| Entries |
| Document | Title | Date |
|---|
| 20080201481 | Remote interface marshalling - A remote interface marshalling (“RIM”) platform is provided in which a protocol interface described using an interface definition language (“IDL”) is parsed to automatically generate the appropriate communication packets and a protocol layer to enable communication between terminal server components. Use of the RIM platform advantageously enables a developer to create a new terminal services protocol simply by writing the interface definition (i.e., describe the input/output) using the well-known IDL language which is well supported on virtually all computing platforms. The RIM platform further provides for robust versioning support by providing the developer with an ability to create a new interface that is derived from an existing interface. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080201482 | Method for Making Secure an Audio-Visual Communication Network - In an audiovisual communications network, a first endpoint exchanges with a control element messages transmitting parameters registered or to be registered in the control element to enable the first endpoint to communicate with a second endpoint registered with the control element. The communications network is made secure by a method that includes an observation step for detecting whether a set of parameters among the parameters transmitted in a message is inconsistent with a current state of the addressee of said message. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080201483 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TERMINATION OF SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL - Systems for graceful termination of support for session initiation protocol communications on a server are described. Systems include techniques for setting a time period for gracefully terminating such support, for sending a service unavailable message to a client, for causing the server to maintain support, until no later than the expiration of the time period for terminating support, for uncompleted session initiation protocol invites accepted by the server before sending the service unavailable message to the client, and for terminating support for session initiation protocol communications on the server no later than upon expiration of the time period for terminating support. Methods for graceful termination of such support and computer-readable storage media whose contents cause a computer system to perform a graceful termination of such support are also described. | 08-21-2008 |
| 20080209052 | System and Method for Delivering Value Added Services from Services Providers - A method and system for delivering value added service (VAS) applications offered by a service provider to a subscribing end user is presented. The method includes collecting, by a user service module, end user device information, forwarding, by the service provider, end user information, to a server, creating, by the service provider, target end user profiles, VAS application campaigns, and campaign schedules, and storing the same in the server. The method further comprises communicating, between the server and the user service module, to display an offer in the end user device for at least one of the VAS applications, in accordance with the target profiles, the application campaigns, and schedules, wherein, upon selecting by the user, the at least one of the VAS applications is loaded, installed, and activated in the end user device without further end user actions. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209053 | HTTP-Based Peer-to-Peer Framework - An HTTP-based P2P framework is described. In one implementation, an exemplary system reduces network congestion caused by P2P traffic at Internet Service Providers (ISPs) by packetizing P2P data and recruiting pre-existing Internet web caches (for HTTP traffic) to cache the P2P traffic. Exemplary pinging techniques detect the web caches, which are usually transparent, and determine their usability. Then, an exemplary topology-building protocol constructs a cache-aware tree-structured P2P overlay that prefers to deliver the P2P traffic via cached data paths. The cache-aware tree-structured P2P overlay has a logical structure that maximizes P2P data transit over paths that have pre-existing Internet web caches. If no web caches are detected, then peers are put into an orphan set and can resort to conventional P2P technology. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080209054 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELAYING STREAMING DATA - Provided are a method and apparatus for relaying streaming data between peers including a first device and a second device in a peer-to-peer (P2P) overlay network. A method of relaying streaming data from the first device to the second device includes determining whether requested streaming data is streaming data that the first device is currently receiving when the first device is requested by the second device to relay streaming data to the second device. Then, the first device assigns a reception bandwidth for receiving the requested streaming data from a source device according to the determination result and receives the requested streaming data using the assigned reception bandwidth to relay the requested streaming data to the second device. Therefore, peers can receive streaming data at a high rate in a P2P network. | 08-28-2008 |
| 20080215741 | SYSTEM AND ARTICLE OF MANUFACTURE FOR ESTABLISHING AND REQUESTING STATUS ON A COMPUTATIONAL RESOURCE - Provided are a system and article of manufacture for establishing and requesting status on a computational resource. An operation is performed to establish a computational resource, wherein the computational resource is not available until the establish operation is completed. A determination is made as to whether a status request to determine status of the computational resource is pending before the establish operation has completed. Indication is made to resubmit the status request if there is a status request for the computational resource pending before the establish operation has completed. | 09-04-2008 |
| 20080228926 | Methods, media, and systems for balancing session initiation protocol server load - In some embodiments, methods for balancing SIP server load are provided. In these methods, a message is received and a session identifier and a resource identifier are extracted from the message. The methods search for one or more sessions associated with the resource identifier and, if there is at least one session that is associated with the resource identifier, the methods further determine whether one of the at least one session is associated with the session identifier. If one of the at least one session is determined to be associated with the session identifier, the methods obtain a server identifier associated with the one of the at least one session and forward the message to a server associated with the server identifier. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228927 | Server directed browsing - Various technologies and techniques are disclosed for providing server directed browsing. After determining that a user needs assistance with one or more particular issues, a client browser being operated by the user and a server agree on a unique communication identifier. The client browser sends asynchronous requests to the server after the client browser loads a script library which causes the asynchronous requests to begin. One or more appropriate responses are received, such as from a responding user. The response is submitted to a command queue on the server so that the asynchronous requests from the client browser will pick up the response on a later communication. The response is one or more commands that the client browser later executes. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228928 | Multimedia content filtering - Methods and apparatuses to filter multimedia content are described. The multimedia content in one embodiment is analyzed for one or more parameters. The multimedia content in one embodiment is filtered based on the one or more parameters using a latent semantic mapping (“LSM”) filter. In one embodiment, the one or more parameters include information about a structure of the multimedia content. A tag that encapsulates the one or more parameters may be generated. Then, the tag is input into the latent semantic mapping filter. In one embodiment, the LSM filter is trained to recognize the multimedia content based on the one or more parameters. In one embodiment, more than two categories are provided for a multimedia content. The multimedia content is classified in more than two categories using the LSM filter. The multimedia content may be blocked based on the classifying. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228929 | Pulling information from information sources via refer requests - Methods, computer program products, information servers, information sources and a system are shown in the context of pulling information from information sources. At an information server, a refer request, which comprises an identifier of a refer-to entity to be referred to by a recipient of the refer request, is configured to trigger an information source to provide information upon reception of the refer request without referring to further information sources. The refer request is issued. At an information source, the refer request is received, and the refer request is checked to determine if information shall be provided by the information source in response to the refer request without referring to further information sources. The information is only provided if it is determined that the information shall be provided. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228930 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR PROVIDING WEB SERVICE - A simple method for providing an existing Web application as a Web service is desired that can be applied to a Web application maintaining user sessions across a plurality of pages and that is simple for a conversion proxy and a Web service client. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080228931 | Method to Reduce the Learning Curve of a Transmission Control Protocol Connection - A method in a data processing system for reducing the learning curve of a transmission control protocol connection. A domain name system is queried for information. The information and a previously used transmission control protocol parameter for a transmission control protocol connection are received from the domain name system. The information and the previously used transmission control protocol parameter are used to configure a current transmission control protocol connection. | 09-18-2008 |
| 20080235382 | FAULT TOLERANT TCP SPLICE SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Computer architecture and method splice a new TCP connection. A proxy group for the new TCP connection is determined and, at one of the proxies, the new TCP connection is accepted. At the one proxy, a client request is received from a client of the new TCP connection and an appropriate backend server to handle the client request is determined. At the one proxy, the client request is spliced and sent to the appropriate backend server. Splicing state information of the new TCP connection is sent from the one proxy to other proxies of the proxy group. Each subsequent TCP segment of the new TCP connection is spliced and sent to the appropriate backend server at any one proxy of the proxy group. | 09-25-2008 |
| 20080256245 | Method and system for information exchange utilizing an asynchronous persistent store protocol - Disclosed herein are embodiments of a method and system for facilitating the exchange of information between interconnected processorsin environments requiring high performance and high reliability. In an exemplary embodiment, the source sends input to the target and expects output from the target in return. A manager in communication with both the source and the target receives and initiates a storage of the information in nonvolatile memory. The manager concurrently forwards the information to its proper destination. If the manager receives output from the target before completion of the input storage, the manager cancels the input storage because it is no longer needed to ensure system reliability. If the manager receives acknowledgement from the source that the target output has been received before completion of the output storage, the manager cancels the output storage because it is no longer needed to ensure system reliability. Related embodiments are also described. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080256246 | Method and apparatus for file sharing between a group of user devices with crucial portions sent via satellite and non-crucial portions sent using a peer-to-peer network - A communication system | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080256247 | PROTECTION OF DATA TRANSMISSION NETWORK SYSTEMS AGAINST BUFFER OVERSIZING - A method of managing the allocation to TCP connections of memory blocks of a TCP re-assembly buffer in a TCP network device including a TCP Processing unit, comprises computing a function r(t) on a per connection basis, that measures the occupancy rate of the re-assembly buffer for the relevant TCP connection, and that is updated upon reception of any packet belonging to said TCP connection; and allowing the TCP connection to be closed and the corresponding memory blocks to be released based on a decision scheme that includes at least a first trigger set on the corresponding function r(t), which defines two different states for said function r(t). | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080256248 | SINGLE SERVER ACCESS IN A MULTIPLE TCP/IP INSTANCE ENVIRONMENT - Methods, systems and computer program products are provided that access a single server application executing on a processing system having multiple TCP/IP instances. The single server application may be accessed by establishing a registration repository containing information sufficient to identify to both the single server application and a client application seeking to access the single server application, one of the multiple TCP/IP instances through which the single server application may be accessed by client applications. In such a case, the registration repository is accessible by the multiple TCP/IP instances and the single server application. | 10-16-2008 |
| 20080263212 | Method and System of Interaction Between Entities on a Communication Network - A method and system of interaction between a requesting entity and a responding entity on a communication network based on the session initiation protocol (SIP). A machine-readable service description includes specifications of interaction between the requesting entity invoking a service at the responding entity and the responding entity offering the service. The specifications include at least a set of rules including abstract input/output message formats and SIP protocol binding rules so that the requesting entity may invoke the service to a SIP uniform resource identifier by means of SIP invocation message patterned according to the service description and it may interpret the response provided by the responding entity according to the service description. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080263213 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND CLIENT DEVICE - Relaying devices to share workload among them are disposed in the carrier equipment network. The relaying devices respectively relay an HTTP message between the mobile phone and the web server and store an upload data from the mobile phone. The relaying devices respectively transmit to the mobile phone, before or immediately after uploading data, an address to couple the mobile phone to them and an identifier to specify an upload data. Where line disconnection has occurred between the mobile phone and the relaying device, the mobile phone resumes coupling to the address of the relaying device in question and transmits the identifier thereto. The relaying devices respectively search data corresponding to the identifier and transmit a data size as stored therein to the mobile phone. The mobile phone transmits data that the respective relaying devices have not stored to each of them. | 10-23-2008 |
| 20080270615 | Establishing a social network - A method of creating social networks designed to facilitate diffusion of desired behavior among groups of people. A social network may be created prior to assigning people to nodes in the network. Communications between people in the network may be controlled and modified to promote diffusion of the desired behavior. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270616 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT DELIVERY - A system and method for electronically transferring documents or any type of electronic media. Application clients may be installed on, or provided in the form of, internet connected devices. The application clients may be used without having to reconfigure a device firewall. A central server may be used to connect document transmitters to document receivers, using a global table of parties. Advantages include providing authenticated, real time, secure, reliable, and confirmed delivery among single or multiple recipients. Another feature includes a global directory to provide levels of service to users. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270617 | Method, System and Article of Manufacture for Providing Connections and Connection Aliases Descriptors by Services and Libraries Archives - A method, system and machine accessible medium for establishing connectivity to a remote computer system by using connectivity objects descriptors provided with services and libraries SDAs. A service or in a library SDA provides a description of how to establish a connectivity object for accessing a remote system. When the SDAs are deployed on an application server, all packed descriptions are stored in a repository. The connectivity is established at server startup in accordance with the descriptions and is accessible for all applications, services and libraries while the server is running. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080270618 | Establishing and Modifying Network Signaling Protocols - Methods among nodes of a computer network for establishing a connection between the server and the client. A client node sends a session-invitation message to a server node. The session-invitation message is a message in a first protocol that establishes a channel at the level of the first protocol between the client and the server according to parameters of the session-invitation message that specify characteristics of session in a second protocol. An intermediary node of the network adding new information to the session-invitation message requesting modification of the session policies, and transmits the session-invitation message to the server node. The server receives the session-invitation message, and sends a provisional response back to the client, and holding in abeyance a success or failure response to the session-invitation, without establishing a channel at the level of the first protocol if no such channel is previously established, and without disrupting a channel at the level of the first protocol if such channel has been previously established. When the client receives the provisional response, it reconfigures the characteristics of the session of the second protocol, and sends an amended request to the server. When the server receives the amended request, the server sends a success or failure response to the client, the content of the response being based at least in part on the amended session-invitation, and being of a form defined in the protocol as being an appropriate response form for reply to the original session-invitation message. | 10-30-2008 |
| 20080275993 | Web service for user and subscription data storage - A data service that manages user and subscription data for multiple services. The data service maintains a database of the user and subscription data and provides an interface that allows the other services, that act as clients to the data service, to access that data. The data service avoids the need for the client services to implement a framework to manage the storage of user and subscription data. The data service also allows user profile data to be updated by one client service and used by all others. Further, data, such as usage history or information on policy violations, may be shared by multiple services. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080275994 | Metadata communication system - Techniques for communicating metadata are disclosed. According to one technique, a device comprises a configuration module. The configuration module contains and specifies a mapping table. For example, each mapping in the mapping table might indicate a standard, a retrieving protocol, and a packaging protocol. In the mapping table, a particular retrieving or packaging protocol can be mapped to more than one standard. The device comprises one or more separately implemented retrieving protocol modules and packaging protocol modules. The device receives a client's request. The device selects a retrieving protocol to interpret the request, and interprets the request using that protocol. The device uses the mapping table to determine a packaging protocol that is mapped to the client's standard. The device uses the selected packaging protocol to package, in the appropriate form, the requested metadata. The device sends the appropriately packaged metadata back to the client. | 11-06-2008 |
| 20080281971 | NETWORK MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION USING MULTIPLE DEVICES - Various embodiments are described relating to multimedia communication using multiple devices in a network. In an example embodiment, a request for a communication session may be received at a first server. Parameters associated with the communication session may be negotiated. One or more of the devices included in a group of one or more devices associated with a first user may be selected for receipt of one or more portions of a requested transmission based on the negotiated parameters. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080281972 | SECURE SHARING OF LOB BOUND INFORMATION IN CLIENT APPLICATIONS - Secure sharing of bound information is enabled in client applications associated with a backend LOB service. Bound item IDs are assigned to newly created bound items by a client, the items synchronized with the LOB system, a correlation ID received in response to the synchronization, and the two IDs mapped. A reverse sequence of actions is performed when the LOB service creates the bound item. In response to an attempt by a client to exchange bound information, the item is placed in a pending state and allowed to be received by a receiver upon successful completion of data transfer and LOB system permission of the exchange passing the bound item ID and the correlation ID. If the LOB system rejects the exchange, the item is placed in an unbound state and the receiver not allowed to receive the bound information. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080281973 | Management Method, Device And System For Session Connection - A method for managing session connection, including: a session connection endpoint device perceiving a configuration management event of session connection and managing status of the session connection according to the configuration management event. The disclosure also provides a server device for session connection and a session communication system. | 11-13-2008 |
| 20080288646 | DATA CONSISTENCY WITHIN A FEDERATION INFRASTRUCTURE - In some embodiments, it is determined that a primary node has been elected from among a plurality of nodes in a replica set of nodes. The primary node accepts and processes client data access requests. The replica set includes the primary node and other secondary nodes. The primary node receives client data access requests. The primary node assigns a data sequence number to each client data access request that mutates state in the order the client data access requests are received. The data sequence numbers include a linearized processing order that is to be followed by each of the nodes in the replica set. The primary node sends the mutating client data access requests including any corresponding data sequence numbers to the secondary nodes. The primary node receives, from a threshold number of secondary nodes, an acknowledgement indicating reception of the client data access request. The primary node commits the data mutating access request. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080288647 | APPLICATION PROGRAMMING INTERFACE AND GENERALIZED NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATOR FOR TRANSLATION OF TRANSPORT-LAYER SESSIONS - An application programming interface for translation of transport-layer sessions is presented. The system includes kernel-mode support for application-controlled network address translation and user-mode implementation of the redirect API routines. An application process may request that a network gateway modify the source and/or destination of a given network session in a manner transparent to the original source host and/or the replacement destination host. With the generalized NAT (gNAT) of the instant invention and its associated API, both the source and the destination addresses of message packets may be changed. The address changes are mapped in the gNAT, and may result in apparent sessions between different clients and servers. Depending on the protocol in use (e.g. TCP or UDP), the address translation may be made dynamically by the gNAT, under the command of the application, and take place at the kernel level. | 11-20-2008 |
| 20080294783 | Grid Identification for Audio Provider - Procedures for identifying audio clients in a media session are described. A gateway device may provide a unique identifier for identifying the audio client/user agent instance. In an example, a globally routable user agent universal resource indicator (GRUU) may be mapped to the gateway device servicing the audio client and a unique identifier may be provided. In examples, the gateway device may include a grid and grid value for identifying the audio client. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080294784 | Method for Synchronizing Connection State in Data Communication, and Communication Node Using the Same - The present invention discloses a method for synchronizing connection state in data communication, which includes: a node requests connection state information from an opposite node connected with it; and the node updates the local connection state according to the connection state information returned by the opposite node. The invention further discloses a communication node using the method. In the invention, by synchronizing the connection state information between a node that may be out of synchronization and its opposite node connected, the problem of connection state synchronization may be solved substantially, and synchronization may be recovered simply by holding the connection. Further, according to the embodiment of the invention, frequent connection state synchronization inside a high-availability system is no longer necessary, so that system bandwidth and processing capability may be saved, and the original connection may be recovered at any moment when an active/standby switching occurs. | 11-27-2008 |
| 20080294785 | Communication system, node device, node process program and a message transmitting and receiving method - A node device in a communication system including plural node devices connected to a network through a relay device including:
| 11-27-2008 |
| 20080301304 | MULTIMEDIA SPACES - The claimed subject matter provides a system and/or method that detect watermarks incorporated within analog and/or digital signals associated with multimedia presentations. The disclosed system can include a component that receives analog and/or digital signals, ascertains the existence of a watermark associated with the received signals, and extracts metadata encapsulated within the watermark, wherein the metadata can both include information regarding the broadcast multimedia presentations as well as information unrelated to the broadcast multimedia. Extracted metadata or more particularly, attributes contained within the metadata can be utilized to establish online social networks based at least on the associated attributes. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080301305 | METHOD AND RELATED SYSTEM FOR BUILDING UP A NETWORK CONNECTION BETWEEN CLIENTS AND SERVERS THROUGH A STREAM FORK BY UTILIZING HTTP PROTOCOL - A method for building up a network connection between a client and a server through a stream fork by utilizing HTTP protocol includes receiving a connection request of the client, transmitting the connection request to the server, building up a connection channel between the client and the server and setting a channel ID of the client, and transmitting the channel ID to the client. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080301306 | FAST SESSION ESTABLISHMENT METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILE TERMINAL - A fast session establishment method and system is provided for reducing time required to establish a multimedia communication session. The fast session establishment method includes registering a parameter set that had resulted in a successful session establishment with a counterpart terminal and establishing a session with the counterpart terminal using the parameter set resulting in a prior successful session. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080301307 | Rfid Tag for Ip Address-Based Rfid Service and Rfid Service Method Using the Same - Provided are a RFID tag and a method for providing a RFID service using the same. The RFID tag includes: a code type data denoting a code type of the RFID tag; and a content server IP address code denoting an IP address of a content server that provides content related to an item with the RFID tag attached. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080301308 | SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING INTERACTIVE MEDIA SESSION BASED ON IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method and system for establishing an interactive media session based on an IP Multimedia Subsystem, including: a terminal adapted to initiate an interactive media session request and receive a media session response; a serving-CSCF adapted to trigger the request to the application server according to a triggering rule and route the message; a proxy-CSCF adapted to forward the request and the response between the terminal and the serving-CSCF; an application server adapted to process the service request; a media control entity adapted to control resource allocation of the media carrier entity; and a media carrier entity adapted to allocate address ports for RTSP connection and RTP connection with the terminal. The present invention can be applied to a NGN network where the carrier and control are separated to improve the media delivery efficiency. | 12-04-2008 |
| 20080307099 | STORAGE SYSTEM AND PRIORITY CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a priority control method for controlling a priority of data transmission in a computer system including a storage system that has a plurality of volumes, a host computer that uses the volumes, a management computer that sets a priority of data transmission between each volume and the host computer, and a network that is composed of a network device controls the priority of data transmission and provides a connection path between the storage system and the host computer. Executed in the method are a first step of obtaining from the storage system information on a first priority assigned to each volume in the storage system and a capacity of a cache memory allocated to each volume, a second step of determining a second priority of the volume on the connection path through the network by referring the obtained information, a third step of notifying the host computer of the determined second priority, a fourth step of obtaining identification of the connection path corresponding to the determined second priority of the volume, and a fifth step of setting the obtained identification to the network device. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080307100 | AUTONOMIC ADJUSTMENT OF CONNECTION KEEP-ALIVES - A server computer system includes a keep-alive autonomic adjustment mechanism that monitors current operating conditions and dynamically adjusts the keep-alive specification to optimize the keep-alives for the current operating conditions. The keep-alive autonomic adjustment mechanism monitors the total number of clients, and the average number of requests per client. The value of a keep-alive specification that determines how log to keep a connection open may be dynamically and autonomically adjusted by the keep-alive autonomic adjustment mechanism according to the monitored current operating conditions. The keep-alive autonomic adjustment mechanism may also include the ability to autonomically enable and disable the keep-alives. In this manner the performance of the server may be tuned to optimize the effect of using keep-alives according to current operating conditions. | 12-11-2008 |
| 20080313340 | Method and apparatus for sending and receiving content with associated application as an object - Techniques for sending a data object to a user of a communication device are disclosed. The technique comprises the steps of: monitoring the occurrence of a trigger on a first communication device; and transferring, upon the occurrence of the trigger, a data object to a second communication device, wherein the data object comprises content and at least one associated application based on at least one capability of the second communication device. | 12-18-2008 |
| 20080320149 | SERVICE REQUEST DEVICE WIRELESS ACCESS DETACH AND BEARER DEACTIVATION METHODS WITHOU LOSS OF INTERNET PROTOCOL CONNECTIVITY - A network device includes an Internet protocol (IP) connectivity generator that generates an IP connectivity indicator. The IP connectivity indicator indicates IP connectivity for a service request device (SRD). A transmit module transmits the IP connectivity indicator to a remote network device before at least one of detachment of the SRD and deactivation of a bearer corresponding to a first session and a tunnel between the SRD and the remote network device. A control module facilitates the detachment of the SRD and deactivation of the bearer while maintaining IP connectivity. The IP connectivity corresponding to at least one of attachment of the SRD and activation of a second session of the SRD based on the IP connectivity indicator. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080320150 | SYSTEM AND PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR SESSION SHARING - The present invention provides a system and program product for session sharing that allows multiple authorized users (e.g., assistants) to access the same session and synchronize the browser views, when the current state changes. Through the use of use of session sharing, it is ensured that all users work on the same data and have the same Web side state. The Client side is kept in synchronization through the use of a publisher-subscriber model that initiates an update of all connected Clients when a state change occurs. These functionalities of the present invention ensure that all participating users can work together and can share the same state both on server and Client side. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080320151 | TRANSACTION ACCELERATOR FOR CLIENT-SERVER COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - Self-discovering transaction accelerators improve communications between a client and a server. A client directs a message to a server. A client-side transaction accelerator intercepts the message, terminates the connection with the client, and accelerates the request by replacing segments of data with references. The accelerated request is forwarded to a server-side transaction accelerator through a new connection. The server-side transaction accelerator reconstructs the message by replacing the reference with segment data in a persistent segment store accessible to the server-side transaction accelerator. The reconstructed request is then provided to the server. Accelerations may occur in any direction of communication. Persistent segment stores can be pre-populated with segment data from other transaction accelerators and anticipated transactions. The persistent segment store can store segments that are data segmented based on content of the data and can be independent of transaction protocol, application, and device. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20080320152 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETECTING A COMMUNICATION PROBLEM IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - A computer in a network runs a verification procedure in which it sends data packets to another computer in the network. Some or all of the data packets contain, either individually or collectively, a secret piece of information, such as a secret code. The computer then makes a determination regarding the network links between it and the other computer. If, for example, the other computer is able to respond by providing the secret piece of information back, then the computer sending the data packets concludes that the devices along the network links en route to the other computer are properly forwarding data packets. | 12-25-2008 |
| 20090006632 | UPDATING CONVERSATIONS AFTER REDIRECTION - The claimed subject matter provides a system and/or a method that facilitates maintaining identification data for a real-time communication. A unified communications component can enable real-time communications by employing a communication session with at least one data communication mode, wherein the communication session can include conversation identification (ID). An invitation from a source to a target can initiate at least one of the communication session or the at least one data communication mode within the communication session. An update component can generate an additional conversation ID for the communication session upon detecting the invitation is forwarded by the target. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006633 | Interactive Connectivity Establishment for Non-Enabled Endpoints - Procedures for commanding a media relay to direct interactive connectivity establishment (ICE) communications are discussed. In an implementation, a back-to-back user agent may issue a command changing the state of the media relay so that communications initially routed through the back-to-back user agent may be routed to a non-ICE device. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006634 | Run-once static content generation using a descriptive file path - A variation of a static base asset used to build a web page is generated responsively to a client browser request using a descriptive file path that is included with the base asset's file name in the request. The descriptive file path employs a specific syntax to declare one or more variable parameters which are placed in the file name. Different values for the variable parameters will map to different variations of the base asset which can be used to implement various themes or other characteristics for the page. Server-side processes parse the variable parameter names from the request, and specify values for them. The variation of the base static asset that maps to the specified values is located and retrieved from a resource store. That variation is renamed to match the file name contained in the request and is included in a response back to the client browser. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090006635 | Network management - Systems and methods relating to managing network addresses. In one implementation, a method is provided. The method includes sending a first request to use a particular network address, sending one or more second requests for respective hardware addresses corresponding to network addresses of one or more network address leases. When a hardware address corresponding to a particular network address lease is received in response to one of the one or more second requests and an acknowledgement of the first request to use the network address is not received determining whether the network address identified by the lease is the same as the network address in the first request, and when the network address is not the same, sending a third request to use the identified network address corresponding to the lease. | 01-01-2009 |
| 20090013081 | METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO PEER DISCOVERY AND/OR PAGING IN PEER TO PEER WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatus related to peer to peer communication networks are described. A peer to peer timing structure is implemented which includes recurring peer discovery intervals and traffic intervals. During a peer discovery interval, a wireless communications device, supporting peer to peer communications, monitors for and receives a broadcast signal from another peer wireless communications device, recovers an identifier from the received broadcast signal, and stores the received identifier in memory. The identifier is one of a device identifier and a user identifier. The wireless communications device maintains a list of discovered identifiers in its vicinity. In some embodiments, paging intervals are also included in the recurring peer to peer timing structure. In various embodiments, a wireless communications device receives or sends a page to a peer node prior to sending or receiving user data in a traffic interval. Various features are directed to peer paging protocol implementations. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090013082 | Field communication system, field server, field device, and field communication method - A transmitting section spontaneously transmits a command including device information relating to a field device, to a field server. An updating section receives commands including device information which is spontaneously transmitted from field devices, and updates a database on the basis of the device information. Based on the device information stored in the database, a server communicating section communicates with the field devices. | 01-08-2009 |
| 20090019166 | SYSTEM AND PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR MANAGING MULTIPLE NETWORK APPLICATION VERSIONS - Under the present invention, a session is established between a user system and an existing version of a network application. Once the session is established, session information corresponding to the session is determined and then communicated to the user system. The session information typically includes a version identifier that identifies the existing version of the network application. Requests received during the same session are accompanied with the session information. The session information is used to route the requests to the existing version of the network application. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090019167 | GENERIC BOOTSTRAPPING PROTOCOL (GBP) - Embodiments of methods and apparatus for discovering a bootstrapping server by a mobile station, and bootstrapping the mobile station are disclosed. In some embodiments, a mobile station discovers a remotely disposed bootstrapping server; transmits wirelessly a bootstrap request to the bootstrapping server; and receive wirelessly a bootstrap response from the bootstrapping server in response to the transmitted bootstrap request. Additional variants and embodiments are also disclosed. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090019168 | APPARATUS AND METHOD OF GENERATING AND MAINTAINING HYBRID CONNECTION IDENTIFICATIONS (IDs) FOR PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS NETWORKS - An apparatus and method are disclosed for generating a transmission connection identifier (CID) for a transmitter/receiver pair in a wireless network. The CID may be selected from or mapped to a hybrid CID space comprising a first set of orthogonal CIDs and a second set of non-orthogonal (random or pseudo-random) CIDs. When a transmitter device wants to initiate a peer-to-peer connection with a receiver device, the transmitter and receiver devices attempt to obtain a CID to identify their connection within a traffic channel in a shared frequency space. The first and/or second device attempt to select a CID from the first set of orthogonal CIDs. However, if a CID collision is detected, the first and second devices select their CID from the second set of non-orthogonal CIDs. The selected transmission CID may be used during a time slot or interval to facilitate communications between the first and second devices. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090019169 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING IN A PEER TO PEER SYSTEM WHERE DEVICE COMMUNICATIONS MAY PARTIALLY INTERFERE WITH ONE ANOTHER - Methods and Apparatus for communicating information, e.g., control information, e.g., in the form of a control value, between communications devices, e.g., peer to peer communications devices, are described. Positional coding is used to encode a value to be communicated and the encoded value it then transmitted on a set of communications resources with the placement of signal energy on individual ones of the resources being used to create a pattern used to convey the value to be communicated. Resources, e.g., tone-symbols, which communicate unreliable signal portions due to interference are identified and not used in the positional decoding operation as either an energy carrying tone-symbol or a non-energy carrying tone-symbol. | 01-15-2009 |
| 20090024746 | Method and apparatus for host controller operations over a network - A remote host controller includes USB ports and a network interface. A processing device in the remote host controller supports an IP stack in communication with a network and drivers in communication with a Universal Serial Bus attached to the USB ports. The remote host controller registers with hosts on the network. Registered hosts are sent communications regarding attachment and detachment of peripheral devices to/from the remote host controller. The registered hosts are selectively configured to be able to communicate with one or more of the peripheral devices. Communications between applications and the peripherals are transparent in that they operate as if directly attached to a USB port on the host computer. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024747 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR VISUAL REPRESENTATION OF A SOCIAL NETWORK CONNECTION QUALITY - An apparatus, system, and method to generate a graphical representation of a social network. The computer program product includes a computer useable storage medium to store a computer readable program that, when executed on a computer, causes the computer to perform operations related to generating a graphical representation of a social network. The operations include an operation to display a first node and a second node in a social network. The operations also include an operation to display an actual quality indicator representative of an actual level of quality of a connection between the first and second nodes of the social network. The operations also include an operation to display a target quality indicator representative of a target level of quality of the connection between the first and second nodes of the social network. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024748 | WEBSITE MONITORING AND COOKIE SETTING - A method and apparatus for setting cookies on client devices | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090024749 | ADAPTIVE FILE DELIVERY WITH TRANSPARENCY CAPABILITY SYSTEM AND METHOD - An adaptive file delivery system and method transmits a data file, such as an audio-video file, over a network or collection of networks in segments, each segment transmitted during a different time period. Each time period has a transmission portion to transmit its associated file segment and a wait portion in which no further interaction with the network occurs regarding the transmitted segment. In some implementations, the duration of the transmission portion of each time period is sufficient to reach a steady-state throughput condition, which allows the traffic load status of the network or networks to be determined from rate measurements of file segment transmissions. The duration of the wait portion of each time period is at least long enough to limit the average rate of file segment transmission to adapt to network traffic load variations while causing the entire file to be delivered in a predetermined delivery deadline. | 01-22-2009 |
| 20090037590 | System and Method for Multiple Address of Record Registration Using a Single Implicit SIP Request - One embodiment of the present invention is a method for registering multiple addresses of record. The method comprises receiving a session initiation protocol register request, the session initiation protocol register request comprising a unique identifier of a session initiation protocol endpoint and a contact address for the session initiation protocol endpoint. The method proceeds by retrieving one or more addresses of record associated with the unique identifier of the session initiation protocol endpoint. The method further comprises associating each of the one or more addresses of record with the contact address for the session initiation protocol endpoint. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090037591 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETER SETTING METHOD - A communication apparatus determines an opposing communication apparatus with which to perform an automatic setting process of automatically setting a communication parameter required for connecting to a network, and acquires the communication parameter from the opposing communication apparatus. The opposing communication apparatus is determined based on at least one of information on an authentication method and information on an encryption protocol of respective communication apparatuses, included in a signal transmitted from each of a plurality of communication apparatuses. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090037592 | NETWORK OVERLOAD DETECTION AND MITIGATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Systems and methods are provided for detecting and mitigating overload conditions affecting one or more computers attached to a network, such as overloads resulting from distributed denial of service (DDoS) attacks, for example. According to some described embodiments, an attempted overload condition is detected, e.g., by a system, through following a method, or both, within a data cleaning center. Detection may be achieved, e.g., by analyzing data packets traveling over the network to identify packets that bear characteristics that may be associated with DDoS attacks, and this analysis may include examination of the packets' data payloads. Mitigation, in turn, may include discarding some data packets, redirecting network traffic, or some combination thereof. | 02-05-2009 |
| 20090043896 | Methods and apparatuses for synchronizing and managing content over multiple devices - In one embodiment, the methods and apparatuses detect an active device configured to utilize content; identify the content and a current location of the content; detect an idle device configured to selectively deliver the content; detect a transition parameter for determining a transition to the idle device; and transition the content from the active device to the idle device wherein the idle device is capable of utilizing the content based on the transition parameter. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043897 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DETECTING A CONNECTION LEAK IN A J2EE CONNECTOR ARCHITECTURE - A connector architecture implementation that is J2EE compliant and provides improved connection management capabilities. The connector architecture implementation provides a connector leak detection mechanism that detects connection leaks both automatically and manually. The connector architecture implementation pre-configures and manages the growth and reduction of a connection pool. The connector architecture implementation may be pre-configured by pre-populating the connection pool. Connection pool growth may be managed by generating connections in response to connection requests. A connection pool may also be configured to reduce the number of connections in the pool. The number of connections may be reduced if the connection demand decreases. Password credentials allowing access to services are used to provide additional connection management. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043898 | MESSAGE FORWARDING METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - A message forwarding method includes: receiving a SIP registration request message carrying a contact address; obtaining the contact address carried in the SIP registration request message; and determining that the contact address is one of SIP proxy server addresses in a network stored in advance; and executing an abnormal process on the SIP registration request message. The present invention also discloses a network device. The message forwarding method and network device in the present invention can prevent a SIP loop attack. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043899 | CLIENT SERVER SYSTEM AND CONNECTION METHOD - The disclosure refers to a server client system. In one example, a server client system includes at least one server and plural terminals connected to a network. A profile associating a temporal condition with at least each of the terminals or the server is stored with the terminals or the server. A connection between each of the terminals and the server is established in accordance with the profile. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090043900 | System and method for establishing unique sessions for DNS subscribers - A method and system for providing service over a communication network. The method includes establishing a plurality of virtual DNS servers that is supported by a DNS server. A plurality of target IP addresses is assigned for the plurality of virtual DNS servers. Each target IP address includes a first IP subaddress identifying the DNS server, and a second IP subaddress identifying a corresponding virtual DNS server. A plurality of network capable devices is uniquely assigned to the plurality of virtual DNS servers for domain name resolution. Each network capable device accesses the communication network through a corresponding network device associated with a corresponding source IP address. A service plan of a client is assigned to a first network capable device used by the client. The service plan is implemented through a DNS request under a session established between the first network capable device and its assigned first virtual DNS server. The session is uniquely identified by a combination of a first source IP address of a first network device used by the first network capable device to access the communication network, and a first target IP address of the first virtual DNS server. | 02-12-2009 |
| 20090049182 | AUTOMATIC TN3270 EMULATOR CONFIGURATION GENERATOR - Automatically generating TN3270 emulator configuration files for implementing communication sessions. A hardware master console (HMC) is data mined to determine a status for one or more data center mainframe entities that include one or more central processing centers (CPCs), sysplexes, logical partitions (LPARs), or various combinations thereof. The data mining also identifies one or more relationships between the data center mainframe entities. The one or more HMCs are periodically polled to update the status for the one or more data center mainframe entities. The updated status and the one or more identified relationships are incorporated into a graphical user interface that provides a navigational aid for navigating to each of a plurality of data center mainframe entities. Upon navigating to a data center mainframe entity of the plurality of data center mainframe entities, TN3270 emulator configuration files are dynamically generated for the data center mainframe entity using the updated status and the one or more identified relationships. The TN3270 emulator configuration files may be employed for use in implementing a single communication session, or to construct a set of TN3270 emulator configuration files for multiple communication sessions which may be unpacked for subsequent use. | 02-19-2009 |
| 20090055540 | Methods and Systems for Multicast Control and Channel Switching for Streaming Media in an IMS Environment - Systems and methods according to the present invention address this need and others by reducing the delay in channel zapping for streaming media, e.g., Internet Protocol television (IPTV). This delay is reduced by performing channel zapping through an Internet Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) architecture using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) signaling. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090055541 | CONNECTION PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM, METHOD THEREOF, ACCESS POINT, SERVER, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND PARAMETER SETTING APPARATUS - An access point performing a communication with a wireless terminal performing a communication according to a predetermined wireless communication specification acquires a connection parameter required for a communication based on the predetermined wireless communication specification from a connection parameter server which can be connected thereto through a network. The access point sets an access point connection parameter in the access point itself. The wireless terminal acquires a wireless terminal connection parameter by using a communication method not requiring setting from the access point in advance and sets it in the wireless terminal itself. This completes the setting for performing a communication based on the predetermined wireless communication specification and it is possible to start a communication based on the predetermined wireless communication specification between the wireless and access point. Thus, it is possible to set a connection parameter for a wireless communication in the wireless terminal and access point without requiring a complicated setting work by a user. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090055542 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR SHARING APPLICATION SESSION INFORMATION ACROSS MULTIPLE-CHANNELS - The present invention provides a device for sharing application session information across multiple channels, for managing the communication between terminal devices and a web server, said device comprises an application session manager (ASM) connected between the terminal device and the web server for receiving and forwarding said user's request sent from said terminal device and the response returned from the web sever; a storing device connected to the application session manager, for storing application session management information and application session information in the response returned from the web server; a retrieving device, connected to the application session manager; an intercepting device, connected to the application session manager, for intercepting a new application session information in the response from the web server; said application session manager generates an application session management information (ASMC) of said user, then sends said response to said terminal device which has sent said user's request | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090055543 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, SYSTEM, AND RELATED COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR USER EQUIPMENT ACCESS - It is disclosed a method comprising holding access information relating to a terminal and a first network entity external to a currently visited network of the terminal, the access information being associated with a first network plane below a second network plane relating to network session initiation, and signaling, based on the second network plane, the held access information to a controlling entity; a method comprising receiving the signaled access information, the receiving being performed based on the second network plane, and relaying, based on the second network plane, the received access information to a second network entity; and a method comprising receiving the relayed access information, the receiving being performed based on the second network plane, and configuring the first network plane based on the access information. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090055544 | Broadcasting receiver and method of interfacing resource information between a host device and a POD, sending host device resource information and obtaining host device resource information - A broadcasting receiver and method of interfacing resource information between a host device and a POD, sending host device resource information and obtaining host device resource information are disclosed. A POD sends a resource information requesting message. And a host device receives the resource information requesting message and responds with a resource information message including a resource identifier defined in a resource information table which includes information indicating whether the host device supports A-mode. Using a “conditional access” feature provided by a conventional cable security card, content received through any type of transport protocol (including an IP protocol) including a wired/wireless network can be protected and A-mode resource information can be systematically defined together with other-mode IP communication resource and the resource information of different modes can be integrated and transmitted to the host device. | 02-26-2009 |
| 20090063690 | CONTINUING AN APPLICATION SESSION USING A DIFFERENT DEVICE FROM ONE THAT ORIGINALLY INITIATED THE APPLICATION SESSION WHILE PRESERVING SESSION WHILE PRESERVING SESSION STATE AND DATA - The present invention discloses a solution for migrating an application session from one device to another. In the solution, a migration event can be detected during an application session involving an application server and an original device. Client-side session information and server-side session information can be stored. The client-side session information can be conveyed to a transfer device, which establishes a communication connection with the application server. This session can occur after an arbitrary delay from an occurrence of the migration event. Transfer device settings can be changed in accordance with the client-side session information and application server settings can be changed in accordance with the stored server-side information. An application session involving the transfer device and the application server can be conducted, beginning in a state approximately equivalent to that which existed at the time of the migration event. | 03-05-2009 |
| 20090070474 | Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol - Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is extended in order to assist with secure network location awareness. In an embodiment a DHCP client receives a signed DHCP response message from a DHCP server, the signed message comprising at least a certificate chain having a public key. In that embodiment the DHCP client validates the certificate chain and verifies the signature of the signed message. If this is successful the DHCP client accesses stored settings for use with the server. The stored settings are accessed at least using information about the public key. In some embodiments signed DHCPOFFER messages and signed DHCPACK messages are used. In another embodiment the signed DHCP message comprises a location identifier which is, for example, a domain name system (DNS) suffix of a DHCP server. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090070475 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND RESPONSE METHOD THEREOF - A communication device connected to a first network receives a connection request transmitted from a second network, and sets a service existing in the first network to a data request wait state in accordance with receiving the connection request. The communication device transmits a response to the connection request in accordance with the service having been set to a data request wait state. | 03-12-2009 |
| 20090077243 | CONVERSATION RECOVERY METHOD - A system for recovering from an interruption of communication on a network between computer users which includes a computer network connecting a plurality of users using computers in a communication session. A computer readable medium encoded with a computer program is connected to at least one of the users' computers for storing generated communication between the users during the communication session. The computer program reconnects the session between the users, and restores the generated communication between the users after detecting an interruption of the session. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077244 | System, Method, and Device for Scheduling a Future Time for a Communication Session - A method for scheduling another time for a communication session when a called party is presently unable or unwilling to accept an incoming call. A first user's communications device receives a request for a communication session from a second user's communications device. Upon failure to accept the request, a server automatically forms a calendar data object, such as in response to receipt of a scheduling trigger message from the first communications device that includes an indication of the failure to accept and an identifier of the second user. The calendar data object includes scheduling information indicating, explicitly and/or implicitly, future time(s) when the first user is available. The calendar data object is sent to either one of the devices, and a time is selected. The server then notifies the other device of the selected time. Corresponding devices are also described. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090077245 | Client-To-Client Direct RTP Exchange In A Managed Client-Server Network - A method for establishing a data packet exchange communication session that allows the exchange of data packets between an originating client and a destination client in a data network having a client-server arrangement is provided. An originating client transmits communications session request data message to a communications management server via a first temporary signaling communications path. The communications session request data message contains at least a unique network address of a destination client. The communications management server, upon determining that said originating client is residing behind a first network firewall, determining whether said first network firewall will allow exchange of data packets between said originating client and any other client not residing behind said first network firewall. If it is determined that the first network firewall will allow exchange of data packets between said originating client and any other client not residing behind the first network firewall, the communications management server retrieves relationship information between said unique network address of said originating client and said unique network address of a first network firewall port and a first network firewall port identity, and establishes a data packet exchange communications session with said communications management server through said first network firewall. Otherwise, said communications management server, upon receiving a media packet communications session request data message from said originating client via said first temporary signaling communications path establishes a media packet exchange session with said originating client via said first network firewall. | 03-19-2009 |
| 20090083429 | Generic Digital Rights Management Framework, and Applications Thereof - Methods, systems and computer program products to implement generic Digital Rights Management (DRM) are provided herein. The methods include opening a session between an initiator and a responder, exchanging one or more of device and system information and sending one of an operation or event based on DRM capabilities, DRM partner, DRM authority, DRM characteristics, DRM Trust and CCEVS profiles. The operation includes one or more of a dataset, response code, operation parameter and response parameter. These extensions may be in the form of one or more of an operation, an event, a dataset or property code. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090083430 | METHOD FOR SECURE USER PLANE (SUPL) VERSION NEGOTIATION - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for negotiating a version of Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) between a network entity and a SUPL enabled terminal. In a particular implementation, a SUPL initiation message is transmitted from a network entity to a SUPL entity, where the SUPL initiation message identifies a plurality of SUPL versions capable of supporting a desired service. A response is received from the SUPL entity that is based, at least in part, on an ability of the SUPL entity to support at least one of the plurality of versions. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090083431 | Content rate selection for media servers with proxy-feedback-controlled frame transmission - In a method for dynamically setting a content rate of a multimedia session for a client in a network, a proxy server receives a channel condition feedback message from a network controller and determines whether a receiver report message has been received from the client since a most recent previous channel condition feedback message. The channel condition feedback message includes current channel condition information for the network. The proxy server sends one of an extended feedback report message and a short feedback report message to a media server based on the determining step. The short feedback report message includes at least a maximum transmission rate parameter for the multimedia session. The extended feedback report message includes at least information contained in the receiver report message. The extended feedback report message may, in addition, include the maximum transmission rate parameter for the multimedia session. | 03-26-2009 |
| 20090089438 | INTELLIGENT NETWORK ADDRESS LOOKUP SERVICE - An intelligent lookup service for a network is provided for clients of a network requesting services of the network that intelligently determines, based on a service requirement of the requested service, optimal service endpoint(s) for providing the requested service. The intelligent lookup service can incorporate predetermined mapping policy and traffic measurements into the determination. In addition, a feedback loop is provided from clients and/or service endpoints to the lookup service concerning measurements about prior connections in the network. The lookup service can include a set of beacons distributed in the network and against which measurements about the network are recorded. A client receives, from the lookup service in response to a request for a network address, a set of candidate service endpoints that pertain to the requested network address and the client connects to one of the candidate service endpoints based on policy or context. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089439 | COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A REAL WORLD ENVIRONMENT AND A VIRTUAL WORLD ENVIRONMENT - Gateway systems and methods are disclosed for allowing for communication between a real world environment and a virtual world environment. A gateway system in one embodiment is implemented between the virtual world environment and the real world environment. For a session being initiated from a real world user to a virtual world user, the gateway system receives a signaling message from the real world user to initiate the session with the virtual world user, and processes the signaling message to identify a virtual world identifier assigned to the virtual world user. The gateway system converts the signaling message to a communication request message in a protocol used in the virtual world environment, and transmits the communication request message to the virtual world user to establish the session. When the session is established, the virtual world user and the real world user may communicate via voice and/or data. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089440 | PROTOCOL FOR LEASING SOCKETS - A system for establishing a communication session in a networked deployment includes a negotiation between a client application and a service regarding the duration of the communication session. A client application sends a packet or datagram having a load and a request for a communication link. The request for a communication link includes a first proposed interval for a lease term between the client application and the service. The service may accept the first proposed interval and begin processing the load. Alternatively, the service may deny the request or counter-propose a second proposed interval for the communication link. Substantially concurrently with sending the second proposed interval, the service may begin processing the load. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089441 | SYSTEMS & METHODS FOR PROXY RESOLUTION OF DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) REQUESTS - Systems and methods are provided for resolving domain name services (DNS) queries for address information about hosts on a network. The queries are posited from remote users across a satellite or other remote link to a network. In response to a domain name services request from the client containing a name of the server, a placeholder address is generated and provided in response to the client. After a subsequent request for a connection to the server is received, the name of the server is re-associated with the placeholder address and the connection request containing the proper host name is forwarded across the data link. A hub processor receives the request for connection, resolves the name of the server to an address on the network, and establishes a connection between the client and the server using the address on the network. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089442 | Method of transmitting data in a communication system - A method of transmitting data from a first terminal to a second terminal in a communication network comprising: receiving at the first terminal an data signal determining an identity of the peripheral device; supplying to a data store the identity of the peripheral device; selecting from the data store at least one parameter for processing the data signal based on the identity of the peripheral device; transmitting the data signal from the first terminal to the second terminal; and processing the data signal, wherein the data signal is processed based on the selected parameter. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090089443 | MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT METHOD AND MANAGEMENT PROGRAM - A management system including a management apparatus and a managed apparatus connected with each other by a communications network, the system having a registration controller, wherein in an initial registration phase where the managed apparatus sends a registration request notice to the management apparatus, and the management apparatus returns a registration permission notice to the managed apparatus; in cases where a first communications method is utilized that enables immediate mutual communication, the registration controller determines that a final registration has completed when the managed apparatus has received the registration permission notice; and in cases where a second communications method via a server is utilized, the registration controller determines that a temporary registration has completed when connection between the managed apparatus and the server has been established, and when the managed apparatus has acquired the registration permission notice, the registration controller determines that the final registration has completed. | 04-02-2009 |
| 20090094368 | INSTANT MESSAGING GENERAL QUEUE DEPTH MANAGEMENT - The present invention provides systems, methods and computer program product code for data processing systems to manage instant messaging sessions and windows of a first user. An instant messaging chat window is initiated. Responsive to initiating the first instant messaging chat window, the first instant messaging chat window is flagged as a first active window, and an active window counter is incremented. A state of the first user is identified based on the active window counter. The state of the first user is then displayed to a second user. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090094369 | SYSTEM FOR CONDUCTING MULTI-MEDIA COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - A system for conducting multi-media communication sessions between two or more terminals includes a smart client application to dynamically load application code and data from servers on demand using an application management protocol. In the present embodiment the smart client is maintained on each terminal and initially executes a core application. This core application provides a user interface for selectively establishing and maintaining a communication session with a remote terminal. The core application also provides a user interface for including shared applications in the session to which the remote terminal has access. The core application provides a further user interface for combining two sessions into one that includes all participants and shared applications from both original sessions. Each shared application provides a user interface to each participant of the session according to their access rights: the participant who added an application to a session will typically have full access, while other participants typically have more restricted access. The core application uses a session management protocol to maintain consistent session state between all terminals involved in a session. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090094370 | Seamless Host Migration Based on NAT Type - Systems and methods of the present invention for maintaining network data distribution are provided. Network data may be distributed in such as manner as to allow a network session to weather interrupted communications between host and clients without significant loss of data. Embodiments of the present invention provide for one or more clients to serve as backup host(s) for the network session, such determinations including the use of NAT profile information. When the other clients transmit data to the host, they may also transmit the data to one or more backup hosts if there are any indications of interrupted communication. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090094371 | CONNECTION FORWARDING - Two or more network traffic processors connected with the same LAN and WAN are identified as neighbors. Neighboring network traffic processors cooperate to overcome asymmetric routing, thereby ensuring that related sequences of network traffic are processed by the same network proxy. A network proxy can be included in a network traffic processor or as a standalone unit. A network traffic processor that intercepts a new connection initiation by a client assigns a network proxy to handle all messages associated with that connection. The network traffic processor conveys connection information to neighboring network traffic processors. The neighboring network traffic processors use the connection information to redirect network traffic associated with the connection to the assigned network proxy, thereby overcoming the effects of asymmetric routing. The assigned network proxy handles redirected network traffic in much the same way that it would handle network traffic received directly. | 04-09-2009 |
| 20090106431 | Information on Demand Process Framework to Generate, Manage, Secure, and Deploy Browsers and Application Accessible Web Services - Disclosure is a method and system for delivering a reusable framework. The disclosure invokes an interface to define an information service within the reusable framework. The defined information service is stored in a repository. The method further includes outputting a service request as an address for invoking the defined information service and establishing a data connection after receiving the service request wherein the defined information service can be invoked. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090106432 | System and Method for Transmitting Data from a Server Application to More Than One Client Node - The invention relates to a system and method for transmitting the same data to more than one client node substantially simultaneously. In one embodiment the invention relates to a method for transmitting the same data substantially simultaneously from an application executing on a server node to at least two client nodes. The method includes the steps of providing a connection between a first client node and a first client protocol stack and between the application and the first client protocol stack; associating a first minimal communications protocol stack with the first client protocol stack; providing a connection between the application and the first minimal communications protocol stack and between a second client node and a second client protocol stack; associating a second minimal communications protocol stack with the second client protocol stack; providing a connection between the first minimal protocol stack and the second minimal protocol stack; and between the second minimal protocol stack and said the client protocol stack. The method then transmits data from the application program to the first client protocol stack and the first minimal protocol stack substantially simultaneously. The invention also relates to a communication system including a server node including: an application program, a first client protocol stack in electrical communication with the application program, a first minimal protocol stack in electrical communication with the application program; a second minimal protocol stack in electrical communication with the first minimal protocol stack; and a second client protocol stack in electrical communication with the second minimal protocol stack. | 04-23-2009 |
| 20090113061 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS FOR ELECTRONIC DEVICE - Disclosed are methods of establishing communication parameters for communicating between a first electronic device and a second electronic device, and corresponding computer apparatus and computer-readable medium. The embodiments store a device driver indicator on the first electronic device, the device driver indicator for indicating a driver for driving the first electronic device using one of a plurality of different operating systems, determine configuration information for the first electronic device, receive a removable computer-readable medium at the first electronic device, the removable computer-readable medium received from a user of the second electronic device, and transfer the device driver indicator and the configuration information to the removable computer-readable medium. The transferred device driver indicator and the configuration information are installable from the removable computer-readable medium to the second electronic device to establish the communication parameters to allow the second electronic device to communicate with the first electronic device. | 04-30-2009 |
| 20090119406 | METHOD FOR DATA COMMUNICATION AND SYSTEM THEREOF - The present invention discloses a system and method for data communication. In the system and method for data communication, a part of communication peers in the communication system are assigned as super peers, and each super peer forwards message according to its route table. When a communication peer logs in the system, network information of the logged communication peer is saved in a super peer which is logically closest to the logged communication peer through messages forwarded among every super peer. And when an origination communication peer searches for a destination communication peer, the network information of the destination communication peer is saved in a super peer which is logically closest to the destination communication peer through the message forwarded among every super peer in super peer layer. The origination communication peer establishes connection with the destination communication peer based on the network information of the destination communication peer, and implements the data communication through the connection established. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090119407 | SECURE NEIGHBOR DISCOVERY BETWEEN HOSTS CONNECTED THROUGH A PROXY - A method, a proxy and a host are provided for securing neighbor discovery (ND) signaling between hosts when the hosts are connected through the proxy. A first host sends an original ND message comprising a first signature based on an address of the first host. The proxy removes the address of the first host and substitutes its own address in a modified ND message. The proxy then places a copy of the address of the first host in a new field and builds a proxy signature based on the own address of the proxy and on the new field. The new field and the proxy signature are added to the modified ND message. A second host receives the modified ND message from the proxy and verifies the proxy signature. The second host reconstructs the original ND message content and then verifies the first signature. | 05-07-2009 |
| 20090125631 | System And Method For Processing Quality-Of-Service Parameters In A Communication Network - System for processing a communication session to be set up via a communication path from an originating location (ASD) to a destination location (TYO) through a communication network. A common Service Level Agreement (SLA) registry contains Quality-of-Service (QoS) related parameters representative for the QoS valid for the domains between the originating location and the destination location. A QoS processor is adapted for processing QoS related parameters which are retrieved from the SLA registry, for predicting the end-to-end QoS values for one communication path between the originating and destination location and for ranking or selecting or both ranking and selecting, based on the predicted end-to-end QoS values, one or more recommended communication paths between the originating location and the destination location. The Quality-of-Service (QoS) processor may be adapted for processing the QoS parameters retrieved from the SLA registry and predicting end-to-end QoS values representative all communication paths between each network domain to each other network domain and for storing said predicted end-to-end QoS values in a QoS registry for selection and/or ranking actions for new session requests in future. | 05-14-2009 |
| 20090132716 | FAULT-TOLERANT DISTRIBUTED SERVICES METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatuses are provided for use in fault-tolerant distributed services. One method includes establishing a plurality of server processes each associated with different non-overlapping subspace range of a distributed data structure, associating a data object with a corresponding server process based, at least in part, on mapping the data object to the subspace range associated with the server process, and manipulating the data object using the server processes. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090132717 | SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL-BASED INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION - Video on demand (VoD) and other video streaming and delivery mechanisms are provided using a messaging protocol (e.g., a session initiation protocol (SIP))-based approach that builds upon existing service delivery platforms. In one example, SIP functionality is extended to provide the ability to control and alter a delivery mode of a content stream, such as to change a playback mode or quality of service, by providing such requests as part of the instruction or payload of existing SIP messages, or by providing new SIP messages. Using SIP allows for third party control, such as by IPTV applications, which is not provided by current Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)-based systems. SIP also can establish a peer-to-peer connection between a client and a SIP-enabled content server to allow the client to directly control the media stream. As an advantage over RTSP, SIP provides for bi-directional messaging between SIP endpoints. | 05-21-2009 |
| 20090138607 | Method and System for Enabling Multipart Communication in a Computer Network - The present invention relates to a method for enabling multipart communication between computers | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138608 | Automatic Multipath iSCSI Session Establishment Over an Arbitrary Network Topology - A method and apparatus for establishing multiple network sessions over an arbitrary network topology comprises receiving network configuration information describing an initiator system and a target controller. The initiator system contains one or more initiator ports. The target controller contains one or more target ports. Each target port is associated with one or more target nodes. A set of pre-defined rules is identified. The set of pre-defined rules governs the establishment of network sessions between the initiator ports and the target nodes through the target ports. One or more network sessions are established based on the set of pre-defined rules and the network configuration information. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138609 | Method and Apparatus for Maintaining User Sessions Across User Devices and Portals - Embodiments of the invention generally provide a method and apparatus for maintaining user sessions across user devices and portals. One embodiment of a method for maintaining a user session across a group including a plurality of user devices includes altering, at a first device in the group, a state of the user session, such that a new session state results and transferring the new session state from the first device to at least one of the other devices in the group. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138610 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, TUNNEL COMMUNICATION DEVICE, TUNNEL COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM - Provided are an information processing system, a tunnel communication device, a tunnel communication method, and a program that can make a communication between plural information processing devices belonging to different LANs without a user's making a complex setup. In the information processing system, a first tunnel communication unit encapsulates a packet from a first information processing device, transmits the encapsulated packet through a path of a P2P communication, and decapsulates the packet transmitted from a second tunnel communication device through the path of the P2P communication. A second tunnel communication unit encapsulates the packet transmitted from the second information processing device, transmits the encapsulated packet through the path of the P2P communication, and decapsulates the packet transmitted from the first tunnel communication device through the path of the P2P communication. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090138611 | System And Method For Connection Of Hosts Behind NATs - Disclosed is a system and method for connection of host behind network address translators. The system includes a server placed in a public network, and a transparent middleware (TMW). The server records the related data between each host and one or more NAT devices. The TMW may be performed in each host. When a first host of a first NAT device tries to establish connection to a second host of a second NAT device, through the server, the TMW looks up a first IP address mapping from the first host to the second NAT device, and a second IP address mapping from the second host to the first NAT device. Accordingly, the TMW accomplishes the support for establishing connection between the first and the second hosts. | 05-28-2009 |
| 20090144432 | Enabling Remote Locale Specific Operations in Multiple Locale and User Environments - A computer-implemented method of negotiating locale settings among a plurality of users communicating over a communication network can include determining a locale for each of a plurality of remotely located users, identifying at least one locale setting for each of the plurality of users according to the locale of each respective user, wherein the locale setting for each of the plurality of users forms at least one locale setting group, and determining whether each locale setting group is exclusive or non-exclusive. For each locale setting group that is exclusive, a locale setting from the locale setting group can be selected and, for each locale setting group that is non-exclusive, a locale setting union can be generated by taking a union of all locale settings of the locale setting group. The selected locale setting and/or the local setting union can be applied to a message exchanged between the users. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090144433 | Traffic Differentiated Network Services - A method, system, and computer-readable medium are provided for efficiently providing network services to client devices based on the network traffic to be communicated between the device and the network. A system is provided that includes a number of home agents configured to provide network services to mobile nodes. The system is configured in such a way that at least one of the mobile nodes may be served by more than one of the home agents. Thereby, for example, a certain mobile node may be provided voice service via one home agent and email messages via another. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090144434 | Method For Device Capability Negotiation, Method, System And Device For Synchronization - Method for device capability negotiation, and method, system and device for synchronization. The synchronization system includes a synchronization server and a synchronization client. The synchronization server or the synchronization client is adapted to skip the device capability negotiation and directly perform a synchronization with the synchronization server and the synchronization client when the negotiated device capability or status ID, or the status ID indicating that the device capability has not been changed and has been stored. The method for device capability negotiation includes receiving an operation request carrying a parameter requesting a device capability negotiation; determining that the session is a device capability negotiation session according to the parameter requesting the device capability negotiation, carried by the request; returning a response and performing the device capability negotiation; storing results of the device capability negotiation. Embodiments of the present invention can improve the synchronization efficiency. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090144435 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SHARING DATA IN NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for managing data between a plurality of electronic devices in a Near Field Communication (NFC) network in which a first electronic device initially establishes a communication link with at least one of the plurality of electronic devices. The desktop configuration information is then exchanged with at least another electronic device. Thereafter, desktop data of the first electronic device can be shared with the at least one of the plurality of electronic devices. | 06-04-2009 |
| 20090150550 | LOCAL DEVICE REDIRECTION - A system for redirecting a local device to a remote system includes a proxy configured to communicate with a remote access module. The remote access module is configured to establish a remote access connection between a system and a remote system. The proxy is configured to receive socket connection information for establishing a socket connection between the system and the remote system. The proxy is also configured to receive, from the remote system over the socket connection, at least one device transaction designated for a virtual device local to the remote system. The virtual device may correspond with a Universal Serial Bus device locally connected to the system. A system for automatically redirecting a local device to a remote system, as well as a system for utilizing a local device of a remote system, are also provided. Methods and machine-readable media are also provided. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090150551 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR COOKIE EXPIRATION BASED ON USER IDLE AND PRESENCE DETECTION - Detecting Internet web navigation and web browsing idle conditions using cookies during navigating and browsing sessions, is accomplished by receiving in a local computer, from a server, a cookie that has at least one policy that causes the cookie to have either an active or expired status, based on either the presence of web content provided by the server or detection that either the user is idle or the user is away from the local computer. The cookie containing the policy is stored on the local client computer. A signal from a user of the local client computer activates the policy in the cookie; thus, causing the cookie to have a status of either active or expired. When a signal is received from the server requesting the status of the cookie, the local computer determines whether the status of the cookie is active or expired. When the status is active, the server continues to provide content to the local computer and when the status is expired, then the server stops sending content to the local computer. | 06-11-2009 |
| 20090157884 | GENERIC REMOTE CONNECTION TO A COMMAND LINE INTERFACE APPLICATION - A method to establish a generic remote connection to a command line interface (CLI) application is provided. A server is implemented. The server is configured with a data input channel, a data output channel, and an error output channel, each connected to the CLI application. A first socket is configured for routing data streams through the data input channel and data output channel of the server. At least one client is implemented. The at least one client is configured with the data input channel, data output channel, and the error output channel. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157885 | ADDRESS MANAGING METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus ( | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157886 | DYNAMIC UI SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REMOTELY CONTROLLING LEGACY DEVICE - A dynamic user interface (UI) system and method is provided for remote controlling of a legacy device, which is not compatible with a peer-to-peer (P2P) middleware, through a P2P network. The dynamic UI system of the present includes at least one legacy device, a proxy for registering and managing the at least one legacy device and supporting a dynamic remote control user interface using a multi legacy device control protocol, and an edge peer for downloading the dynamic remote control user interface from the proxy and requesting control of the at least one legacy device to the proxy. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090157887 | Control for the interface for sending an SIP reply message - In one embodiment a communication client, includes at least one sending interface to send a signaling message in accordance with the SIP protocol, towards a first interface of a communication server. The client and server are connected by a communication network. The communication client is suitable for inserting an indication within the signaling message regarding the interface for the communication server to use to send its response signaling message. | 06-18-2009 |
| 20090164644 | WIRELESS SECURITY CONFIGURATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless network security method comprises a first communications device generating configuration settings for wireless access and transferring that information to a second communications device through a removable storage device or directly through a physical electrical interface. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164645 | REAL TIME COMMUNICATION BETWEEN WEB AND SIP END POINTS - Described are a service node and method for establishing a communication session between a non-SIP (session initiation protocol)-enabled computing device and a SIP-enabled communication device. The service node includes a web server component for establishing a web browser-based connection with a non-SIP (session initiation protocol)-enabled computing device over a first network. A SIP user agent of the service node establishes a SIP-based connection with a SIP-enabled communication device over a second network. Service logic establishes a transfer of media between the non-SIP-enabled computing device and the SIP-enabled communication device using the browser-based and the SIP-based connections. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164646 | METHOD FOR DETERMINING NETWORK PROXIMITY FOR GLOBAL TRAFFIC LOAD BALANCING USING PASSIVE TCP PERFORMANCE INSTRUMENTATION - Techniques are described for measuring TCP connection quality between a client and a plurality of data centers. A small amount of code, called a web beacon, is placed onto production web pages. When a client requests the production web page, the web page is served to the client. When the web page code is processed, the web beacon instructs the client to retrieve zero-content images from a plurality of data centers through TCP connections in the background. As each connection is made, a passive monitoring system measures and logs statistics about each TCP connection from the client to the data center. The statistics are aggregated into a database and may be sorted based upon ranges of IP addresses of clients and the connection quality measurements. The data is exported from the database to global load balancers to determine routing from subsequent clients to the plurality of data centers. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164647 | INTERFACE APPARATUS, EXCHANGE APPARATUS EQUIPPED WITH THE INTERFACE APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD FOR USE IN THE INTERFACE APPARATUS - According to one embodiment, an interface apparatus includes a connector capable of connecting a plurality of SIP terminals and a SIP network to a port, a first processor which executes an exchange processing to the plurality of SIP terminals, a second processor which executes an exchange processing to the SIP network, a memory which stores a terminal ID for specifying each of the plurality of SIP terminals, and a sorting module configured to refer to a stored content of the memory based on sender identification information in a control signal relating to an exchange received by the connector, and sort the control signal to the first processor or the second processor based on a reference result of the memory. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090164648 | RELIABLE DELIVERY OF MULTI-CAST CONFERENCING DATA - Conferencing data is reliably delivered to computer systems participating in a hierarchically arranged multi-cast conferencing session. When a child computer system does not receive a multi-cast packet (e.g., an IP multi-cast packet), the child computer system sends a negative acknowledgment to a parent computer system. In response, the parent computer system re-transmits conferencing data that was contained in the multi-cast packet to the child computer system. Conferencing data can be re-transmitted to the child computer system via uni-cast (e.g., TCP). Accordingly, conferencing data that is not received or that is damaged via multi-cast can be repaired via uni-cast. Computer systems can join an existing multi-cast conference session without having to communicate with the root computer system. The root computer system adjusts a multi-cast send rate to compensate for changed network conditions. | 06-25-2009 |
| 20090172173 | Method for the Management of Flows Between Appliances of a Telecommunications Network - This method is for managing flows between a first appliance and at least one second appliance, these appliances being designed to operate according to the so-called SIP protocol on a telecommunications network, wherein, the second appliance being preferably registered with the first appliance. The method comprises upon reception of a notifying message related to the loading state of said first appliance sent according to the SIP protocol, the implementing a procedure for spacing communications sent from the second appliance to said first appliance as a function of the loading state of the latter. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172174 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-SERVICE ACCESS - A control and bearer separating system for the multi-service access includes: at least one access node for receiving the message of the user, separating the control flow and the service flow of the message, transmitting the control flow to the controller, and transmitting the service flow to the corresponding edge node, based on the control of the controller; the controller for processing the control flow to control the access node to transmit the service flow to the corresponding edge node, and control the corresponding edge node to process the service flow; and at least one edge node for transmitting the received service flow to the corresponding service provider node, based on the control of the controller. Furthermore, there is a method for connecting the user to the networking using the above control and bearer separating system, and a control and bearer separating method. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172175 | Data Providing System and Data Providing Apparatus - A data providing system is provided with a data providing apparatus, a data utilizing apparatus configured to be connected with the data providing apparatus in a communicable manner, and a communication apparatus configured to be connected with the data providing apparatus in a communicable manner. The data utilizing apparatus sends an identification information-sending request to the data providing apparatus, outputs identification information sent from the data providing apparatus, sends the identification information to the data providing apparatus, and utilizes data sent from the data providing apparatus. The communication apparatus allows a user to input the identification information, sends the input identification information, and allows the user to disconnect a communication session with the data providing apparatus. The data providing apparatus sends the identification information to the data utilizing apparatus in accordance with the identification information-sending request sent from the data utilizing apparatus, stores the sent identification information, and sends data to the data utilizing apparatus on a condition that the identification information sent from the communication apparatus is being stored, and that the identification information sent from the data utilizing apparatus is received during a communication session with the communication apparatus. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090172176 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FILTERING ELECTRONIC MESSAGES - A method is provided for filtering electronic messages such as unsolicited bulk email. The method includes establishing a communications connection with the remote server under the Simple Email Transfer Protocol or other suitable protocol; accepting session data from the remote server; and determining if the session data meets criteria associated with legitimate messages. If the data pertaining to the connection does not meet the criteria associated with legitimate messages, then one or more stimulus signals are sent to the remote server. If the server responds to the stimulus signal in the manner required by the communications protocol, then the session can be added to a database of known sessions. The session is then terminated by responding to the server with a temporary error message in accordance with the protocol. If the remote server is a legitimate server complying with the STMP, it will resend the message after a prescribed time period. | 07-02-2009 |
| 20090177781 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR COMMUNICATING WITH STORAGE SYSTEMS USING SLIM IP STACKS - Methods, and associated devices, media, and systems, for establishing a communication link between a host system and a storage device are provided. Such a method includes the steps of: providing a communication stack having only an application layer and a physical layer; and establishing a communication channel between a host system and the storage device using the communication stack. The step of establishing may be performed via a TCP/IP emulator in a host-system side and a storage-command interpreter in a storage-device side. The method may further include: establishing a communication channel between the host system and a device having a static-IP address; and establishing a communication channel between the host system and a device having a storage identifier that is embedded into one of command parameters sent by the application layer or the physical layer to the TCP/IP emulator. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090177782 | System and method for associating communication devices - A system and method of associating at least two communication devices is provided. First information identifying a first communication device and second information identifying a second communication device is received via a link layer protocol over a data network. It is determined if the first communication device and the second communication device are co-located based on first link layer data associated with the first communication device and second link layer data associated with the second communication device. An association is triggered between the first information and the second information if the first communication device and the second communication device are determined to be co-located. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090177783 | Pairing and storage access scheme between a handheld device and a computing system - A method is described that involves detecting the presence of a pairing partner. Prior to establishing a paired relationship with the pairing partner, a user is prompted to verify himself/herself. In response to the user properly verifying himself/herself, the paring partner is paired with. The pairing includes invoking a remote storage protocol that contemplates a network between the partners to establish on a first of the partners access to non volatile storage resources for general use. The non volatile storage resources are located on a second of the partners. The second of the partners is a handheld device that provides wireless cell phone service, wireless Internet service and music playback service. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090177784 | END-POINT IDENTIFIERS IN SIP - A system and method for uniquely identifying an SIP device extends the SIP communications protocol with an end point identifier, carried for example in the header of an SIP transmission. The end point identifier is useful for routing, registration, subscription, and authentication. The end point (device) of a given user epid can be uniquely identified by creating a key from an epid and a user's address-of-record (URI). This in turn enables improved connection management and security association management when the connections/IP addresses are transient, such as when HTTPS tunneling is used. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090177785 | FAST HANDOVER USING SIP - A method of handling a data stream during a handover in a communications network comprising a first user agent having a fixed address, a proxy server and a second user agent, said method comprising the steps of: mapping at the proxy server the fixed address with a dynamic network address allocated to the first user agent; sending a request by the first user agent to the second user agent for a data stream; generating by the second user agent in response to the request a plurality of messages each comprising part of the data stream requested and the fixed address of the first user agent, wherein the message is a session initiation protocol message, and sending the messages to the proxy server; receiving the messages at the proxy server and determining the mapped dynamic network address corresponding to the fixed address in the message, and forwarding the messages to the determined dynamic network address; and when the first user agent is allocated a new dynamic network address, replacing by the proxy server the mapped dynamic network address with the new dynamic network address and forwarding the received messages to the new dynamic network address. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090177786 | Network device, address change notification method, and address change notification program - A network device includes a storage unit configured to store an IP address assigned to the network device as an address to be sent to a plurality of domain name servers in which an address-domain mapping relationship between the IP address and a domain name of the network device is to be registered, a server searching unit configured to search for an in-operation domain name server among the plurality of domain name servers, the in-operation domain name server being a domain name server that is currently operating, a software holding unit configured to hold a plurality of unique communication program modules, each corresponding to one of the plurality of domain name servers, and an address notifying unit configured to notify the in-operation domain name server of the IP address through a corresponding one of the communication program modules to register the address-domain mapping relationship in the in-operation domain name server. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090177787 | SERVER, AND PACKET TRANSFERRING METHOD AND PROGRAM THEREFOR - A server that relays packet data transmitted and received between a first terminal and a second terminal among plurality of terminals, includes a transfer table storing unit configured to store a transfer table in which a connection address pair, includes a first connection address and a second connection address, is registered, and a connection establishment message processing unit configured to transmit a SYN ACK message as a response message to a SYN message, upon receiving the SYN message, for establishing a TCP connection from each of the terminals. The first connection address is used to connect the server and the first terminal and the second connection address is used to connect the server and the second terminal. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090177788 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SERVER, TERMINAL, PACKET DATA TRANSFERRING METHOD, AND PROGRAM THEREFOR - A communication system includes a plurality of terminals and a server that relays packet data transmitted and received between a first terminal and a second terminal among the plurality of terminals. The server includes a connection establishment message processing unit configured to transmit a first SYN ACK message that is a response message to a first SYN message transmitted from the first terminal for establishing a TCP connection upon receiving the first SYN message from the first terminal, and an option information notifying unit configured to transmit a first TCP option information notifying message that includes first TCP option information included in the first SYN message from the first terminal and first communication destination information to indicate the second terminal as a destination of communication. The first terminal recognizes the second terminal as the destination of communication and notifies the second terminal of the first TCP option information included in the first TCP option information notifying message, upon receiving the first TCP option information notifying message from the option information notifying unit. | 07-09-2009 |
| 20090182883 | POLICY CONTROL AND CHARGING (PCC) RULES BASED ON MOBILITY PROTOCOL - Techniques for supporting policy control and charging (PCC) functions in a wireless communication network are described. In one design, a Policy Control and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) may receive a request from a first network entity (e.g., a home agent) to establish a PCC session for a user equipment (UE) accessing the first network entity using a mobility protocol (e.g., Mobile IP). The PCRF may determine the mobility protocol used by the UE based on an IP-CAN Type parameter included in the request. The PCRF may determine PCC rules for the PCC session based on the mobility protocol and may send the PCC rules to the first network entity. The first network entity may apply the PCC rules on packets for the PCC session and may count each packet for charging. A second network entity may forward the packets but would not count these packets for charging. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090182884 | Domain name resolution making IP address selections in response to connection status when multiple connections are present - Methods, configured storage media, and systems are provided for resolving domain names into IP addresses in a path-sensitive manner, namely, a manner that may consider information about a link to a server and/or information about routers and other path components. The IP addresses given in response to domain name resolution requests are selected to provide increased reliability and/or dynamic load-balancing over paths. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090182885 | System And Method For Interactively Delivering Expert Information To Remote Outlets - A networked interactive expert system is disclosed for selectively providing relevant expertise when a user requires such assistance. System provides a set of networked facilities for determining an expertise needed by a customer based on a location. Such location can be either physical or logical. A physical “location” corresponds, for example, to a department within a retail outlet. Examples of logical “locations” are ones corresponding to a web-page, a product identification code of interest, a customer identification code, and/or explicit knowledge category selected by the customer. An expert studio, from a list of expert studios providing expertise corresponding to the identified location associated with the customer's request, is matched up with the request. Thereafter, a primary connection, supporting an interactive videoconference session, is established between a first networked node associated with the customer and a second networked node associated with the designated expert studio. | 07-16-2009 |
| 20090187663 | Method and system for accessing data in an enterprise information system - Systems and methods for requesting and receiving data from an enterprise information system are described. In accordance with one embodiment, the connector system includes an application server managed connection factory for receiving a data request, and a load balancer for assigning an enterprise information system server connection to the request. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090187664 | Method for addressing call transmission and service elements between heterogenous nodes - A SIP server addressing method for the inter-operation of SIP nodes (A, B) of a determined IP type in which each SIP server (P, R) is attributed (A) an auxiliary address (R | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090187665 | DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUITED FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA AMONG A PLURALITY OF DATA COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES CONNECTED TO A NETWORK, DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS CONSTITUTING SUCH SYSTEM, AND TRANSMISSION DESTINATION UPDATE METHOD AND TRANSMISSION DESTINATION UPDATE PROGRAM EXECUTED BY SUCH DATA TRANSMISSION APPARATUS - In order to allow the communication method for receiving data to be set at the side receiving the data, among a plurality of data communication apparatuses, a data transmission apparatus includes a destination designation portion for accepting designation of user identification information, a data accepting portion for accepting data, a data transmission portion for transmitting the data based on a communication method and destination information stored in association with the user identification information, a comparing portion for comparing the communication method stored in association with user identification information included in reply data with a communication method by which the reply data was received when the reply data for the transmitted data is received, and an update portion for updating the communication method and the destination information stored in association with the user identification information included in the reply data with the communication method by which the reply data was received and with the destination information included in the reply data based on the result of a comparison. | 07-23-2009 |
| 20090193126 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CONFIGURATION DRIVEN REWRITE OF SSL VPN CLIENTLESS SESSIONS - The present disclosure provides solutions for an enterprise providing services to a variety of clients to enable the client to use the resources provided by the enterprise by modifying URLs received and the URLs from the responses from the servers to the client's requests before forwarding the requests and the responses to the intended destinations. An intermediary may identify an access profile for a clients' request to access a server via a clientless SSL VPN session. The intermediary may detect one or more URLs in content served by the server in response to the request using one or more regular expressions of the access profile. The intermediary may rewrite or modify, responsive to detecting, the one or more detected URLs in accordance with a URL transformation specified by one or more rewrite policies of the access profile. The response with modified URLs may be forwarded to the client. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090193127 | Systems and Methods for Establishing and Validating Secure Network Sessions - A method and system that employ a central server with an associated database and a Master Agent for establishing a TCP/IP connection between a client and an application server associated with a Remote Agent. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090193128 | Call Connection Processing Method And Message Transmission/Reception Proxy Apparatus - A call connection processing method that uses SIP (Signal Invitation Protocol) to perform call connection between user terminals and a backbone network via an access network is disclosed. In the method the user terminal instructs a proxy apparatus in the access network to send specified SIP signaling messages to the backbone network in place of the user terminal; by following that instruction, the proxy apparatus does not send a certain SIP message of the SIP signaling messages to the user terminal, or sends another SIP messages to the backbone network in place of the user terminal. | 07-30-2009 |
| 20090198819 | Method and System for Providing the Internet Service with Advertisement - A method for providing an Internet service with advertisement is provided. First, a computing device installs an ad-playing application and runs the ad-playing application to request a telecommunication network for a connection to the Internet. Then, the telecommunication network establishes the connection for it and transfers advertisement to the computing device. Then, the ad-playing application plays the advertisement on the screen of the computing device. Last, the telecommunication network disconnects the connection when the advertisement is not played on the computing device. Moreover, A system for providing the Internet service with advertisement is disclosed in the specification. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090198820 | PRESERVING STATE INFORMATION CLIENT-SERVER SYSTEM NETWORKED VIA A STATELESS PROTOCOL - A method performed by a server for maintaining state in a stateless server environment is includes receiving a request for performance of an operation by an application from a client wherein the request includes a first universal resource locator (URL). A first set of state information may be extracted from the first URL, if any is present, and evaluated. A second set of state information associated with the operation is assembled, and the second set of state information contains at least the client identification information, the application information, and a counter. The counter keeps track of how many times the client has interacted with the server for the operation. The second set of state information is incorporated into a second URL. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090198821 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND NETWORK ENTITY FOR NEGOTIATING THE SESSION DESCRIPTION PROTOCOL VERSION AND OBTAINING THE SESSION DESCRIPTION PROTOCOL VERSION INFORMATION - A method, system and network entity for negotiating a session description protocol (SDP) version improve a negotiation process where two communication parties negotiate an SDP version supported by both applications. Especially when the H.248 protocol is applied, by extending of a property parameter, the negotiation process between a media gateway controller and a media gateway can be achieved easily. A method, system and network entity for obtaining information of an SDP version allow one communication party to obtain information of an SDP version supported by the other party from the other party. Especially when the H.248 protocol is applied, by extending the property parameter, the media gateway controller may obtain the information of the SDP version supported by the media gateway easily. | 08-06-2009 |
| 20090204713 | UNIT AND A METHOD FOR DEFINING A SESSION RULE IN A NETWORK - A unit is provided for defining a rule to be applied to a multimedia session in a network. The unit takes into account, to define the rule, information data about the media, a policy predefined by the carrier and an access type received from a session monitoring unit and used by a terminal participating in the session to access the network. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090204714 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM FOR MANAGING COLLABORATIVE WORKING SESSIONS - A solution is proposed for managing collaborative working sessions (for example, meetings). A corresponding method ( | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090204715 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING A TRANSMISSION PATH OF AN SIP MESSAGE - A method for acquiring the transmission path of the SIP message includes the following steps: the caller initiates the test calling and encapsulates the path information request symbol, which represents the request for the callee to return the transmission path information of SIP message, in the calling request information; after receiving the calling request information, the callee encapsulates all of or some of the calling request information in the successful response and returns the successful response information to the caller; the caller acquires the transmission path of the calling request information according to the received successful response information. A system and a network node device for acquiring the transmission path of SIP message are provided. The method, system and the device make the caller acquire the path which the calling request information traverses in the network, and provide the necessary information for the setting of domain routing policy and the active maintenance for the provider. | 08-13-2009 |
| 20090210539 | HDMI LOGICAL ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT METHOD FOR USE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A CEC controller of a wireless node device determines a destination logical address of a polling message received through a wired interface circuit based on an address list table in an address list memory when the polling message is received from a wired interface circuit, and transmits an ACK for the received polling message through the wired interface circuit in the case that the destination logical address of the polling message is a logical address of a node device connected over a wireless interval. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090210540 | Method for generating function blocks for web services - In continuous operation, for example during the control of a machine, PLCs (programmable logic controllers) execute as client a data transaction with a server. This data transaction is initiated by the PLC by implementing a communication with the server via web services. A WSDL file is called up and additional data during the generation of a user program of the PLC is provided. Function blocks for web applications are then automatically generated from this data and integrated in the user program. | 08-20-2009 |
| 20090216888 | DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE - A data transmission device to transmit a data file to an external device is provided. The data transmission device includes a data file storing unit to store a data file to be transmitted, a communication session establishing unit, which is capable of establishing a plurality of communication sessions between the data transmission device and the external device, a data transmitting unit to transmit data included in the data file and divided in portions concurrently through the plurality of communication sessions to the external device. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090216889 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DELIVERING LAST MILE COMPUTING OVER LIGHT FROM A PLURALITY OF NETWORK EDGE LOCATIONS - Last mile computing is a cost effective system and method for delivering subscription based multimedia computing, wherein processing is done at network edge and the computed multimedia information is transported over light to be presented on remote end devices. The network edges can include a campus data center location, a metro data center location, a rural data center location, and a traditional telecommunication central office location. The computed multimedia information can deliver data, voice and video services. The last mile computing system enables subscribers to choose and perform last mile computing in a plurality of operating system environments: the system's native master operating system environment; Microsoft operating systems environments; Apple-Macintosh operating systems environments; Unix and Linux operating systems environments; and in other commercially available Legacy operating systems environments. Last mile computing systems are interconnected in a local domain architecture and local domains in turn are interconnected in an inter domain architecture over optically enabled communication networks. Such interconnected last mile computing domains provides a means for delivering last mile services ubiquitously. Subscribers can request last mile services from a last mile computing system regardless of their home location. | 08-27-2009 |
| 20090222564 | Apparatus and Method for Supporting Connection Establishment in an Offload of Network Protocol Processing - A number of improvements in network adapters that offload protocol processing from the host processor are provided. Specifically, a mechanism for improving connection establishment in a system utilizing an offload network adapter is provided. The connection establishment mechanism provides the ability to offload connection establishment and maintenance of connection state information to the offload network adapter. As a result of this offloading of connection establishment and state information maintenance, the number of communications needed between the host system and the offload network adapter may be reduced. In addition, offloading of these functions to the offload network adapter permits bulk notification of established connections and state information to the host system rather than piecemeal notifications as is present in known computing systems. | 09-03-2009 |
| 20090234954 | SELECTABLE NON-INTERACTIVE ENTITY APPLICATION PROXY METHOD AND SYSTEM - A selectable security method and system. The method includes retrieving first configuration data associated with a non interactive entity (NIE) software application and second configuration data associated with a plurality of requesters. A master refresh period is calculated from the first configuration data and the second configuration data. Credentials data associated with the NIE software application are retrieved. The credentials data are transmitted to a resource server. A session key generated by the resource server is received by the NIE software application. The NIE software application calculates a stale time associated with the session key. The NIE software application stores the session key and the stale time. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090234955 | Methods and Systems for Synchronization of Multiple Applications - Aspects of the present invention relate to systems and methods for synchronizing multiple applications. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090234956 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION - A method for establishing a connection includes the following steps: A mobility management entity generates a create bearer context request message and sends the message to a selected serving gateway. The create bearer context request message at least includes address information of at least one packet data network gateway and corresponding indication information of the protocol type of connection establishment. The serving gateway receives and analyzes the create bearer context request message, and determines the protocol type of the connection according to the indication information of the protocol type of connection establishment. The serving gateway processes the create bearer context request message with the determined protocol type of connection. Further provided are a mobility management entity, a serving gateway, and a network system which are able to reduce time delay when connection is established. | 09-17-2009 |
| 20090240817 | System and method for transporting data units through a communication network - A system and method for transporting data units for a communication network. In a communication between two peers a proxy and a network entity for controlling a partial communication are provided. One or both of the proxy and the network entity is arranged to modify one or more of the data units, in order to provide communication control related information that is different from communication control related information exchanged between the two peers The respective other or both of the proxy and the network entity is arranged to perform data unit transmission control based on the different communication control related information. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090240818 | Method and Apparatus for Reconstructing a Communication Session - Each person to a communication session records their contributions to the communication session. Metadata is maintained for each contribution to identify the time of the contribution and any other useful information to enable the content of the contribution to be accessed at a later point in time. When a portion of the communication session is to be recreated, the people involved in the communication session are requested to provide their contributions for a particular period of time or all contributions associated with a particular topic. Users will then select and forward previously recorded contributions that they are willing to have included in the recreation. By collecting contributions from the individuals involved in the communication session, the intended portion of the communication session may be recreated. Since each person is recording their own contribution to the communication session, no explicit permission is required to record the conversation. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090240819 | INFORMATION PROCESSING UNIT, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, REMOTE SERVER, AND INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM - There is provided an information processing unit including an application execution section to execute an application to request establishment of an HTTP tunneling connection with a connection target unit, a connection establishment section to set a maximum content length settable with the connection target unit, establish an HTTP tunneling connection with the specified content length with the connection target unit via a connected proxy server and update the HTTP tunneling connection with the specified content length a plurality of times upon closure of the established connection, and a connection management section to manage connection status of each of a plurality of HTTP tunneling connections and make the application execution section recognize the plurality of HTTP tunneling connections as one virtual HTTP tunneling connection. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090240820 | Quality of Service for Network Connected Clients - A mechanism is provided for network communication. The mechanism establishes a connection between a network server and a network client. The connection is established using a connection-oriented protocol. The network server has a first server configuration stored in a memory of the network server. The first server configuration comprises a set of server parameters specific to a network application that the network server provides to the network client. The mechanism identifies the network client configuration. The mechanism replaces, in the memory of the network server, the first server configuration with a second server configuration. Responsive to a determination that the client configuration is incompatible with the second server configuration, the mechanism disconnects the network client. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090240821 | Multiplayer Peer-to-Peer Connection Across Firewalls and Network Address Translators Using a Single Local Port on the Local Host - A system for providing peer-to-peer connections includes a plurality of host devices behind corresponding NATs; and a plurality of STUN servers. Each host device includes first and second sockets respectively bound to first and second private ports. Each host device sends a first STUN packet through the first socket to a first STUN server and a second group of STUN packets through the second socket to the STUN servers via public ports of the corresponding NAT. The STUN servers identify the public port numbers of the public ports. Each host device calculates a predicted public port number of the corresponding NAT for the second socket, based on the public port numbers of the public ports for the first socket and the second socket, the predicted public port number to be used for peer-to-peer connection between the second socket of the host device and other host devices. | 09-24-2009 |
| 20090254666 | METHOD AND DEVICES FOR ENABLING A MULTI-MODE DEVICE TO ESTABLISH A SESSION THROUGH MULTIPLE NETWORKS - A method, device, and computer-readable storage element enables a multi-mode device to establish a session through multiple networks in a communication system. The method includes registering, at the same time, each of a plurality of sub-clients of a single multi-mode device with a single application server, wherein each sub-client is separately registered through a different network, using an individual logical identity. The method further includes detecting an invitation including session parameters to establish a session using the single application server, and selecting at least one of the sub-clients to process the invitation based on the session parameters to establish the session through the networks corresponding to the selected sub-client. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090254667 | METHOD FOR ELIMINATING REDUNDANT CONNECTIONS - A method and system for eliminating redundant connections, including transmitting a request to merge two connections, terminating a first portion of a first connection, terminating a first portion of a second connection, and merging a second portion of each of the first and second connections, are described. A method and system for merging connections, including receiving a request to merge two connections, terminating a first portion of a first connection, terminating a first portion of a second connection, and merging a second portion of each of the first and second connections. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090254668 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING FOR SESSION ID IN WIRELESS MOBILE IP COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and a method for performing session setup in a wireless communication system that uses a Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP) are provided. In the method, when at least one Mobile Node (MN) requests registration, a Network Access Identifier (NAI) of the MN is determined. A session Identification (ID) is assigned to the NAI of the MN. The session ID assigned to the NAI is inserted into an Identification Low field forming a registration request field of a message requesting registration of the MN. The message is transmitted to a Home Agent (HA) of the MN. A Foreign Agent (FA) can more easily search for an MN corresponding to a registration replay message provided from the HA, and memory consumption and a time delay that occurs due to a hash method may be reduced. | 10-08-2009 |
| 20090259756 | TRANSMITTING MEDIA STREAM BURSTS - Mechanisms are provided to transmit media stream bursts upon recognizing that a device buffer is low or empty. In particular examples, a content server transmits 6 seconds of video in 2 seconds in order to quickly replenish a device buffer so that the device can start playback sooner. Content server buffers for particular channels can be prefilled even before any stream is requested for that channel. The content server can transmit at a higher bit rate for a short period of time or alternatively can switch to transmitting a lower quality stream for a short period of time. A media stream burst can be provided without disrupting system operation or requiring client rebuffering. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090259757 | Securely Pushing Connection Settings to a Terminal Server Using Tickets - Systems and techniques for securely pushing connection settings to a terminal server using tickets are described. In one embodiment, a request is received at a first network component from a client for access to a second network component. A ticket associated with one or more connection settings is created and provided to the client. The ticket is provided by the client to the second network component. The ticket is provided from the second network component to the first network component, and the one or more connection settings associated with the ticket are received from the first network component back to the second network component. The one or more connection settings are enforced at the second network component. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090259758 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SESSION MIGRATION - A method for session migration includes: sending a request for transferring a session from a source terminal to a target terminal; receiving, by a media transfer controller, the request; and transferring, by the media transfer controller, the session to the target terminal by negotiating with the media relay. A system for session migration is also provided. Through the present disclosure, speed and efficiency for a session migration service are improved. | 10-15-2009 |
| 20090265472 | Method, System, and Apparatus for System Level Initialization - Multiple initialization techniques for system and component in a point-to-point architecture are discussed. Consequently, the techniques allow for flexible system/socket layer parameters to be tailored to the needs of the platform, such as, desktop, mobile, small server, large server, etc., as well as the component types such as IA32/IPF processors, memory controllers, IO Hubs, etc. Furthermore, the techniques facilitate powering up with the correct set of POC values, hence, it avoids multiple warm resets and improves boot time. In one embodiment, registers to hold new values, such as, Configuration Values Driven during Reset (CVDR), and Configuration Values Captured during Reset (CVCR) may be eliminated. | 10-22-2009 |
| 20090271521 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING END-TO-END CONTENT-BASED LOAD BALANCING - Methods and systems for providing end-to-end content-based load balancing are described. A Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) connection is accepted from a client and a request is received from the client. The request is processed, a target stack is selected, and the TCP connection is transferred to the selected target stack such that the client and selected target stack maintain an end-to-end TCP connection. In an exemplary embodiment, the request can be processed in a TCP kernel. In another preferred embodiment, the TCP connection can include TCP data packets and the request can include request data packets. The TCP connection transfer can be performed by replaying the TCP data packets and the request data packets to the selected target stack. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090271522 | System, Method and Apparatus For On-Demand Recording Of A Communication Session - A method for on-demand recording of a communication session according to one embodiment includes establishing a communication session between a first communication device and a second communication device. The method further includes receiving a request to initiate recording of the communication session at a network server in response to a user input. The method still further includes recording the communication session by the network server in response to receiving the recording request, and storing the recorded communication session in a storage device associated with the network server. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090271523 | System, Method and Software for Using One Computer Network to Bypass a Portion of Another Computer Network - A bypass computer network allows data communications between a client computing device and a remote content source to be selectively routed around a portion of the public Internet (or other computer network(s)) via the bypass network without requiring a physical connection between the bypass network and either the client computing device or the content source. | 10-29-2009 |
| 20090276532 | REDUCING OCCURRENCE OF USER EQUIPMENT REGISTRATION EXPIRY DURING CALLS - Methods, systems, User Equipment (UE), and computer readable medium for reducing the occurrence of UE registration expiry are provided. A method of reducing the occurrence of UE registration expiry during calls includes registering a UE with a network for a registration period, determining a re-registration threshold time period, comparing a duration of a remaining portion of the registration period at a particular time with the re-registration threshold time period, and attempting to re-register the UE with the network for a further registration period if the remaining portion is less than or equal to the re-registration threshold time period, wherein the determining of the re-registration threshold time period includes at least one of setting the threshold time period to a value greater than 600 seconds, determining the threshold time period according to a remaining talk time of the UE at the particular time, determining the threshold time period according to a state of the UE at the particular time, determining the threshold time period according to a duration of at least one previous call made by the UE, determining the threshold time period according to a statistical parameter of a plurality of calls made by the UE, determining the threshold time period according to a statistical parameter of a plurality of calls made by at least one UE, determining the threshold time period according to a predefined maximum call duration, and determining the threshold time period independently of a length of the registration period. | 11-05-2009 |
| 20090282155 | PROVIDING PEER-TO-PEER MEDIA - This disclosure provides a system and method for providing peer-to-peer multimedia. In some embodiments, a method includes identifying media devices based, at least in part, on a call session between communication devices. Peer-to-peer multimedia is provided between the identified media devices. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090282156 | OCCURRENCE DATA DETECTION AND STORAGE FOR MOTE NETWORKS - Systems and processes for detecting and storing occurrence data using mote networks are disclosed. In some embodiments, a system includes a computing component coupled with a data storage device and operable to receive data from one or more motes. Instructions on the data storage device configure the computing component to receive data from one or more motes into a received data set, receive an input selection corresponding to a target-occurrence having a representative feature, the representative feature including at least one recognizable pattern of at least one parameter in the data received from the one or more of the motes, select a pattern recognition criteria corresponding one of the representative features of the target-occurrence, and in response to the input selection corresponding to the target-occurrence, automatically search the received data set for data correlating to the target-occurrence representative feature using the selected pattern recognition criteria. | 11-12-2009 |
| 20090287829 | Methods, apparatuses, and computer program products for facilitating establishing a communications session - An apparatus may include a processor configured to maintain at least a portion of a distributed database. The distributed database may comprise a plurality of private address data. The processor may be further configured to receive a request from a first terminal device seeking to establish a communications session with a second terminal device. The processor may be additionally configured to search the distributed database for a private address for the second terminal device. The processor may also be configured instruct a network address translating (NAT) apparatus to create a binding between the private address for the second terminal device and a public address accessible by the first terminal device. In some embodiments, the processor may be further configured to facilitate establishing a communications session between the first and second terminal devices based upon the binding between the private address and the public address. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287830 | Method and system for managing the transfer of files among multiple computer systems - A system and method is disclosed for transferring files from a source computer to a destination computer. The system and method comprises reading a configuration file containing one or more parameter expressions representing file transfer instructions. One or more transfer files stored on the source computer are identified based on at least one of the parameter expressions contained within the configuration file. The identified transfer files are transferred from the source computer to the destination computer in accordance with the parameter expressions contained within the configuration file. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287831 | APPLICATION DISTRIBUTION CONTROL SYSTEM, APPLICATION DISTRIBUTION CONTROL METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND CLIENT TERMINAL - An application distribution control system is made up of an information processing apparatus including a data collecting part that collects and stores data of a use state when using an application of an application distribution server into a memory and a data moving part that moves the use state data to a client terminal; the client terminal including a data setting part that receives the use state data from the information processing apparatus to set a use state of the application in accordance with the use state data and a request transmitting part that transmits a use request for the application to the application distribution server; and the application distribution server including a service providing part that receives the use request for the application from the client terminal to allow for the use of the application through the network. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090287832 | MULTIPLE CLIENT CONTROL SYSTEM - Systems and methods for multiple client control are provided. In an aspect of the disclosure, a multiple client system is provided. The multiple client system comprises a master client and one or more slave clients. The master client comprises a remote access module configured to receive session data from a server via a remote access connection and a multi-client control module configured to deliver all or a portion of the session data received from the server to the one or more slave clients. Each of the one or more slave clients comprises a remote access module configured to connect to the master client via a communication network connection that is separate from the remote access connection between the master client and the server. | 11-19-2009 |
| 20090292813 | Address Assignment in Fibre Channel Over Ethernet Environments - A method of initializing a Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) link between a Fibre Channel over Ethernet node (ENode) and Fibre Channel Forwarders (FCFs) in a network by discovering the presence of FCFs available to the ENode and other FCFs, assigning second MAC addresses to the ENode corresponding to each available FCF, and converting from a management and initialization process using the first MAC address to normal Fibre Channel operation using the second MAC addresses. The implementations described herein may additionally distinguish management and initialization processes from normal Fibre Channel operation using separate Ethertypes. | 11-26-2009 |
| 20090300191 | Multi-Protocol Network Registration and Address Resolution - The functionality of a C12.22 application layer is overlaid on an IP-based infrastructure, by employing an IP DNS server as the registration host for both IP- and C12.22-based communications. Communication can occur at either the IP layer or the C12.22 application layer. At the IP layer, a host application can interrogate network nodes. To extend this service to C12.22 communications, C12.22 registration and resolve services are implemented on the DNS server. Similar to the manner in which an IP-based service uses a native, IP-based DNS resolve request, a C12.22 host can utilize a C12.22 resolution request against the C12.22-enabled DNS server for C12.22 application-layer interrogation of endpoints | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300192 | Subscription-Based Services - The present invention provides a virtual network, sitting “above” the physical connectivity and thereby providing the administrative controls necessary to link various communication devices via an Access-Method-Independent Exchange. In this sense, the Access-Method-Independent Exchange can be viewed as providing the logical connectivity required. In accordance with the present invention, connectivity is provided by a series of communication primitives designed to work with each of the specific communication devices in use. As new communication devices are developed, primitives can be added to the Access-Method-Independent Exchange to support these new devices without changing the application source code. A Thread Communication Service is provided, along with a Binding Service to link Communication Points. A Thread Directory Service is available, as well as a Broker Service and a Thread Communication Switching Service. Intraprocess, as well as Interprocess, services are available. Dynamic Configuration Management and a Configurable Application Program Service provide software which can be commoditized, as well as upgraded while in operation. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300193 | CONTENT DISTRIBUTION SERVER AND CONTENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD - Disclosed herein is a content providing server, including, a content distribution processing block configured to distribute, in multicast distribution, content data at least one reception terminal via a predetermined transmission path, and a content reception processing block configured, in reception of a content distribution request via a predetermined connection line, to execute, via the connection line, callback on a content providing terminal that issued the received content distribution request and distribute, in multicast, content data obtained in a session connected by the callback from the content distribution processing block to the reception terminal. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090300194 | CONTENT DISTRIBUTION SERVER AND CONTENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD - Disclosed herein is a content providing server, including, a content distribution processing block configured to distribute, in multicast distribution, content data at least one reception terminal via a predetermined transmission path, and a content reception processing block configured, in reception of a content distribution request via a predetermined connection line, to execute, via the connection line, callback on a content providing terminal that issued the received content distribution request and distribute, in multicast, content data obtained in a session connected by the callback from the content distribution processing block to the reception terminal. | 12-03-2009 |
| 20090307358 | Transmission of Data Between A Server and A Communicating Object - Transmission of data between a download server and a communicating object through a communications network is initiated by a registration server, by transmitting connection parameters received from the download server to the communicating object via a first data channel opened by a first agent of the communicating object after attaching the object to the network. As a function of the connection parameters, a second agent in the communicating object opens a second data channel to the download server so as to transmit the data therein. As long as the first data channel is open, other servers can initiate a transmission via the registration server. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090307359 | IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD THEREOF AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An image forming apparatus has a server cooperation function to transmit data to a data processing server connected therewith via a network and receive processed data after the server performs data processing, and is capable of communicating with a plurality of external apparatuses via the network by establishing concurrent connections. A judger judges whether or not the number of the currently established connections with the external apparatuses reaches a limit number of connections that is an allowed upper limit of concurrent connections, and a controller reserves a connection with the data processing server if the judger judges that the number of the currently established connections with the external apparatuses does not reach the limit number of connections during execution of the server cooperation function, and cancels the reserved connection with the data processing server after the end of the execution of the server cooperation function. | 12-10-2009 |
| 20090313379 | Topology Hiding Of Mobile Agents - A method, infrastructure node ( | 12-17-2009 |
| 20090319673 | Automated Wireless Device Pairing - Illustrative embodiments provide a computer implemented method, an apparatus in the form of a data processing system and a computer program product for performing automated wireless device pairing. In one illustrative embodiment, the computer implemented method comprises initiating by one device, detection of a another device and responsive to detecting the another device, transmitting a pairing information as a light signal from the one device to the another device. The computer implemented method further comprises determining whether the another device received the pairing information, and responsive to receiving the pairing information, completing a pairing process to form paired devices. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090319674 | TECHNIQUES TO MANAGE COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN RELAY SERVERS - Techniques to manage communications between relay servers are described. A system may include multiple relay servers each having an enhanced relay control module. The enhanced relay control module may be operative to manage communications between private clients communicating over the first relay server and the second relay server. The enhanced relay control module may establish a media channel between control ports for the first and second relay servers when a port range attribute for at least one of the first or second relay servers is turned off. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090319675 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING FILE SHARING SESSIONS - The session initiation protocol (SIP) is used to establish calls/sessions between end-points. The type of session to be established is described by the session description protocol (SDP), RFC 2327. At present however, RFC 2327 only contains parameters that describe audio or video sessions. The expansion according to the invention of the SDP by corresponding parameters that describe file sharing sessions thus permits file sharing sessions to be established using the SIP. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090319676 | Conveying Session Continuity Information in a Multi-Component Communication Session - In a multimedia communication session with multiple media components, one or more media components can be transferred from one access network to another access network and yet maintain the continuity of the overall communication session. Each session is first identified and thereafter the media component intended to be transferred is also identified. The identities of the identified session and component are sent to one or more entities within the communication network for executing the media component transfer. | 12-24-2009 |
| 20090327498 | REMOTE COMPUTING SESSION FEATURE DIFFERENTIATION - Example embodiments of the present disclosure are related to terminal servers. In an example embodiment a license can be associated with, or define, a set of capabilities and a session can be generated that includes the capabilities. In an example embodiment the session can be generated in view of a license and privileges that are associated with an account identifier of a user requesting a session from a terminal server. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327499 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MEDIATED CODEC NEGOTIATION - The solutions offered herein include introducing a mediator in the codec: negotiation process. Rather than having the endpoints negotiate codecs directly, the mediator receives signaling from the endpoints relating to the establishment of a communication session which requires codec negotiation, and influences the selection of a codec based on codec policy criteria which depends on known topology information. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20090327500 | PEER TO PEER SVC-BASED DSL SERVICE - Policy-based routing of packets over a peer-to-peer, quality of service connection includes sending a connection setup request, over a control connection to a connection establishing device, to dynamically establish the peer-to-peer, quality of service connection between a source peer implemented on at least one device and a destination peer implemented on at least one device. Packets originating from an application requiring a specified level of service are transmitted, from the source peer implemented on at least one device, over the peer-to-peer, quality of service connection. Packets originating from an application that does not require the specified level of service are transmitted, from the source peer implemented on at least one device, over a best effort connection. | 12-31-2009 |
| 20100005177 | IP UNICAST STREAMING SERVICE DELIVERY - A method of ordering the delivery of a unicast media stream to a second client terminal coupled to an IP Multimedia Subsystem network is described. The method comprises first sending a unicast media order from a first client terminal to an application server of said IP Multimedia Subsystem network. A Session Initiation Protocol INVITE message is then sent from the application server to said second client in response to receipt of said order, the INVITE message containing a media Universal Resource Locator identifying a media source. The Universal Resource Locator is used to exchange Real Time Streaming Protocol signalling between the second client terminal and the application server to initiate and control delivery of the media. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100005178 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FIREWALL FRIENDLY REAL-TIME COMMUNICATION - Method and system for transmitting packets of different data types from a sender client to a receiver client over a server client connection established in a packet switched network, where a transport protocol connection for each data type to be transmitted is established between the sender client and the receiver client using the server client, the data transfer rate of one or more data type connections are measured at the server client, which transfer rate is sent as feedback information to the sender client, the sending rate at the sender client is adapted based on the feedback information from the server client and the transfer rate measured by the sender client, data types are prioritized in priority and non-priority delay sensitive data types by marking the data packets, non-priority data type packets are dropped at the sender client if the transport connections dedicated for non-priority data are too busy to send more data, the individual data types are separately buffered at the server, non-priority data type packets are dropped at the server before they are buffered if a corresponding dedicated data type buffer with a size of N packets is full until the buffer contains a number of M packets, where M| 01-07-2010 | |
| 20100005179 | Multi-Level Secure Network - In certain embodiments, a method for establishing a communication session includes receiving, from a first endpoint, a request to establish a communication session with a second endpoint. The first endpoint has an associated first security level and is operable to communicate via an IP network, the second endpoint has an associated second security level, and the first security level and the second security level are different. The method further includes determining, based on the first security level associated with the first endpoint and the second security level associated with the second endpoint, a communication session security level. The method further includes determining a communication session path for the requested communication session, the communication session path comprising a media processing module corresponding to the determined communication session security level. The method further includes establishing the requested communication session with the second endpoint over the determined communication session path. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100005180 | Method and apparatus for remotely controlling a computer with peer-to-peer command and data transfer - A remote access session is established between client and host computers with the assistance of a gateway. The gateway requests the host computer to send a plurality of data packets to different external addresses and monitors the network ports used for these outgoing packets. The gateway then uses the network port information to predict which port the host will use to transmit future outgoing data packets. A similar process is performed on the client computer. The gateway then directs the client computer to send further data packets to the network address and the predicted port of the host computer. Similarly, the host computer is directed to send further data packets to the network address and predicted port of the client computer. The computers are then directly connected together so that further data communications bypass the gateway. | 01-07-2010 |
| 20100011109 | Method for Safety Control of Data Exchange Flows Between a Communications Module and a Communications Network and Said Communications Module - To perform security control for data flows exchanged between a communication module and a communication network in communication sessions organized in accordance with communication session contexts, a communication session is established with a remote unit, a corresponding communication session context is activated, and the data flows exchanged in accordance with the activated communication session context are controlled, within the established session, with respect to at least one parameter related to said context. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100011110 | Mobile terminal to media server connection apparatus, system, and method - An apparatus, system, and method for a communication network that includes base stations, mobile terminals, and media servers. A base station may receive enable a device-to-device connection between a media server and a mobile terminal. The mobile terminal and the media server may establish the enabled device-to-device connection to create an underlay network within the cellular network, the underlay network including the mobile terminal, the media server, and the device-to-device connection. In some embodiments, the mobile terminal and the media server each include a device-to-device radio that is used to establish and maintain the device-to-device connection. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100011111 | METHOD FOR OFFERING A CALL CENTER SERVICE IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - A call center service is offered in a peer-to-peer network. At least one peer in the peer-to-peer network has a call center function added to it, and a check is then carried out by way of a search algorithm to determine whether a called subscriber is or is not registered in the peer-to-peer network. If the called subscriber is registered, an IP address is first of all determined for that subscriber, and a check is then carried out to determine whether the call center service has been activated for this subscriber. An incoming call is then diverted to a peer with a call center function, and is not passed on to the called subscriber until contact is made with the peer with the call center function. Otherwise, if the subscriber is not registered in the peer-to-peer network, further entries for the called subscriber are first of all checked in the peer-to-peer network. If there is an entry for an active call center service, an address of a peer with a call center function is sought, and the incoming call is then forwarded directly to that peer with the call center function. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100011112 | SESSION TRANSFER METHOD AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING SESSION CONTINUITY - A device and method for transferring a session. The method includes receiving a session continuity operator policy while performing a session with a target terminal via an original network; storing the session continuity operator policy; determining whether to transfer a whole or part of the session to a server according to a parameter in at least the session continuity operator policy; and sending to the server a session invitation message for a session transfer to transfer of the whole of the session if the whole of the session is determined to be transferred. The session invitation message includes information on at least one data to be transferred among a voice data and a non-voice data on the session. The session transfer corresponds to a PS (Packet Switching) to PS transfer. | 01-14-2010 |
| 20100017522 | STREAMING ELECTRONIC CONTENT BETWEEN DISSIMILAR DOMAINS - A system, method, and streaming gateway for delivering a video stream between an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) endpoint in an IMS domain and an Internet endpoint in an Internet domain. The streaming gateway sets up sessions in both the IMS and Internet domains. The IMS endpoint sends the video stream to the streaming gateway utilizing the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and Real Time Protocol (RTP), and the streaming gateway forwards the video stream to the Internet endpoint using an appropriate Internet protocol such as the Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP). The streaming gateway may also stream another video stream such as a promotional video to the Internet endpoint while waiting for the video stream from the IMS endpoint to become available. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100017523 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A data transmission control server is connected to a network, and communicates with a data transmission server, a data transmission auxiliary server, and a client via the network. The data transmission server and the data transmission auxiliary server respectively include: a network interface that transmits data to the client based on a client request; a data transmission information database having stored therein a data identifier for identifying transmission data, a data transmission address for specifying an address of the transmission data, and a data transmission beginning time indicative of a beginning time of data transmission; and a control unit that controls the data transmission server and the data transmission auxiliary server so as to transmit data to the client by transmitting transmission data session information to the data transmission server and the data transmission auxiliary server b a data transmission request from the client. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100017524 | CONTINUOUS PERMISSION TO SEND MEDIA - A method, PT client device and PT server device for controlling transmission of media data, are discussed. According to an embodiment, the method includes starting, by a PT server, a timer when a media burst revoke message is transmitted to a PT client; stopping, by the PT server, the timer before the timer expires when last media data and a media burst release message are received from the PT client; and transmitting, by the PT server, a media burst idle message to the PT client when the timer is stopped. | 01-21-2010 |
| 20100023627 | Call setup and control by third-party device - Method for setting up a communication session (SM) between two communication agents (A, B), triggered by the reception of an event (S) by a third-party communication element (C). Following the reception of this event, the third-party element sends the first of the two agents (A) a signalling message (M | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100023628 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SETTING IP ADDRESSES IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for setting a plurality of Internet Protocol (IP) address in a mobile communication system are provided. A method for using the plurality of IP addresses at a dual-mode terminal in the mobile communication system comprises determining whether a socket open is requested from an application program, when the socket open is requested, determining whether the application program is for a trusted-only network, when the application program is for the trusted-only network, selecting an access means from a plurality of access means for the trusted-only network, determining a corresponding IP address from a plurality of IP addresses using the selected access means, and binding a socket using the determined IP address. | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100023629 | METHOD FOR SETTING UP A PEER-TO-PEER LINK BETWEEN TWO COMMUNICATION MEDIA - A method for setting up a peer-to-peer communication link between a first communication medium ( | 01-28-2010 |
| 20100030901 | Methods and Systems for Browser Widgets - Aspects of the present invention are related to systems and methods for providing and managing browser widgets in systems with limited user interface capabilities or computational power. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030902 | Method for managing a communication between a server device and a customer device - A method is described for managing a communication between a server device and a customer device. The method comprises interchanging between the server device and the customer device one or more parameter messages that are comprising a parameter description for a parameter name. The parameter description does consist of an hierarchical tree-like structure of characters with each level separated by a predefined character (dot). The method further comprises a step of instantiating by an instantiating device of the customer device, an iterator associated to an index, for a next level of a parameter-sub-tree being part of the global parameter description, and a step of recalling an object array for the parameter-sub-tree with the next level having different values for its index starting with a predefined start-value and ending with a predefined end-value. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030903 | MODEM AND CONFIGURATION METHOD THEREOF - A modem includes a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) module, a point-to-point protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) module, and a network monitor module. The DHCP module automatically establishes a DHCP connection over a communication network, and generates a first notification signal after the DHCP connection is established. The PPPoE module automatically establishes a PPPoE connection over the communication network and automatically configures parameters of an Internet access service over the communication network and generates a second notification signal after the PPPoE connection is established. The network monitor module determines current network properties of the communication network upon receipt of the first notification signal and/or the second notification signal, and selectively configures parameters of the Internet access service and a voice over Internet protocol (VoIP) service. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030904 | USER DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND IMS USER EQUIPMENT - There is provided a user device that is equipped with IMS functionality. The user device includes: searching means for searching, based on UPnP technology, a UPnP network for another user device that has IMS subscription information, establishing means for establishing a session with the other user device discovered by the searching means, retrieving means for retrieving the IMS subscription information from the other user device via the session, and sending means for sending a first SIP register message including the IMS subscription information to an IMS network. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030905 | Technique for providing services in a service provisioning network - The invention relates to techniques for providing services in a service provisioning network ( | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100030906 | RE-ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION FOR AN APPLICATION LAYER VIA A SERVICE LAYER - A method and system for establishing a connection with a server after a connection has been broken is provided. A connection system in a service layer of a client detects that a connection between the client and the server has been broken. Upon detecting the broken connection, the connection system of the service layer automatically attempts to re-establish an application-level connection to the server. If the connection system can re-establish an application-level connection to the server, then it need not notify the application layer of the broken connection. | 02-04-2010 |
| 20100036959 | SECURE RESOURCE NAME RESOLUTION - Techniques for securing name resolution technologies and for ensuring that name resolution technologies can function in modern networks that have a plurality of overlay networks accessible via a single network interface. In accordance with some of the principles described herein, a set of resolution parameters may be implemented by a user, such as an end user or an administrator, to be used during a name resolution process for securing the process and/or for conducting the process in an overlay network. In some implementations, the set of resolution parameters may be maintained as a table of rules, and used to govern name resolution processes. For example, resolution parameters may be created that govern a DNSSEC session, or that govern how to communicate with networks implemented with Microsoft's Direct Access overlay technologies, or that govern communications using any other networking technology. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100036960 | METHOD FOR SENDING DATA, AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The application describes a method for sending data which involves the reception of a first piece of information which represents the first change in a data record and of a first data change indicator associated with the first change, the making of a second change, the ascertainment of a second data change indicator on the basis of the first data change indicator, and the sending of a second piece of information, which represents the second change in the first changed data record to produce the second changed data record, and of the second data change indicator. | 02-11-2010 |
| 20100042730 | DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION USING DUAL PROTOCOL STACKS - An intermediate device for data transmission includes an interface and a wireless module, the interface establishing a local connection with an electronic device and the wireless module establishing a remote connection with a server for the electronic device. Different network parameter values are adopted for the local connection and the remote connection. A method for data transmission is also provided. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100042731 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) DIALOG IDENTIFICATION - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for session initiation protocol (SIP) dialog identification are disclosed. According to one method, a first SIP message associated with a SIP dialog is received. A dialog ID that is associated with the SIP dialog is computed using fields of the first SIP message. A second SIP message associated with the SIP dialog is generated. The computed dialog ID is included in the second message. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100042732 | METHOD FOR IMPROVING PEER TO PEER NETWORK COMMUNICATION - The present invention relates to a node for deployment on a peer to peer network. The node is programmed for monitoring the network to receive communication messages therefrom and to forward the communication messages, optionally changing the communications radius parameters to an optimal or near optimal value. The node can forward messages from one network to another or from one network to the same network. The invention also provides a method for monitoring communication messages for selected objects by nodes on a peer to peer network. The method includes interposing the node on the network. The node has at least one stored object corresponding to a communication message object stored the node; and monitors the network to detect communication messages matching at least one of the stored objects and decides whether or not to forward or change communication message radius parameters based on some defined programming or configuration. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100042733 | TASK SWITCH BETWEEN TWO COMPUTING DEVICES - A method is provided to enable the person to switch use of computing devices when working with records and/or documents. A method such as described may be implemented for an individual operating two (or more) computing devices that share and synchronize sets of records. One or more operations may be performed to update and maintain correspondence between the two sets of records. A switchover event may be detected, where the event corresponds to the individual using a second computing device while already using a first computing device. Once the switchover event is detected, state of use information may be received on the second computing device. This information indicates the state of use of one or more records on the first computing device. This information may be used to affect the state of use of corresponding records on the second computing device. In particular, the corresponding records on the second computing device may be placed in a state of use, or in a selected state for subsequent use. | 02-18-2010 |
| 20100049857 | SYSTEM SOFTWARE PRODUCTIZATION FRAMEWORK - A unified framework is established based on a domain-specific system description model representative of physical network system topology, network system device capability and/or logical network system structure. The framework can be employed to streamline a network system configuration process and/or a software system deployment process and the like. Some instances can also be utilized in establishing a unified framework in a broadcast equipment environment to augment network system based technologies. Additionally, network devices having multiple network interfaces that are dedicated to specific network usages can be automatically configured. A method in accordance with an aspect of the present principles includes generating a site model with a plurality of groups of device model network interfaces that can represent dedicate networks. The device model interfaces are grouped according to usage and network medium type and are logically associated with pre-defined IP addresses. The site model is applied to the network devices to logically associate them into dedicated networks by automatically assigning the pre-defined IP addresses to the network interfaces of the devices. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100049858 | INITIAL ACCESS METHOD FOR BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Provided is an initial access method for a broadband wireless access system. The initial access method is used between a portable subscriber station (PSS) and a radio access station (RAS) in the broadband wireless access system and includes an authentication operation and a default transport connection setting operation. In the initial access method, default information, which is required to register the PSS and to set default transport connection, is stored in an authentication authorization accounting (AAA) server, the default information is then transmitted to the RAS connected to the PSS in the authentication operation by the AAA server, and when the PSS is registered and the default transport connection is set, a message composed of parameters, which are required to register the PSS containing the default information and to set the default transport connection, is then transmitted to the PSS by the RAS. Accordingly, a simplified initial access procedure is achieved. | 02-25-2010 |
| 20100057919 | System and Method to Provide a Network Service - A method of providing a network service includes accepting an incoming transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) connection from a user device at a point of presence (POP) proxy server. The TCP/IP connection corresponds to a particular application that is not stored at the POP proxy server. The method also includes relaying the TCP/IP connection from the POP proxy server to a remote application server that stores the particular application via an accelerated network link. Further, the method includes streaming data between the user device and the remote application server after relaying the TCP/IP connection to the remote application server. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100057920 | SESSION INTEGRATION METHOD AND SYSTEM - A session integration method is provided for integrating a first session between a first entity and a third entity and a second session between a second entity and the third entity in a session-based service environment. The first entity receives a REFER message including dialog information from the second entity, and sends a response message to the received REFER message to the second entity. When header information included in the received REFER message indicates an INVITE message and the dialog information is related to the first entity, the first entity generates a Re-INVITE message and sends the generated Re-INVITE message to an address of a target which is subject to session integration. The address is included in the header information and corresponds to the third entity. The first entity updates the first session into an integrated session with the third entity. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100057921 | METHOD, SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING HOME NETWORK DEVICE AND HOME NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - A method, a system for accessing a home network device, and a home network access device are disclosed. The method includes the steps as follows. A home network access device finds a home network device and obtains information of the home network device through a home network protocol. A data model of the home network device is established in the home network access device according to the information of the home network device. A remote service device accesses the data model of the home network device established in the home network access device through a remote management protocol. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100057922 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSACTIONAL SESSION MANAGEMENT - A system and method of transactional session management. Information sufficient to permit creation of a deep copy of a session object is saved concurrently for all aspects of the transaction. For example, the saving may save state information provided by different hierarchical levels of the session as well as possible different hardware or software entities participating in the session. In the event of a rollback condition, the deep copy is supplied to one or more applications. Those applications may then continue the session from the point of the deep copy. | 03-04-2010 |
| 20100064047 | INTERNET LOOKUP ENGINE - The present invention provides computer software, hardware, and systems for use as, or as part of, an Internet lookup engine that eliminates the need for initial consultation with the DNS system. The software of the invention enables client applications (e.g., web browsers, email clients, etc.) to make a persistent or apparent session-level connection with the Internet lookup engine, and may be part of the Internet lookup engine, an API, plug-in, and/or add-on. Information about a client application (collected from previous sessions) may be applied to each new session to create permanence or apparent permanence for the user from session to session. Methods of doing business are also disclosed using the principles of the present invention. | 03-11-2010 |
| 20100070634 | PROTOCOL EXCHANGE AND POLICY ENFORCEMENT FOR A TERMINAL SERVER SESSION - Example embodiments of the present disclosure provide techniques for performing multiple protocol exchanges over a single socket connection, one preceding another, in order to provide a platform for policy exchange between terminal servers and a gateway. The protocol exchanges may occur without using additional ports while ensuring that the terminal server state is restored to the previous state. In an embodiment, such a method may adhere to terminal server security levels and perform an exchange with the terminal servers by replicating remote access security layer exchanges and authenticating the gateway to the terminal server. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100070635 | METHODS FOR SETTING UP AN IP CONNECTION USING A SHARED KEY AND RELATED ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS - A method of operating a first electronic device to set up a communication session with a second electronic device includes establishing a communication connection with a session management server, sending a session identification associated with a previous communication session between the first and second electronic devices to the session management server, and communicating with the second electronic device responsive to the session management server joining the communication connection established with the session management server with a communication connection established between the session management server and the second electronic device. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100070636 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ENABLING MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION WITH A PRIVATE NETWORK - A method and arrangement for enabling access to a home device in a private network from a remote device located outside the private network. The private network includes a multimedia gateway connected to a multimedia service network. A session invite message is sent from the remote device to the multimedia gateway. In response, connection parameters of a residential gateway in the private network are sent to the remote device, which are associated with the selected home device if a home device identification was included in the received message, or with a proxy function in the multimedia gateway capable of providing home device information, if no such identification was included in the received message. In this way, home devices in the private network can be easily and safely accessed remotely. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100070637 | Streaming data playback apparatus - A handsfree apparatus performs an operation for requesting a connection of a Bluetooth connection link to a cellular phone after guaranteeing a continuous playback of music streaming data by an audio player in a time slot that does not have packet transfer of the music streaming data, if the connection request of the Bluetooth connection link to the cellular phone is generated during a time of A2DP connection that defines packet transfer of the music streaming data with the audio player. The connection request of the Bluetooth connection link to the cellular phone is thus handled appropriately without interrupting a continuous playback of the music streaming data. | 03-18-2010 |
| 20100077087 | METHOD FOR HOST SELECTION BASED ON DISCOVERED NAT TYPE - A host may be selected for a peer-to-peer grid based on discovered NAT type. NAT profile information may be collected by each of the peers and shared with the other peers. Each peer receives NAT profile information for the other peers. Each peer may determine from the NAT profile information for the peer and the NAT profile information for the other peers which of the two or more peers to designate as the host. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100077088 | SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING MULTIMEDIA BROADCAST MULTICAST SERVICE FOR LOAD DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - Provided is a broadcast multicast service control system capable of distributively processing excessively given load under environments that have to offer MBMS service by linking with several mobile communication networks, and a control method thereof. The service control system provides a multimedia broadcast multicast service including a service announcement function of announcing service information, a security function of executing generation and distribution of keys for user authentication and information protection, and a proxy and transport function of transmitting/receiving control signals and traffics to/from a mobile communication network to provide the multimedia broadcast multicast service, and the service control system includes: a plurality of service control units, a load management unit, a service distribution policy management unit, and a processing load distribution policy management unit. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100077089 | SCANNER SHARING DEVICE - A scanner sharing device includes a scanner device connection terminal for a scanner device to be connected thereto, a plurality of computer connection terminals for a plurality of computers to be connected thereto, a connection switching unit selectively connecting one of the plurality of computer connection terminals with the scanner device connection terminal, and a switch control unit controlling the operations of the connection switching unit. When the scanner sharing device is in an automatic switching mode, the switch control unit maintains the connection between the computer connection terminal associated with that one computer and the scanner device connection terminal until the switch control unit receives a processing completion signal. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100077090 | Fast switching between multiple user sessions - Methods, apparatus, systems and computer program product for instantiating user sessions in a terminal server environment in such a way as to accomplish fast switching between multiple user sessions while all user sessions are fully isolated from one another. The methods can embody a communication method wherein a user's credentials are used to identify the instances of system resources, for example, applications, that a user is using. This grouping can be referred to as a context, which may be associated with a particular user session. Independent communication mechanisms or pathways with window server for each context can be created and maintained. A bootstrap component can be created in such a manner that a logical barrier between user sessions is initiated and maintained; each instance of a given application thereby will be associated with a specific context. Additional control of information flow between bootstrap processes can be provided via a gateway, which may also manage communication between the components of the operating system and local user input/output agents. | 03-25-2010 |
| 20100082821 | Device-to-device workflows - Systems, methods, and devices are provided for performing a workflow with two or more electronic devices. Embodiments include an initiator electronic device that may function to control the workflow and send instructions for executing the workflow to a target electronic device. The initiator device may generate instructions for the workflow based on properties received from the target device. The instructions generated by the initiator may allow both devices to accomplish a shared goal, such as exchanging contact information. In some embodiments, the initiator device may include a graphical user interface for creating workflows, downloading workflows from a web service, and entering preferences governing the performance of the workflows. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082822 | TECHNIQUE FOR REALIZING HIGH RELIABILITY IN INTER-APPLICATION COMMUNICATION - A storage medium storing a program, in inter-application communication that is performed between a first application operating on a first node and a second application operating on a second node, for making the first node perform processes by transmitting a same packet simultaneously to all the communication paths, the processes including: a trouble monitoring session establishing process in which, whether or not a trouble monitoring session has already been established between a first communication control unit and a second communication control unit is checked; an inter-application communication session establishing process in which, a request for establishing the inter-application communication session is performed to the second application and the inter-application communication session is established; and a trouble monitoring communication process in which trouble monitoring communication is performed using only necessary information for trouble monitoring in the trouble monitoring session and at a shorter interval than an interval between retransmission processes. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082823 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SEPARATING HTTP SESSION - A method and system for separating hypertext transfer protocol session. The method includes: detecting at the client a condition that a server is to be requested to instantiate same application during same hypertext transfer protocol session; obtaining from the server another hypertext transfer protocol session identifier corresponding to a service instance to be instantiated and setting the hypertext transfer protocol session identifier in the current session as a hypertext transfer protocol session identifier corresponding to a service instance that is to communicate with the server. The system includes: a session manager configured to detect a condition that a server will be requested to instantiate an application during a current HTTP session and a session agent configured to: (i) obtain from the server a second HTTP session identifier and (ii) set the second HTTP session identifier in the current session as a HTTP session identifier. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100082824 | PROGRAM NETWORK RECORDING METHOD, MEDIA PROCESSING SERVER AND NETWORK RECORDING SYSTEM - A program network recording method is provided. The method includes setting up a session control channel and a media transport channel with a user terminal, receiving media control information from the user terminal via the session control channel, receiving media data collected and transmitted in real time by the user terminal via the media transport channel, and executing a recording operation on the media data according to the media control information. A media processing system and network recording system are also provided for implementing at least portions of the provided method. | 04-01-2010 |
| 20100088419 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING A SETUP TIMER IN A SIP-BASED NETWORK - A system and method for providing a setup timer in a SIP-based network including initiating a session by transmitting one or more messages to a first user. The system and method also comprises starting a first timer upon transmitting the one or more messages, wherein the first timer is configured to expire after a first predetermined time period. The system and method further comprises starting a second timer upon transmitting the one or more messages, wherein the second timer is configured to expire after a second predetermined time period. The system and method furthermore comprises transmitting one or more instructions upon expiration of at least one of the first timer and the second timer, and taking one or more actions based at least in part on the one or more instructions. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100088420 | DATA PROCESSING DEVICE, PARTICULARLY A SET-TOP BOX FOR CONNECTION TO A RECEIVER, INPUT DEVICE FOR THE CONTROL OF A DATA PROCESSING DEVICE, AND METHOD FOR OPERATING A DATA PROCESSING DEVICE - A data processing device, particularly a set-top box, is connected to a receiver and a communication network from which it receives data, including content data and at least one item of identification data. The data processing device processes the data and transmits the processed data to the receiver for the output thereof. The data processing device is further configured to receive and process a code sent by an input device of the data processing device and/or of the receiver, the code being associated with an item of the identification data. In response to the receipt of the code, a communication connection is established between the data processing device, or a communication terminal, and a unit of the communication network, which is associated with the item of the identification data. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100088421 | Evaluating Initial Filter Criteria - A method of evaluating Initial Filter Criteria (IFC) at a terminating Serving Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) in an IP Multimedia Subsystem network. Upon receiving a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message containing a destination Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), the S-CSCF applies an Initial Filter Criterion to the message, sends the message to an Application Server (AS), and suspends further IFC evaluation. When a return message is received from the AS, the S-CSCF determines whether the AS changed the URI. If so, the S-CSCF makes a determination of whether to resume IFC evaluation. If the AS did not change the URI, the S-CSCF resumes IFC evaluation. | 04-08-2010 |
| 20100095008 | Global server load balancing support for private VIP addresses - A site switch determines the mapping between public and private IP addresses of VIPs configured on the site switch. The site switch then transmits the public IP address, rather than the private IP address, to a load balancing switch that performs the load balancing for network resources accessible via the site switch. This public IP address has also been configured on an authoritative DNS server for which the load balancing switch serves as a proxy. The load balancing switch updates its address records, containing the VIPs configured on the site switch, with the public address of the VIP. When the load balancing switch reorders a DNS reply from the authoritative DNS server for a domain containing the public address, the load balancing switch correctly identifies the IP address as a VIP on the site switch and applies appropriate load balancing metrics to the received IP address. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100095009 | Method, System, and Devices for Network Sharing or Searching Of Resources - The invention presents an architecture of a distributed communication system that combines strengths of Distributed Hash Table (DHT) algorithms and social networks. The system forms a cost efficient platform for providing innovative mobile Services. Possible implementations of the proposed system in the IP Multimedia Subsystem and as a standalone SIP based system are presented. The architecture may also be deployed in other systems. Further, a content sharing inside community service is provided. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100095010 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATONS NETWORK - A method for use in a telecommunications network which makes use of the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The method comprises sending charging information to a charging function of the network in response to the receipt of an unsuccessful SIP response to a SIP request. The SIP request may relate to a request to modify an established SIP session or the media of an established SIP session; for example, by adding, removing or changing the media. | 04-15-2010 |
| 20100100628 | IMAGE PHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS - An image photographic apparatus which includes an information recording medium capable of communicating by use of a communication protocol and recording an image of a subject, and is configured to function as a server to transmit the image of the subject stored in the information recording medium to a client connected to a network by establishing communication based on a request for communication start from the client, the image photographic apparatus including a detection device to detect the request for communication start from the client, a display unit to display other client who transmits a request for communication start based on detection results of the detection device, and a selection-input device to select and input whether allowing communication to the other client transmitting the request for communication start based on the display of the display unit. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100100629 | DOMAIN NAME SERVICE RESOLVER - A content delivery network (CDN) for providing content objects and domain resolution. The CDN includes a connection with a terminal device, a second domain name service (DNS) system, an IP address store for holding authoritative Internet protocol (IP) addresses, and a content store holding at least one of the first or second content object. A first request to resolve a first domain name is received by the second DNS system at a second location. A second request to resolve a second domain name is received by the second DNS system at the second location. The first domain name is associated with a first content object, and the second domain name is associated with a second content object. The first and second requests are relayed with the terminal device, which receives Internet access from an access network. The access network comprises a first DNS system that functions in a recursing DNS mode. The content object is realized in a first location that is different from the second location of the terminal device. The second DNS system operates in a recursing DNS mode to retrieve a first IP address corresponding to the first domain name. The first IP address for the first domain name is returned from the second DNS system to the terminal device to fulfill the first request. The second DNS system operates in an authoritative DNS mode to retrieve a second IP address from the IP address store. The second IP address for the second domain name is returned from the second DNS system to the terminal device to fulfill the second request. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100100630 | METHOD FOR ACQUIRING TRAVERSAL RESOURCE, PEER TO PEER NODE AND PEER TO PEER SYSTEM - A method for acquiring a traversal resource includes the following steps. A peer to peer (P2P) entity generates a message carrying a request for collecting a network address translation (NAT) traversal resource, and sends the message carrying the request for collecting the NAT traversal resource to a destination P2P node. A middle P2P node and the destination P2P node receiving the message carrying the request for collecting the NAT traversal resource collect the NAT traversal resource. The middle P2P node and the destination P2P node send the collected NAT traversal resource to a first P2P node. A P2P node and a P2P system are also provided. | 04-22-2010 |
| 20100106842 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING TIMER AFFINITY THROUGH NOTIFICATIONS WITHIN A SESSION-BASED SERVER DEPLOYMENT - The session-based server deployment can be comprised of an engine tier that is designed for high throughput processing of communications and a state tier that maintains state information for access by the engine tier. The engine tier can include a plurality of engine nodes that process incoming messages. The state nodes can contain call state, including various timers. When processing a call, an engine can set various timers in the state tier. Upon expiration of a timer, the state node can transmit a notification assigning the timer to the corresponding engine node which handled previous communications for the call. This affinity between the timer and its respective engine can provide numerous benefits, such as reduced latency and more localized data access. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100106843 | Communication System and its Communication Control Method - According to one embodiment, a communication system comprises a plurality of communication devices connected to a communication network. The plurality of communication devices each comprises a negotiation module and a shifting module. The negotiation module determines a CODEC to be used for a peer to peer communication by notifying a priority order of a plurality of CODECs from a transmitter side to a receiver side in negotiation prior to start of the peer to peer communication. The shifting module shifts the priority order of CODECs based on a predetermined standard to optimize a quality of the peer to peer communication. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100106844 | PROJECTOR, COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT, AND NETWORK CONNECTION METHOD - A projector includes: an interface unit that reads multiple types of network setting information stored in a portable information storing medium; an image producing unit that produces, based on the multiple types of network setting information, a network setting selection image from which a network setting used to connect the projector to a network is selected; an input unit through which receives selection information indicating which one of the network settings is selected; a communication unit that connects the projector to the network based on the selected network setting contained in the selection information; and a projection unit that projects the network setting selection image. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100106845 | METHOD AND NETWORK ELEMENT FOR OBTAINING IP-CAN SESSION POLICY CONTROL INFORMATION - A method for obtaining IP-CAN session policy control information is applicable to a scenario where the access gateway does not process an IP-CAN session setup message directly, and includes: receiving a request for obtaining IP-CAN session policy control information; obtaining an address of an access gateway; and sending the IP-CAN session policy control information to the access gateway according to the address of the access gateway. | 04-29-2010 |
| 20100115108 | WIRELESS DEVICE AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY ESTABLISHING WIRELESS CONNECTION - The invention discloses a wireless device and a method for automatically establishing a wireless connection. The wireless device is selectively connected to the information providing device. The information providing device stores setting information relative to a wireless network. The wireless device comprises a wireless interface and a first wired interface. The information providing device comprises a second wired interface. When the first wired interface of the wireless device is coupled to the second wired interface of the information providing device, alternatively, the information providing device automatically provides the setting information to the wireless device, or the wireless device actively gathers the setting information from the information providing device. After fetching the setting information, the wireless device utilizes the setting information to connect the wireless network via the wireless interface. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115109 | COMMUNICATION CONTINUING METHOD AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE USED IN THE METHOD - A technology is disclosed for providing a communication continuing method and the like that can shorten an amount of time required to complete message exchange for changing addresses of both ends of the SA, and efficiently perform the message exchange, without increasing the number of messages. In the technology, a step at which the second communication terminal sends the first message to the first communication terminal in accompaniment with movement of the second communication terminal itself is included, the first message requesting an update of an address in security information held by the first communication terminal. A step at which the first communication terminal sends the second message to an address of the second communication terminal before movement in accompaniment with movement of the first communication terminal itself, and sends the third message to an address of the second communication terminal after movement when the first message is received before a response to the second message is received is also included, the second message requesting an update of an address in security information held by the second communication terminal and the third message requesting an update of an address in the security information held by the second communication terminal. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115110 | REALIZING METHOD OF EMERGENCY CALL REGISTRATION - A realizing method of emergency registration is disclosed. When the user equipment in the visited network initiates an emergency registration request, the method comprises the following steps: after P-CSCF of the visited network receives the emergency registration request sent from the user equipment, it forwards the message to S-CSCF of the home network. The S-CSCF sets the emergency registration expiration time according to the setting policy for emergency registration expiration time, includes it into the emergency registration response sent to the P-CSCF which retrieves the emergency registration expiration time from the emergency registration response and sends the message to the user equipment, which in turn retrieves the emergency registration expiration time from the emergency registration response. The factors of the setting policy for the emergency registration expiration time comprise: a type of the emergency call, the location information of the visited network and the location information of the user equipment. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115111 | SUBMIT REPORT HANDLING IN SMSIP - Submit report handling in Short Message Session Initiation Protocol (SMSIP) is provided. For example, a method can include preparing a submit report, wherein the preparing includes using a combination of forking and an in-reply-to header to find an appropriate terminal. The method can also include sending the submit report to the appropriate terminal. Likewise, another method can include receiving, by an apparatus, a session initiation protocol message request including a submit report. The method can also include processing the submit report to determine whether the request corresponds to a message sent by the apparatus. The method can further include sending, when the submit report is determined not to correspond to any message sent by the apparatus, a not-acceptable-here session initiation protocol response. The method can additionally include sending, when the submit report is determined to correspond to the message sent by the apparatus, an ok session initiation protocol message. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115112 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE SOLICITATION OF PRESENCE INFORMATION FROM PRESENCE SOURCE - Disclosed is a system and method for directly requesting and receiving presence information from a presence source. The system for providing a presence service, which includes a presence source which stores presence information about at least one presentity, previously registers presence information elements, which the present source can publish, in a SIP/IP (Session Initiation Protocol/Internet Protocol) core in accordance with corresponding each media feature tag value, and publishes presence information according to media feature tag values when specific presence information is requested; a SIP/IP core which allows presence information elements registered by the presence source to each media feature tag value so as to store the presence information elements, allows the media feature tag value described in the message to correspond to a previously registered media feature tab value of the presence source so as to identify a presence source to which the message for requesting the presence information will be published when the SIP/IP core receives the presence information from the presence server, and transmits the message for requesting the presence information to corresponding presence source; and a presence server, which allows a media feature tag value regarding the corresponding presence information to be included in the message for requesting presence information so as to request specific presence information from the presence source, and then transmits the message for requesting presence information, which selectively includes a publication rule regarding corresponding presence information of the corresponding source. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100115113 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PROVIDING DYNAMIC NETWORK AUTHORIZATION, AUTHENTICATION AND ACCOUNTING - Systems and methods for selectably controlling and customizing source access to a network, where the source is associated with a source computer, and wherein the source computer has transparent access to the network via a gateway device and no configuration software need be installed on the source computer to access the network. A user may be prevented access from a particular destination or site based upon the user's authorization while being permitted to access to other sites that the method and system deems accessible. The method and system can identify a source without that source's knowledge, and can access customizable access rights corresponding to that source in a source profile database. The source profile database can be a remote authentication dial-in user service (RADIUS) or a lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP) database. The method and system use source profiles within the source profile database to dynamically authorize source access to networks and destinations via networks. | 05-06-2010 |
| 20100121958 | INPUT-SENSITIVE INTERFACE SELECTION FOR POSTING - A system for supporting interactive functionality via the combined implementation of two or more messaging systems. This functionality may, in some instances, allow users/apparatuses to indirectly access remote resources that would not have ordinarily been available for direct access. Indirect access may be obtained, for example, by initially communicating utilizing a first messaging system and then employing a second messaging system when communication requirements exceed the abilities of the first system (e.g., where generating user content, such as posting information to the Internet, is difficult or impossible using the first system). While two different messaging systems are being employed, linkage between communication occurring in the first and the second messaging systems may be maintained through session information corresponding to the original interaction that took place via the first messaging system. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100121959 | LOW-LEVEL REMOTE SHARING OF LOCAL DEVICES IN A REMOTE ACCESS SESSION ACROSS A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, a remote access session may be established between a first computer and a second computer. In response to detecting a device in low-level local communication with the first computer via a first local communication port of the first computer, the low-level local communication at the first local communication port may be intercepted and transmitted to the second computer via the remote access session. Then, the low-level local communication may be injected to a second local communication port of the second computer, wherein the second computer responds to the low-level local communication as though the device were located at the second local communication port of the second computer. For example, the device may be configured to autoconnect with the second computer via the remote access session when the device is connected to the first computer. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100121960 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN NETWORK - A method implemented by a gateway device which handles sessions over a network to which the gateway device is connected and which also enforces conditions of service provided to those network sessions, the method involving: receiving from a policy server a policy rules package, wherein the policy rules package specifies a set of rules that are to be applied to certain sessions handled by the gateway device and a set of criteria for identifying among a plurality of subscribers a group of all subscribers to which the rules are to be applied by the gateway device; based on set of criteria in the policy rules package identifying all subscribers with currently active sessions to whom the policy rules are to be applied; and applying the set of rules to the sessions of the identified subscribers. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100121961 | SESSION MOBILITY BETWEEN COMMUNICATING DEVICES - There is described a method for enabling session mobility in a multi-participant IP-based multi-media communication network in full-mesh conference model, the method comprising: mapping a full-mesh communication protocol to a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP); defining an extended message protocol including new message mechanisms to support session mobility options; mapping the extended message protocol to the Session Initiation Protocol; and adding headers to mapped messages from the extended message protocol and from the full-mesh communication protocol to comply with full-mesh message signalization protocol mechanisms. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100121962 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY RESPONDING TO A RECEIVED COMMUNICATION - A device and a method of responding to a received interrupt event received by a communication device is provided. The method comprises: determining a current state of availability of a user associated with the device; determining whether a response action to the interrupt event is required based on a level of importance associated with the interrupt event and further based on the current state of availability; and providing notice of response actions which occurred during a previous state of unavailability, where the notice provides a link to initiate a response communication to the interrupt event. The current state of availability may be determined based on data associated with an operating application on the device. Also, providing the notice may occur upon a change of the current state of availability. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100121963 | Method and Device for Obtaining Media Description Information of IPTV Services - A method and device for obtaining media description information of Internet Protocol Television (IPTV) services are provided. The method includes: receiving, by a network device, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) request for obtaining media description information, where the SIP request is sent by a User Equipment (UE) through a core IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and carries a content identifier; sending, by the network device, a SIP response that carries the media description information corresponding to the content identifier to the UE through the core IMS. According to the present disclosure, a SIP message is used to obtain media description information, so that a session of the Content on Demand (CoD) service is set up. | 05-13-2010 |
| 20100125668 | Methods, Systems, and Computer Program Products for Enhancing Internet Security for Network Subscribers - A network communication system includes a connection server that assigns a network address within a data communication network to a subscriber terminal. The connection server receives outgoing communications from the subscriber terminal and transmits the outgoing communications to a network access point and receives incoming communications from the network access point and transmits the incoming communications to the subscriber terminal. The connection server intercepts a tracking cookie received from a remote server in the data communications network and intended for the subscriber terminal and stores the tracking cookie at the connection server so that the tracking cookie can be used to support a communication session between the subscriber terminal and the remote server without the tracking cookie being stored at the subscriber terminal. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100125669 | System, Method, and Software for Object-Based Cloud Computing Management - A method for managing cloud computing systems includes establishing a connection between a cloud computing interface and cloud computing systems. Each of the cloud computing systems includes computing resources accessible by a proprietary interface. The cloud computing interface includes object methods that abstract the proprietary interface of each of the cloud computing systems. The method further includes receiving a request to perform an operation on one or more of the cloud computing systems. The method further includes provisioning at least one object method to implement the request. | 05-20-2010 |
| 20100131658 | Multiple core Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) - A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) proxy server including a multi-core central processing unit (CPU) is presented. The multi-core CPU includes a receiving core dedicated to pre-SIP message processing. The pre-SIP message processing may include message retrieval, header and payload parsing, and Call-ID hashing. The Call-ID hashing is used to determine a post-SIP processing core designated to process messages between particular user pair. The pre-SIP and post-SIP configuration allows for the use of multiple processing cores to utilize a single control plane, thereby providing an accurate topology of the network for each processing core. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131659 | Systems and Methods For Load Balancing Real Time Streaming - The present application relates to systems and methods for managing of Real Time Stream Protocol (RTSP) sessions by an intermediary located between a client and a server. An intermediary located between a client and a server receives a response from the server to a request of the client to setup a media stream. The response may include a first session identifier established by the server. The intermediary may encode a port of the server and an internet protocol address of the server into the first session identifier to form a second session identifier. The intermediary may modify the response to identify the second session identifier as the session identifier provided by the server. The intermediary may transmit the modified response to the client responsive to the request of the client to setup the media stream. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131660 | DETERMINISTIC SESSION LOAD-BALANCING AND REDUNDANCY OF ACCESS SERVERS IN A COMPUTER NETWORK - In one embodiment, for each port of an access node in an access-based computer network, one access server of a plurality of access servers is configured as a preferred access server for that port. Upon receiving a session initiation message at a particular port, the access node forwards the session initiation message to one or more of the access servers based on the configured preferred access server for the particular port. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131661 | FIBER CHANNEL STORAGE SERVER - A fiber channel (FC) storage server includes an optical network access interface and a storage device subsystem. The optical network access interface includes a first FC access module and a first small computer system interface (SCSI) module. The storage device subsystem includes a second FC access module and a second SCSI module. When the optical network access interface receives a connection request packet from an initiator, the first FC access module generates a packet in an SCSI identification format of the storage device subsystem. Further, the storage device subsystem generates a packet in an optical network access interface identification format having a response instruction through the second FC access module and the second SCSI module, and transmits the packet to the optical network access interface to complete the response process. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131662 | NETWORKED PROJECTION DISPLAY ADAPTER - A networked projector system includes a projection display device, a projector computer, and a network adapter. The projector computer negotiates an IP address of a local network, and periodically broadcasts the IP address on the local network. The network adapter connects with a client on the local network with the IP address. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131663 | METHOD FOR PRE-CONFIGURATION OF IP ADDRESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A handover method between heterogeneous networks is disclosed. A method for pre-configuration of an IP address allows a mobile terminal to perform a handover between heterogeneous networks. Methods for relaying messages for pre-configuration of IP address and a method for relaying messages for performing MIH based on pre-configuration of IP address are also disclosed. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131664 | Buffer transfer in a communications network - A method and apparatus for transferring buffer data from a first network node to a second network node during a mobile handover between cells. In order to improve the speed at which buffer data is transferred during a handover, a connection using a congestion control protocol is established between the two nodes prior to the handover. Dummy data is sent over this connection, in order to approach or reach the available data transfer rate, and at the handover, the dummy data is replaced with buffer data. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100131665 | Method, apparatus and system for determining version information - The present disclosure discloses a method for determining version information, including: sending a first session request to a device, and receiving error code information returned by the device in response to the first session request; sending one or more session requests to the device in response to the error code information, and determining the version information of the device according to one or more pieces of information returned by the device in response to the one or more session requests. The present disclosure further discloses a system and an apparatus for determining version information. The version information of a device which does not support the version negotiation is determined, thereby solving problems of interaction and compatibility between devices which do not support the version negotiation. | 05-27-2010 |
| 20100138546 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR REASSIGNING A NETWORK ADDRESS - A method, apparatus, and system are disclosed for reassigning a network address. A detection module detects a routing table change for a host. The host is in communication with a least one network. A client is also in communication with the host over a network interface using a first address. A generation module generates a second address for the client. The second address does not compete with other addresses on the at least one network. An interface module disables the network interface to the client. The interface module then enables the network interface between the client and the host. A communication module receives a request for a new address from the client. The communication module assigns the second address to the client. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100138547 | GENERIC BROADBAND APPLICATION AND PLUG-INS - A device may receive a broadband card, dynamically load a non-generic plug-in to detect the broadband card, determine whether the loaded non-generic plug-in detects the broadband card, dynamically load a generic plug-in when the loaded non-generic plug-in does not detect the broadband card, and use the generic plug-in to certify the broadband card. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100138548 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FILES BETWEEN ELECTRONIC DEVICES - The present invention provides a system and method for transmitting files between electronic devices. The method includes: supplying a computer for connecting at least one electronic device to the computer and connecting the computer to a server; controlling the electronic device to log on or off the server when the electronic device is connected with the computer; obtaining an identifier (ID) of a target electronic device, an ID of the electronic device, and information of files what are selected in the electronic device by a user; generating a request including the ID of the target electronic device, the ID of the electronic device, and the information of files that the user selects; and transmitting the request to the target electronic device if the target electronic device is logged on the server. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100138549 | PORTABLE AP ENHANCEMENTS - An access point configured to connect a station to a wireless network includes a wireless communication unit configured to send data to the station, and a control unit configured to adjust one or more operational parameters of the access point based on indicative parameters of a basic service set (BSS), which includes the access point and the station. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100138550 | SHIP-BORNE DEVICE MANAGING METHOD - A ship-borne device managing method includes allocating IP address information to a device when a device configuration information request message is received from the device through a network in a ship system; performing an overlapping test of checking whether the allocated IP address information is currently used in the device; allocating service session information necessary for provision of an application service regarding the device in case where the overlapping test determines that the allocated IP address information is not currently used by the device; and generating a device configuration information response message based on the allocated IP address information and service session information and transmitting the device configuration information response message to the device. The device configuration information request message may include information regarding the device in the form of text or binary. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100138551 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR APPLYING TRANSFORMATIONS TO IP ADDRESSES OBTAINED BY DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS) - Described herein are systems and methods for improving networked communication systems by transforming IP addresses. In particular, an intermediary device disposed in a network between a plurality of clients and a plurality of servers can receive a request for a service offered at a specified domain name. The appliance can also receive a DNS-resolved primary address for a server associated with the domain name, and transform the primary address to a secondary address for the server. The address transformation can be done by the intermediary to prevent service interruption between a client and server due, for example, to server maintenance. | 06-03-2010 |
| 20100146126 | Peer-to-Peer Network Address Translator (NAT) Traversal Techniques - Techniques described herein perform network address translator (NAT) traversal using a peer of a peer-to-peer architecture in lieu of a server. A first peer maintains a list of public domain peers that are not hidden behind a NAT or a firewall and have previously been connected with the first peer. The first peer distributes the list to other peers via a gossip-based protocol. When a second peer desires to connect with the first peer, the second peer initiates a connection with the first peer and sends a request to a public domain peer of the list, requesting that the public domain peer instruct the first peer to initiate a connection with the second peer. By leveraging a public domain peer to establish a connection between the first and second peers, these techniques lessen the burden on the server of the architecture. Furthermore, because different peers may make requests to different public domain peers, the techniques allow for better scalability of the architecture. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146127 | USER-MODE BASED REMOTE DESKTOP PROTOCOL (RDP) ENCODING ARCHITECTURE - Techniques are disclosed for a user-mode based remote desktop protocol (RDP) encoding architecture. A user mode desktop application and user mode virtual channel application run in user-mode session space. Virtual channel data from the virtual channel application is marshaled and sent to a RDP encoder process in user-mode system space. There it is converted to RDP protocol data units (PDU) and sent to a remote client across a communications network. Graphics data from the desktop application is sent to a display driver in kernel-mode session space and then to a graphics reflector that marshals the graphics data and sends it to the RDP encoder for a similar transformation. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146128 | DECENTRALISED MULTI-USER ONLINE ENVIRONMENT - Protocols for facilitating a peer-to-peer real time network in which network state information and data processing is delegated to user nodes. A virtual space is recursively divided into a plurality of sub-regions represented by a logical tree, with responsibility for leaf nodes delegated to multiple user nodes. A distributed hash table can be used to store leaf node state and identity information. A discovery index protocol is provided for user nodes to effectively identify a user node responsible for a sub-region of interest. Further, a semantic filtering protocol limits communications primarily to other user nodes deemed relevant, so as to constrain bandwidth usage. A broadcast control protocol is provided to increase the number of simultaneous interactions for each user node. A security protocol is also provided to prevent any illegal activity by malicious nodes. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146129 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WI-FI PROTECTED SETUP IN ADHOC NETWORK - In order to provide communication parameters with ease and efficiency even in ad-hoc mode, a device that provides the communication parameters adds specific additional information to a notification signal, and transmits the notification signal. A device that receives this notification signal also adds the same additional information when transmitting the notification signal. A device that is to receive the communication parameters requests the provision of the communication parameters from the device denoted in the received information. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146130 | Methods and Apparatus for Providing Session Policy During a Registration of a Device - A method for a user agent to access a session policy in a network is provided. The method comprises the user agent sending a registration message to a first network node. The method further comprises the user agent receiving policy-related information from the first network node in a response to the registration message. The policy-related information is one of the session policy, a Uniform Resource Locator that points to the session policy, and a Policy-Contact header containing a policyContactURI for a policy document. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100146131 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CREATING IP-CAN SESSION - A method and an apparatus for creating an Internet Protocol Connectivity Access Network, IP-CAN, session are disclosed herein. The method includes: creating, by a First Policy and Charging Enforcement Function entity, PCEFa entity, a session with a Policy and Charging Rules Function entity, PCRF entity; performing, by the PCEFa entity, mobility registration with a second Policy and Charging Enforcement Function entity, PCEFb entity; creating, by the PCEFb entity, a session with the PCRF entity; and sending, by the PCRF entity, a session information to the PCEFa entity and the PCEFb entity. mobility The apparatus includes: a PCEFa entity, a PCEFb entity, and a PCRF entity. The method and the apparatus for creating an IP-CAN session under the present invention accomplish the purpose of creating an IP-CAN session in the new PCC architecture. | 06-10-2010 |
| 20100153563 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPLETING A CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICE CALL IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL NETWORK - A method and an apparatus for processing a session request in an Internet Protocol (IP) network are disclosed. For example, the method receives a session request, and queries an tElephone NUmbering Mapping (ENUM) server for a called party of the session request. The method determines if at least one Naming Authority Pointer (NAPTR) resource record associated with the called party is received from the ENUM server, and forwards the session request to a circuit switched network if the at least one NAPTR resource record is not received from the ENUM server. The method determines a Session Description Protocol (SDP) value of the session request if the at least one NAPTR resource record is received from the ENUM server, and processes the session request in accordance with the SDP value if the at least one NAPTR resource record is received from the ENUM server. | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100153564 | CONFIGURATION OF A COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, BY PROVISIONING OF DHCP REALM IDENTIFIER - Method for configuring a client (C | 06-17-2010 |
| 20100161810 | GENERATING A TRAINING DATA SET FOR A PATTERN-RECOGNITION MODEL FOR ELECTRONIC PROGNOSTICATION FOR A COMPUTER SYSTEM - One embodiment of the present invention provides a system that trains a pattern-recognition model for electronic prognostication for a computer system. First, the system monitors a performance parameter from a set of computer systems that includes at least two computer systems, wherein monitoring the performance parameter includes systematically monitoring and recording performance parameters in a set of performance parameters from computer systems in the set of computer systems, wherein the recording process keeps track of the temporal relationships between events in different performance parameters in the set of performance parameters. Next, the system generates a training data set based on the monitored performance parameter from the set of computer systems, wherein generating the training data set includes concatenating two or more time-series of the performance parameter from computer systems in the set of computer systems. Then, the system trains the pattern-recognition model using the training data set. Next, the system uses the pattern-recognition model to look for anomalies in performance parameters gathered during operation of a monitored computer system. The system then generates an alarm when the pattern-recognition model detects an anomaly in the performance parameters from the monitored computer system. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100161811 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING SUPPLEMENTAL VISUAL CONTENT - An approach is provided for transmitting supplemental visual content to a user. A command is received to retrieve visual content associated with a transaction conducted with a user over a source device. In response to the command, the visual content is retrieved for presentation to the user via a target device. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100161812 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADVERTISING SERVICE IN PERSONALIZED MANNER IN NEXT-GENERATION COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Provided are a method and apparatus for advertising a service in a personalized manner in a next-generation communication network. The method includes: receiving new service registration information, which indicates that a new service has been registered, from a service registration server; mapping the received new service registration information to service profiles included in pre-stored subscription information of a plurality of subscriber terminals and selecting a subscriber terminal which is related to the new service registration information; and identifying whether the selected subscriber terminal is subscribed to a new service notification event of a home subscriber server and sending advertising information of the new service, which is related to the new service registration information, to the selected subscriber terminal with reference to subscription information of the selected subscriber terminal. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100161813 | TRANSFER METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEAMLESS CONTENT TRANSFER - A method and apparatus for seamlessly transferring content from a first communication device to a second communication device is disclosed. The method includes establishing a communication session with a controller for streaming content and sending a request to the controller for sharing the content being currently streamed at the first communication device. The request includes an option tag indicating a share request and an address of the second communication device to which the content is to be shared. The method further includes receiving a notification from the controller once the second communication device starts receiving the content from a point in time at which the request was sent from the first communication device. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100161814 | Auto-detection and selection of an optimal I/O system resource virtualization protocol - A means for automatic detection and selection of an optimal I/O system resource virtualization protocol. The invention is a solution for the problem of complexity and the resulting lack of optimization in I/O system resource virtualization implementations. The invention shields the user from the complexity of network analysis and allows the engaging of multiple I/O system resource virtualization protocols—as opposed to a single protocol. The invention enables automatic detection and selection of an optimal I/O system resource virtualization protocol on a per resource basis, which is a unique capability and something that has not been accomplished in the prior art. The net result is a simplified user experience and optimized performance when using virtualized I/O system resource. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100161815 | MAINTENANCE SYSTEM - A system for maintaining remotely an electric operation equipment. The user has a local terminal to be connected to the operation equipment, from which terminal a wireless connection can be established to the Internet and through it to a remote terminal, which is in use by an expert. The local terminal is provided with a transmission program, by which data can be transferred both between the local terminal and operation equipment and between the local terminal and remote terminal. For the program-based treatment of the operation equipment there is a maintenance program in the remote terminal, local terminal or some server. When a request comes from a user, the expert does the needed treatment via the maintenance program. The expert can ponder the situation and take necessary action without visiting the position of the operation equipment. | 06-24-2010 |
| 20100169497 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTEGRATING LOCAL SYSTEMS WITH CLOUD COMPUTING RESOURCES - In one embodiment the present invention includes systems and methods for integrating local systems with cloud computing resources. In one embodiment, shared security information is stored on a local system and on a cloud computer system to allow secure communications between software applications on the two systems. In another embodiment, a tunnel agent client on a local system and a tunnel agent server on a cloud computer system are used to establish a secure connection point between the two systems. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100169498 | CENTRALIZED CONTROL OF PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION - Techniques for centralized control of peer-to-peer (P2P) communication and centralized control of femto cell operation are described. For centralized control of P2P communication, a designated network entity (e.g., a base station) may control P2P communication of stations (e.g., UEs) located within its coverage area. The designated network entity may receive an indication of a first station (e.g., a UE) desiring to communicate with a second station (e.g., another UE). The designated network entity may determine whether or not to select peer-to-peer communication for the first and second stations, e.g., based on the quality of their communication link. The designated network entity may assign resources to the stations if peer-to-peer communication is selected. For centralized control of femto cell operation, the designated network entity may control the operation of femto cells (e.g., may activate or deactivate femto cells) within its coverage area. | 07-01-2010 |
| 20100174820 | Network connection manager - Methods, systems, apparatuses and program products are disclosed for managing connections to telecommunications networks, especially networks that deploy Internet Protocols and the like. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100174821 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR GENERATING AND USING STATELESSLY REVERSIBLE REPRESENTATIONS OF SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) INFORMATION BY SIP CLUSTER ENTITIES - The subject matter described herein relates to methods, systems, and computer readable media for generating and using statelessly reversible representations of SIP information by SIP cluster entities. One method includes, at a first SIP cluster entity, receiving a first SIP message including SIP information. The method further includes generating a second SIP message including a statelessly reversible representation of the SIP information. The method further includes transmitting, to a SIP entity that is not a member of the cluster to which the first SIP entity belongs, the second SIP message with the statelessly reversible representation and information for reaching the cluster. | 07-08-2010 |
| 20100180038 | METHOD FOR PROVIDING A COMPUTER PROGRAM TO A MOBILE COMPUTERISED DEVICE AND A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC APPARATUS FOR STORING THE COMPUTER PROGRAM - A method is provided that provides computer data or a computer data program to a mobile computerised device. The computer data or computer program being stored on a portable electronic apparatus and is able to operate the mobile computerised device to provide an information or service. The portable electronic apparatus includes a memory device for storing the computer data or computer program, a further memory device for storing usage information and a more further memory device for storing information of the mobile computerised device obtained from the mobile computerised device, said portable electronic apparatus having at least one interface and at least one data communication device for communicating with the mobile computerised device. The interface and the communication device communicating under the control of a controller including data programs for initiating, controlling and terminating the communication. The portable electronic apparatus includes a display device for displaying messages. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100180039 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING LOCATION INFORMATION OF A TERMINAL - A common location service request/response method between various types of clients and location servers. A location request and a location estimate are delivered between a terminal and a location server using messages defined in a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) protocol. In this manner, the terminal and server using the SIP protocol can easily send a request/response for location information, making it possible to provide a new service associated with the location service. | 07-15-2010 |
| 20100185774 | Control Entity and Method for Setting up a Session in a Communications Network, Subscriber Database and Communications Network - Control entity and method for setting up a session in a communications network, subscriber database and communications network The invention relates to a control entity for setting up a session in a communications network, comprising an input device for receiving a request to set up a session in the communications network, a processor unit for processing the request, and an output device for sending messages. The control entity further comprising or having access to a memory for storing information. The processor unit is arranged to determine if the request comprises a valid Communication Service Identifier, CSI, the Communication Service Identifier identifying the type of communication service of the session that is to be established over the communications network. And if the request does not comprise a valid Communication Service Identifier to execute a default CSI procedure using default CSI information stored in the memory. | 07-22-2010 |
| 20100191856 | REDUCING NETWORK CONNECTION LATENCY - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including medium-encoded computer program products, for decreasing latency perceived by a user in retrieving data from a data server. A user-initiated interaction with a user interface can be detected and a user-generated request to retrieve data automatically predicted, based at least in part on the user-initiated interaction. Resolution of a domain name into a network address can be initiated, based on the predicted user-generated request to retrieve data, prior to receiving a user-initiated submission of the user-generated request to retrieve data. In certain instances, a network communication synchronization sequence with a data server associated with the predicted user-generated request to retrieve data can be initiated prior to receiving a user-initiated submission of the user-generated request to retrieve data. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100191857 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DISCOVERING THE TOPOLOGY OF THE COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN APPLICATIONS OF A COMPUTER NETWORK - A method for discovering the topology of communications between applications of a computer network having several items of equipment, the method including the following steps: a) connecting to each of the items of equipment of the network, b) for each item of equipment, acquiring raw data relating to applications hosted within the item of equipment, c) for each item of equipment, acquiring connection data for each live connection established by an application, d) from the raw data and the connection data thus obtained, communication links are determined respectively between pairs of applications of the network, and e) a level-7 topology of the network is generated from the communication links. | 07-29-2010 |
| 20100205310 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY OPTIMIZING TCP WINDOW SIZE - System and method for optimizing TCP window size in operating systems. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205311 | Methods and Arrangements for a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to a solution for including CS media information to be able to also offer CS media in addition to PS media by using SIP and hence being able to utilize the advantages of SIP for CS. The solution is achieved by a method and arrangements for handling at least a first c line ( | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205312 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, SERVICE PROVIDING APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - An information processing apparatus that provides a proxy for a service that a service providing apparatus provides to a control apparatus, the information processing apparatus includes: a first communications unit adapted to connect to a first communications path; a second communications unit adapted to connect to a second communications path; a first determination unit adapted to determine whether or not the providing apparatus exists via the first communications unit; a second determination unit adapted to determine whether or not the providing apparatus exists via the second communications unit; a connection unit adapted to connect to the providing apparatus via the second communications unit; and a proxy unit adapted to connect to the control apparatus via the first communications unit, and provide a proxy for a service between the providing apparatus and the control apparatus. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205313 | Scalable NAT Traversal - A system and method for traversing a firewall for a voice-over-IP session or other communication session uses four main components: a relay agent, and NAT | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205314 | Intelligent Auto-Dialer - The present invention describes an automatic dialer for determining relative rankings of network access numbers from within a group of available network access numbers known as an available NAN list, and for facilitating selection of a network access number to use for a connection from a client device to a data network. Various factors are considered in determining the rankings of the network access numbers. The factors include connection costs, quality of connection. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100205315 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING SERVICE CONNECTION - A method, a system, and a device for establishing a service connection are provided. The method includes the following steps. An interface configuration parameter is obtained, in which the interface configuration parameter includes an interface configuration parameter of a remote device. An interface parameter object is added to a user network interface (UNI) request message, in which the interface parameter object carries the interface configuration parameter. The UNI request message carrying the interface configuration parameter of the remote device is sent to the remote device, so as to establish a service connection with the remote device. Thus, the interface parameter object is added to the UNI request message, and then the UNI request message carrying the interface configuration parameter of the remote device is sent to the remote device, for establishing the service connection, so as to realize automatic negotiation and configuration of the interface parameters, thereby saving manpower resources. | 08-12-2010 |
| 20100211687 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOGGING USER INPUT DATA FOR SUBSEQUENT RETRIEVAL - An information handling system includes a processor, an authentication detection module, a user input device, and encoding module, and a buffer. The authentication detection module determines whether the information handling system is operating in an authenticated network communication session, The user input device receives user input data from a user, and the encoding module receives the user input data from the user input device and encodes the received user input data into a suitable format. The buffer logs the encoded user input data for later retrieval if the authentication detection module determines that the information handling system is not operating in an authenticated network communication session. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100211688 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION - A method for establishing a connection includes the following steps: A mobility management entity generates a create bearer context request message and sends the message to a selected serving gateway. The create bearer context request message at least includes address information of at least one packet data network gateway and corresponding indication information of the protocol type of connection establishment. The serving gateway receives and analyzes the create bearer context request message, and determines the protocol type of the connection according to the indication information of the protocol type of connection establishment. The serving gateway processes the create bearer context request message with the determined protocol type of connection. Further provided are a mobility management entity, a serving gateway, and a network system which are able to reduce time delay when connection is established. | 08-19-2010 |
| 20100211689 | DISTRIBUTION OF SHARED CONTENT STREAMS IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A method for controlling distribution of a content stream in a communications network, comprising the steps of:
| 08-19-2010 |
| 20100217874 | TUNNELING OF REMOTE DESKTOP SESSIONS THROUGH FIREWALLS - Endpoints are enabled to facilitate desktop and/or application sharing in enhanced communication systems using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) protocols by tunneling RDP packets through an Interactive Connection Establishment (ICE) channel built-in within the Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP), thus allowing RDP sessions to traverse Network Address Translators (NATs) or firewalls. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217875 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method is disclosed for use by an Interrogating Call/Session Control Function (I-CSCF) of an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). The method comprises, in response to receipt of a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message, requesting capabilities information relating to a user from a Home Subscriber Server (HSS) of the IMS. On receipt of the capabilities information from the HSS, a primary and a secondary Serving Call/Session Control Function (S-CSCF) of the IMS are selected to provide services to the user. In one embodiment, the I-CSCF attempts to forward the SIP message to the primary S-CSCF with information relating to the secondary S-CSCF, such that the information can be provided subsequently to the HSS. If the attempt is determined to have failed, the SIP message can be forwarded to the secondary S-CSCF instead. Methods are also disclosed for use by the S-CSCF and the HSS. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217876 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A method of controlling a communication device and a corresponding communication device are described. A communication session with a communication partner is managed using a session level connection identifier for referring to a transport connection used in said communication session, and a link record associating a recorded value of said session level connection identifier with a recorded value of a transport layer connection identifier is kept. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217877 | Method and System for Enabling Access Policy and Charging Control - The present invention relates in general to a method and apparatus concerning access policy and charging control. In particular it relates to enhanced service information for access policy and charging control. A media stream management of a service session between a first and a second electronic communication device comprise obtaining identity address data related to the first electronic communication device step, obtaining policy information associated with the second electronic communication device step, and performing a media stream management control step involving the identity address data related to the first electronic communication device and the policy information related to the second electronic communication device such that media streams between the first electronic communication device and the second electronic communication device can be controlled. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217878 | METHOD, SYSTEM, AND PROGRAM FOR ENABLING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN NODES - Provided are a method, system, and program performed at a local node to communicate with a remote node. A first communication protocol is used to communicate with the remote node to establish a connection for a second communication protocol. Data structures are created to enable communication with the remote node to establish the connection with the remote node for the second communication protocol. An extension layer is invoked for the second communication protocol. The data structures are passed to the extension layer to use to communicate with the remote node using the second communication protocol. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100217879 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR REMOTE ACCESS TO INCIDENT DATA - Systems, devices, and methods for acquisition, processing and display of data from devices, associated with geo-locations. | 08-26-2010 |
| 20100223388 | Apparatus and method for triggering session re-negotiation between access network and access terminal in a high rate packet data system - The invention relates to a method for triggering re-negotiation of a session when an Access Terminal moves from one access network (source AN) to another access network (target AN) having different capabilities in high rate packet data system. According to an exemplary embodiment of the invention, the source AN is allowed to store all the protocol subtypes, protocols and applications that AT is capable of and also allowing the AT to send this information in priority order during session negotiation and hence facilitating the transfer of this information from source AN to target AN during session transfer when AT moves from one AN to another AN. An alternate embodiment is to let the AT send the protocol subtypes, protocols and applications and other AT capable information to target AN after it moves to a new AN or by letting the Rev-A capable AN query the AT's capability information and then the AT providing this information. In another exemplary embodiment, the invention includes re-negotiation by introducing a revision (like Protocol revision) information in overhead information messages that an AN broadcasts to all ATs. | 09-02-2010 |
| 20100228867 | ESTABLISHING A SPLIT-TERMINATED COMMUNICATION CONNECTION THROUGH A STATEFUL FIREWALL, WITH NETWORK TRANSPARENCY - A method and apparatus are provided for establishing a split-terminated client-server communication connection through a stateful firewall, with network transparency. In an environment in which a pair of network intermediaries is employed to optimize client-server communications, a first intermediary intercepts a client request for a new connection. The first intermediary probes the network for a counterpart near the server, and opens an optimized communication session with a second intermediary that responds affirmatively. Some or all client-server communications that transit the intermediaries' session are accelerated or otherwise optimized. The first intermediary's probe uses the client's source address, but a different port number, while the optimized intermediary session is opened using the client's source address and source port. Therefore, a network monitoring tool can monitor the end-to-end connection, and the stateful firewall will not reject the optimized session. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100228868 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR - In order to make it possible for a communication apparatus to readily detect a provider of communication parameters, the provider of communication parameters specifies a network in which a receiver apparatus that requests receipt of communication parameter is participating, joins this network and then provides the communication parameters. The receiver apparatus creates a network for which a network identifier that is unique in the vicinity has been set and receives communication parameters from the provider. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100228869 | LINKUP STATE GENERATING METHOD, INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, AND LINKUP STATE GENERATING PROGRAM - A linkup state generating method for generating a state in which linkup is completed in first and second information processing apparatuses, the first and second information processing apparatuses each including a linkup function of, with parameter exchange, comparing parameters included in the first and second information processing apparatuses and adjusting specifications of the parameters so that the specifications of the parameters match each other, the linkup state generating method including setting, from the outside, a parameter in the first information processing apparatus so that a specification of the parameter included in the first information processing apparatus matches a specification of a parameter included in the second information processing apparatus, and sending, from the first information processing apparatus, a signal received from the second information processing apparatus to the second information processing apparatus in a manner that the second information processing apparatus recognizes that parameter exchange has been performed. | 09-09-2010 |
| 20100235520 | DYNAMICALLY OPTIMIZING DELIVERY OF MULTIMEDIA CONTENT OVER A NETWORK - Communication device capabilities may change during an established multimedia session due to connection of a peripheral device. For example, a user listens to an Internet radio service on a mobile phone through a set of headphones. Later, the user connects the mobile phone to stereo system in a car. The mobile phone can leverage the car's stereo system to present higher quality audio than it could present with the headphones. Functionality can be implemented in a communication device to detect connection of a peripheral device and determine multimedia capabilities of the peripheral device. The communication device updates its presence information to indicate the multimedia capabilities of the peripheral device. In response, a multimedia server determines multimedia capabilities indicated in the presence information have changed and optimizes delivery of multimedia content based on the updated multimedia capabilities. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235521 | Multi-Session Web Acceleration - A method for speeding up data downloads across the Internet utilizing a proxy server to receive client requests for downloading remote data files and then establishing multiple concurrent sessions from the proxy server which balance the download of the remote data in multiple segments across two or more available wide-area network (WAN) links. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235522 | SESSION-CACHE-BASED HTTP ACCELERATION - A method performed by a device includes receiving a first Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) packet, creating a first session based on the HTTP packet, and creating a session cache entry for the first session. The method also includes receiving a second HTTP packet, performing a session cache lookup to identify a match of the second HTTP packet with the session cache entry, and creating a second HTTP session based on the match of the second HTTP packet with the session cache entry. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235523 | FRAMEWORK FOR SUPPORTING MULTI-DEVICE COLLABORATION - A framework for providing multi-device collaboration is described herein. In one embodiment, a method for providing multi-device collaboration between first and second devices can include transferring an initializing function call to create a session object. The function call specifies a mode of the session object, a service type, and a service name. The session object can include functions to discover the second device, connect with the second device, and provide data transport between the connected first and second devices. The service name can include a truncated name, a unique identification, and a state of service of a software application associated with the first device. The method can include detecting a network and advertising the service type and the service name via the network. The service type and service name can be advertised prior to establishing the connection between the first and second devices. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235524 | Advanced Availability Detection - A method is provided in which the present invention is for a method in which a telecommunications terminal determines whether its user is available to accept an incoming invitation to participate in a telecommunications session based on: ( | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100235525 | EFFICIENT SERVICE DISCOVERY FOR PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKING DEVICES - Techniques for discovering and/or advertising services are described herein. A first bitmask is received from a remote device over a wireless network, the first bitmask having one or more bits that have a predetermined logical value. Each bit represents a particular service provided by the remote device. A logical operation is performed between the first bitmask and a second bitmask locally generated within a local device, where the second bitmask represents a service being searched by the local device. It is determined whether the remote device is potentially capable of providing the service being searched by the local device based on a result of the logical operation. | 09-16-2010 |
| 20100241754 | Telephone System, Server, and Terminal Device - According to one embodiment, there is provided a telephone system comprises terminal devices which process a signaling protocol, and a server which forms a session with each terminal device using a first protocol or a second protocol as a lower layer protocol of the signaling protocol. The terminal device comprises request module requests the server to form a session using the first protocol. The server comprises determination module, session forming module and switching module. The determination module determines permission or rejection to the request. The session forming module forms a session with a request source terminal device using the first protocol when the request is permitted, or using the second protocol when the request is rejected. The switching module switches the lower layer protocol of the session from the second protocol to the first protocol when the request from the terminal device is permitted. | 09-23-2010 |
| 20100250754 | INTEGRATION OF SS7 WITH AN APPLICATION SERVER - A computer-implemented method, system and computer-readable storage medium are presented for establishing a communication link between an SS7 device and an application server. An SS7 message is first decoded by a SS7 SIGTRAN gateway into a SIGTRAN message. The SIGTRAN message is sent to a proxy server, wherein the SIGTRAN message is converted into XML for transmission to a converged application in the application server. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100250755 | Methods, Systems, And Computer Program Products For Establishing A Shared Browsing Session Between A User Of A Web Browser With A User Of Another Web Browser - Methods and systems are described for establishing a shared browsing session between a user of a web browser with a user of another browser. In one aspect, current browsing information for a browser having a using entity is detected. An activity message (AM) identifying a current activity of the using entity is sent for delivery to a monitoring node. A session initiation message (SIM) is received requesting a co-browsing session based on the AM. In response to receiving the SIM, a session establish message is sent for establishing the requested co-browsing session. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100250756 | Methods, Systems, And Computer Program Products For Establishing A Shared Browsing Session Between A User Of A Web Browser With A User Of Another Web Browser - Methods and systems are described for establishing a shared browsing session between a user of a web browser with a user of another browser. In one aspect, based on a received activity message sent from a first node, information identifying an association between current browsing information and a using principal of a browser operating on the first node is relayed to a second node. A session initiation message (SIM) is received including a request to establish a co-browsing session with the using principal of the browser. Based on the SIM, the request is relayed to the first node. A session establish message (SEM), sent from the first node, is relayed to the second node to configure the requested shared browsing information. The SEM includes session establishment information for configuring the requested session. Current browser information of the using principal, sent from the first node, is relayed to the second node. | 09-30-2010 |
| 20100262701 | ELECTRONIC APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - According to one embodiment, a session control module is configured to temporarily release a first session between a first communication program and the external device by stopping a first conversion module corresponding to a an application protocol of the first communication without informing the first communication program of releasing of the first session, and to establish a second session between a second communication program and the external device by activating a second conversion module corresponding to an application protocol of the second communication program. A session restoring module is configured to restore the first session to a data transferable state by activating the first conversion when the second session is finished. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100262702 | SERVICE ENHANCEMENT METHOD, PROXY SERVER AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A service enhancement method includes: receiving a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) request for using a service from a SIP user, obtaining service control logic according to the SIP request; and executing the service control logic to deliver the service to the SIP user. | 10-14-2010 |
| 20100268830 | WEIGHTING SOCIAL NETWORK RELATIONSHIPS BASED ON COMMUNICATIONS HISTORY - A method may include receiving or retrieving session information associated with one or more electronic communications that occurred outside of the social network site and included users of the social network site, comparing the session information with information associated with the users of the social network site, selecting one of the users as a user of the social network site and one or more of the users as one or more connections of the selected user of the social network site, based on the comparing, generating a weighted social graph for the selected user of the social network site, based on the session information, generating social network information based on the weighted social graph, and providing the social network information to at least one of the selected user of the social network site or the selected one or more connections of the user of the social network site. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268831 | Thin Client Session Management - Thin client session management is described. In embodiments, a thin client device senses a usage context for the thin client device, and a process analyses the usage context to automatically select a session for the thin client device to connect to. Embodiments describe how the sensed usage context can indicate a location of the thin client device, movement of the thin client device, swapping of thin client devices or an identity of a user of the thin client device. Embodiments also describe how the thin client can be automatically authorized to access a selected session, based on the usage context. In other embodiments, a thin client device comprises a sensing device that can indicate a usage context for the thin client. Embodiments describe how the sensing device can determine that the thin client device is located in a docking station, and identify the docking station. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268832 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DEVICES COMMUNICATING OVER A NETWORK - Systems and methods are described for establishing a connection between a client and a server that are each communicating via a network. The methods and techniques may be used, for example, to establish a media streaming connection between a media player and a placeshifting device when a firewall or other impediment to direct network connections exists. A relay server receives connection requests from the client and from the server via the network. In response to receiving the requests, a first connection is established between the relay server and the client and a second connection between the relay server and the server. Data received by the relay server on each of the first and second connections is relayed to the other of the first and second connections to thereby establish the connection between the client and the server via the relay server. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100268833 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SESSION CENTRALIZING APPARATUS - A communication system which causes a terminal apparatus to access a server apparatus via a network includes a communication session centralizing apparatus between the network and at lest one terminal apparatus. The communication session centralizing apparatus performs, for each user of the terminal apparatus, processing of establishing a session for a communication partner terminal on behalf of the user via a control apparatus of the network using a predetermined signaling protocol to obtain a use permission of the network. | 10-21-2010 |
| 20100281172 | SAS topology pathway analysis - Methods and systems for configuring network storage are presented. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100281173 | DELEGATED ADMINISTRATION FOR REMOTE MANAGEMENT - A remote administration system is described herein that provides varying permissions to invoke administrative commands to multiple users. An application host provisions users of different organizations and defines one or more commands that the users can invoke remotely. The system associates the commands with users and/or groups to specify the users and/or groups that are authorized to execute the commands. When the remote administration system receives a remote request to perform a command, the system determines a user associated with the command and whether the user is authorized to execute the command. The system also creates an execution context for each connected user that defines the roles and access privileges associated with the user and that isolates the user from other users. Thus, the remote administration system provides remote administration of hosted applications in a way that is easy for administrators of the hosted service to manage. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100281174 | Personalized Media Server in a Service Provider Network - Apparatuses and methods support a media server that is hosted in a service provider's network so that media content can be stored from or rendered to a Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) network. Media content may be stored directly by accessing the media server or by downloading the media content to the media server. A tunnel is established between an endpoint in the DLNA network through the service provider infrastructure to the media server. Subsequently, a session may be established between a DLNA device to the media server through the tunnel using a virtual address, where the media server is addressable as a virtual device within the DLNA network so that the virtual address is part of an address space of the DLNA network. The media server may support a plurality of DLNA networks, in which a tunnel is established to the media service for each DLNA network. | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100281175 | NETWORK SYSTEM | 11-04-2010 |
| 20100287286 | System and Method for Providing Sequenced Anonymous Communication Sessions Over a Network - A method for facilitating a sequenced, anonymous communications session in a communications environment is provided in one example that includes receiving, from a first endpoint, an anonymous, sequenced request for a communication session involving a second endpoint. The communication session is sequenced to occur at designated periods provided by the end user(s) and/or an administrator, while maintaining end user(s) anonymity. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100287287 | Network Apparatus and Method for Translating Media Access Control Addresses - Network apparatus for linking a plurality of client equipments to a network service provider router, by way of Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE), the network apparatus being configured such that, in use, in sending data packets from the client equipments to the network service provider routers the Media Access Control (MAC) address of each client equipment is replaced with a MAC address of an interface card of the apparatus. | 11-11-2010 |
| 20100293281 | Managing web tier session state objects in a content delivery network (CDN) - Business applications running on a content delivery network (CDN) having a distributed application framework can create, access and modify state for each client. Over time, a single client may desire to access a given application on different CDN edge servers within the same region and even across different regions. Each time, the application may need to access the latest “state” of the client even if the state was last modified by an application on a different server. A difficulty arises when a process or a machine that last modified the state dies or is temporarily or permanently unavailable. The present invention provides techniques for migrating session state data across CDN servers in a manner transparent to the user. A distributed application thus can access a latest “state” of a client even if the state was last modified by an application instance executing on a different CDN server, including a nearby (in-region) or a remote (out-of-region) server. | 11-18-2010 |
| 20100299441 | MULTI-PROTOCOL NETWORK REGISTRATION AND ADDRESS RESOLUTION - The functionality of communications standards and protocols that are application-layer specific are overlaid on an IP-based infrastructure, by employing an IP DNS server as the registration host for IP and other communications standards based and protocol based communications. Communication can occur at either the IP layer or the communications standards or protocol application layer. At the IP layer, a host application can interrogate network nodes. To extend this service to other communications standards or protocol communications, device registration and resolve services are implemented on the DNS server. Similar to the manner in which an IP-based service uses a native, IP-based DNS resolve request, a host can utilize a resolution request against the communications standards and protocol-enabled DNS server for standards and protocol application-layer interrogation of endpoints. | 11-25-2010 |
| 20100306389 | RULE BASED MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ON WEB PAGES - A computer implemented process to support communication with a web site visitor includes rendering one or more web pages to be viewed by a web site visitor in a session; matching a customer service agent to the website visitor based on one or more predetermined rules and information from the session; and initiating multi-media communication requests to the web site visitor and the customer service agent based on a predetermined rules. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100306390 | MEMORY OVERLOAD PROTECTION - A method, system and program product for controlling memory overload for a computer system. The invention determines heap utilization of a server; determines a maximum session lifetime a configured percentile of at least one session; determines a traffic rate (comprised of an average traffic rate received from a proxy server and a variance of traffic rate received from a proxy server); and calculates a maximum traffic rate, wherein the maximum traffic rate determines the heap utilization at a maximum heap percentage. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100306391 | SINGLE-INTERFACE DYNAMIC MTU CONTROL - Systems, methods, and computer media for loading initial maximum transmission unit (MTU) information and determining a destination host PMTU are provided. PMTU is the maximum data unit size that can be transmitted from a source host to a destination host because of a limiting component located somewhere in the path. Initial MTU values are determined from local and network sources, including a central repository, and loaded. A PMTU is then determined for a path between a source host and destination host by selecting an MTU value from the available values. If no MTU values are available for a destination host, a default value is used. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100306392 | CREATING CONTEXT-SENSITIVE WEBPAGE TIME-OUT INTERVALS - An approach is provided to establish, over a network adapter, network sessions with various client computer systems. Requests for a webpage are received at the network adapter from the client computer systems. The requested webpage is retrieved from a storage area. Multiple timeout intervals are initialized and stored in a memory area, wherein each of the plurality timeout intervals corresponds to one of the client computer systems. The timeout intervals that are initialized are different for at least some of the client computer systems. The requested webpage is returned to the client computer systems. When a timeout interval elapses for any of the client computer systems, the system terminates the session that was established with the client computer system. | 12-02-2010 |
| 20100312903 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, SESSION CONTROL MANAGEMENT SERVER AND SESSION CONTROL METHOD - To implement a calling party number anonymous service in an IP telephone service. An IP telephone terminal adds the setting of requesting a Pool IP address along with a normal IP address to a REGISTER message directed from the IP telephone terminal to an SIP server and requests the assignment of a temporary IP address if receiving an anonymous call incoming request message. The SIP server makes the temporary assignment of the Pool IP address and notifies the temporary IP address to a called party IP telephone terminal by adding it to an INVITE message, if the called IP address of the anonymous call incoming request INVITE message is the IP telephone terminal. The called IP telephone terminal receiving the assignment of the temporary IP address can make the connection, communication and disconnection processes employing the temporary IP address as the self IP address in the following dialog. | 12-09-2010 |
| 20100318666 | EXPEDITING ADAPTER FAILOVER - Expediting adapter failover may minimize network downtime and preserve network performance. Embodiments may comprise copying a primary adapter memory of a failing primary adapter to a standby adapter memory of a standby adapter. Copying the memory may expedite TCP/IP offload adapter failover by maintaining TCP/IP stack and connection information. In several embodiments, Copy Logic may copy primary adapter memory to standby adapter memory. In some embodiments, Detect Logic may monitor primary adapter viability and may initiate failover. In additional embodiments, Assess Logic may assess whether the IO bus is operative permitting Direct Logic to copy adapter memory via, e.g., DMA. In other embodiments, Packet Logic may fragment primary adapter memory into network packets sent through the network to the standby adapter where Unpack Logic may unpack them into memory. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318667 | MULTI-CHANNEL COMMUNICATION - In one example, a client and a server may communicate with each other using a control channel and a data channel. The control channel carries requests from the client to the server, and the data channel carries the server's response to these requests. Some requests submitted on the control channel may be assigned identifiers, so as to be addressable. A client may submit, over the control channel, a request to cancel previously-made requests. A cancelation request uses the identifiers associated with the previously-made requests to identify the request(s) to be canceled. The client may open the control and data channels by issuing POST and GET requests, respectively, to the server. Control channel communications may then be sent as part of the POST message, and data channel communications may be sent as responses to the GET request. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100318668 | USING REACHABILITY INFORMATION TO FACILITATE PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - The present invention allows originating endpoints to obtain reachability information from a directory service, which collects contact and related information from available users. When initiating a peer-to-peer communication session to an endpoint of a destination user, the originating endpoint will access the directory service to obtain reachability information for the destination user. The reachability information may contain one or more addresses, one of which will be a peer-to-peer communication session address. From the reachability information, the originating terminal will determine an appropriate address to initiate communications with the destination user. The reachability information may identify multiple addresses, where only certain of the addresses may be peer-to-peer communication addresses and other addresses may be used to establish other types of sessions through disparate types of networks. | 12-16-2010 |
| 20100325290 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COORDINATING HUMAN INTERACTION IN SOCIAL NETWORKS - A method for coordinating human interaction between users within a social network system may include matching users together based on identified compatibility trends. The compatibility trends may be identified based on compatibility research and analysis and/or analysis of previous successful matches. Additionally, the method may include matching users together based on identified personal preferences. The personal preferences may be identified through monitoring the users' interactions with the Internet and determining personal preferences based on the interactions. In a particular embodiment, the social networking system may be a voice-based speed dating network which occurs via voice communications over the Internet. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100325291 | SIGNALING USING BINARY FORM OF SIP MESSAGES - Methods, devices, and systems are provided for negotiating the usage of a binary object representation of SIP messages. More specifically, the negotiation for the binary SIP transmission can be done by exchanging text-based SIP messages or other similar messages over standard SIP connection channels. If the negotiation is successful, then binary SIP messaging may be employed to enhance the ease and efficiency with which a SIP message is generated, transmitted over a communication network, and parsed/processed by a SIP network element. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100325292 | ADDRESS TRANSLATOR, MESSAGE PROCESSING METHOD AND EQUIPMENT - An address translator includes an SIP message detecting function. Upon detection of an SIP message, the address translator sends the SIP message to an SIP address translator. The SIP address translator extracts addresses for translation, and makes a query to the address translator. The SIP address translator translates an IP address included in the SIP message, using translation information of the address translator. Thus, an SIP communication is accomplished between terminals belonging to different regions in association of the address translator and the SIP address translator. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100325293 | Graphical User Interface (GUI) for Administering a Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) Network Implementing Media Aggregation - A graphical user interface (GUI) is disclosed that allows a user to identify routers, communities, residents and media aggregation managers existing on a network. The user may interactively select a path that includes two media aggregation managers and at least one router. The GUI predicts scheduled bandwidth utilization along the selected path for a variety of residents wishing to communicate across the path. The GUI may be utilized for initializing all media aggregation managers on the network along with provisioning each of the routers on the selected path. The GUI provisions all of the routers and initializes all of the media aggregation managers on the selected path simultaneously in order to accomplish the predicted schedule of usage provided by the GUI to the user and force all communication packets communicated between the residents to travel along the selected path. | 12-23-2010 |
| 20100332665 | Multi-Channel Sessions - Implementations of the present disclosure provide multiple communication channels between a client and a session and include establishing a first communication channel between the session and a first application program executed on the client, the session being active on an application server, the first application program using a first communication protocol, and instantiating a second application program on the client. A second communication channel is established between the second application program and the session, the second application program using a second communication protocol different from the first. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332666 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS PERFORMING COMMUNICATION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION PROCESS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME - The present invention solves a problem that can occur when operation for performing a communication parameter configuration process is started on three or more communication apparatuses. For that purpose, when a communication apparatus that is performing a communication parameter configuration process with a first communication apparatus receives a start request to start a communication parameter configuration process from a second communication apparatus, the communication apparatus sends, to the second communication apparatus, network information in which the communication apparatus participates after the end of the communication parameter configuration process with the first communication apparatus. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20100332667 | TECHNIQUE FOR SETTING NETWORK COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS - Techniques are disclosed for setting network communication parameters at a network interface based on the types of applications being executed at one or more computer devices that interface with the network. Thus, for example, the network interface can set the communication bandwidth, priority, or combination thereof, for each executing application based on the application type. By setting the network communication parameters for each application based on the application type, the applications can communicate with the network more efficiently. | 12-30-2010 |
| 20110004692 | Gathering Information about Connections in a Social Networking Service - To enhance information about connections in a social networking service, embodiments of the invention enable users to reference nodes while posting content to a communication channel. To identify connections within content in the social networking service, users of the social networking service are provided an interface to post content items in communication channels of the social networking service. A trigger received in the interface indicates that a user wishes to identify a connection in the posted content item. Selectable links enable the user to mention another node in the social networking service when posting a content item. As users reference nodes in content items, information about the connections with the referenced nodes is gathered and stored in a database that is indexable and searchable in real-time. | 01-06-2011 |
| 20110016217 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PREDICTING DOMAIN NAME REGISTRATION RENEWAL PROBABILITY - A method for determining probability of a domain name registration renewal includes receiving a plurality of inputs associated with the domain name and assigning each of the plurality of inputs to at least one category from among a plurality of categories. The method also includes assigning a weighted value to each of the plurality of categories and calculating the probability of the domain name registration renewal based in part on the weighted value of each category. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110016218 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REQUESTING AND TRANSFERRING CONTENTS - Disclosed are an apparatus and method enabling a user to efficiently share contents. A user of an electronic device performs an image capturing by use of a camera, thereby generating an image capture event. According to the image capture event, the electronic device obtains address information of a content transferring apparatus and transfers a content requesting message to the content transferring apparatus having the address information. Upon reception of the content requesting message, the content transferring apparatus provides the electronic device with contents in execution and status information of the content. The electronic device uses the content and the status information to restore a status of the content which has been executed in the content transferring apparatus. | 01-20-2011 |
| 20110029677 | SIGNALING FOR TRANSITIONS BETWEEN MODES OF DATA TRANSMISSION - Embodiments of the invention are generally directed to signaling for transitions between modes of data transmission. A embodiment of a method includes transmitting a data stream over a data link from a first device to a second device, the data stream operating in a first mode; determining that the data stream is to be changed from the first mode to a second mode; and transmitting a message from the first device to the receiver over a control link, the message indicating that the first device will change the data stream from the first mode to the second mode, the message being sent prior to the change to the second mode. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029678 | Communications Using the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) - Communications using the common object request broker architecture (CORBA) is disclosed. The communications are between a first computing device and a second computing device separated by a NAT device. The first computing device issues a request conforming to the CORBA protocol to obtain an IOR for an object from the second computing device. A first request interceptor on the first device adds a public IP address of the second computing device as user-defined data in the request. A second request interceptor on the second computing device extracts the IP address from the request and stores it. The second computing device builds the IOR for the object including embedding the public IP address of the second computing device in the IOR. The second computing device sends the IOR to the first computing device. The first computing device then establishes a successful connection to the public IP address received in the IOR. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029679 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A communication apparatus receives a communication request from a communication partner and determines whether itself functions as a server or a client. If a first parameter for communication for causing the communication partner to function as the client is included in the communication request and the communication apparatus functions as the server, the communication apparatus determines a second parameter for communication for causing the communication apparatus to function as the server based on the first communication parameter. If the communication apparatus offers the communication partner to function as the client in response to the communication request, the communication apparatus determines a third parameter for communication for causing the communication apparatus to function as the client. The communication apparatus transmits data indicating whether the communication apparatus functions as the server or the client, and the second or the third parameter for communication with the communication partner. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110029680 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREFOR - In a communication-parameter providing apparatus, a search is conducted at the start of a communication-parameter automatic setting process. Upon detection of a communication apparatus, the rate at which the communication-parameter providing apparatus sends a beacon per unit time is increased, whereby a communication-parameter receiving apparatus can easily detect the communication-parameter providing apparatus. | 02-03-2011 |
| 20110035503 | System and Method for Anonymous Addressing of Content on Network Peers and for Private Peer-to-Peer File Sharing - A system and method for efficient and private peer-to-peer file sharing consists of ascribing a uniquely identified and anonymous link (an “edgelink”) to any file or set of files on a peer computer. The link is registered with a publishing server along with continuously updated connectivity information about the peer without registering any identifying information about the file. A peer recipient is able to access the link, receive connectivity information about the publishing peer from the server, and then receive the file from the publishing peer without file content passing through the server, mediating any intermediary NAT devices without requiring any manual or automatic device reconfiguration. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110035504 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONDUCTING COMMUNICATIONS OVER A NETWORK - A method and system for conducting communications over a network is provided. An embodiment includes a server that is connectable to a client machine via a virtual private network that includes a VPN concentrator. The client machine and the VPN concentrator are configured to delay renegotiation of the VPN link in the event that an important stream is being carried over the VPN link. | 02-10-2011 |
| 20110040882 | DYNAMIC HANDLER FOR SIP MAX-SIZE ERROR - A network device forwards a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) setup request from an originating user device toward a destination user device via multiple network elements and intercepts a message-too-large error message sent from one of the multiple network elements to the originating user device. The network device automatically splits the session setup request into smaller SIP messages, where a size of each of the smaller SIP messages is less than or equal to a particular size of message that the network element will accept. The network device then notifies another one of the multiple elements that the session setup request has been split into the smaller SIP messages and sends, via the multiple network elements, the smaller SIP messages toward the destination user device on behalf of the originating device. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040883 | Control of Session Parameter Negotiation for Communication Connection - The invention relates to a session control entity, method and a computer program product for determining a first media type indicated for a session associated with a dialogue and determining a second media type indicated for an early media associated with the dialogue, comparing if the first media type and the second media type are the same, and transmitting to a policy control entity, parameters relating to the early media in the same session information media component than parameters relating to the session, if the first media type and the second media type are the same. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040884 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR PROVIDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES BETWEEN A SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) NETWORK AND A SIGNALING SYSTEM 7 (SS7) NETWORK - Methods, systems, and computer program products for providing telecommunication services between a SIP network and an SS7 network are disclosed. In one method, SIP/SS7 gateway receives an INVITE message from a SIP proxy server. The SIP/SS7 gateway extracts a called party number from the INVITE message and determines whether a telecommunications service is required and a type of service required for the INVITE message based on the called party number. The SIP/SS7 gateway then formulates an SS7 query to a database corresponding to the identified service type. The SIP/SS7 gateway receives a response from the database and uses data from the response to facilitate completion of the call. In one example, the SIP/SS7 gateway may forward a routing number extracted from the response back to the originating SIP proxy server. In another example, the SIP/SS7 gateway may generate a new INVITE message and forward the new INVITE message to a terminating SIP proxy server. In yet another example, the SIP/SS7 gateway may formulate a second query to the same database or to a different database to obtain further information for facilitate completion of the call. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040885 | MECHANISM FOR UPDATING PARAMETERS OF A SESSION SET UP THROUGH A VIRTUAL CIRCUIT - A method of communicating through a pseudo-wire set up between first and second provider edge nodes of a packet-switched network through at least one router of the packet-switched network, said method comprising, during a phase of transmitting data through the pseudo-wire in accordance with parameters defining a first communication session set up between the first and second provider edge nodes steps of: the second provider edge node receiving a set up message a of second communication session between the first and second provider edge nodes, the setting up message comprising parameters defining the second session, and the second equipment sending the router a notification message comprising parameters defining the second session and indicating switching of data transmission to the second communication session, the phase of transmitting data continuing in accordance with the parameters defining the second communication session. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110040886 | Method and System for Identification of Packet Gateways Supporting Different Service Types - The present invention provides a method and system for identification of the different packet gateways that support different types of services on their packet data networks. The method and system provides identification and addressing information to user equipment for one or more packet gateways that support different types of services, sometimes called QoS services. The identification and addressing information for the one or more packet gateways is provided in the present invention by and through a DNS server or an AAA server depending on the network architecture and the IP version supporting the communications with the mobile node. | 02-17-2011 |
| 20110047279 | METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING AN ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION - The invention relates to methods and a communication device for establishing a communication transmission (ALTV), wherein upon detecting an original signaling (SIGRA) directed from a first terminal (EG | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110047280 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING A SESSION BETWEEN MULTIPLE CLIENTS - A method for transferring a session between clients is provided when one user uses multiple clients on a service (for example, Push to talk over Cellular (PoC), Instant Messaging (IM), Converged-Internet Protocol (IP) Messaging (CPM)) providing system implemented through a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)/IP core network. A session transfer method is provided when the user needs to transfer a session to another client while the session is performed through one client. A “temporary storing” technique is used in which a conversation server or client as one of elements of a seamless CPM system for providing a seamless user environment temporarily stores data transmitted from another user during session transfer. | 02-24-2011 |
| 20110055407 | DEVICE-DEPENDENT SELECTION BETWEEN MODES FOR ASYMMETRIC SERIAL PROTOCOLS - A portable communication device (PCD) can automatically switch into different operating modes of an asymmetric communication protocol (such as USB) depending on the type of accessory connected. For example, the accessory can signal whether the PCD should operate in a first mode or a second mode using a hardware indicator such as identification resistor across two pins of a multi-pin connector and/or a software indicator such as a command protocol. The PCD can detect the accessory's signal and switch to the operating mode requested by the accessory. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055408 | INTELLIGENT MODULE SEQUENCING - Methods, devices, and systems are provided for selecting and ordering the firing of application modules based on parameters determined during communication initialization including call type, originator of the call, etc. The module invocation sequence is determined based on criteria determined when a connection is received, which then becomes an attribute of that connection such that subsequent messages belonging to that connection have the same module sequencing applied thereto without re-determining the optimal sequence for each message by analyzing the properties of each message every time. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055409 | Method For Network Connection - A method for network connection is provided. The method uses an identification tag during a network connection process. The method not only makes network connection more easily and convenient, but also gives consideration to security and compatibility. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055410 | DIALOG COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, DIALOG COMMUNICATION METHOD AND DIALOG COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A computer terminal is provided with a contact list memory means that stores a contact list to describe registered users; a presence information control means that receive from, or deliver to, other computer terminals a request to register or delete the user described in the contact list; a contact list management means that receives from, or deliver to, the other computer terminals the request to register or delete the user described in the contact list and does not complete the registration or deletion of the user in the contact list until receiving a response from the other computer terminals; and a communication control means that carries out the disclosure of presence information indicative of the existence, non-existence or the like of the user only with the user registered in the contact list and dialog communication. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055411 | GENERIC BOOTSTRAPPING PROTOCOL (GBP) - Embodiments of methods and apparatus for discovering a bootstrapping server by a mobile station, and bootstrapping the mobile station are disclosed. In some embodiments, a mobile station discovers a remotely disposed bootstrapping server; transmits wirelessly a bootstrap request to the bootstrapping server; and receive wirelessly a bootstrap response from the bootstrapping server in response to the transmitted bootstrap request. Additional variants and embodiments are also disclosed. | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110055412 | System for Conversion of SIP Messages - SIP is a popular protocol used in communications over IP, which however is incompatible with many other protocols used for the set-up of calls in other networks. SIP-based transactions are converted through the use of a grammar by a proxy user agent ( | 03-03-2011 |
| 20110060838 | MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE DOMAIN NAME SYSTEM REDIRECTION - A device provides, to a domain name system (DNS), uniform resource locator (URL) information received from a user device, and generates a redirect query when a redirect error is received from the DNS based on the URL information. The device also provides the redirect query to a policy server/accounting database, and receives, from the policy server/accounting database, information indicating that the user device subscribes to a redirect service and subscriber information associated with the user device. A device management database (DMD) query is generated based on the subscriber information, provides the DMD query to a DMD server, and receives, from the DMD server, model information associated with the user device, where the URL information and the model information are used to retrieve redirect information for the user device. | 03-10-2011 |
| 20110066736 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS BETWEEN NODES IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method, system and article of manufacture are disclosed for establishing a connection between a plurality of nodes in a communication network, the plurality of nodes including at least first and second nodes. The method comprises the steps of verifying availability of the second node by the first node; and sending an exchange identification request by the first node to the second node, this request including information related to protocols supported by the first node. An exchange identification response is received by the first node from the second node, this response including information related to protocols supported by the second node. Also, the verifying step includes the steps of sending a request to the second node to initiate a link level connection between the first node and the second node, and confirming this connection upon receiving a response from the second node. | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110066737 | SET-UP OF MEDIA STREAM TRANSMISSION AND SERVER AND CLIENT FOR MEDIA STREAM TRANSMISSION - A media stream is transmitted from a server device to a client device. The client device ( | 03-17-2011 |
| 20110072141 | Providing Enterprise Services in a Service Provisioning Network - A method and a system for providing enterprise services in a service provisioning network is described wherein service provisioning network is connected through at least one trunk to at least one enterprise network. The method comprises the steps of: providing a service request associated with an enterprise network; associating trunk information to said service request; routing said service request to an application server comprising one or more enterprise services associated with said enterprise network; and, said application server executing at least one enterprise service using said trunk information. | 03-24-2011 |
| 20110078318 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR LOAD BALANCING USING FORECASTING AND OVERBOOKING TECHNIQUES - Methods and systems for establishing user sessions between a client and a server or server farm can be carried out by a load balancing agent executing on a computer in communication with the client, server or server farm. The load balancing agent can intercept a connection request generated by an application executing on a client and responsively select a server on which to establish a user session. Selecting the server can be based on overbooking a particular server and choosing a server with a predetermined amount of forecasted load. Forecasted load can be determined by summing the current load on a server with a current load calculated by multiplying: the average load on the user sessions hosted by the server; by the number of cached user sessions stored on the server; and by the probability that a cached user session reconnects. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110078319 | SESSION SHARING SYSTEM, SESSION SHARING METHOD, SESSION SHARING PROGRAM, AND USER TERMINAL - There is provided a session sharing system for sharing sessions in a system in which one or more application servers cooperate for plural applications including: a first function processor; a second function processor; and a session information cooperation unit for converting session information of a session established with an application server, which is acquired from the first function processor or the second function processor, into a predetermined format and giving the converted session information to the second function processor or the first function processor, wherein the second function processor or the first function processor transmits, to an application server, a request message including the converted session information received from the session information cooperation unit, and the application server associates the converted session information included in the request message with session information that is generated based on a current communication processing protocol. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110078320 | APPLICATION INTEGRATED GATEWAY - In one embodiment, a network application may offload stateful operations to a user-plane application. In one embodiment, the network application receives state information for a user device. The network application then sends the state information to a user-plane application, which can maintain the state information. The network application may then offload a stateful operation to the user-plane application. For example, the network application may have the user-plane application perform stateful operations. Also, the network application may use the state information maintained at the user-plane application for error recovery after the network application fails. For example, the network application may recover the state information from the user-plane application after failure. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110078321 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRACKING UNIQUE VISTORS TO A WEBSITE - A system and method for analyzing traffic to a website is provided that is based on log files and that uses both server-side and client-side information channeled through one source to create a more complete picture of activity to a website. In one preferred embodiment, a sensor code is embedded in a requested web page, and sends information back to the web server where the website resides. This additional information is logged along with normal requests. | 03-31-2011 |
| 20110087789 | SUBSCRIPTION BASED NETWORK ROUTING TABLES AND ENFORCEMENT FOR OVERLAY NETWORKS - A method and apparatus are provided according to one example embodiment to allow a user device to access services over an overlay network. The method and apparatus of one example embodiment further allows a user device, such as a mobile terminal, to move freely across network access points without interruption in the services. An example method may include receiving a request for service, allocating an address to the request, configuring rules associated with the request, generating at least one routing table entry from the rules, and providing for transmission of the routing table entry and the address. An address prefix may be associated with the service, in which case the address includes the address prefix. Further, the address prefix may be associated with a unique overlay network. Prior to transmitting the routing table entry, the request for service may require approval. The address may be a static or dynamic address. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110087790 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR COMMUNICATING WITH STORAGE SYSTEMS USING SLIM IP STACKS - Methods, and associated devices, media, and systems, for establishing a communication link between a host system and a storage device are provided. One method includes an operation for providing on the host a communication stack including a Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) module and a host physical layer module. The storage device includes a storage command extractor, and the method includes another operation for establishing a communication channel between an application in the host and the storage device, where the communication channel uses the communication stack and the storage command extractor. In the method, the TCP/IP module converts TCP/IP commands received from the application in the host to storage commands for the storage device. | 04-14-2011 |
| 20110093599 | HIERARCHAL STRUCTURING OF NODES IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - A method of operating a communication system comprises registering a plurality of communication devices with a peer-to-peer network as a plurality of enterprise nodes using a plurality of network handles that identify positions in an enterprise hierarchy. The method further comprises receiving a request to establish a session with a participant node and an enterprise node of the plurality of enterprise nodes using a first network handle of the plurality of network handles that identifies a first position in the enterprise hierarchy. In response to the request, the method provides identifying a routing identifier associated with the enterprise node and exchanging user communications for the session with a communication device of the plurality of communication devices registered as the enterprise node using the routing identifier. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093600 | MOBILE PEER-TO-PEER BASED NETWORK APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - A Peer-to-Peer (P2P)-based network apparatus and system is provided. The P2P-based network apparatus may sense the movement of a mobile station (MS), select a candidate proxy, and change a proxy of the MS to the candidate proxy. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110093601 | Session control apparatus, software applied to session control apparatus, communication control method, and network system - A network system includes a session control server and a presence server. The session control server includes a presence information update unit that is started when the status changes and notifies the presence server of the changed status. The presence server includes a presence information control unit that controls the consistency of the notified update information. | 04-21-2011 |
| 20110099280 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SECURE ACCESS TO REMOTE NETWORKS UTILIZING WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure provides secure connectivity to remote networks on demand without requiring an interactive logon at a wireless client. Specifically, the present invention utilizes a proxy in a wireless network, such as an Access Point (AP) or the like, to provide client access to a remote, hosted network external to the wireless network. The present invention utilizes existing wireless security protocols and other security mechanisms between the proxy and the remote, hosted network. In operation, a wireless network proxy responds to a wireless client that is seeking a remote, hosted network, such as through an association request. The wireless network proxy then serves as an intermediary between the remote, hosted network and the wireless client to enable secure end-to-end communication. | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110099281 | System and Method for Managing Emergency Requests - A network component is provided. The network component including a component configured such that the network transmits a response message containing an indicator indicating that a first message is an emergency-related request, and such that the network receives a second message containing information associated with a user equipment (UE). | 04-28-2011 |
| 20110106956 | Communication System and Communication Method - The present invention discloses a communication system and a method. The communication system includes at least first 802.11 equipment and second 802.11 equipment. The first 802.11 equipment including a network connector for searching relevant information of the second 802.11 equipment and modifying a network setting of the first 802.11 equipment according to the searched relevant information and a 802.11 driver interface. The second 802.11 equipment includes a 802.11 driver interface. The driver interface of the first 802.11 equipment communicates with the driver interface of the second 802.11 equipment in accordance with the modified network setting. | 05-05-2011 |
| 20110113145 | Stateless Transmission Control Protocol Rendezvous Solution For Border Gateway Function - A method and apparatus for brokering a transmission control protocol (TCP) session between two clients that are each situated behind a firewall that blocks incoming TCP session requests is described. Each of the two clients transmits a TCP session request to the other client in order to establish a TCP session between these clients. This brokering allows the two clients to establish the TCP session between the two clients. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110113146 | DYNAMIC QUALITY OF SERVICE (QOS) SETUP OVER WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method to setup Quality of Service (QoS) parameters over a wireless network and over a wired network is described herein. A request to setup the QoS parameters may be initiated by a wireless device. The method includes the steps of receiving a first message from the wireless device that includes a first set of QoS parameters requested by the wireless device and determining a second set of QoS parameters for transmission over a wired network corresponding to the first set of QoS parameters. The method further includes the steps of transmitting a second message to a wired device including the second set of QoS parameters and receiving a response to the second message from the wired device that indicates whether the second set of QoS parameters was accepted by the wired device. The method also includes transmitting a response to the first message, based on the response to the second message, to the wireless device indicating whether the first set of QoS parameters are acceptable. A similar method is provided to setup QoS parameters over the wireless network when the initial request is received over the wired network. | 05-12-2011 |
| 20110119389 | TRANSFERRING MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION MODALITIES DURING A CONVERSATION - A conversation may be established using any supported type of communication modalities, including voice, video, desktop sharing, IM, application sharing , and the like. During the conversation, a user may transfer all or part of the modalities of the conversation at the same time to one or more destinations. The transfer may specify mandatory and non-mandatory modalities and may occur supervised or in a blind manner. In addition to transferring the modality, a conversation payload (e.g. IM history) may also be transferred to a destination. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110119390 | SELECTIVELY RE-MAPPING A NETWORK TOPOLOGY - In at least some embodiments, a method includes receiving a remote computing session request. The method further includes inspecting a user profile based on the remote computing session request and selectively re-mapping a network topology based on information in the user profile. | 05-19-2011 |
| 20110125912 | System and Method for Registration of Network-Capable Consumer Electronic Devices - Manufacturer registration of consumer electronic devices includes a registration server receiving purchaser-specific information from a user computer over a network, such as the Internet. This received purchaser-specific information may then be associated with a temporary short code, which is in turn provided back to the user computer over the network. The purchaser is then free to input the provided temporary short code into the consumer electronic device to be registered, after which both the short code and certain additional device-specific identification information may be provided directly by the consumer electronic device to the registration server over a network connection. The provided short code may then be matched to the previously-provided purchaser-specific information, and the manufacturer registration process completed using both the purchaser-specific information and the device-specific identification information. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110125913 | Interface for Communication Session Continuation - Methods and systems are provided for forwarding a media streaming session from one node to another node while the session is in progress. A streaming server may store data sent between nodes in the session. When one node is forwarded to a new node, the stored data may be used to transition to the new node with little or no interruption in data sent between nodes in the session. A user interface may allow a user to set preferences and control other aspects of the session forwarding features. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110125914 | END-TO-END (E2E) SERVICE LEVEL AGREEMENT (SLA) COMPLIANCE ACROSS BOTH MANAGED AND UNMANAGED NETWORK SEGMENTS - Embodiments of the present invention address deficiencies of the art in respect to e2e SLA support in a network of both manageable and unmanageable portions and provide a method, system and computer program product for e2e SLA compliance across both managed and unmanaged network segments. In one embodiment of the invention, a method for e2e SLA compliance across both managed and unmanaged network segments can be provided. The method can include identifying both a managed segment and an unmanaged segment of an e2e network for a communications path implicated by an SLA, determining an observed delay for the unmanaged segment of the e2e network, computing from a desired delay for the communications path and the observed delay a differential delay, and constraining the managed segment to meet the differential delay in order to assure meeting the desired delay for the communications path implicated by the SLA. | 05-26-2011 |
| 20110131335 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR CLOUD COMPUTING MANAGEMENT - Disclosed is a management service that enables a user to establish, monitor, and control cloud computing sessions offered via third-party service providers. In some instances, the management service establishes a market space that allows a user to establish a customized cloud computing session based on computing resources offered by third-party service providers. In some instances, the management service instantiates monitoring mechanisms within the virtual servers of the cloud computing sessions to be able to monitor, assess, and provide reports and alerts pertaining to performance metrics of the various virtual servers. In some instances, the management service also allows a user to remotely transfer services from a first cloud computing session to a second cloud computing session. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131336 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FILE TRANSMISSION BASED ON MULTIPLE PROTOCOLS - The present invention relates to method and device for file transmission based on multiple protocols. According to an embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a method in a user node of downloading files, comprising the steps of: A. intercepting a request message from an application functional entity, for requesting a file based on a first protocol; B. downloading said file at least based on a second protocol; C. providing said file to said application functional entity. With the method, software, storage media provided in the present invention, faster download speed could be obtained when the client downloads files from the network base on the first protocol, compared with that obtained in the traditional C/S mode, therefore the user experience is improved. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110131337 | MOBILE DEVICE AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - The mobile device includes a communication unit which performs communication through a network; and a control unit which executes an application prepared by an application programming interface (API) of the network function provided by a platform, and controls the communication unit to perform communication in accordance with a setup of a preferred network if the application includes the setup of the preferred network. | 06-02-2011 |
| 20110138064 | APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR MONITORING AND OPTIMIZING DELIVERY OF CONTENT IN A NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for delivering content to a user so as to optimize and enhance the “experience” of the content. In one embodiment, an optimization and monitoring entity (OME) is used which determines, evaluates, and provides notification and/or recommendation of alternative content delivery platforms which are available to a user. The OME receives requests for content forwarded from a content server containing information identifying requesting devices and/or subscriber accounts. The OME examines the capabilities of the registered devices, and identifies/recommends alternative devices based on e.g., video/audio quality, picture size, bandwidth availability, and/or any other additional capabilities of the client devices. A notification is then sent to the client devices indicating which of the user's devices may receive the content alternatively, or in addition to, the requesting device. The notifications may be interactive, allowing the user to select one or more of the devices for delivery. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110138065 | Methods And Apparatus For Use In Establishing Communications For Virtual Private Networking - Techniques for registering for communications for a communications application stored in a mobile device are described. The mobile device communicates, via a communication network, a request for a connection with a private network. If the connection is established within a predetermined period of time, then the mobile device receives from the private network a first IP address for assignment to the mobile device, and communicates to a server a request for registering for the communications using the first IP address assigned to the mobile device. If the connection is not established within the predetermined period of time, then the mobile device communicates to a server a request for registering for the communications using a second IP address assigned to the mobile device. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110138066 | HANDLING OF AGGREGATE MAXIMUM BIT RATE BY POLICY AND CHARGE CONTROL - A policy and charge control (PCC) architecture and method for handling access point name-aggregate maximum bit rate (APN-AMBR) subscription data that is associated with a subscriber regardless of whether the subscriber's User Equipment (UE) is located in an AMBR-capable access area such as an E-UTRAN or in an AMBR non-capable access area such as a 3G SGSN. The PCC architecture includes: (a) a policy server such as a PCRF that installs the APN-AMBR subscription data during an IP session establishment for the subscriber in the IP level convergence point and (b) an IP level convergence point that enforces the APN-AMBR subscription data for a lifetime of an IP session associated with the IP session establishment. | 06-09-2011 |
| 20110145420 | SESSION PERSISTENCE - A system may include a number of load balancers configured to receive requests associated with a service, and a number of computer pools associated with the load balancers, where each of the computer pools includes a number of computers. The system may also include a memory accessible to each of the computers, the memory being configured to store state information associated with a client session involving a first client device requesting the service. A first one of the computers may be configured to perform a portion of processing associated with the client session and forward first state information regarding the processing to the memory. A second one the computers may be configured to perform an other portion of the processing associated with the client session and forward second state information to the memory. The memory is configured to store the first and second state information. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145421 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTONOMOUS PEER DISCOVERY AND ENHANCING LINK RELIABILITY FOR WIRELESS PEER DIRECT LINKS - A system, method and device may include triggering a direct connection setup based on one or more communication parameters communicated with a mobile device via a fixed device. It may be determined whether the mobile device is a peer. The quality of service with the mobile device via the fixed device may be compared with quality of service of a mobile device via a direct link. A channel for the direct link may be selected and information may be sent to the mobile device over the direct link via the channel. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145422 | MANAGEMENT PROCESSORS COOPERATING TO CONTROL PARTITION RESOURCES - Systems, methods and computing components are provided for allocating a plurality of computing components among one or more logical partitions. Each of the plurality of computing components may have a management processor that is configured to assume a role among management processors of a partition. Each management processor may then cooperate with other management processors of the partition to control resources of the partition. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110145423 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR USING A DISTRIBUTED MESSAGE BUS FOR AD HOC PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTIVITY - A method and apparatus for using an ad hoc peer-to-peer distributed message bus is provided. The method may include determining, by a local bus node, using a first power level communication protocol, that a remote bus node is available, obtaining, by the local bus node, connection information from the remote bus node using a second power level communication protocol, wherein the connection information comprises connection information for one or more remote endpoints associated with the remote bus node, and generating one or more local virtual endpoints, wherein each of the one or more local virtual endpoints corresponds to each of the one or more remote endpoints, and wherein the remote endpoint is described with reference to a well-known name, unique to the remote endpoint. | 06-16-2011 |
| 20110153844 | System and Method for Automatic Discovery of Topology in an LTE/SAE Network - A system, method and computer program product are disclosed for monitoring a telecommunications network that comprises a plurality of Mobility Management Entity (MME) nodes and a plurality of evolved UTRAN NodeB (eNodeB) nodes coupled by S1-MME interfaces. A Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) association identifier is assigned to an SCTP association between interconnected MME and eNodeB nodes. Specific S1-MME messages allow discovering the MME nodes and the eNodeB nodes with their network identifiers, identifying the connections between them and populating proper tables for this topology information. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153845 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING NETWORK CONNECTIONS USING AN INTER-MEDIATING DEVICE - Systems and methods are provided to facilitate communication between a first device and a second device on a network. A first wireless communication session is established between the first device and a remote control or other intermediating device. A network address used by the first device to communicate on the network is received from the first device via the first wireless communication session. A second wireless communication session is established between the intermediating device and a second device, and the first address is provided to the second device via the second wireless communication session. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153846 | EMBED CONTROL COMMANDS AND PRODUCT EXTENSIONS WITHIN RFB SESSION - According to various embodiments, methods, apparatuses and systems are provided that allow a management server coupled to a managed device to establish a management session with a management station in accordance with a management protocol. A management server may forward to the management station modified user interface display that provides additional functions to the management station. The management station may interact with the modified user interface display and evoke the additional functions through the use of keyboard, mouse or any suitable user interface input means. Other embodiments may be described and claimed. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153847 | COMMUNICATION NODE IN COMBINED NODE SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - A communication method of a first communication node of a combined node system including a plurality of communication nodes includes receiving data from at least one second communication node of the plurality of communication nodes, generating common control information by using the data, the common control information including data transmission path information between the plurality of communication nodes and an external communication apparatus which is on the outside of the combined node system, transmitting the common control information to the at least one second communication node, and communicating with the external communication apparatus through at least a part of the plurality of communication nodes on the basis of the common control information. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153848 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CONTROL METHOD AND CONTROL PROGRAM - An information processing device includes: a control data request signal reception unit configured to receive a request signal for requesting transmission of control data; a control data transmission unit configured to transmit control data required by the received request signal to a communication device; a control data transmission destination recording unit configured to record device identification information used for identification of a communication device in a manner correlated with identification information for identifying this provided data; a device selecting unit configured to select device identification information recorded in the control data transmission destination recording unit in a manner correlated with identification information for identifying the provided data; and a device identification information transmission unit configured to transmit the selected device identification information to a communication device on a P2P network as device identification information used for identification of a communication device in which the provided data is recorded. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153849 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A HOSTED MOBILE MANAGEMENT SERVICE ARCHITECTURE - A hosted mobile management service is provided for enabling a user to access a centralized account through a web browser on a terminal in order to manage the user's media information, such as digital music and photos. Any modifications made by user through the web browser are transparently sent to the user's mobile device where a thin client application receives such modification information and interacts with the mobile device's file system to reconcile such modifications. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110153850 | NETWORK SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A communication device includes: a memory for storing first and second identification information for identifying the communication device and another communication device; a creation unit for creating a room name based on at least one of the first and second identification information; and a communication control unit for connecting to the other communication device in accordance with the second identification information, and for transmitting a creation request to a server device to create a room having the room name for allowing the communication device and the other communication device to exchange information. The communication control unit is operative in response to a first external instruction to transmit a deletion request through a communication interface to the server device to delete the room having the room name. | 06-23-2011 |
| 20110161505 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A CALL TO AN AGGREGATE ENDPOINT DEVICE - A method and an apparatus for processing a call to an aggregate endpoint device over a network are disclosed. For example, the method receives a session request by a Serving-Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF), wherein a route header for the session request comprises an aggregate endpoint identifier, and interacts with an application server to receive a Public User Identity (PUID) of the aggregate endpoint device in accordance with the aggregate endpoint identifier. The method performs a termination processing for the session request using the PUID of the aggregate endpoint device, and forwards the session request towards the aggregate endpoint device. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161506 | METHODS, APPARATUSES & COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR FACILITATING REMOTE SESSION POOLING - An apparatus is provided for generating a pool of remote session references that may be utilized to establish authenticated sessions. The apparatus includes a processor configured to generate remote session references that may be maintained in a pool. The remote session references may include information used to establish authenticated sessions with a secure device. The processor is also configured to determine whether a remote session reference(s) of the pool may be borrowed in response to receipt of a request for a resource(s) on the secure device. Additionally, the processor may perform a test on a borrowed remote session reference when a determination reveals that one of the remote session references may be borrowed. The processor may also provide the secure device with the borrowed remote session reference and a request for the resource(s) in response to determining that the test passed. Corresponding computer program products and methods are also provided. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161507 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TIME-LIMITATION SETTINGS IN COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - A method and computer program product includes initiating an instant messaging session on one or more communication devices. A first time-limitation setting for the instant messaging session based upon a user identification may be received. The first time-limitation setting may represent a maximum duration for the instant messaging session. A second time-limitation setting for the instant messaging session based upon the user identification may also be received. The second time-limitation setting may represent a minimum time between one or more instant messaging sessions. The instant messaging session may be terminated if the duration of the instant messaging session exceeds the first time-limitation setting. A subsequent instant messaging session may be prevented if the time between the instant messaging session and the subsequent communication does not exceed the second time-limitation setting. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161508 | METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SESSION AND SERVER USING THE SAME - Disclosed is a method for masking media flows against a discovery procedure for inter-UE transfer. According to the method, when a Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server (SCC AS) establishes a session, an User Equipment (UE) is able to indicate to the network that some or all of the media flow composing a session are not discoverable from other UEs. Therefore, when the SCC AS receives the request for discovery for discovery of the ongoing session on any UE, the SCC AS identifies which media flows in the ongoing session of the UE are indicated as indiscoverable, and does not send information about theses media flows to the other UEs | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110161509 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FAST CHANNEL SWITCHING USING STANDARD RTSP MESSAGES - Method and system for performing fast channel switching in client-server systems, in which live media streams sent by a streaming server under the RTSP protocol are played by the client, are described. The existing functionality of the media player, for example seek functionality, is overloaded to provide switching between live media streams by using standard RTSP message in-band within a single RTSP session. | 06-30-2011 |
| 20110167163 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, METHOD, DEVICE AND PROGRAM - A first communication apparatus executes a session control protocol thereby to determine a session identifier which identifies a session for media-related protocols for transferring the data when the session is established, and thereafter executes the media-related protocols thereby to perform communications for transferring the data on the session. A second communication apparatus executes the session control protocol thereby to establish a session for the media-related protocols with the first communication apparatus, and thereafter executes the media-related protocol thereby to perform communications for transferring the data with the first communication apparatus on the session. | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110167164 | Method for Lawfully Intercepting Communication IP Packets Exchanged Between Terminals - A method for lawfully intercepting communication IP packets exchanged between terminals is provided. The method involves assigning an IP address associated with a telecommunication service provider to, for example, a sending terminal for use as its IP address in communications with a receiving terminal, the telecommunication service provider providing SIP proxy services for establishing communication between the sending and receiving terminals. The communication IP packets are intercepted in such a way that the terminals are unaware of the interception. | 07-07-2011 |
| 20110173333 | UTILIZING RESOURCES OF A PEER-TO-PEER COMPUTER ENVIRONMENT - Utilizing resources of a peer-to-peer computer environment. Connections to a peer-to-peer computer environment are established using a first protocol at an open node computer system. A request for services is received at the open node computer system from a user computer system not currently associated with the peer-to-peer computer environment, wherein the request is received using a second protocol. The request for the services is satisfied using resources of the peer-to-peer computer environment. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110173334 | Intercepting File Transfers In Multi-Node Topologies - A system and method for intercepting and processing a payload sent between clients. A home server determines the roles that are intermediate to the clients by having intermediate servers insert identity information into a message of a session setup protocol. The home server selects a role to be the intercepting role, and sends a notification and aggregate information to a server of the selected role. A server of the intercepting role intercepts and processes the payload when it is sent between the clients. Payload processing may include content inspection or filtering based on any of a number of factors. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110173335 | ESTABLISHMENT OF A PACKET COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A SERVER AND A SERVICE ENTITY OF A RADIOCOMMUNICATION NETWORK - In order to establish a packet communication between a first server (SS) connected to a packet network (RP) and a service entity (ES) capable of communicating without a subscriber identification module in a radiocommunication network (RR), the service entity transmits an identifier (IdEs) of the service entity (ES) to a second server (SO) that determines an address (Ads) of the first server based on the received service entity identifier. The second server transmits the determined address of the first server to a gateway that interconnects the radiocommunication network and the packet network. The gateway establishes a communication between the service entity and the first server based on the address of the first server. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110173336 | BARRIER BOUNDARY NODE AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BETWEEN BARRIER BOUNDARY NODES - The present invention discloses a block boundary node and a method for setting up a connection between block boundary nodes. The block boundary node comprises a connection controller, a link resource manager and a route controller. The method comprises: an ingress boundary node querying and verifying block information of an ingress subnet point after receiving a connection setup request message, and sending a block information query request to an egress boundary node upon successful verification; the egress boundary node querying and verifying block information of an egress subnet point after receiving the block information query request, and sending the block information to the ingress boundary node upon successful verification; the ingress boundary node querying route by using the block information of the ingress subnet point and egress subnet point as query parameters, and sending a connection setup request message to the egress boundary node upon querying the route successfully; and the ingress boundary node receiving a connection setup acknowledgement message returned by the egress boundary node, thus the connection setup is complete. The present invention allows invalid flood information to be reduced efficiently while ensuring success rate of connection setup. | 07-14-2011 |
| 20110185071 | LOSS TOLERANT PROTOCOL FOR REMOTING DESKTOP GRAPHICS - In various embodiments, remote presentation encoding techniques may be modified in such a way that the data can be transmitted over transports without guaranteed packet delivery. In one embodiment, the desktop graphics data may be encoded in individual frames, each frame comprising self-contained graphics elements that fit in a small number of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) protocol data units (PDUs). The PDUs may then be sent to the client on a separate lossy link instead of the lossless link. On the client side, the client may detect which graphic elements within a frame were “lost” as a result of dropped UDP packets and request a refresh from the server through the lossless channel. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110185072 | METHOD AND SYSTEM OF EMULATING DEVICES ACROSS SELECTED COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS THROUGH A TERMINAL SESSION - Emulating devices across selected communication pathways by way of a terminal session. At least some of the illustrative embodiments are methods including establishing a terminal session between a first computer system and a second computer system (the second computer system distinct from the first computer system, and the second computer system having a management processor with a plurality of communication pathways to a main processor of the second computer system), configuring the management processor to send data regarding emulation of a first mass storage device across a first selected pathway of the plurality of communication pathways to the main processor (the configuring by way of the terminal session), and emulating (by the management processor) the first mass storage device across the first selected pathway. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110185073 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CLIENT IP ADDRESS INSERTION VIA TCP OPTIONS - The present disclosure presents systems and methods for maintaining identification of network devices sending or traversing a network packet en route to an intermediary device deployed between a source and a destination network device. An intermediary may receive an acknowledgement packet comprising an option field identified by an option number for a transport layer connection established via intermediary. The acknowledgement packet may comprise overlay network data that identifies IP addresses of the originating network device and host network devices intercepting and forwarding the network packet to the intermediary. The intermediary device may determine the option number for the option field from which to obtain the overlay network data identifying IP addresses. The intermediary device may receive a second request of the client to access the server via the transport layer connection and insert IP addresses from the overlay network data into an application layer protocol header of the second request forwarded to the server. | 07-28-2011 |
| 20110191482 | Notification of resource restrictions in a multimedia communications network - The invention relates to a method of notifying an Application Function, AF, in a communications network of resource restrictions relating to a communications session. The network includes a Policy and Charging Rules Function, PCRF, for authorising and controlling flows of data in the session. In the method the AF sends an authorisation request to the PCRF for establishing the communication session. The authorisation request includes an indication that the AF is to be notified of resource restrictions for the data flows in the session. The PCRF notifies the AF of the resource restrictions. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191483 | METHOD AND APPLICATION SERVER FOR USING A SIP SERVICE FROM A NON-SIP DEVICE - A method and an Application Server for enabling a non-SIP device to use a SIP service are described. The method is executed in an Application Server and comprises the steps of receiving a request for a SIP service from a non-SIP device. The method comprises retrieving a contact card corresponding to the non-SIP device from a Contact Server, the contact card containing at least one identity. The method also comprises inserting the at least one identity retrieved from the contact card in the request for the SIP service and forwarding the request for the SIP Service to the Service Server. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110191484 | HIERARCHICAL ROUTING AND INTERFACE SELECTION FOR MULTI-PROCESSOR MULTIMODE NETWORK DEVICES - The embodiments simplify the development of applications for current and future wireless communication devices, resolving the deficiencies of current methods by providing a hierarchical routing layer which abstracts the actual proximity of the network connection. An application can request and receive a type of network connection without having to address details of the actual connection established. A hierarchical routing layer is provided within the software architecture of each processor within the computing device. The hierarchical routing layer abstracts the actual proximity of the network connectivity on the modem from the applications using proxy network interfaces. The hierarchical routing layers on each processor cooperate to identify a best network interface for an application network request. The routing layer enables response to an application request for a network interface in a simple manner regardless of whether the network interface is provided on the application host processor or another processor. | 08-04-2011 |
| 20110196971 | APPLICATION SESSION CONTROL USING PACKET INSPECTION - Network devices, computer-readable media, and other embodiments associated with packet inspection are described. Packet inspection may be performed on data packets associated with a session, where a session can include multiple data channels and associated control channels that have been bound together. A session may be associated with an identity. Various policies may be associated with that identity. As packet inspection occurs, it can be determined whether policies are being violated on a per identity basis. If a policy is being violated, then an action may be selectively performed. The action performed may affect a single channel in the session or may affect the whole session. Different identities may have different policies. Example actions include dropping a session, throttling a session, monitoring a session, controlling the number of channels associated with a session, dropping a channel, throttling a channel, monitoring a channel, and other actions. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196972 | Selective Connection between Corresponding Communication Components Involved in a Teleconference - A client device selectively establishes connections between selected client communication components and corresponding server communication components. The client device receives data from the corresponding server communication components via the connections between the selected client communication components and the server communication components. The data received via different ones of the connections is associated with a different content stream of a teleconference. During the teleconference, a given connection is suspended. When the given connection is suspended, the client computing device continues to receive data via connections other than the given connection. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196973 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-DEVICE SESSION CONTINUITY (IDSC) OF MULTI MEDIA STREAMS - A method and apparatus for Inter-Device Session Continuity (IDSC). IDSC may include session transfer, session duplication, peer discovery, media transport control, session retrieval, and peer device detection of media streams between wireless transmit receive units (WTRUs) in real-time via Inter-User Equipment Transfer (IUT) across any internet protocol (IP) based network. This framework allows for both collaborative and non-collaborative media sessions, media session transport and shared media session control under the same subscription or multiple subscriptions. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196974 | SERVICE LEVEL CROSS NETWORK COORDINATED INTERACTION - Embodiments of the invention provide systems and methods for orchestrating or coordinating interactions between different types of networks such as a legacy network and a next generation network. According to one embodiment, a method for coordinating interactions between different types of networks can comprise receiving at a service layer component a communication in a communication session from a first communication network. The communication can be in a first protocol. The communication can be translated from the first protocol to a second protocol with the service layer component, wherein the first protocol is different from the second protocol. One or more additional service layer components for providing at least one service in the communication session can be identified with an application dispatcher of the service layer component. The translated communication can be dispatched to the one or more additional service layer components from the application dispatcher. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196975 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE BIDIRECTIONAL ADDRESS CONVERSION IN SIP-CONTROLLED DATA STREAMS BETWEEN IPV4 AND IPV6 DATA TERMINALS - The invention relates to a method and to a device for the bidirectional address conversion in SIP-controlled data streams between IPv4 data devices (T | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110196976 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication system including a SIP client, a proxy, and a node. When the node relays a SIP message sent for the SIP client, the node replaces management information set up in a parameter with an ID, and stores the ID and the management information by associating them with each other. When the node relays a SIP message in which the stored ID is set up, the node replaces the ID with the management information associated with the ID. When an ID is set up in a parameter of a received SIP message, the SIP client stores the parameter and the ID by associating them with each other. When the client sends a SIP message that includes the stored parameter, an ID associated with the parameter is set up in the parameter. | 08-11-2011 |
| 20110202667 | Database Virtualization - Aspects of the subject matter described herein relate database virtualization. In aspects, clusters of database servers may be located at various locations of the Internet. When a client seeks to access a logical database, the client may send a logical server and logical database name in a data structure. These names may be used to find a physical server(s) and database(s) that correspond to the logical database. Once the location is determined, a proxy component is used to intercept and/or forward communications between the client and the physical server(s) and database(s) corresponding to the logical database. Using this system, a client may access data from a logical database without knowing the physical address of the logical user database. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110202668 | Methods for Creating and Using a Telecommunications Link between Two Users of a Telecommunications Network - A technique is disclosed for the creation and the use of a telecommunications link between two users of a telecommunications network. Disclosed in particular is the technical creation of a social links network employing a telecommunications network. A method is disclosed for creating a telecommunications link between a first set of communications devices associated with a first user and a second set of communications devices associated with a second user, including generating a pair of certified identifiers of the first and second users allowing a communications session to be set up between at least a communications device of the first set and a communications device of the second set. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110202669 | Method for Network Domain Name Resolution and the Resolution Device Thereof - The invention relates to a method for network domain name resolution, the domain name comprises a first portion domain name and a second portion domain name, and the resolution method comprising following steps: In a first network system, resolving the first portion domain name into a first network address; In the first network system, searching for a first network node corresponding to the first network address according to the resolved first network address; In a second network system, resolving the second portion domain name into a second network node address, and the domain name resolution system of the second network system being independent of the domain name resolution system of the first network system. As the resolution structure of the domain name in the Intranet is independent of the resolution structure of the domain name in the Internet, the IP address of the Intranet will not occupy the IP address resource of the Internet. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110202670 | METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFYING IP SESSION - A method, a device, and a system for identifying an Internet Protocol (IP) session are provided. The method includes: a network gateway generates an IP session identity (ID) for an IP session during an IP address configuration process for a user equipment (UE), according to preset rules for generating the IP session ID; and filters a received IP session packet from the UE according to the IP session ID. By applying the technical solutions, a coupling relation between a data communication process and an authentication process or an IP address configuration process of the IP session is established, and the security of the IP session is enhanced. | 08-18-2011 |
| 20110208869 | HTTP PUSH TO SIMULATE SERVER-INITIATED SESSIONS - A mobile device apparatus uses an HyperText Transfer protocol (HTTP) push operation to simulate server-initiated sessions. The illustrative mobile device apparatus comprises a push server logic operable in a push server that sends a message to a mobile device over a network. The push server logic is configured to receive a GET command from a mobile device. The GET command includes a mobile device identifier parameter and a timeout parameter designating a maximum time interval for the push server to reply with a message. The push server logic holds a GET command session until expiration of a timeout designated by the timeout parameter in a condition that no message is targeted to the mobile device. The push server logic terminates the GET command session by sending a message immediately in a condition that the message is targeted to the mobile device. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110208870 | Policy Service System Architecture for Sessions Created Using STUN - Described herein are embodiments for setting, managing, and monitoring connection policies for a plurality of network paths from a first endpoint to a second endpoint. In embodiments, a set of candidate addresses from a first endpoint and a set of candidate addresses from a second endpoint are received. Each candidate address of the first endpoint is paired with each candidate address of the second endpoint to create a plurality of candidate address pairs. Each candidate address pair has an associated network path. The network path is the route by which data flows to and from the various endpoints. Once all network paths between each candidate address pair have been determined, a connection policy is set for each network address pair and the associated network path. | 08-25-2011 |
| 20110213888 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SCREENING REQUEST TO ESTABLISH SIP SESSION - A method and apparatus for screening a request to establish a SIP session is provided. The method may include a) receiving a request to establish a SIP session at a network node of an internet protocol network and incrementing a counter, b) determining whether the request includes a resource priority parameter with an elevated priority value and, if so, incrementing a counter, c) comparing a ratio of the priority request count to the total request count to a threshold, and d) processing each request that includes the elevated priority value using more comprehensive screening after the ratio exceeds the threshold, allowing processing for each request that includes the elevated priority value to continue in accordance with the elevated priority value after the ratio does not exceed the threshold, and allowing processing for each request that does not include the elevated priority value to continue in accordance with a routine priority. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213889 | Method For Configuring At Least One Communications Link For Transmitting Medical Image Datasets And System For Managing And/Or Processing Medical Image Datasets - A method is disclosed for configuring at least one communications link for transmitting medical image datasets by means of a special transmission protocol, in particular the DICOM protocol, from a first computing device to at least one second computing device, in particular a plurality of different second computing devices. In at least one embodiment, the transmission performance is determined automatically at the first computing device for a plurality of sets of configuration parameters of the communications link and the set of configuration parameters having the best transmission performance is selected for the configuration. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213890 | METHOD FOR RECOVERY OF A CONTROLLED FAILOVER OF A BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL SPEAKER - A method and apparatus for recovering from a controlled failover of a BGP speaker is provided. A user sends, to a network element, a request to switch a designation of an active Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) speaker of the network element from a first BGP speaker to a second BGP speaker. After receiving the request, the network element pauses operation of a transport for BGP. Routing data, which describes a state of a first routing information base (RIB) maintained by the active BGP speaker, is transferred from the first BGP speaker to the second BGP speaker. Thereafter, the first BGP speaker may instruct the second BGP speaker to become the active BGP speaker. After the second BGP speaker becomes the active BGP speaker, the second BGP speaker resumes operation of the BGP transport. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110213891 | INTEGRATED HOME SERVICE NETWORK - The present invention provides a centralized home controller that is used to coordinate a plurality of associated packet communication clients. The home controller provides a centralized and unified control and messaging system for the various packet communication clients. The home controller also allows the packet communication clients to establish and control packet sessions among the associated packet communication clients, as well as between any one of the packet communication clients and remote clients. The packet communication clients are provided in consumer electronics devices, and the associated packet sessions support data, voice, audio, or video content. In one embodiment, the home controller acts as a proxy for the various communications between the packet communication clients. | 09-01-2011 |
| 20110219126 | MOBILE TERMINAL, FORWARDING INTERMEDIATE NODE AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219127 | Method and Apparatus for Selecting Network Services - An approach is provided for selecting a network server. An apparatus comprising at least one processor, and at least one memory including computer program code, the at least one memory and the computer program code configured to, with the at least one processor, cause, at least in part, the apparatus to load from one or more network servers configuration information of one or more network servers used by a service provider network. The apparatus is also caused to select a network server in the service provider network based at least in part on at least one of network server latency and the network server load. The apparatus is further caused to set the network server as default network server used for at least one of current and future session on one or more user equipment. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219128 | FAST VIRTUAL CONCATENATION SETUP - The invention is directed to optimizing setup of a VCAT connections using (largest) CCAT containers so as to minimize the number of cross-connection commands needed to enable data transfer. A system and method are provided for enhancing VCAT networks to include faster service restoration rates and faster connection setup times. One embodiment includes expanding available VCAT timeslots to include available CCAT timeslots. A routing and signaling control module alerts a source network element, internal network elements and a destination network element that the data transmission includes VCAT payloads rather than the expected CCAT payloads. By issuing this alert, the routing and signaling control module instructs an end-point monitoring function to overlook any mismatch between the expected CCAT rate and the received VCAT traffic. Otherwise, if the mismatch is not overlooked, then the end-point monitoring function will squelch the received VCAT traffic, which terminates the data communication | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219129 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING NETWORK SOCKETS BETWEEN APPLICATIONS - A system and method for establishing communication over a network includes devices, instructions, and/or operations for: executing a browser application within a web browser, the web browser including a security mechanism for restricting access to and from the browser application; receiving, by the browser application, a private network address of an endpoint device; establishing a first network socket connection and a second network socket connection between the browser application and an application; and sending loss-sensitive network traffic over the first network socket connection and loss-tolerant network traffic over the second network socket connection. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219130 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TWO WAY COMMUNICATION AND CONTROLLING CONTENT IN A GAME - A method for two way communication and control of a game may include executing, by a host device in communication with a computer network, a game application within a web browser. A communication channel is established over the computer network and between the game application and a controller application running on an endpoint device. Data is sent over the communication channel for controlling and playing the game application within the game application. A system for two way communication and control of a game is also provided. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110219131 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TWO WAY COMMUNICATION AND CONTROLLING A REMOTE APPARATUS - A system for controlling a remotely controlled apparatus includes executing, by a remotely controlled apparatus, a program for controlling actions of the remotely controlled apparatus. The system includes a first network connection between the remotely controlled apparatus and a network hub device configured to extend the range of a computer network may be established. The system also includes second network connection between the network hub device and an endpoint device executing an application for controlling the remotely controlled apparatus may be established. An endpoint device may send data over the first and second network connections for controlling the remotely controlled apparatus. An application executing within a web browser may process the data. A method for controlling a remotely controlled apparatus is also provided. | 09-08-2011 |
| 20110225308 | DATA COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - According to one embodiment, a data communication apparatus includes a communication unit configured to transmit a transmission frame and receive a reception frame via a plurality of networks, a storage unit configured to store a first identifier indicating by way of which of the plurality of networks the communication unit has received a reception frame or a second identifier indicating by way of which of the plurality of networks the communication unit transmits a transmission frame, a hardware protocol processing unit, and a software processing unit. The hardware protocol processing unit performs protocol processing on the reception frame to write the first identifier to the storage unit, and perform the protocol processing on the transmission frame to read the second identifier from the storage unit. The software protocol processing unit performs the protocol processing on the transmission frame to write the second identifier to the storage unit, and perform the protocol processing on the reception frame to read the first identifier from the storage unit. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225309 | METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PERFORMING PCRF-BASED USER INFORMATION PASS THROUGH - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for performing PCRF-based IP CAN session information pass-through are disclosed. According to one method, a policy charging and rules function (PCRF) receives Internet protocol connectivity access network (IP CAN) session information from an access network-aware gateway. The PCRF forwards at least a portion of the IP CAN session information to a deep packet inspection (DPI) node. | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110225310 | CONTENT DELIVERY SYSTEM - This system | 09-15-2011 |
| 20110231559 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A first determination section determines, when an instruction for connection establishment is issued, whether or not connection information including target apparatus specifying information that uniquely specifies a predetermined target apparatus is stored in a first storage section. A first connection section performs, when the first determination section determines that the connection information is stored in the first storage section, a process for establishing a connection by wireless communication to the target apparatus that is specified based on the target apparatus specifying information stored in the first storage section. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231560 | User Equipment (UE) Session Notification in a Collaborative Communication Session - A communication system facilitates notification of a controller User Equipment (UE) about the changes of session description in a collaborative session by subscribing to a Session Continuity Controller (SCC) Application Server (AS). First, controller UE subscribes to its dialog event package with the SCC AS. Second, SCC AS maintains several dialogs with controller UE, controllee UE(s) and remote UEs within the collaborative session. Third, when there is an updates in the session description of UEs in the collaborative session, SCC AS notifies the controller UE about the change in a SIP NOTIFY request that is constructed by having an XML body with a session description element containing the Session Description Protocol (SDP) of all of the controllee UEs and remote UEs, including media lines and related information such as as the IP addresses of the UEs. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231561 | System and Method for Routing SUPL Proxy-Mode Traffice When Multiple Nodes are Deployed in a Network - A system and method for connecting a mobile device to a node in a wireless network. A query may be received for a mobile device from a location based application. In response to the query a first message may be transmitted to the mobile device from a first node, the first message being populated with at least one predetermined parameter. At a second node, it may then be determined whether to forward a second message from the mobile device to the first node via the second node as a function of the availability of the first node or the at least one predetermined parameter. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231562 | Method and Arrangements in a Communication Network - Methods executed in a server in a communication network are provided. The server handles messages for at least one client and/or application. The method includes identifying deterioration in a connectivity or reachability between the server and the at least one client and/or application; and transmitting a re-establishment message to the at least one client and/or application. The message makes or enables the at least one client and/or application reestablish the connectivity or reachability. Related devices are also provided herein. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110231563 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR INITIATING PACKET DATA NETWORK DISCONNECTION - A method, a device, and a system for initiating Packet Data Network (PDN) disconnection are provided, so as to achieve disconnection of one or more specific PDNs. The method includes that: a Foreign Agent (FA) or a Mobile Access Gateway (MAG) receives PDN disconnection information from an authenticator; and initiates Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP) deregistration to a PDN Gateway (PDN GW) corresponding to the PDN disconnection information. The device includes a receiving module and a transmitting module. The system includes an FA or an MAG, and an authenticator connected to the FA or the MAG in a communicable manner. | 09-22-2011 |
| 20110238847 | Saving a Connection Profile when Unable to Connect to a Wireless Local Area Network - Various connection parameters of a wireless local area network ‘WLAN’ may be saved in a WLAN client device in a connection profile, even if the WLAN client device is unable to connect to the WLAN. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238848 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Difficulties involved when a plurality of setting methods for setting communication parameters are usable are overcome. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110238849 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ESTABLISHING NETWORK CONNECTION SERVICE, AND AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHED OPTICAL NETWORK - A method for establishing a network connection service includes: initiating a request for establishing a network connection service from the user side of a source end to the user side of a sink end; a network ingress node and network egress node of the network connection service communicating through message exchange to determine a network connection between the two nodes for supporting the network connection service and a protocol adaptation stack from the user side to the network side in the network connection service; and the network ingress node and the network egress node establishing the network connection supporting the network connection service and configuring the adaptation stack, so as to establish the network connection service. With the invention, no manual configuration is needed, and it is possible to reduce the time delay in the connection establishment and facilitate multi-service transport under a multi-service transport network condition. | 09-29-2011 |
| 20110246656 | END-USER NOTIFICATION UPDATES OF SESSION EVENTS - A method for controlling sessions between an IP Multimedia Subsystem network, IMS network, and at least two communication terminals ( | 10-06-2011 |
| 20110252150 | System and Method for Processing User Information - A method for processing information, such as user preferences and other user information, operates in connection with a server and/or a browser device. A connection is established between the browser device and the server, and a unique identifier is transmitted from the server to the browser device for storage on the browser device. User information is then received at the server, from the browser device and stored in a memory of the server, and the unique identifier is associated with the user information in the memory of the server. The user information includes one or more of the following types of information: language preferences, graphic display configuration preferences, other display preferences, disability preferences, marketing preferences, content preferences, personal user information, browsing history information, visitor type information, customer status information, relationship information, and user analytic information. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110252151 | MOBILITY IN PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS - A method for mobility in peer to peer communication for a first peer, comprising registering a first Internet Protocol (IP) address and IP mobility method of the first peer with a P2P tracker, establishing a peer to peer (P2P) connection with a second peer, changing locations and obtaining a second IP address, registering the second IP address of the first peer with the P2P tracker via IP mobility method, and transmitting information to the second peer in the P2P communication. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110252152 | RELIABLE MESSAGING SYSTEM AND METHOD - A reliable messaging channel is created using multiple independent HTTP requests. In one embodiment, a method (a) establishes a session identifier by exchanging messages with a recipient using an application layer communication protocol (e.g., HTTP); and (b) uses the application layer communication protocol to send ordered data to the recipient by assigning one or more sequence numbers according to the predetermined order in the data. The session identifier may be generated, for example, using a random number of generator. In one implementation, the session identifier is not less than 96 bits long. The sender may receive from the recipient acknowledgements each acknowledging receipt of the data bearing a corresponding sequence number. Data to be sent in the opposite direction may piggy-back on an acknowledgement by including the data in a non-zero length payload. Data received out of order are queued. The sender may limit the rate at which data is transmitted to a “window size” (i.e., no more than a predetermined amount of data is sent within a predetermined time period). The window size is adjusted according to a channel condition (e.g., an amount of data retransmitted or lost during the predetermined time period). In one implementation, the window size is adjusted by doubling or halving, consistent with the channel condition. | 10-13-2011 |
| 20110258331 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR, PROGRAM, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Even when multiple providing apparatuses joined in a network are activated as providing apparatuses, a new apparatus can be added to the network without degrading the network security or the ease of use of the providing apparatuses, a apparatus activates an operation as a providing apparatus of a communication-parameter in accordance with the a state notification of an operation as a providing apparatus of a communication-parameter, which is received from another communication apparatus. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110258332 | METHOD, PUSH SYSTEM, AND RELEVANT DEVICES FOR SETTING UP PUSH SESSION - A method, a push system, and relevant devices for setting, up a push session are provided. The method for setting up a push session includes: obtaining device identity information of a client; adding the device identity information of the client to a Session Initiation Request (SIR) message; and sending the SIR message to the client according to the device identity information of the client, and requesting the client to set up a push session connection based on a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) with a server according to the SIR message. The push system includes a server and a client. The server includes an information obtaining unit, a message adding unit, and a request sending unit. The client includes a request receiving unit and a judging and connecting unit. Hence, the setting up of push sessions based on the SIP is implemented. | 10-20-2011 |
| 20110264812 | DYNAMIC CONNECTION MANAGEMENT ON MOBILE PEER DEVICES - Dynamically evaluating candidate connections as alternatives to an active connection between a first computing device and a second computing device. The first computing device transitions to one of the candidate connections to replace the active connection based on the evaluation. The evaluation and transition occurs based on time intervals, events, or conditions. Maintaining the candidate connections enables mobile devices, for example, to be resilient to and tolerant of topology changes affecting the active connection. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264813 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION SESSION ESTABLISHMENT - A method and system for managing communication session establishment is provided. The method includes receiving a request from a first communication device to establish communication session with one or more communication devices. The method then receives a plurality of media type parameters associated with communication session establishment based on Session Description Protocol (SDP). The method further sends the plurality of media type parameters to the one or more communication devices. Further, the method receives media capabilities information of each communication device based on SDP. The media capabilities information includes at least one of information associated with types of media each communication device is capable of receiving and information about types of media each communication device is incapable of receiving. The method then establishes communication session between the first communication device and each of the one or more communication device based on the capabilities of each of the communication devices. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110264814 | System and Method for Implementing a Session Initiation Protocol Feature - A method for implementing a SIP feature includes, in particular embodiments, establishing a communication session via a communications platform between a first and second user and receiving a request from a third user to join the communication session. The second and third users are from a plurality of users using a shared line. The method further includes integrating communications of the third user into the communication session. In particular embodiments the method includes establishing a communication session between a first and second user via a communications platform. The method also includes receiving a select request that locks the communication session so that a third user cannot resume the communication session with the first user. In particular embodiments the method includes receiving a request from a first user of a shared line to enable a privacy feature that reduces call information generated by the communications platform in remote state notifications. | 10-27-2011 |
| 20110270999 | DEVICE OF SD TYPE USING A SINGLE WIRE PROTOCOL - The invention is a portable electronic device comprising a non volatile memory and a memory controller. The portable electronic device comprises a connector having eight pads able to communicate using a protocol of Secure Digital® type. The connector comprises at least one additional pad intended to be linked to an antenna. The additional pad is able to communicate using a protocol of SWP type. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110271000 | Automatically Configuring A Web-Enabled Portable Device To Access The Internet - Automatically configuring a portable electronic device for accessing a site on a public network is disclosed. The method and system include establishing a connection to at least one server for establishing and maintaining website accounts, and sending information uniquely identifying the electronic device to the at least one server. The at least one server sends user account information to the device, including an account ID and password, created based on the electronic device information. The user account information is stored on the device for use the next time the device accesses the website, whereby the user does not have to enter account information in order to establish the ISP connection or the website account before accessing the public network or, if the user account is not completely set up, to establish the user account a next time the device connects to the at least one server. | 11-03-2011 |
| 20110276702 | Tunneling apparatus and method for client-server communication - An HTTP tunneling service is described for creating a tunneled path between a client and a server (e.g., over a firewall or other data/protocol filtering device). According to one embodiment of the invention the client sends the server an initial request to open a preliminary socket connection which includes a secure client ID previously assigned to the client. The server opens the preliminary socket connection, generates a random client ID and transmits the random client ID to the client. The preliminary socket connection is then closed. The client then sends a second request to open a second socket connection using both the unique ID and the secure client ID for authentication purposes. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276703 | System and Method for Establishing a Peer-to-Peer Communication Session - The present invention describes a system and method of establishing a peer-to-peer communication session between first communication device and second communication devices. Routing information of the first communication device is provided to the second communication device via a server coupled to a wide area network, and routing information of the second communication device is provided to the first communication device via the server. The first communication device communicates with the server to maintain updated first communication device routing information and port availability. Authentication information of second communication device is provided to the first communication device via the wide area network and the open port of the first communication device in order to authorize the initialization of a peer-to-peer communication session between the first communication device and the second communication device. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276704 | Apparatus and method for triggering session re-negotiation between access network and access terminal in a high rate packet data system - The invention relates to a method for triggering re-negotiation of a session when an Access Terminal moves from one access network (source AN) to another access network (target AN) having different capabilities in high rate packet data system. According to an exemplary embodiment of the invention, the source AN is allowed to store all the protocol subtypes, protocols and applications that AT is capable of and also allowing the AT to send this information in priority order during session negotiation and hence facilitating the transfer of this information from source AN to target AN during session transfer when AT moves from one AN to another AN. An alternate embodiment is to let the AT send the protocol subtypes, protocols and applications and other AT capable information to target AN after it moves to a new AN or by letting the Rev-A capable AN query the AT's capability information and then the AT providing this information. In another exemplary embodiment, the invention includes re-negotiation by introducing a revision (like Protocol revision) information in overhead information messages that an AN broadcasts to all ATs. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276705 | Managing Associated Sessions in a Network - A method and a system for managing associated sessions in a network is described, wherein the network comprises a network element configured for managing associated sessions between the network and user equipment. The method comprises the steps of providing a composition session identifier for associating sessions in a network; exchanging the composition session identifier between a user equipment and the network element; and associating two or more sessions with the composition session identifier by exchanging the composition session identifier. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110276706 | CONTENT MANAGEMENT ACROSS SHARED, MOBILE FILE SYSTEMS - A content management system and method are disclosed having one or more shared file systems located on one or more networks having a firewall. The content management system includes an explorer client, a mounting client, and a gateway. The gateway is in communication with both the explorer client and the mounting client. The explorer client forms a profile of a user device by determining the characteristics of the user device. The mounting client determines the capabilities of the one or more file systems and where content resides on each of the one or more file systems. The gateway then creates a virtual abstraction layer based on the profile of the user device and the capabilities of the one or more file systems. | 11-10-2011 |
| 20110283004 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC CHANNEL SETUP - Provided is a device and a method for automatically setting up a channel. A method for setting up a channel in a slave node includes examining whether a Link Control Protocol (LCP) session with a master node is opened by changing a time slot within a variable range, and performing an Internet Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP) connection with the master node when the LCP session is opened. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110283005 | GENERIC BROADBAND APPLICATION AND PLUG-INS - A network device may include one or more devices to select, upon receiving a broadband card at the network device, a first vendor-specific plug-in provided in the network device, to detect the broadband card; one or more devices to determine that the first vendor-specific plug-in fails to detect the broadband card; and one or more devices to select, when the first vendor-specific plug-in fails to detect the broadband card, a second vendor-specific plug-in provided in the network device, to detect the broadband card, the first vendor-specific plug-in being associated with a first vendor, and the second vendor-specific plug-in being associated with a different, second vendor. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110283006 | COMMUNICATING WITH AN IN-BAND MANAGEMENT APPLICATION THROUGH AN OUT-OF-BAND COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL - A remote management controller is provided for use in conjunction with a managed host computer. The remote management controller exposes a virtual network interface controller, such as a driverless virtual USB network interface controller, to the managed host computer. Through the in-band connection provided by the virtual network interface controller, the remote management controller can communicate with in-band management applications executing on the managed host computer. The managed host computer can also access services executing on the remote management controller through the in-band communications interface. The remote management controller can also enable communication between the management client computer and in-band management applications executing on the managed host computer. The managed host computer can also access an out-of-band communications network between the remote management device and a management client computer. | 11-17-2011 |
| 20110289226 | POLICY CO-ORDINATION IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In order to address the problem of allowing a GGSN of a UMTS core network to work towards multiple Policy Control Functions (PCFs) co-located with P-CSCF nodes using the COPS protocol, a policy control function coordinator (PCF-C) is implemented between the GGSN and the P-CSCF. A single COPS connection is established between the GGSN and the PCF-C while a COPS connection is established between the PCF-C and each of the P-CSCF nodes. Decisions made at the PCFs are routed to the GGSN via the PCF-C, and responses generated at the GGSN are routed to the appropriate PCFs via the GGSN. This architecture avoids conflicts which might otherwise arise with the COPS protocol. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110289227 | METHOD OF MULTI-TERMINAL CONNECTION TRAVERSING NAT WITHOUT THIRD PARTY INTERFACING - A method of multi-terminal connection traversing a network address translation (NAT) without third party interfacing is provided, which is applicable to existing network communication protocols. The method is mainly used to realize connection of a user end having a NAT or a firewall with a third party, and enable the user end to form direct network interconnection with other user ends through a multi-terminal network connection system without additionally opening a network connection port for the NAT or firewall. Moreover, the method enables a user of the user end to additionally load Internet application programs, such as Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and video conference, on the multi-terminal network connection system based on demands of the user or for work. In addition, the user end may realize direct network interconnection through a checking mechanism of the NAT Internet protocol, so as to avoid information security vulnerability caused by exceptional opening of the network connection port for network connection, and the network connection is implemented without third party or proxy server interfacing. Therefore, the security of network connection between user ends is enhanced and the occurrence of information vulnerability is reduced. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110289228 | INTERNET PROTOCOL CAMERA MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND METHOD - An Internet Protocol (IP) camera management system and method determines a MAC address of an IP camera corresponding to a communication channel, searches an IP address of the IP camera through the determined MAC address of the IP camera, then establishes connection between the IP camera management system and the IP camera through the searched IP address. Furthermore, video image data are acquired from the IP camera through the communication channel and are displayed on a display interface. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110289229 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR WI-FI SETUP AND CONFIGURATION - The present invention relates generally to the configuration of wireless networks and the configuration of electronic devices to connect to wireless networks, especially when those electronic devices have limited user interfaces and/or no display screen. The present invention makes use of devices already connected to a wireless network, previously connected to a wireless network, or capable of acting as an interface to discover the connection settings required to connect to the wireless network. The present invention further uses a shared communication medium between that connected device and an unconnected device in order to share the connection settings needed to connect the unconnected device. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110289230 | APPLICATION SWITCH SYSTEM AND APPLICATION SWITCH METHOD - In data processing of network traffic (a communication amount), relay processing is distributed in a wide area. Specifically, an application switch system which controls a connection between a plurality of client terminals and a plurality of servers, is provided with at least one switch, a relay unit configured to perform protocol relays; and a controller. The controller is provided with a section for performing a centralized control on a route table used to determine a destination in the switch; a section for controlling relay processing of the relay unit; a section for selecting one server as a connection destination from the plurality of servers; a section for selecting a route which links between one client terminal of the plurality of client terminals and the selected server, and which contains the relay unit, and for setting the selected route to the route table in the switch; and a section for setting relay information used when the relay unit performs the protocol relay, to the relay unit. | 11-24-2011 |
| 20110296036 | Method and apparatus for single sign-off using cookie tracking in a proxy - An intermediary (such as a web reverse proxy), which is located between a web browser and one or more backend applications, manages cookies that are provided by the backend applications and returned to the web browser during a user session. When a session sign-off event is initiated in the reverse proxy, HTTP “Set-Cookie” headers are sent back to the web browser to destroy the cookies (in the browser) that represent sessions with the one or more backend application(s). | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110296037 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR INTERFACING WITH A VEHICLE COMPUTING SYSTEM OVER MULTIPLE DATA TRANSPORT CHANNELS - In one or more embodiments, two or more devices may interface with a computing system over multiple communication channels. A connection may be established between a computing system and two or more devices communicating data using different communication protocols. The communication protocol of the two or more devices may be determined and a general transport protocol for communicating data with the two or more devices based on the respective communication protocols may be imposed on the communication protocol of the two or more devices. Data may be communicated with the two or more devices based on the general transport protocol. An event may be performed at the vehicle computing system or the two or more devices based on the data. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110296038 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTINUATION OF A WEB SESSION - A computer-implemented method, executed on a web server, for facilitating continuation of a web session after the web session has been terminated. The method includes initiating a web session having an associated web page with a URL upon receiving a request from a web browser. During the web session, the method includes generating session information, including a transaction identifier and state information. The generated session information is then transmitted to a web browser followed by termination of the web session. After the termination, the web session is resumed by the web server by accepting the session information from the web browser, authenticating the transaction identifier, and validating the client data corresponding to the authenticated transaction identifier. After validation, the web session may be continued at the web page. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110296039 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BACK-OFF ALGORITHM HAVING DIFFERENT RETRY TIME CLASSES - A method and apparatus for a back-off timer having different retry time classes, the method checking whether a connection establishment attempt for a first service on a connection slot is in a back-off time that equals or exceeds a predetermined threshold; and if yes, allowing a second service access to the connection slot. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110296040 | IP Multimedia Service Provision - A method of operating an IP Multimedia Subsystem user terminal to facilitate user services over a communication network comprising an IP Multimedia Subsystem network. The method comprises receiving a SIP message and parsing the message to identify a generic service identifier. Upon identification of said generic service identifier, either a web link within the message body is identified and a web browser session to said web link established, or web page content contained within the message body is identified and displayed. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110296041 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION SESSION CORRELATION - An arrangement and method in a communication system such as an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio receiver for reducing the impact of interference from an intermittent interfering signal transmitted by an interfering system which may be co-located with the OFDM system or may be remotely located. Each OFDM symbol in a received OFDM signal includes a guard interval (GI), a middle portion, and a last portion identical to the GI. The arrangement determines which portion of each OFDM symbol is contemporaneous with the interfering signal and time-shifts a fast Fourier transform (FFT) window in the OFDM receiver to minimize or eliminate FFT processing of samples of the OFDM symbol that are contemporaneous with the interfering signal, thereby minimizing the impact of the interfering signal. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110296042 | METHOD, TERMINAL, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR PROCESSING MESSAGE - A method, a system, a server, and a terminal for processing message are described. The method includes the steps as follows. A notification message for requesting to establish a session sent by a session requester is received, in which the notification message carries session management information related to the session. The session management information of the session in the notification message is acquired, and a session connection with the session requester is initiated according to the session management information. Alternatively, the notification message is acknowledged according to the session management information, a reply message is generated according to an acknowledgement result, and the reply message is sent to the session requester. A Data Synchronization (DS)/Device Management (DM) server determines problems of the sent notification message according to the information returned from the terminal, so as to perform the further processing, thereby preventing the DS or DM server from blindly and repeatedly sending the notification message when not being informed that a session connection is established by a DS or DM terminal. | 12-01-2011 |
| 20110302315 | DISTRIBUTED SERVICES AUTHORIZATION MANAGEMENT - One or more techniques and/or systems are disclosed for providing resource authorization to users of a distributed memory store (e.g., a distributed web-based cloud service). A session ID that identifies a location of an authorization document in a distributed memory store is used to access the authorization document, which comprises a global section with a principal ID related to a user. The user can be authorized to utilize a resource (e.g., in a distributed cloud service) if a resource section is present for the principal ID in the authorization document, and has appropriate resource data for the resource. If the resource section is not present, it can be created in the authorization document, and identified by a resource identifier. Authorization data can be loaded into the newly created resource section, and the authorization document, with the global and resource sections, is saved to a local cache for the distributed memory store. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110302316 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING AND USING SESSIONS AS RESTful WEB SERVICES - Disclosed herein are systems, methods, and non-transitory computer-readable storage media for managing and using sessions as RESTful web services. A session is exposed as a resource having an associated Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), and the session is composed with other services. For example, a client sends an HTTP POST request to a web server to create a session, an HTTP GET request to retrieve a representation of the session, an HTTP PUT request to update the representation of the session, and an HTTP DELETE request to delete the session so that resources within the session are reclaimed. Since the sessions are resources, the resources can be shared among clients, and the web servers knows the client states while still being stateless, making them robust and scalable. Composing web services with the common RESTful session service reduces complexity and enhances interoperability. | 12-08-2011 |
| 20110307617 | Method And Apparatus For Handling Peers With Dynamic IP Connectivity Status In Peer-To-Peer Networks - Method and apparatus for communication in a peer-to-peer (P2P) network are provided. The method comprises a first peer in the P2P network selecting a primary Internet Protocol (IP) address from a plurality of IP addresses associated with the first peer. The method further comprises the first peer providing the primary IP address to a second peer as an address the second peer is to use in initiating communication with the first peer. The apparatus comprises a user equipment (UE) that includes a processor configured such that the UE selects a primary IP address from plurality of IP addresses associated with the UE and registers the primary IP address in the P2P network. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307618 | SECURE LEGACY MEDIA PERIPHERAL ASSOCIATION WITH AUTHENTICATION IN A MEDIA EXCHANGE NETWORK - A method for secure access and communication of information in a distributed media network is disclosed and includes detecting, at a first geographic location, when a media peripheral is communicatively coupled to at least one computing device at the first geographic location within the distributed media network. The media peripheral may be validated for use at the first geographic location using at least one identifier. The at least one identifier may be associated with the media peripheral. The at least one identifier may be used to facilitate communication by and/or to the media peripheral over the distributed media network. The at least one identifier associated with the media peripheral and at least one identifier of a user may be requested utilizing the media peripheral. The at least one identifier associated with the media peripheral is a serial number of the media peripheral. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110307619 | RELAY PROCESSING METHOD AND RELAY APPARATUS - A relay apparatus is connected to a plurality of servers and a client to relay a message transmitted from the client to one of the plurality of servers. The relay apparatus receives from one of the plurality of servers a response to a first message transmitted from the client. The relay apparatus stores in a data storage a first server identifier of the server that has transmitted the response, in association with a first session identifier included in the response. The relay apparatus extracts, upon receiving a second message transmitted from the client, a second server identifier from the data storage on the basis of a second session identifier included in the second message. The relay apparatus determines a destination server of the second message on the basis of the extracted second server identifier. The relay apparatus transmits the second message destined to an address of the determined destination server. | 12-15-2011 |
| 20110314167 | Peer to Peer Secure Synchronization Between Handheld Devices - A method implemented in a user equipment (UE) comprising a processor. First information is stored to a removable memory connected to the UE and second information is stored to a non-volatile memory of the UE. The first information may be a unique value and may include additional information. A connection request based at least in part on the first information is received. A connection response based at least in part on the second information and the connection request is sent. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110314168 | SYSTEM FOR INTERACTION OF PAIRED DEVICES - A system and method are disclosed for setting interactions between paired computing devices. Paired devices may interact in a master-slave relationship, where the slave device is an intelligent computing device capable of performing a wide variety of functions for the master computing device. When initiating a paired relationship, various characteristics relating to the initiating device are recorded, and the used in defining the relationship between the initiating device and the target device with which the initiating device paired. In a further example of interactions between paired computing devices, user-defined policies may be recorded, stored and implemented which affect the behavior of one or both computing devices when the two devices are paired. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110314169 | GROUP ACCESS TO IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM SERVICE - A method of facilitating access to services of an IP Multimedia Subsystem network by user terminals and services located behind an access point to said network. The access point is associated with a subscription to the IP Multimedia Subsystem network. The method comprises including within an Implicit Registration Set defined for said subscription, a wildcarded Public User Identity, Public Service Identity, Public User Identity sub-domain representative of a range of Public User Identities, or Public Service Identity sub-domain representative of a range of Public Service Identities. At IP Multimedia Subsystem registration of said access point with the IP Multimedia Subsystem network, the Public User Identities and Service Identities contained in the Implicit Registration Set are distributed to a Serving Call Session Control Function allocated to said access point and to a Proxy Call Session Control Function to which said access point is attached. | 12-22-2011 |
| 20110320616 | Managing Secure Sessions - The different illustrative embodiments provide a method, a computer program product, and an apparatus for managing secure sessions. An identity of a requestor is verified in response to receiving a request from the requestor to access a resource. The identity of the requestor comprises authentication information used to identify a number of privileges to the resource for the requestor. A session cookie is sent to the requestor by a first data processing system. The session cookie identifies the number of privileges for a session. A migration cookie is sent to the requestor by the first data processing system, wherein the migration cookie is used to recreate the session on a second data processing system. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110320617 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DETECTING INCOMPLETE REQUESTS, TCP TIMEOUTS AND APPLICATION TIMEOUTS - Described herein is a method and system for preventing Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. An intermediary device is deployed between clients and servers. The device receives a first packet of an application layer transaction via a transport layer connection between the device and client. The device records a last activity time for the transport layer connection based upon the timestamp of the first packet. The device receives subsequent data packets and determines whether the data in the packets completes a protocol data structure of the application layer protocol. If the device determines that the subsequent packet completes the protocol data structure, the last activity time is updated. If the device determines that the application layer protocol remains incomplete, the device retains the last activity time and determines that the duration of inactivity for the transport layer connection exceeds a predetermined threshold. The device may subsequently drop the connection. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110320618 | METHOD OF AUTOMATICALLY DETERMINING LINK SPEED FOR A MULTISPEED FIBER LINK MODULE - Automatically determining a link speed between link partners using a multispeed fiber module. An embodiment solves the problem of how to determine the highest common link speed between short range (SR)/long range (LR) fiber link partners when at least one of the link partners is using a multispeed fiber module. In an embodiment, a multispeed fiber module comprises a module that is capable of both 10 gigabit (GB) per second Ethernet and 1 GB per second Ethernet or lesser data transfer speeds over a fiber optical link. In an embodiment, the method comprises trying each link speed in a known succession, from highest supported speed to lowest supported speed. In an embodiment, an initiator link partner “blinks” a transmit laser, which alerts the link partners that a link speed determination session is being initiated. By automatically determining link speed, the user is relieved of the necessity to manually configure the link speed. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20110320619 | METHOD FOR OPERATING A NETWORK AND A NETWORK - For allowing an enhancement of diversity of network applications in a simple way a method for operating a network, especially an IP (Internet Protocol) network, is claimed, wherein a local network is in connection with the network via a gateway and wherein a UE (User Equipment) of the local network is performing a session setup by communicating with a functional entity of the network in order to communicate with or to start a UE-related and/or session-related application. The method is characterized in that the application is communicating with a local network controller, wherein the network controller is receiving a UE-related and/or session-related parameter (LID—Local Identifier) from the application for locating a UE and/or a specific session within the local network based on the received parameter. Further, an according network is claimed, preferably for carrying out the above mentioned method. | 12-29-2011 |
| 20120005355 | SESSION ESTABLISHMENT METHOD USING GATEWAY SERVER AND PHONE IDENTIFICATION - Disclosed is a method of establishing a session between a mobile communication terminal and a computer linked to the Internet via a gateway server therebetween through WAP or TCP/IP by using identification information of the mobile communication terminal as a connection key to transmit/receive data packets. Consequently, stable and accurate data communication between the mobile communication terminal and the computer linked to the Internet can be achieved. | 01-05-2012 |
| 20120011258 | STORAGE PROCEDURES FOR APPLICATION SERVER SESSION PERSISTENCE - Session persistence storage schemes are provided. These schemes may include identifying a change in a session attribute for an application client session, querying a session persistence table associated with the application running in the application-server environment, and updating an attribute in the record identified by the query of the session persistence table, where the query is made to a session persistence table with session attributes grouped by common traits. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120011259 | User Authentication Across Multiple Network Stacks - A computing device provides an application that uses multiple protocol stacks to communicate with a server. The server requires messages from each of the protocol stacks to include a credential for a user of the computing device. The credential is a set of information that includes identification and proof of identities that is used to gain access to a resource. However, the user is not prompted for the credential more than once. In some embodiments, this is accomplished by storing the credential at the computing device for retrieval by the protocol stacks when the application uses the protocol stacks to communicate with the server. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120011260 | Method and system for transmitting large message mode converged IP messaging - The present invention discloses a method and system for transmitting a large message mode Converged IP Messaging (CPM) message, wherein the method comprises the following steps that: when sending a large message mode CPM message to a CPM client of a receiver, a CPM client of a sender sends a session invitation message to the CPM client of the receiver and negotiates with the CPM client of the receiver to determine a media transmission link between the CPM client of the sender and the CPM client of the receiver; the CPM client of the sender sends the content of the large message mode CPM message to the CPM client of the receiver via the determined media transmission link; and the CPM client of the sender or the CPM client of the receiver initiates a flow to end the session of the large message mode CPM message. The present invention realizes the transmission of a large message mode CPM message. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120011261 | SESSION CHANGE METHOD AND SESSION CHANGE DEVICE - A technique is disclosed to realize the change of session seamlessly and with high degree of freedom while reducing the increase of the processing load on a session control server upon a request to change the session from a terminal and to decrease the load on network traffic. According to this technique, trigger information is embedded in a session of content used by the terminal. When this trigger information is detected, the terminal carries out an operation to set up as trigger action (e.g. the change to another session). The relation between the trigger information and the trigger action may be described in sequence information, which is held by the terminal in advance or the trigger action may be described in the trigger information. With regard to certain trigger information, different types of trigger actions may be set up for each terminal (or, depending on the condition of the terminal). As a result, different types of session change can be performed, depending on each terminal and on the conditions of the terminals. | 01-12-2012 |
| 20120016998 | Refreshing a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Session - In one embodiment, a session is refreshed using a message that is simplified for refresh purposes. The refresh message that is used is a message used for another purpose in a protocol (e.g., SIP). For example, a reINVITE message may be used as a refresh message. If the reINVITE message is used for its intended purpose, the reINVITE message may be used to change the characteristics of a session. This reINVITE message includes an SDP and full header such that the parameters can be properly changed. However, the reINVITE message may be used to refresh a session. This may be referred to as a simple refresh message. But, the simple refresh message does not include an SDP or any other message body. The simple refresh message includes only a reduced header. This reduces time spent building and parsing the simple refresh message. | 01-19-2012 |
| 20120023241 | SSL Cache Session Selection - In one embodiment, a gateway implements: selecting, from a plurality of instances, an instance with which to begin a secure initial communication session; establishing, with the selected instance, a secure initial communication session; generating information regarding the session, the information including a session identifier associated with the session and an instance identifier associated with the selected instance; receiving a request to resume the session, the request including the session identifier and the instance identifier; using the instance identifier to identify a processing instance from the plurality of instances; and resuming the initial communication session using the identified processing instance, wherein at least a portion of the information associated with the initial communication session is re-used for the resumed session. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023242 | IPv6 GENERATION TO TRIGGER A VIRTUAL LEASED LINE SERVICE - Various embodiments relate to a communications system and related method for determining an address of a service access point (SAP) upon establishment of a service over a packet data network. A customer SAP connected to a provider SAP may request a link-local address for another customer SAP on the far-end of the packet data network. When the service, such as a virtual leased line (VLL) is not yet established, the provider SAP may generate an address for the customer based on another value, such as its own media access control (MAC) address. The generated address may then allow the service to become established, which may allow Neighbor Solicitation and Neighbor Advertisement packets to be sent, analyzed, and extracted. The provider SAP may then replace the generated address with the address extracted from the Neighbor Solicitation or Advertisement packet received after the service was established. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023243 | Methods and Devices for Providing Internet Access through a Restricted Device - According to an aspect of the disclosure, novel solutions are disclosed for providing Internet access to a client device (e.g., desktop computer, laptop computer, tablet computer or portable electronic device) using non-privileged portions of an application programming interface (“API”) of a gateway device (e.g., smartphone or cellular phone). According to another aspect of the disclosure, novel solutions are provided for building a Wireless Internet gateway system through a Wi-Fi capable gateway device that also has Internet access provisioned by a cell phone carrier. A Wi-Fi Internet gateway system can be implemented on a device where it was originally impossible to do so, due to various access restrictions to core functionalities, such as root access restrictions. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023244 | IP SERVER FACILITATING NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN DEVICES UTILIZING VIRTUAL NETWORK CONNECTIONS - A method includes, first, communicating by first and second devices, to a server, network contact information; and thereafter, communicating data from the first device to the second device by communicating, by the first device, a request to the server to engage in communications with the second device, communicating, by the server, the request received from the first device, communicating, by the second device, acceptance to the server of the request to engage in communications with the first device, communicating connection information, by the server, to one or more of the first and second devices for enabling an open network connection between the first and second devices, using virtualized network capabilities of a virtual machine of the first device, establishing a network connection with the second device using the connection information, and communicating data, from the first device using the virtualized network capabilities of the virtual machine, to the second device. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120023245 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING A PIECE OF INFORMATION INDICATIVE OF A DESIRE TO BE INVOLVED IN AT LEAST ONE USER APPLICATION SESSION - A method and apparatus are provided for processing an item of information indicative of a desire for involvement in at least one application session, established according to the SIP protocol, in progress for a user of a telecommunications network. The at least one session is controlled by a first terminal of the user. The method is implemented by the first controller terminal, and includes receiving a notification of an event relating to the user, which includes at least one item of information indicative of a level of involvement desired by a second terminal of the user, and making a decision relating to the desired level of involvement. In the case of a positive decision, an involvement command is transmitted relating to the level of involvement desired by the second terminal to the telecommunications network. | 01-26-2012 |
| 20120030363 | DISPLAYING A NETWORK TOPOLOGY MAP WITH A REDUCED NUMBER OF OBJECTS - Displaying a network topology map may include creating a database representing objects in a network; requesting a topology map of a certain type to represent at least a portion of the network; determining from the database a set of objects corresponding to the type of the requested map; determining parameters associated with the map type; and, while the cardinality of the set is above a threshold: presenting at least one of the parameters on a display, enabling a user to specify a value or group of values for the parameter, and reducing the cardinality of the set by removing objects not matching the value or group of values specified for the parameter. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030364 | Proxy appparatus and operation method thereof - A proxy apparatus includes a multi-core CPU comprising a plurality of CPU cores; and an extended listen socket comprising a plurality of queues provided for the plurality of CPU cores respectively. A kernel thread and a proxy thread operate on each of the plurality of CPU cores. The kernel thread executes a receiving process of an establishment request packet of a first connection with a client terminal, assigned to a corresponding one of the plurality of CPU cores, and registers an establishment waiting socket which contained information of the first connection, on a corresponding one of the plurality of queues. The proxy thread refers to the corresponding queue, and establishes the first connection based on the establishment waiting socket when the establishment waiting socket is registered on the corresponding queue. | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120030365 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Relevant Service Levels - Method and apparatus in a router ( | 02-02-2012 |
| 20120042084 | SELF-ORGANIZING IMS NETWORK AND METHOD FOR ORGANIZING AND MAINTAINING SESSIONS - A method and system for setting up and maintaining an IMS session. The method comprising transmitting an invite message from a registered user equipment, forwarding the invite message to a selected SIP proxy (P-CSCF), forwarding the invite message to a specified SIP server (S-CSCF) and relaying said invite message to a destination. The invite message contains a header and a payload. The header includes an identifier for the load balancing node. The load balancing node is assigned to the user equipment. There are at least two load balancing node, a primary and a secondary load balancing node. The identifier for the load balancing node does not change even if there is a failure of one of a primary load balancing node, the P-CSCFs or S-CSCFs. During registration, the routing information for the load balancing node is added into both via and record-route headers in a SIP registration request. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120042085 | Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Improving Resource Reservation in Session Initiation - There are provided measures for resource reservation improvement in session initiation. Such measures for resource reservation improvement may for example comprise receiving a session initiation request of a user, determining an authentication type of the user, detecting, in the received session initiation request, an absence of authentication data required for an authentication in accordance with the determined authentication type of the user, and preventing a resource reservation for the requested session initiation. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120042086 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING SECURE COMMUNICATION LINK BETWEEN COMPUTERS OF VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - A technique is disclosed for establishing a secure communication link between a first computer and a second computer over a computer network. Initially, a secure communication mode of communication is enabled at a first computer without a user entering any cryptographic information for establishing the secure communication mode of communication. Then, a secure communication link is established between the first computer and a second computer over a computer network based on the enabled secure communication mode of communication. The secure communication link is a virtual private network communication link over the computer network in which one or more data values that vary according to a pseudo-random sequence are inserted into each data packet. | 02-16-2012 |
| 20120047273 | Device initiated multiple grants per interval system and method - A cable modem integrated session border control circuit operates as a point of demarcation between a local area network (LAN) and a DOCSIS network and, in response to receiving a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message, which includes Session Description Protocol (SDP), from a VoIP device coupled to the LAN, communicates with a Cable Modem Termination System (CMTS) to take advantage of DOCSIS Dynamic Quality of Service (DQoS) if a VoIP session between the VoIP device and a remote endpoint includes use of the DOCSIS network. The cable modem integrated session border controller further determines required service flow attributes. If required service flow attributes, as determined from the SDP of the SIP message, matches service flow attributes of an existing UGS service flow with a CMTS, a DOCSIS Dynamic Service Chance (DSC) request is used to add an additional sub flow to the existing UGS service flow. If attributes fail to match attributes of all existing UGS service flows, a DOCSIS Dynamic Service Change (DSC) request is used to initiate an additional UGS service flow with the required service flow attributes. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120047274 | METHOD FOR MANAGING DATA BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICES AND PERSONAL COMPUTER - An operation method for a mobile device is provided by the present invention. First, a data transmission link is established with a personal computer installing into a personal computer via a network. When a operation is executed, it is checking whether or not a predetermined folder in the mobile device has a predetermined data to be saved into the personal computer. When the predetermined data to be saved into the personal computer, the predetermined data is transmitted to the personal computer. Then, a requirement command is sent to the personal computer through the data transmission link, so as to control the personal computer to save the predetermined data. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120047275 | NETWORK ACCESS METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE, SERVER, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A network access method, a terminal device, a server, and a communication system are provided. The method includes: querying corresponding parameters of connection according to a service type; and accessing a network by using the queried parameters of connection. Compared with the prior art in which the network is accessed by attempting to access one by one, the technical solution directly acquires correct parameters of connection for accessing the network without establishing a large number of redundant connection attempts, thereby greatly improving network access efficiency, reducing access time, decreasing a system load and network burden, and improving user experience. | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120047276 | SESSION PUSH TRANSFER - A first UE (User Equipment) initiates a device discovery procedure by registering ( | 02-23-2012 |
| 20120059944 | ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION SESSION - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of facilitating a communication session between a user terminal and an Application Function over an IP Connectivity Access Network. The method comprises, at a Policy and Charging Rules Function, receiving information relating to the session from the Application Function (B3), determining one or more Policy and Charging Control rules for the session including deriving a Quality of Service authorised for the session, and sending the Policy and Charging Control rules, including the authorised Quality of Service, to a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (B5). At the Policy and Charging Enforcement Function, installing the one or more Policy and Charging Control rules including the aurhtorised Quality of Service for the session, and, if it is determined that the authorised Quality of Service cannot be achieved due to a limitation on a Quality of Service available in the Access Network, then reporting this to the Policy and Charging Rules Function and including the available Quality of Service (B8). At the Policy and Charging Rules Function, receiving the report from the Policy and Charging Enforcement Function, including the available Quality of Service, and using the available Quality of Service to determine whether and/or how to maintain the session. | 03-08-2012 |
| 20120066399 | MITIGATING CONNECTION IDENTIFIER COLLISIONS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A new instance of a connection that is in the wait state can be established while mitigating connection identifier collisions. Based on a connection identifier in a connection request received at a server from a client, it is determined that a previous instance of a connection represented by the connection identifier is in a wait state. An acknowledgement message comprising wait state parameters associated with the connection identifier and original connection parameters associated with the previous instance of the connection in the wait state is provided from the server to the client. In response, the server receives a compliance message comprising updated wait state parameters and updated connection parameters from the client. The new instance of the connection represented by the connection identifier that previously represented the previous instance of the connection is established based, at least in part, on the updated wait state parameters and the updated connection parameters. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066400 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PARALLEL MUXING BETWEEN SERVERS IN A CLUSTER - Systems and methods are provided for providing parallel muxing between servers in a cluster. One such system can include a cluster of one or more high performance computing systems, each including one or more processors and a high performance memory. The cluster communicates over an InfiniBand network. The system can also include a middleware environment, executing on the cluster, that includes one or more application server instances. The system can further include a plurality of muxers, wherein each application server instance includes at least one muxer. Each muxer can receive information from a plurality of threads to transmit to a different muxer on a different application server instance over the Infiniband network using a plurality of parallel channels. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120066401 | ROLE BASED SERVICES - The present invention allows individual providers to be assigned to one or more roles. A role corresponds to a function, service, or action that can be fulfilled by the provider who is assigned to the role. A media session may be initiated by sending a session request from a requester toward a given role instead of being initiated directly to a particular provider. The media session may include a voice or video call, instant messaging session, file transfer session, application sharing session, or the like. The session request is routed to a role server, which may direct the session request to the provider who is assigned to the corresponding role. Once a decision is made to route the session request to a particular provider, provider routing rules may further control how the session requests are routed to the provider terminals of the particular provider. | 03-15-2012 |
| 20120072601 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INTERNET PROTOCOL (IP) BASED SERVICES INDEPENDENT OF PLATFORM OR OPERATING SYSTEMS USING IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) - An apparatus and method for providing at least one Internet Protocol (IP) based service independent of platform or operating systems using IP multimedia subsystem (IMS), the method comprising implementing a call setup signaling and an end-to-end media transfer using an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS); and implementing the at least one Internet Protocol (IP) based service using the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS). | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072602 | TRANSPOSE BOX BASED NETWORK SCALING - The deployment and scaling of a network of electronic devices can be improved by utilizing one or more network transpose boxes. Each transpose box can include a number of connectors and a meshing useful for implementing a specific network topology. When connecting devices of different tiers in the network, each device need only be connected to at least one of the connectors on the transpose box. The meshing of the transpose box can cause each device to be connected to any or all of the devices in the other tier as dictated by the network topology. When changing network topologies or scaling the network, additional devices can be added to available connectors on an existing transpose box, or new or additional transpose boxes can be deployed in order to handle the change with minimal cabling effort. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072603 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIUM - A communication device includes a communication start request output unit and a response notification acceptance unit. The communication start request output unit outputs a communication start request to an output destination communication device. The response notification acceptance unit accepts a response notification with respect to the communication start request from the output destination communication device. When the response notification acceptance unit accepts a response notification indicating connection rejection due to a mismatch of a communication standard as the response notification with respect to the output communication start request, the communication start request output unit again outputs the communication start request to the output destination communication device in the communication standard to which the output communication start request conforms. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120072604 | TECHNIQUE FOR DELIVERING CONTENT TO A USER - A technique is provided for delivering content to a user. The user sends at least one quality indicator to a first content-delivery device, referred to as a secondary device. The indicator relates to delivery of a portion of the content by a second content-delivery device, referred to as a primary device. When the secondary device detects an event that might affect the delivery of the content by the primary device to the user, on the basis at least of the quality indicators relating to at least a delivery of content by the primary device, it commands the user to transfer from the primary device to the secondary device in order to enable the secondary device to deliver portions of the content that have not been delivered by the primary device. | 03-22-2012 |
| 20120079123 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING ACCESS OF A FIRST MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE TO AT LEAST ONE NETWORK ACCESSIBLE BY A SECOND MOBILE ELECTRONIC DEVICE - A method, system and apparatus for or automatically enabling access of a first mobile electronic device to at least one network accessible by a second mobile electronic device, the second mobile electronic device storing configuration data for accessing the at least one network. A communication session is automatically established between the first mobile electronic device and the second mobile electronic device via a local link. The configuration data is automatically received at the first mobile electronic device from the second mobile electronic device via the local link in response to establishing the communication session. The configuration data is automatically installed at the first mobile electronic device such that the at least one network is accessible by the first mobile electronic device using the configuration data. | 03-29-2012 |
| 20120089741 | Media link establishment method for transmitting large message mode CPM messages to groups - The present invention provides a method of establishing a media transmission link for transmitting a large message mode Converged IP Messaging (CPM) message to a group. The method comprises the following steps: Session Description Protocol (SDP) media parameter negotiation is accomplished through session invite messages and success response messages among a transmitter CPM client, a source participation function entity, a controlling function entity, a destination participation function entity and a receiver CPM client; according to the negotiation result, media transmission links are respectively established between the transmitter CPM client and the source participation function entity, between the source participation function entity and the controlling function entity, between the controlling function entity and the destination participation function entity, and between the destination participation function entity and the receiver CPM client. The present invention solves the problem that there is a lack of the MSRP transmission link in the large message mode in the prior art. | 04-12-2012 |
| 20120096173 | Middlebox Control - In order to carry out actions such as setting up a call from an entity in the address realm of one middlebox to an entity in the address realm of another middlebox, then a middlebox control node such as a call server is used. Previously, the middlebox control node has needed to have pre-configured information about all the middleboxes and which address realms they are associated with. The present invention provides one or more middlebox-identity-providing nodes which are separate from the middlebox control node, and which are more directly connected to the end users of the service than the middlebox control node. This provides greater flexibility in network design and removes the need for middlebox information to be pre-configured at the middlebox control node. Instead, this information is sent to the middlebox control node, as part of signalling messages, from middlebox-identity-providing nodes. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096174 | Middlebox Control - In order to carry out actions such as setting up a call from an entity in the address realm of one middlebox to an entity in the address realm of another middlebox, then a middlebox control node such as a call server is used. Previously, the middlebox control node has needed to have pre-configured information about all the middleboxes and which address realms they are associated with. The present invention provides one or more middlebox-identity-providing nodes which are separate from the middlebox control node, and which are more directly connected to the end users of the service than the middlebox control node. This provides greater flexibility in network design and removes the need for middlebox information to be pre-configured at the middlebox control node. Instead, this information is sent to the middlebox control node, as part of signalling messages, from middlebox-identity-providing nodes. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096175 | DYNAMIC ADJUSTMENT OF CONNECTION SETUP REQUEST PARAMETERS - The number of connection setup request packets that are accepted for processing by a network element are dynamically adjusted based on the run time capacity of the network element. The number of accepted connection setup request packets that can be initiated for processing are dynamically modified based on the processor utilization and average latency of completion of processing the connection setup requests. The network element can apply a scheduling policy to those connection setup request packets to differentiate the processing treatment of different types of connection setup requests. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096176 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PUSHING CONTENT TO A TERMINAL UTILIZING A NETWORK-INITIATED DATA SERVICE TECHNIQUE - A system is provided for pushing content to a terminal located within a mobile network or a private network. The system includes a network node, such as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) proxy, located across a public network from the network including the terminal. The network node is capable of subscribing to a push service on behalf of the terminal such that the network node is also capable of receiving push content in accordance with the push service. Thereafter, the network node is capable of establishing a network-initiated data session with the terminal. In response to the network-initiated data session, the network node is further capable of registering the terminal such that the terminal is capable of receiving the push content based upon the registration. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120096177 | METHODS, APPARATUSES, AND RELATED COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR NETWORK ELEMENT RECOVERY - It is disclosed a method (and related apparatus) comprising establishing a control session by transmitting and receiving control session-related messages, transmitting restart information indicating a restart of a network element, receiving at least one protocol-related message of a first control session including session-related detail information, transmitting a restoration request message based on the session-related detail information, receiving at least one session parameter necessary for restoring the at least one first session, and restoring the at least one first session based on the received session-related detail information and the at least one session parameter. It is further disclosed a method (and related apparatus) comprising receiving restart information indicating a restart of a network element, processing at least one protocol-related message of a first control session to include session-related detail information, and transmitting at least one session parameter necessary for restoring the at least one first session, and the at least one protocol related message. | 04-19-2012 |
| 20120102207 | REGISTRATION OF AD-HOC GROUP MEMBERS INTO AN INFRASTRUCTURE NETWORK - In an example embodiment, a technique employing a device (registration assistant) that can communicate with an infrastructure network to configure devices via an ad hoc network to communicate with the infrastructure network. An ad hoc device associates with the registration assistant and sends a request to be configured. The registration assistant contacts a registration service on the infrastructure network and sends data identifying the ad hoc device to the registration service. The registration assistant upon receiving a registration response from the registration assistant forwards configuration data to the ad hoc device that can enable the ad hoc device to communicate with the infrastructure network. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102208 | MULTI-LAYER STACK PLATFORM FOR CLOUD COMMUNICATIONS - A multi-layer stack platform is provided for cloud communication connections and services between devices. The system includes three or more layers, including a directory component, an applications component, and a peering component. An interconnection component may also be provided for communication between the applications component and the peering component. The components operate to provide communication services, such as sessions, according to the functionality of a selected application by adhering to device, user, and routing rules and preferences. The device, user, and routing rules and preferences are maintained in and processed by the directory component. The applications component receives communication session requests and accesses corresponding application scripts to perform the requested session. The peering component receives the device, user, and routing rules and preferences, and establishes connection between devices based on the rules and preferences as defined by the directory component. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102209 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A THIN CLIENT SESSION - The exemplary embodiment concerns a method for establishing a Thin Client session between a Thin Client device ( | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102210 | Communication Device, Communication Method, and Computer-Readable Storage Medium Storing Communication Program - A communication device performs P2P communication with the other communication device by establishing a session through a server, and includes a first transmitting portion, if the communication device operates as a called device requested to establish the session, upon the receiving a session start message from the other communication device, transmits to the other communication device a response message including information on a port for directly receiving data from the other communication device; a session establishing portion establishes the session by transmitting a control message to a port specified by information in the session start message or a response message received from the other communication device; a command accepting portion accepts a user's command permitting to receive from the other communication device; and a starting portion starts transmitting and receiving of data to and from the other communication device, upon the accepting of the command. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120102211 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USE IN AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A method is provided for use in an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, in which a session control protocol (such as the Session Initiation Protocol, SIP) is used to establish and manage sessions within the IMS. The method comprises using session control protocol messages (such as Session Initiation Protocol messages) to carry node-specific charging information, where the charging information is required for charging purposes at a charging control system of the IMS. A private header part (such as a P-Charging-Vector header) of the session control messages may be used to carry the node-specific charging information. The node-specific charging information may comprise charging data and at least one of: an indication of the type of the charging data; a name or identifier of the node, allowing the node to update charging data which relates to the node and which is carried by a session control message received by the node; and an indication of the version of the charging data, a different version indication being used to indicate different charging data; node name; version number; data name; and value. At least one session control protocol message may be used to carry node-specific charging information relating to a plurality of different nodes. | 04-26-2012 |
| 20120110195 | UNCONNECTED CONNECTIVITY ANALYSIS - A computing device retrieves a set of configuration files of devices associated with a network, and extracts, from the set of configuration files, Internet protocol (IP) address information to form an IP address database. The computing device also extracts, from the set of configuration files, border gateway protocol (BGP) routing protocols to form a BGP routing database. The computing device analyzes the IP address database and the BGP routing database to determine network connection information for each of the devices associated with the network and generates an output file that includes the network connection information for each of the devices associated with the network. The device connectivity information is determined without establishing a connection between the computing device and the devices associated with the network. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110196 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR SELECTIVELY SHARING CONTENT - A method for sharing content with participants in a conference including establishing a network conference session, identifying restricted content to be shared, and identifying global content which is a subset of the restricted content. The method further includes the steps of identifying a global participant group for the network conference session wherein members of the global participant group attend the network conference session using one or more communication devices, identifying a restricted participant group for the network conference session wherein members of the restricted participant group attend the network conference session using one or more communication devices, transmitting the restricted content to the restricted participant group, and transmitting the global content to the global participant group. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120110197 | TECHNIQUE FOR RELOCATING A SERVING GATEWAY ASSOCIATED TO A USER EQUIPMENT - A technique for relocating a Serving Gateway associated to a User Equipment is described. One method implementation of this technique is performed in a Mobility Management Entity, MME, and comprises the steps of a) triggering, from the MME, a relocation of a source SGW to a target SGW by sending a Create Session Request message to the target SGW, b) receiving, from the target SGW, a Create Session Response message including S1 General Packet Radio Service, GPRS, Tunneling Protocol, GTP, endpoints of the target SGW, c) updating, from the MME to an Evolved NodeB, eNB, an Internet Protocol, IP, address and a Tunnel Endpoint IDentifier, TEID, of the target SGW, and d) sending, from the MME to the source SGW, a Delete Session Request to delete a session. | 05-03-2012 |
| 20120117253 | Methods for reducing latency in network connections and systems thereof - A method, computer readable medium, and apparatus for reducing latency in network connections include receiving at a proxy server device a first response from one or more server devices in response to a first request from a client device for a network resource stored on the one or more server devices. The proxy server device determines whether or not the first response is a redirect message, and sends a second request to the one or more server devices when the first response includes the first redirect message, such that the sending is performed at least partially based upon the received redirect message. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117254 | Methods, Devices and Computer Program Products for Actionable Alerting of Malevolent Network Addresses Based on Generalized Traffic Anomaly Analysis of IP Address Aggregates - Methods for providing alerts in a network are disclosed. Some methods include collecting network traffic data corresponding to multiple subsets of network addresses during a predefined time interval. A suspect subset of the subsets of network addresses that corresponds to anomalous network activity may be identified based on the network traffic data and using at least one of multiple anomaly detection metrics. A source network address within the suspect subset of network addresses that corresponds to the anomalous network activity is identified. An alert corresponding to the source network address may be generated. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117255 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR THE SOLICITATION OF PRESENCE INFORMATION FROM PRESENCE SOURCE - A method for requesting presence information from a presence source by a presence server is provided. The method includes receiving, from a presence source, media feature tag value corresponding to presence information published by the presence source, respectively; requesting specific presence information from the presence source using a specific media feature tag value from among the media feature tag values; transmitting a publication rule for controlling publication operation of the presence source; and receiving, from the presence source, the specific presence information published by the presence source, according to the publication rule. Each of the media feature tag value represents a type of presence information published by the presence source | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117256 | Session Switching During Ongoing Data Delivery in a Network - There is described a method of delivering data from a server to a client device in a network. Data packets with a first source address are sent in a first session from the server to the client device. A Session Switch Information (SSI) message, including a second source address, is sent from the server to the client device. A second session is configured between the server and the client device, and data packets with a second source address are sent in the second session from the server to the client device. The same transport protocol may be used for both sessions, and the method can be 10 used to switch between unicast and multicast delivery. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120117257 | Method and Apparatus for Notifying Connection Attributes for Local Internet Protocol (IP) Access - The invention discloses a method for notifying connection attributes of local IP access, comprising in the procedure of establishing a PDN connection, a mobility management element notifying the user terminal of connection attributes of the PDN connection. The invention also discloses an apparatus for notifying connection attributes of local IP access, comprising: a determination unit for determining connection attributes of the PDN connection for user terminal in the process of establishing the PDN connection; a notification unit for notifying the user terminal of the connection attributes of the PDN connection. The mobility management element at the network side of the invention notifies the UE of the type and attribute information of the PDN connection at the same time after determining the PDN connection to be established for UE so as to facilitate the UE determining the corresponding access policy according to the attribute information of current PDN connection when moving. | 05-10-2012 |
| 20120124224 | Mobile interactive kiosk method - To regulate information exchanges, provide personal security and enhance personal privacy inside and outside a network and to regulate devices. Provided is a personal bio-data mining and pairing method of a human user to one or more communications devices capable of functioning in a network cloud environment and, where the rules governing cloud organization and communications are based in part upon a human user bio-data and real world information exchanges commonly occurring at specific geographical locations. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124225 | COGNITIVE CONNECTIVITY MANAGEMENT - A system for configuring communications in an apparatus. An apparatus may determine whether access to resources not in the apparatus is desired. If it is determined that access to the resource is desired, an access request may be sent to a resource manager. The apparatus may then receive connection information in response to the access request, and may then utilize the connection information when selecting a communication configuration usable for accessing the desired resources that are accessible via the other apparatus. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124226 | SERVER, METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING NODE INFORMATION FOR P2P NETWORK - The invention provides a server, a method and a system for providing node information for P2P network. A server in a peer-to-peer (P2P) network comprises: a location information storage unit which stores coordinate information indicating a coordinate of each data node in the P2P network in a coordinate system that is created based on communication delays among data nodes in the P2P network; and a node information providing unit which, upon receipt of a request for information on data nodes having a first data item, selects one or more data nodes from data nodes having the first data item based on the coordinate information, and provides information indicating the selected one or more data nodes. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124227 | BROWSER-BASED VOIP SERVICE METHOD AND SYSTEM - A system is disclosed for providing browser-based VOIP services. The system includes a web server, a database server, a rendezvous server, and a streaming media server. The web server is configured to provide a web page for a user computer and a recipient computer to set up a call connection based on a computer-to-computer (CC) call link sent from the user computer to the recipient computer. The database server is coupled to the web server to provide user data. Further, the rendezvous server is configured to support a real time media flow protocol (RTMFP) to enable direct peer-to-peer communication between the user computer and the recipient computer to establish the call connection. The streaming media server is configured to support a real time messaging protocol (RTMP), an RTMP tunneled (RTMPT), and an RTMP secured (RTMPS) and to be a fail-over for the rendezvous server. Further, the CC call link is created by the web server upon a request from the user computer and sent to the recipient computer. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124228 | MULTIMEDIA SESSION TRANSFER CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD - A multimedia session transfer control system and method are provided. The multimedia session transfer control system includes a service transfer control server configured to issue a session transfer message including information on transfer of a session when the session between a receiving terminal and a transmitting terminal is transferred; and a service providing server configured to receive the session transfer message, identify a multimedia service corresponding to the session transfer, change an execution rule for the multimedia service, and provide the multimedia service whose execution rule has been changed from the transmitting terminal to the receiving terminal. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124229 | METHODS AND APPARATUS OF INTEGRATING DEVICE POLICY AND NETWORK POLICY FOR ARBITRATION OF PACKET DATA APPLICATIONS - An apparatus or method integrates device policy and network policy in order to arbitrate a priority between packet data applications or services for a data connection. In response to a request, a data connection to a wireless network is established for a first application of a first type of application or service if no data session is in progress or if a second application of a second type of application or service can share an existing data session. A hybrid arbitrator performs hybrid arbitration between the first application and the second application in response to determining that the first type and the second type cannot share the existing data session, either based upon a network policy that specifies a difference in priority between the first type and the second type, or based upon a device policy if the network policy does not specify a difference in priority. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120124230 | Method For Conversion Between SIP Message And ISUP Message And Conversion Apparatus - A method for conversion between SIP message and ISUP message for number portability service and corresponding conversion apparatus are provided. In the method for converting the ISUP message into the SIP message, the ISUP message is received and parameters related to number portability are read from the ISUP message, a number portability type is determined according to the parameters related to number portability, and the parameters related to number portability are mapped into the SIP message based on the number portability type. The SIP message includes: destination address parameter, which represents destination user number; npdi parameter, which indicates execution of the number portability dip and uniquely identifies the number portability type; and rn parameter, which represents the number to be routed to the destination user number. The conversion apparatus for converting ISUP message into SIP message and the method for converting SIP message into ISUP message and corresponding conversion apparatus are also provided. | 05-17-2012 |
| 20120131209 | NEARBY ADDRESS NETWORK SERVICE INFORMATION PROVISIONING FOR MARKETING REPRESENTATIVES - A network device receives a geographic location of a mobile device. The network device accesses a database to identify addresses within a distance parameter of the received geographic location, and retrieves attributes associated with the identified addresses from the database, wherein the attributes comprise attributes associated with one or more network services provided to customers from a network service provider. The network device sends the identified customer addresses and the retrieved network service attributes to the mobile device. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131210 | TRANSPORT LAYER CONNECTION - A system identifies a network socket on a machine by assigning a non-IP address socket anchor and a port number to the network socket. A socket anchor may comprise a globally unique number. In some embodiments, a socket anchor comprises a number having a preselected number of bits. The number having the preselected number of bits may comprise a selected number associated with the machine concatenated with a number of randomly generated bits. The number of bits of the selected number plus the number of randomly generated bits is equal to the preselected number of bits. In some embodiments, the selected number associated with the machine is a Media Access Control (MAC) address of a network interface associated with the machine. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131211 | OPTIMIZED NETWORK DEVICE DISCOVERY - A computing device retrieves a set of configuration files of devices associated with a network to be analyzed and extracts from the set of configuration files Internet protocol (IP) address information to form an IP address database. The computing device also extracts from the set of configuration files border gateway protocol (BGP) routing protocols to form a BGP routing database. The computing device analyzes the IP address database and the BGP routing database to generate a database of calculated network connection information for the devices associated with the network. The computing device conducts live network discovery, on the network and based on the IP address database, to generate a database of discovered connection information, and merges the database of calculated network connection information and the database of discovered connection information to form a master database from which output files may be generated. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131212 | NAVIGATION SYSTEM WITH SESSION TRANSFER MECHANISM AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF - A method of operation of a navigation system includes: establishing a navigation session for routing from a starting point to a destination on a device; setting a transfer condition for continuing the navigation session between the device and a further device; and transferring the navigation session when the transfer condition is satisfied for routing with the further device for displaying on the further device. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131213 | NETWORK DEVICE AND POINT TO POINT CONNECTION DISTINGUISHING METHOD - A network device connects a terminal device to the Internet using a plurality of connections. The network device obtains a quantity of different destination port numbers employed by the plurality of connections, calculates a ratio of the quantity of the different destination port numbers to a quantity of the connections, and determines that the connections include at least one point to point connection if the calculated ratio is larger than a predetermined ratio. The network device further determines that one of the connections is the point to point connection upon the condition that a communication protocol of the one of the connections is the transmission control protocol, that the destination port number of the one of the connections is larger than a predetermined port number, and that the average size of the packets of the one of the connections is larger than the predetermined size. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131214 | RELAY APPARATUS, RELAY APPARATUS CONTROLLING METHOD, AND DEVICE CONTROLLER - A relay apparatus includes a storing unit configured to store information related to a connection state between the relay apparatus and a device connected thereto, a determining unit configured to determine whether a change is a temporary change, based on a change factor responsible for the change in the connection state, in a case in which the change occurs in the connection state between the relay apparatus and the connected device. The relay apparatus includes a notifying unit configured to discontinue notifying a higher level apparatus of the change in the connection state when it is determined by the determining unit that the change in the connection state is a temporary change, and notify the higher level apparatus of the change in the connection state when it is determined by the determining unit that the change in the connection state is not a temporary change. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120131215 | MANAGING HIERARCHICALLY ORGANIZED SUBSCRIBER PROFILES - Methods are provided for managing hierarchically organized subscriber profiles. According to one embodiment, a connection for a subscriber is created based on a service context of the subscriber. A connection request is received from a subscriber of a network service delivery environment. The subscriber is associated with a first-level profile identifier indicative of a service context for the subscriber. One or more other subscribers can be associated with the first-level profile identifier. Lower-level profile identifiers are determined using the first-level profile identifier. The lower-level profile identifiers indicate a set of services that is available to the subscriber during the connection. Creating a connection for the subscriber that enables forwarding of packets based on the lower-level profile identifiers. | 05-24-2012 |
| 20120137010 | PROVIDING SERVER IDENTIFICATION TO A CLIENT - A request for a server identifier is responded to with one of two different server identifiers. A remote server identifier is provided if the remote server is available and a local server identifier is provided if the remote server is not available. A networked device may provide the server identifier in a networked system. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120137011 | PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE IN MULTI-NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Provided are a peer-to-peer (P2P) connection system and method for use in a multi-network environment. The P2P connection system includes a user terminal configured to register connection information for connecting to the user terminal through each of a plurality of connectable networks in a location server; and the location server configured to store the connection information received from the user terminal. | 05-31-2012 |
| 20120144047 | REDUCING LOAD AT A PROXY SERVER - A method is described for reducing a load placed on an endpoint server acting as an endpoint of a tunnel from a client device across a network. The method, implemented at the client device, comprises the following steps. A request to establish a new network connection is received. A risk of establishing the new network connection outside of the tunnel is determined based on a plurality of predefined criteria. The determined risk is compared with a predefined risk threshold and, if the determined risk is less than or equal to the predefined risk threshold, the new network connection is established directly via the network. If the new network connection fails before it is completed it is re-established via the tunnel. If the determined risk is greater than the predefined risk threshold, the new network connection is established via the tunnel. A client device and computer-readable medium configured to implement the method is also described. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120144048 | Method, System and Apparatus for Communication - A method for managing user terminal identification information is described. In response to an invitation message to establish communication between terminals, a first address identification of a terminal, included in the message, is examined. Based on the first address identification, a first number identification for the corresponding terminal is retrieved from an ENUM database. Based on the retrieved first number identification, a second number identification maintained for the user terminal is retrieved from an MNP database. It is checked whether the number identifications correspond to each other. Based on that, a second address identification corresponding the second communication number identification is retrieved from the ENUM database, and the invitation message is forwarded towards a recipient user terminal such that the second address identification is included in the message. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120144049 | POLICY AND/OR CHARGING CONTROL FOR A COMMUNICATION SESSION - According to a first aspect of the present invention there is provided a method of implementing policy and/or charging control for user communication sessions over an IP Connectivity Access Network. The method comprises: at a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function, configuring a plurality of profiles, each profile defining one or more policy and/or charging control characteristics; at a Policy and Charging Rules Function, configuring a plurality of profile selection rules to be used to determine which of the plurality of profiles should be applied to communication sessions; at the Policy and Charging Enforcement Function, when establishing a communication session, sending a request for policy and/or charging control characteristics for the session to the Policy and Charging Rules Function; at the Policy and Charging Rules Function, receiving the request, using the profile selection rules to select one or more profiles, and sending a response to the Policy and Charging Enforcement Function including an identifier for each of the one or more selected profiles; and at the Policy and Charging Enforcement Function, receiving the response, retrieving the one or more policy and/or charging control characteristics from the one or more selected profiles identified in the response and enforcing the retrieved characteristics for the session. | 06-07-2012 |
| 20120151073 | INTELLIGENT CACHE MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL FOR VEHICULAR NETWORKS - A method and system for cooperatively caching digital content in a vehicle for sharing with other vehicles in a vehicle-to-vehicle network. A content utility value is assigned to each piece of digital content available on the network, where the utility value is a function of the popularity of the content, the freshness of the content, and the size of the content. Any piece of content with a sufficiently high content utility value is stored in a host vehicle's collective cache, so that other vehicles may be able to retrieve it quickly on demand. The host vehicle may cache a particular piece of digital content even if the host vehicle is not interested in it. The host vehicle periodically re-computes the content utility value for all digital content in the vehicle's cache to determine if any of the data should be evicted from the cache. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120151074 | TARGETED DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN OPERATIONAL DOMAINS - The present invention extends to methods, systems, and computer program products for targeted data transfer data between operational domains. Embodiments of the invention facilitate moving data between operational domains inside and outside of a resource cloud. A proxy runs on the boundary of each operational domain, such as, for example, an on premise cluster and a resource cloud. The proxies are capable of resolving the location of the targeted entity and forwarding the data or request on to the next hop, which may either be another proxy or the worker module running on the target node. A proxy can run on the head node of an on premise cluster so that compute nodes on private networks can be targeted. A proxy can also run on a public endpoint within the resource cloud to make nodes within the resource cloud available. | 06-14-2012 |
| 20120158975 | Method and Apparatus for Detecting Network Protocols - A method and system for dynamic detection of network protocols are provided. Data is received from a device, wherein the data does not specifically identify a protocol for communication. The data is analyzed to determine a communication protocol associated with a connection. A response is transmitted to the device using the determined communication protocol. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158976 | METHODS AND APPARATUS TO MIGRATE BORDER GATEWAY PROTOCOL SESSIONS BETWEEN ROUTERS - Methods and apparatus to migrate border gateway protocol sessions between routers are disclosed. An example method to migrate a border gateway protocol session from a first router to a second router disclosed herein comprises exporting a connection state to migrate a transport control protocol connection supporting the border gateway protocol session with a session endpoint from the first router to the second router, and after the transport control protocol connection has been migrated to the second router, announcing, from the first router to the second router, routes contained in an exported routing information base associated with the session endpoint, the second router to process the routes to migrate handling of the border gateway protocol session with the session endpoint to the second router. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158977 | Method and System for Transmitting a Bearer Control Mode in Roaming Scenarios - The present invention provides a method and system for transmitting a bearer control mode in a roaming scenario. The method includes: a hPCRF sets a bearer control mode of an IP-CAN session, and forwards the bearer control mode of the IP-CAN session to vPCRF through an S9 subsession corresponding to the IP-CAN session; or, an hPCRF sets a bearer control mode of a gateway control session, and forwards the bearer control mode of the gateway control session to the vPCRF through an S9 subsession corresponding to the gateway control session. The system includes an hPCRF and a vPCRF. The present invention enables the hPCRF to select different bearer control modes for a plurality of IP-CAN sessions established by a User Equipment (UE) and to forward to the vPCRF, and the vPCRF can further send the bearer control modes to the corresponding enforcement network elements to be executed. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120158978 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR LOAD BALANCING REAL TIME STREAMING - The present application relates to systems and methods for managing of Real Time Stream Protocol (RTSP) sessions by an intermediary located between a client and a server. An intermediary located between a client and a server receives a response from the server to a request of the client to setup a media stream. The response may include a first session identifier established by the server. The intermediary may encode a port of the server and an internet protocol address of the server into the first session identifier to form a second session identifier. The intermediary may modify the response to identify the second session identifier as the session identifier provided by the server. The intermediary may transmit the modified response to the client responsive to the request of the client to setup the media stream. | 06-21-2012 |
| 20120166655 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INVOKING NATIVE FUNCTIONS OF A MOBILE DEVICE TO CONTROL A SET-TOP BOX - An approach is provided for controlling a user device native function via a web-based application at a user device (e.g., a mobile terminal). The mobile terminal executes a web-based application and a shell application, wherein the shell application provides communication between the web-based application and a native function of the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal registers the web-based application with the shell application for the communication. The mobile terminal invokes the native function of the mobile terminal via the communication based upon a communication protocol that specifies a command of a native function associated with a set top box. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166656 | Establishing Secure Communications Between Client Computing Devices Located Behind Network Security Devices - Methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, are described for establishing secure communications sessions between computing devices located behind network security devices. The method includes receiving, from a first client computing device, a request for a secure connection with a second client computing device, the request including a first transport protocol role and a first security protocol role associated with the first device. The method includes transmitting the request to the second device. The method includes receiving, from the second device, a response to the request including a second transport protocol role and a second security protocol role associated with the second device, transmitting the response to the first device, and establishing the secure connection between the first device and the second device, where the first and second security protocol roles are determined independently from the first and second transport protocol roles. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166657 | GATEWAY SYSTEM, GATEWAY DEVICE, AND LOAD DISTRIBUTION METHOD - A gateway system comprises a first packet relay device and a plurality of gateway devices. The first packet relay device determines the gateway device serving as a destination of a packet based on destination information of the packet. The gateway device determines a gateway device in charge of processing the packet based on transmission source information of the packet, and if the gateway device in charge of processing the packets is other gateway device, the gateway device transmits this packet to this other gateway device. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166658 | GMPLS NETWORK-BASED INTER-DOMAIN INTERFACE APPARATUS AND METHOD - A general multiprotocol label switching (GMPLS) network-based inter-domain interface apparatus and apparatus are provided. The GMPLS network-based inter-domain interface apparatus is installed in an edge node of a GMPLS network-based inter-domain, forms a session between edge nodes of the inter-domains, and allows the edge nodes to exchange a routing protocol message. Accordingly, link state information and routing information can be automatically exchanged in real time between inter-domains. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166659 | Node and Method for Quality of Service (QoS) Control - The present invention generally relates to a node and method for quality of service (QoS) control. The present invention particularly relates, but is not limited to, a technology that enables QoS control for a communication that is based on a protocol such as the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), which does not mandate the use of a session description protocol (SDP) message. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166660 | METHOD, SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING HOME NETWORK DEVICE, AND HOME NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - A method, a system for accessing a home network device, and a home network access device are disclosed. The method includes the steps as follows. A home network access device finds a home network device and obtains information of the home network device through a home network protocol. A data model of the home network device is established in the home network access device according to the information of the home network device. A remote service device accesses the data model of the home network device established in the home network access device through a remote management protocol. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120166661 | CONNECTION FORWARDING - Two or more network traffic processors connected with the same LAN and WAN are identified as neighbors. Neighboring network traffic processors cooperate to overcome asymmetric routing, thereby ensuring that related sequences of network traffic are processed by the same network proxy. A network proxy can be included in a network traffic processor or as a standalone unit. A network traffic processor that intercepts a new connection initiation by a client assigns a network proxy to handle all messages associated with that connection. The network traffic processor conveys connection information to neighboring network traffic processors. The neighboring network traffic processors use the connection information to redirect network traffic associated with the connection to the assigned network proxy, thereby overcoming the effects of asymmetric routing. The assigned network proxy handles redirected network traffic in much the same way that it would handle network traffic received directly. | 06-28-2012 |
| 20120173740 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION ESTABLISHMENT - A method and apparatus of establishing a network connection for P2P communications is disclosed. According to one example, a method of establishing a network connection may include establishing an initial data connection between a first network device and a second network device via a third network device, the third network device providing an initial communication channel required to exchange setup messaging between the first network device and the second network device. Other operations may include establishing another data connection between the first network device and the second device after the setup messaging is exchanged, the another connection being independent of the third network device, and transferring data messages between the first network device and the second network device via the another connection. Once the P2P connection is established, the initial data connection may be removed. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173741 | TRANSFERRING WEB DATA BETWEEN OPERATING SYSTEM ENVIRONMENTS - An electronic device having a multi-environment operating system (OS) is disclosed. The electronic device creates a web session and/or updates a browser configuration in a first OS environment based on a web session and/or a browser configuration in a second OS environment. The web session is created and/or the browser configuration is updated when a primary OS environment transitions from the second OS environment to the first OS environment. The transition may occur when the device transitions from a docked mode to a mobile mode, or from a mobile mode to a docked mode. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173742 | Method and Server Entity for Forwarding a Message Containing a Host Name or Domain Name in an Internet Based Communications Network - Method and server entity for forwarding a message containing a host name or domain name in an interne based communications network from a User Agent (UA) to the communications network or vice versa. The method comprises the steps of querying, by a proxy entity, a Domain Name Server (DNS) for obtaining from the Domain Name Server an Internet Protocol (IP) address associated with the host name or domain name, and including the Internet Protocol address in the message prior to forwarding the message to the communications network or User Agent, respectively, by the proxy entity. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173743 | Method and System for Changing Selected Home Operator of Machine to Machine Equipment - A method and a system for changing the Selected Home Operator (SHO) of a Machine to Machine Equipment (M2ME) are disclosed. The method includes: the M2ME establishing a connection with a Registration Operator (RO) through a Trusted Environment (TRE) functional entity, the RO registering the M2ME in the new SHO; the new SHO sending the new International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) to the RO or authorizing the RO to provide a new IMSI after it has passed the verification of the M2ME by the Platform Validation Authority (PVA); the RO sending the new IMSI to the M2ME through the connection established by the TRE functional entity; the M2ME replacing the old IMSI in the Universal Integrated Circuit Card (UICC) with the new IMSI; wherein the UICC and the TRE function entity are all located in the M2ME. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173744 | WIRELESS CONNECTION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING IMAGE RECOGNITION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A method and apparatus for wireless connection with an external device using image recognition in a mobile communication terminal is provided. In the method for wireless connection with an external device using image recognition in a mobile communication terminal, an image including network connection information is acquired by a camera. The network connection information is acquired by recognizing the image through an image recognition algorithm. The wireless connection with the external device is performed using the acquired network connection information. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120173745 | SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL-BASED INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION - Video on demand (VoD) and other video streaming and delivery mechanisms are provided using a messaging protocol (e.g., a session initiation protocol (SIP))-based approach that builds upon existing service delivery platforms. In one example, SIP functionality is extended to provide the ability to control and alter a delivery mode of a content stream, such as to change a playback mode or quality of service, by providing such requests as part of the instruction or payload of existing SIP messages, or by providing new SIP messages. Using SIP allows for third party control, such as by IPTV applications, which is not provided by current Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)-based systems. SIP also can establish a peer-to-peer connection between a client and a SIP-enabled content server to allow the client to directly control the media stream. As an advantage over RTSP, SIP provides for bi-directional messaging between SIP endpoints. | 07-05-2012 |
| 20120179830 | ADAPTIVE NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION BINDING FOR WIRELESS NETWORKS - The binding of addresses and port ranges is performed by a device, based on network usage conditions. The device may determine a port block size, indicating a quantity of ports, to allocate to client devices. The device may transmit a message including an Internet Protocol (IP) address and a port range. The message may indicate that the IP address and port range is to be allocated to the one of the client devices based on an order of a first port value and a second port value in the port range, where the port range covers a quantity of ports corresponding to the port block size. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120179831 | ENCRYPTED VPN CONNECTION - A method, apparatus, and system are described that provides fully automated network access to remote networked devices. The device and system permits the remote access of a local network without any pre-configuration or administrative burden at the local network. Embodiments as described herein provide a “plug and play” option to insert a device into the local network and provide access to select target devices on the network, even non-routable devices, without first requiring dedicated host software or other administrative privileges or configurations be set at the local network. | 07-12-2012 |
| 20120185604 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INDICATING CALLEE PREFERENCES - A system and method of communicating callee device preferences to a network is present. A first device identification is transmitted. The first device identification at least one of identifies the callee device and describes a capability of the callee device. A caller capabilities pattern is encoded into a first session initiation protocol (SIP) message. The caller capabilities pattern describes an attribute of a candidate caller device. An action pattern is encoded into the first SIP message. The action pattern defines an action and the network is configured to take the action. The action pattern is associated with the caller capabilities pattern. The first SIP message is transmitted to the network. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120185605 | METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING AND/OR USING A COMMUNICATIONS MODE - Methods and apparatus for determining whether two or more communications devices, e.g., wireless terminals, in a communications system should communicate using direct peer to peer communications or via one or more infrastructure elements, e.g., base stations, are described. The determination whether a given pair of communications devices should communicate using direct peer to peer communications, rather than via the infrastructure element(s), is determined by a control device. The control device instructs various wireless terminals to make various signal measurements and/or transmit signals to be measured. Based on the signal measurements the control device estimates interference caused by the direct peer to peer link to the existing communications devices, the direct peer to peer link channel quality and/or interference caused to such a direct peer to peer link by existing communications devices which are communicating using peer to peer signaling and makes a mode decision based on such information. | 07-19-2012 |
| 20120191865 | SESSION TABLE FRAMEWORK - In accordance with embodiments disclosed herein, there are provided methods, systems, and apparatuses for implementing a session table framework including, for example, receiving a configuration request at a host organization from a client device; generating, via a configurator engine of the host organization, a configuration model having metadata therein; generating a user session unique to the client device in a memory of the host organization; creating a user session data table within the user session of the memory based on the metadata of the configuration model; populating data into the user session data table based on the metadata of the configuration model; generating a renderable User Interface (UI) based on the metadata of the configuration model and based further on the data in the user session data table; and transmitting the renderable UI to the client device for display, responsive to receiving the configuration request. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191866 | TRANSPORT LAYER CONNECTION - A method identifies a network socket on a machine by assigning a non-IP address socket anchor and a port number to the network socket. A socket anchor may comprise a globally unique number. In some embodiments, a socket anchor comprises a number having a preselected number of bits. The number having the preselected number of bits may comprise a selected number associated with the machine concatenated with a number of randomly generated bits. The number of bits of the selected number plus the number of randomly generated bits is equal to the preselected number of bits. In some embodiments, the selected number associated with the machine is a Media Access Control (MAC) address of a network interface associated with the machine. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120191867 | MANAGING REQUESTS FOR CONNECTION TO A SERVER - A connection accepting system, an accepting server, and a connection-acceptance managing method, for reducing the processing load of a server and allowing connection to the server in the order of arrival of connection requests. An accepting server accepts a connection request to an application server made from a client terminal through a network. The accepting server issues a reference number to the client terminal at the time of receiving a first connection request, and manages a connection priority for connection to the application server, based on the reference number. The accepting server transmits a program for automatically executing a connection request again after a predetermined time period, at the time of issuing the reference number to the client terminal. | 07-26-2012 |
| 20120198082 | Automatic Fallback Communication Mechanism - A method disclosed. The method includes attempting to communicate with a printer in a network via a first network communications protocol, determining if the communication with the printer is successful via the first network communications protocol and automatically communicating with the printer via a second network communications protocol if communication via the first network communications protocol the printer is unsuccessful. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120198083 | CLIENT DEVICE AND METHOD FOR FINDING AND BINDING TO A HOME CONNECTION - In an embodiment, a client device scans to detect available remote connections using a network protocol. Upon detecting one or more available remote connections, the client device presents or transmits client credentials that are unique to the client device to the remote connections or devices until the client device finds a remote connection that accepts the credentials. The remote connection that accepts the credentials is stored as the home connection by client device, and the client device connects to the home connection. Once the home connection is set, the client device will no longer seek other connections, and will only attempt to re-connect with the home connection if the connection is lost. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120198084 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATIONS FOR BROWSER-BASED APPLICATIONS - An approach is presented for facilitating communications for browser-based applications. A data communication platform determines to associate a communication identifier with a browser session. The browser session hosts, at least in part, a web application. The communication identifier facilitates addressing of the browser session, the web application, or a combination thereof via a process that is not specific to the browser session, the web application, or a combination thereof. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120198085 | System and Method for CSCF Entity Disaster Tolerance and Load Balancing - The present invention discloses a system and method for CSCF entity disaster tolerance and load balancing the system comprises P-CSCF entities, I-CSCF entities and S-CSCF entities, and further comprises a DNS Server. The present invention uses a DNS UPDATE message to report the load equivalent weight of the CSCF entity at regular time, so that the DNS Server can use the load equivalent weight when executing the load balancing strategy. It makes the disaster tolerance and load balancing in the IMS network be much easier to use and extend, thus reducing the load of the IMS network. | 08-02-2012 |
| 20120203917 | METHOD TO LINK DEVICES WITH EACH OTHER VIA A NETWORK - There is provided a method to link a first device ( | 08-09-2012 |
| 20120210009 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, SYSTEM, METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM OF PROGRAM - A communication apparatus includes a memory that stores data and a processor to execute a procedure, the procedure including, obtaining time information which indicates a communication time period in which each of a first apparatus, a second apparatus and the communication apparatus is capable of communicating, deciding on the basis of the communication time period whether or not a first communication between the communication apparatus and the first apparatus is capable of being established in a first period of time, and whether or not a second communication between the first apparatus and the second apparatus is capable of being established in a second period of time which is later than the first period of time, and notifying the first apparatus of the first period of time, in which the data stored in the memory is transmitted to the second apparatus, after confirming the second period of time. | 08-16-2012 |
| 20120210010 | COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A client device ( | 08-16-2012 |
| 20120215930 | P-CSCF ADDRESS DISCOVERY - The present invention relates to a method for enabling IP multimedia system, IMS, signalling traffic in a Policy and Charging Control, PCC, environment between a user equipment ( | 08-23-2012 |
| 20120221737 | COMMUNICATION DEVICES, METHODS AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIA - A communication device including a controller that controls the communication device to execute steps of: establishing a first communication session between the communication device and a first communication device; determining whether a second communication session between the first communication device and a second communication device is established; acquiring a communication parameter of the second communication session from the first communication device when the controller determines that the second communication session between the first communication device and the second communication device is established; and determining a bandwidth of the first communication session based on the acquired communication parameter of the second communication session. | 08-30-2012 |
| 20120226815 | SECURE MANAGEMENT OF SIP USER CREDENTIALS - A device may obtain, from a remote device on a network, information regarding loads and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) devices on which the loads are installed. In addition, the device may access a database storing load compatibility information, identify problematic loads based on the obtained information and the load compatibility information, determine fixes for one or more of the problematic loads, and apply the fixes to the one or more of the problematic loads over the network. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120226816 | DATACASTING SYSTEM WITH HIERARCHICAL DELIVERY QUALITY OF SERVICE MANAGEMENT CAPABILITY - Datacasting systems may include one or more compound carousels each managing one or more elementary carousels, and managed by a bandwidth manager. Subsets of compounds carousels may be identified, for example, according to priority levels. Bandwidth allocations may be determined for the compound carousels. For example, the bandwidth manager may utilize multiple bandwidth allocation cycles to determine the bandwidth allocations. The multiple bandwidth allocation cycles may form a sequence. Each bandwidth allocation cycle may at least partially allocate an available datacasting bandwidth resource to at least one of the identified subsets of the compound carousels. The allocations may be based at least in part on desired bandwidths determined by the compound carousels and/or one or more bandwidth guidelines of datacast sessions associated with the compound carousels. | 09-06-2012 |
| 20120233341 | MICROCONTROLLER WITH CAN BUS MODULE AND AUTO SPEED DETECT - In a method for initializing a Controller Area Network (CAN) module in a microcontroller, the following steps may be provided: measuring the period times between a plurality of falling or rising edges of a CAN signal; sorting the period times; determining difference values between adjacent period times of the sorted period times; sorting the difference values; selecting a first difference value from the sorted difference values and determining a first frequency from the first difference value; initializing the CAN module using the selected frequency; receiving a CAN signal frame; determining whether an error occurred; if an error occurred selecting a next frequency and repeating initializing the CAN module until a valid CAN frequency has been found. | 09-13-2012 |
| 20120233342 | Opportunistic Network Updates - Methods, systems, and apparatus, including computer programs encoded on a computer storage medium, for providing opportunistic network updates. In one aspect, a method includes determining, by a queue manager on a mobile device that has a network interface, to fulfill one or more requests to upload or download data through the network interface, and in response to determining to fulfill the requests, applying, by the queue manager, one or more rules to the requests, to classify each request as a request that is to be fulfilled, or a request that is not to be fulfilled. The method also includes causing, by the queue manager, the requests that are classified as to be fulfilled to be fulfilled, or the requests that are classified as not to be fulfilled to not be fulfilled. | 09-13-2012 |
| 20120239817 | System and Method for Controlling Connections to an Application Server - A system and method are provided for controlling a connection to an application server. The method comprises storing a chat state indicative of interactivity with a chat feature in a social networking application; detecting resumption of the social networking application subsequent to an interruption thereto; determining the chat state; and restoring the chat feature for the social networking application to the determined chat state. The method may also, upon detecting inactivity with respect to the chat feature, comprise executing one or more operations to maintain a connection with a server for the social networking application according to a first communications protocol. The method may also, upon detecting that a second period of time has elapsed subsequent to detecting inactivity, comprise receiving data associated with the chat feature according to a second communications protocol. | 09-20-2012 |
| 20120239818 | Method and system for providing a session in a heterogeneous environment - A computer-implemented method and system are disclosed for providing a user with a consistent view of user session in a distributed environment, wherein the session requires establishing conversations between the external device and application servers (A1, . . . , C4) of a system. The system is provided with at least a routing means configured to establish, for a given session, a conversation between the external device and one of the application servers. Establishing the conversation includes the following steps performed at the routing means with at least one data processor: receiving a call from one among the application server and the external device to reach the other among the application server and the external device; determining if the call includes a session identifier (ID), If the call does not include a session ID, then opening a session for said conversation, creating a session ID that uniquely identifies said session, adding the session ID to the call, storing the session ID and routing the call to the other among the application server and the external device, establishing thereby the conversation; If the call already includes a session ID, then routing the call to the other among the application server and the external device and allowing said conversation to join an already opened session that is uniquely identified by said session ID, thereby establishing the conversation and enabling the conversation to share the context of said already opened session. | 09-20-2012 |
| 20120239819 | A METHOD FOR OPERATING A NETWORK AND A NETWORK - For allowing a high degree of resource consumption within a network a method for operating a network is claimed, wherein at least one end user device is connected to an access network, wherein the method is characterized in that the at least one end user device or an application on the end user device queries at least one network element of the access network and/or at least one network element attached to the access network about low layer parameters information for optimizing connection and/or protocol parameters after having received the queried low layer parameters information. Further, a network is claimed, preferably for carrying out the above mentioned method. | 09-20-2012 |
| 20120246328 | PROTOCOL INTERWORKING DEVICE FOR NETWORK TELEPHONE SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USING THE SAME - A protocol interworking device communicates with at least one first network telephone terminal supporting a first protocol and at least one second network telephone terminal supporting a second protocol. The protocol interworking device includes a protocol converter supporting both the first and second protocols, and a transferring telephone enabled to communicate with both the first and second network telephone terminals by the protocol converter. When the first network telephone terminal sends a call request for calling the second network telephone terminal to the protocol interworking device, the transferring telephone hangs up with the first network telephone terminal and sends another call request to call the second network telephone terminal. When successfully connecting to the second network telephone terminal, the transferring telephone reconnects with the first network telephone terminal, and the first and network telephone terminals communicate with each other through the protocol interworking device. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120246329 | METHOD FOR SETTING PLURALITY OF SESSIONS AND NODE USING SAME - Disclosed are a method for setting a plurality of sessions and a method for transmitting/receiving data using the same. According to an exemplary embodiment of the present invention, at least some of the data including attribute information of the data are received through initial sessions, the number of additional sessions for receiving the data is calculated by using the attribute information of the data, and the additional sessions are set as many as the calculated number of additional sessions. According to the exemplary embodiments of the present invention, various and complicated states of the communication network can be reflected to session setting as the configuration of the communication network becomes more and more complicated and the sessions depending on the state of the communication network can be set, thereby transmitting data more effectively. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120246330 | Code access via the web to multiple databases - A web-hosted system includes a server and a block of memory addresses accessed via an URL application on a mobile device. Within the block of memory addresses there are several independently addressable and independently managed sub-blocks. Short codes inputted by a user on his or her mobile device address both the sub-block and data within the sub-block. | 09-27-2012 |
| 20120254450 | TIERED HIERARCHICAL REMOTE USER INTERFACE - A method of structuring Remote User Interface (RUI) into a tiered hierarchical standard with a minimum base RUI profile that is supported by all devices that meet the standard with optional support for the higher level hierarchies within the tier. RUI profiles are a superset of a lower RUI, so that lower RUIs are able to be partially rendered by a higher RUI. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120254451 | NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, INFORMATION COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND LINK METHOD - A device link unit of a PC requests a setting information file from a mobile phone, and a device link unit of the mobile phone transmits the setting information file to the PC. The device link unit of the PC then receives the setting file to display functions of linking with the mobile phone, in other words, data that is capturable from the mobile phone, based on the information on the received setting information file. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120254452 | BRIDGE FOR IMPLEMENTING A CONVERGED NETWORK PROTOCOL TO FACILITATE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN DIFFERENT COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL NETWORKS - A first adaptor implements a first communication protocol and a second adaptor implements a converged network protocol, which facilitates communication of packets encoded with a second communication protocol with a third communication protocol network. Parameters are configured in a memory for communication between the first adaptor and the second adaptor in the converged network protocol to indicate to the second adaptor that the converged network protocol is supported, wherein the first adaptor does not support the converged network protocol. A packet is received at the first adaptor encoded in the second communication protocol and forwarded to the second adaptor to forward to the third communication protocol network. A command is received at the second adaptor, directed to the first adaptor, to implement a function in the converged network protocol using the parameters in the memory to support transmission of packets between the first and the second adaptors. | 10-04-2012 |
| 20120259988 | METHOD AND APPARATUS OF PERFORMING PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION ESTABLISHMENT AND CONNECTION CHANGE-OVER - A method and apparatus of monitoring active data communication sessions and potential new connections is disclosed. One example method of operation may include identifying a data communications requirement of a first network device currently communicating via the first communications connection with a second network device, an transmitting a data test message over at least one of the existing first communications connection and the second communications connection. The method may also include receiving a response to the data test message, and determining a change-over from the first communications connection to the second communications connection would provide a more optimal data connection based on the identified data communications requirements of the first network device. Active data sessions are constantly being considered for a change-over by potential new data connections which may provide increased optimal data performance. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120259989 | TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL WITH PID CONTROL OF DATA TRANSMISSION RATE - A computer data transmission system is provided with proportional-integral-derivative (PID) control over a data transmission rate so as to maximize use of available bandwidth of a datagram-based network. A data channel and a separate feedback channel are established between the sender and receiver units of the system. The sender unit coupled to the data and feedback channels sends datagrams over the data channel to the receiver continuously until a source of data is exhausted or paused by the receiver unit. The receiver unit sends acknowledgment messages over the feedback channel to the sender unit at predetermined intervals. A PID controller in the sender unit uses the information provided in the acknowledgment messages to track unsuccessfully transmitted datagrams and to adapt the data transmission rate to any changing network transfer conditions. In particular, the rate of datagram loss may be used as a PID process variable to control an inter-datagram delay of the sender. There may also be absolute speed and transmission rate acceleration/deceleration limits constraining the PID control. PID control may also be adapted for data compression control, datagram block sizes, and degree of redundancy in the datagrams sent. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120259990 | PROVISIONING DEVICE, AND METHOD OF SETTING NETWORK PARAMETER IN PROVISIONING NETWORK - A provisioning device connected to field devices, which are objects of provisioning, via a provisioning network separated from a target network may include a router advertisement unit that designates a field device, which is an object of provisioning, among the field devices located within a router advertisement zone of the provisioning device to transmit a router advertisement to the designated field device in a unicast mode, a connection control unit that controls a connection to the provisioning network of the field device that receives the router advertisement, and a parameter setting unit that performs setting of network parameters in the field device, the network parameters being managed by the field device. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120259991 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SIP USER AGENT IDENTIFICATION AND EFFICIENT BINDING - The present disclosure provides a system and method for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) user agent identification and efficient binding. In accordance with one example embodiment, there is provided a method for use on a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) registration server for registering user agents, comprising: receiving a REGISTER message which includes a binding key; determining whether a prior binding associated with the binding key exists in a registration repository; and creating a new binding associated with the binding key and adding the new binding to the registration repository when no prior binding associated with the binding key exists in the registration repository. | 10-11-2012 |
| 20120265887 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, PROCESSING METHOD THEREOF, NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus detects one or a plurality of apparatuses which have been instructed to start communication-parameter setting processing using identification information and, moreover, in which this identification information has already been set, outputs terminal identification information, and executes the communication-parameter setting processing with an apparatus, which is other than an apparatus detected before the terminal identification information is output, from among detected apparatuses. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120265888 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GATEWAY SESSION ESTABLISHMENT - A method for deploying a policy from a 3GPP core network to a non-3GPP access network. The policy relates to a connection established from a mobile terminal to the 3GPP core network via the non-3GPP access network. A local IP address acquired by the mobile terminal during establishment of the connection is received at the 3GPP core network. At the 3GPP core network, establishment of a policy control session is initiated from the 3GPP core network to the non-3GPP access network. The received local IP address is used to determine the non-3GPP access network used for the connection with reference to shared IP addressing information. At the 3GPP core network, the policy is provided to the non-3GPP access network using the policy control session established as a result of the policy control session initiation step. The policy is for deployment in the non-3GPP access network in relation to the established connection. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120265889 | METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ENABLING MULTIMEDIA COMMUNICATION WITH A PRIVATE NETWORK - A method and arrangement for enabling access to a home device in a private network from a remote device located outside the private network. The private network includes a multimedia gateway connected to a multimedia service network. A session invite message is sent from the remote device to the multimedia gateway. In response, connection parameters of a residential gateway in the private network are sent to the remote device, which are associated with the selected home device if a home device identification was included in the received message, or with a proxy function in the multimedia gateway capable of providing home device information, if no such identification was included in the received message. In this way, home devices in the private network can be easily and safely accessed remotely. | 10-18-2012 |
| 20120271957 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ASSOCIATING A CONTACT WITH MULTIPLE TAG CLASSIFICATIONS - An approach for enabling multiple tag associations to be used for classifying a contact identifier is described. A first tag is associated with a contact identifier for grouping into a first classification; and a second tag is associated with the contact identifier for grouping into a second classification. Storage of the first tag and the second tag is initiated along with the contact identifier as part of a contact list. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120271958 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING SESSION IN A PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK - A method and apparatus for establishing a session by a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) module in a Packet Switched (PS) network, in which the PCEF module transmits bearer information indicating whether the session supports a single bearer or multiple bearers, to a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) module, receives a Policy & Charging Control (PCC) rule generated based on the bearer information, from the PCRF module, and establishes a session for a packet service by applying the received PCC rule. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120271959 | FEATURE SET BASED CONTENT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS AND METHODS - An exemplary method includes an access device 1) transmitting a profile request signal to a profile management subsystem over a network, the profile request signal representing a request for profile data representative of a feature set corresponding to an additional access device, 2) receiving the profile data from the profile management subsystem in accordance with the profile request signal, 3) storing the profile data within a data store included within the access device, 4) using the stored profile data to display one or more graphics representing the feature set corresponding to the additional access device, and 5) establishing, based on the stored profile data and after the one or more graphics representing the feature set corresponding to the additional access device are displayed, a communications channel between the access device and the additional access device. Corresponding methods and systems are also disclosed. | 10-25-2012 |
| 20120278493 | System and/or Method for Client-Driven Server Load Distribution - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to communication between a client and a server in a communications network. In one particular example, a server is selected from a plurality of servers to provide a resource and/or a service to a client. | 11-01-2012 |
| 20120284416 | Establishing Tunnels Between Selective Endpoint Devices Along Communication Paths - In one embodiment, an intermediary device situated along a communication path between two endpoint devices may receive communication packets sent along the communication path. If the intermediary device receives a connection-initiating packet having a customization indicator and a connection-acknowledgement packet having a customization indicator, then the intermediary device may install a bypass rule. | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120284417 | Endpoint Discriminator in Network Transport Protocol Startup Packets - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to communication between a client and a server or between peers in a communications network. In one particular example, only a desired server from a plurality of servers addressable through a socket address may respond to a client request to initiate a session. | 11-08-2012 |
| 20120290729 | ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION PATH GROUP IDENTIFICATION FOR MULTIPLE STORAGE DEVICES - Embodiments of the disclosure relate to setting up a logical path group identification for multiple data storage devices. An aspect of the disclosure concerns a computer implemented method that comprises receiving a host command to establish a group of connection paths between the host and a plurality of storage devices, identifying the group of connection paths, adding each one of the storage devices to the group of connection paths, and reporting to the host those storage devices that could not be successfully added to the group of connection paths. The method maintains host access security to the storage devices by not grouping a device when it is a reset event state. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120290730 | MASS RE-FORMATION OF GROUPS IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - A system in which wireless devices form a group in accordance with a peer-to-peer protocol and, at a later time, a device may send an invitation request to trigger the devices tore-form the peer-to-peer group. The invitation request may contain an identifier that is associated with a set of a plurality of devices. Those devices may be related such that they perform a function for which a user would want to use those devices together. The group of devices, for example, may be multimedia devices that receive and present streaming multimedia content or may be human interface devices that collectively act as an interface for a work station incorporating a wireless computing device operated by a user. Requesting that remote devices concurrently re-form a group reduces the time and spectral congestion associated with re-forming the group, particularly when the remote devices may periodically enter a low power state. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120290731 | NETWORK SETUP VIA SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION - A system for expediting IP address assignment. An apparatus that desires to initiate a connection with another apparatus may be deemed an initiator (e.g., or a “handover requester” in Near Field Communications, or NFC, terminology). In the instance that an apparatus is deemed to be an initiator, a further determination may be made as to whether the initiator is already a member of a network. If the initiator is determined not to already be a member of a network, the initiator may provide IP address configuration information usable by the other apparatus for assigning an IP address to the initiator. The IP address that is set in the initiator may then be based on an IP address provided to the initiator by the other apparatus in response to the previously sent IP address configuration information. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120290732 | METHODS FOR ASSOCIATING AN IP ADDRESS TO A USER VIA AN APPLIANCE - The present disclosure describes methods and systems for efficiently assigning, managing and querying virtual private network (VPN) addresses intranet IP (IIP) addresses of users, such as SSL VPN users on an enterprise network. The disclosure describes techniques and policies for assigning previously-assigned VPN addresses of a user to subsequent sessions of the user as the user logs in multiple times or roams between access points. The disclosure also describes a configurable user domain naming policy so that one can query the VPN address of a user by an easily referable host name identifying the user. The appliance and/or client agent provides techniques for applications to seamlessly and transparently communicate on the VPN using the VPN address of the user or client on the private network. | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120290733 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - The invention provides a method of establishing communication in a communications network in which a communication initiation request including service suppression information indicating that the whole or part of a communication service associated with the communication should be suppressed is generated and sent to initiate communication. When the communication initiation request is received ( | 11-15-2012 |
| 20120297078 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PERFORMING SERVICE IN NETWORK - Methods and devices are provided for performing a service between devices in a network. A predetermined event for starting the service is recognized in a first device. A pairing is performed between the first device and a second device that is a party of the service. The pairing is ended by setting information for performing the service. The service between the first device and the second device is performed. The pairing is ended before or during performance of the service. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120297079 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TERMINATION OF SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL - Systems for graceful termination of support for session initiation protocol communications on a server are described. Systems include techniques for setting a time period for gracefully terminating such support, for sending a service unavailable message to a client, for causing the server to maintain support, until no later than the expiration of the time period for terminating support, for uncompleted session initiation protocol invites accepted by the server before sending the service unavailable message to the client, and for terminating support for session initiation protocol communications on the server no later than upon expiration of the time period for terminating support. Methods for graceful termination of such support and computer-readable storage media whose contents cause a computer system to perform a graceful termination of such support are also described. | 11-22-2012 |
| 20120303825 | METHOD AND DEVICE CONFIGURED FOR PROCESSING AN SDP REQUEST IN A MEDIA PATH OPTIMIZATION PROCESS - The present invention provides a method and device configured for processing an SDP request in a media path optimization process. In this case, the method comprises: an application layer gateway (ALG) receiving a session description protocol (SDP) request; the ALG determining that media connection information used by the SDP request is different from media connection information in last accessible domain information in node information of the SDP request; and the ALG sequentially adding its forward accessible domain information and its backward accessible domain information to an end of a queue of the node information of the SDP request, and then sending the SDP request. By virtue of the present invention, an optimized media path and normal communication can be ensured. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120303826 | AIRCRAFT DATA SERVICES - A method and system provide efficient, flexible, and convenient data communication services over public wireless systems. The system includes a data communication server, having a plurality of interface units, for facilitating data communication between a moving object and one or more ground terminals via a radio communication path. The data communication server establishes the radio communication path over one of a plurality of wireless data networks including packet data networks and satellite data networks and preferably includes a pre-determined software architecture. | 11-29-2012 |
| 20120311165 | SELECTIVE ADMISSION INTO A NETWORK SHARING SESSION - A system and method provide for the selective authorization and admission of a client into a data sharing session with a host. A host may select one or more clients into the sharing session based on the proximity of the clients. When a client is selected, an identifier is provided from the client device to the host device, for example, utilizing an optical identifier such as a bar code or an audible identifier such as an encoded sound. The identifier is then utilized to establish a link between the client and the host. In this fashion any number of client devices may be selectively admitted into the sharing session in a quick and easy process enabling security for the host and anonymity for the client. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120311166 | Pipe Selection Heuristics - A method and apparatus of a device that manages connection pairs between a pair of devices is described. The device receives a metric from an application that indicates a preference to be used in suggesting a connection pair between a pair of devices. The device further receives characteristics of the connection pairs and selects one of the connection pairs based on these characteristics and the application metric. The device suggests the selected connection pair to the application. | 12-06-2012 |
| 20120317295 | Distributed Overlay Browser For Transparent Streaming Media Support In Virtualized Desktop Environment - Techniques are provided for establishing an integrated and transparent overlay of a browser window for rendering data such as streaming media on a client endpoint device. A web browser on a Hosted Virtual Desktop (HVD) draws HVD display image comprising a browser window and communicates it to the client endpoint device for display, via a virtual desktop interface (VDI) protocol. The browser window comprises zero or more host-provided window elements such as a window frame and at least one placeholder element where a client-provided frameless browser window may be rendered. A browser (or browser extension) on the HVD works together with a browser server on the client endpoint device to render data such as streaming media in the client-provided frameless browser window in place of the placeholder, before displaying the frameless browser window and the HVD display as an integrated display at the client endpoint device. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120317296 | ASSOCIATING COMMUNICATIONS IN COLLABORATION SESSIONS - A method, computer program product, and system for associating communications in collaboration sessions is described. A method may comprise displaying, via one or more computing devices, a document accessible to one or more collaborators of a first collaboration session. The method may further comprise associating, via the one or more computing devices, a first communication session of the first collaboration session with a first portion of the document. The method may additionally comprise indicating, via the one or more computing devices, the association between the first communication session of the first collaboration session and the first portion of the document. | 12-13-2012 |
| 20120324120 | METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR INITIATING A SESSION IN HOME NETWORK SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for initiating a session in a home network system are disclosed. A method for initiating a session over a HDBaseT network includes transmitting, by an initiation entity, a session initiation request message for initiating the session to at least one session partner selected by the initiation entity over an Ethernet network, and receiving a session initiation response message acting as a response to the session partner over the Ethernet network. The session initiation request message includes a first source reference field for identifying the initiation entity and a second final target reference (FTR) field for identifying the at least one session partner. | 12-20-2012 |
| 20120331160 | MULTI-PATH TRANSMISSION CONTROL PROTOCOL PROXY SERVICE - A method of providing multi-path proxy services includes receiving a first transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) connection request from a client device at a proxy server, the connection request specifying that the client device is capable of establishing a multi-path TCP/IP connection, establishing a single path TCP/IP connection from the proxy server to a serving node in response to receiving the connection request, establishing first and second TCP/IP connections between the proxy server and the client device as multi-path TCP/IP sub-flows between the proxy server and the client device, and proxying communications between the client device and the serving node over the first and second TCP/IP connections as multipath TCP/IP sub-flows between the client device and the proxy server and the single path TCP/IP connection between the proxy server and the serving node. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20120331161 | WIRELESS BASE STATION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a wireless communication system transmitting information to a communication terminal moving through a spot wireless area. In an integrated base station, an external information communication section controls communication with a server. A contents memory section stores contents received from the server. A wireless LAN communication section communicates with the communication terminal. A control section establishes connection with the communication terminal using a first connection not requiring an authentication procedure for connection with the communication terminal, or using a second connection requiring the authentication procedure for connection with the communication terminal. An access control (restriction) section permits access from the communication terminal to the contents memory section and prohibits access to the server when a type of connection with the communication terminal is the first connection, and permits access from the communication terminal to the contents memory section and to the server in the case of the second connection. | 12-27-2012 |
| 20130007291 | MEDIA INTERWORKING IN IPv4 AND IPv6 SYSTEMS - A device receives a request, from a first endpoint device, to initiate a communication session with a second endpoint device. The device determines whether an IP version that is likely to be used by the second endpoint device, in establishing a media communication session, is compatible with the IP version used by the first endpoint device. The device transmits, when the determination is that the IP version likely to be used by the second endpoint device is compatible with the IP version used by first endpoint device, SIP messages to signal the establishment of a direct media communication session between the first and second endpoint devices. Otherwise, the device may transmit SIP messages to signal the establishment of the media communication session through an intermediary device. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130007292 | DATA SET CONNECTION MANAGER HAVING A PLURALITY OF DATA SETS TO REPRESENT ONE DATA SET - Provided are a computer program product, system, and method for a data set connection manager having a plurality of data sets to represent one data set. A request is processed to open a connection to a data set having members, wherein the connection is used to perform read and write requests to the members in the data set. In response to establishing the connection, establishing for the connection a primary data set having all the members; a secondary data set to which updated members in the primary data set are written; and a pending delete data set to pending delete members comprising members that are updated. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130007293 | Method and Equipment for Forwarding a SIP Request Message Having Alerting Information Associated Therewith to a Receiving Subscriber in a SIP Based Communications Network - Method and user equipment and network node for sending a SIP request message having alerting information associated therewith from an originating user equipment having an originating SIP-UA associated therewith to a receiving SIP-UA associated with a receiving user equipment in a SIP based communications network, including setting a condition which must be met in order for the receiving SIP-UA to be allowed to receive the alerting information, checking whether the condition has been met, and f the condition has been met, passing the alerting information on to the receiving SIP-UA. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130007294 | System and Method for Geographic SIP Scaling - Described herein are aspects relating to a system and method for scaling a session initiation protocol communication system that allows components of the system to be distributed and/or scaled across multiple and different hardware, networks, systems, and locations. | 01-03-2013 |
| 20130013796 | Apparatus and Method for Directing a Communication Session to a Communication Device of a Group of Devices Having a Common Registration Identity - An apparatus, and an associated method, for directing communications of a communication session to a selected communication device, or devices, of a group of commonly-registered devices. A device-direction policy is created and stored at a network entity. The policy identifies preferred devices to which communications of a communication session are to be provided. A SIP Invite, or other communication-session initiation message, is provided to the network entity. The network entity detects the message, accesses the policy, and forwards on the message in accordance with the policy. | 01-10-2013 |
| 20130019022 | SIP PARSER/GENESYS-SIP PARSER-TO PARSE SIP TELEPHONY EVENTS AND DECRYPT THE USERDATA IN IP TELEPHONY - An apparatus, method, and medium for retrieving information from an internet protocol network are provided. The apparatus includes a network interface that is in communication with the internet protocol network. The network interface accesses a plurality of session initiation protocol events and a plurality of non-session initiation protocol events via the internet protocol network. The plurality of session initiation protocol events are transmitted on the internet protocol network, and the plurality of non-session initiation protocol events are transmitted from a non-internet protocol network to the internet protocol network. An input receives a parsing parameter, and a processor parses the plurality of session initiation protocol events and the plurality of non-session initiation protocol events that are accessed by the network interface based on the parsing parameter. A reporter reports parsing results of the processor. | 01-17-2013 |
| 20130031260 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING AN AD-HOC BI-DIRECTIONAL NETWORK WITH AN OPTICAL IDENTIFIER - A method of managing the establishment of a bi-directional communication session between a first client device and at least a second client device comprising receiving data from the first and the second client devices. The reception of data from the first client device establishes a presence of the first client device on a network where the first client device has a first identification. The reception of data from the second client device establishes a presence of the second client device on a network where the second client device has a second identification. The embodiment also includes transmitting an optical identifier signal to the first client device, wherein the optical identifier signal enables the first client device to display an optical identifier comprising the first identification encoded therein. The optical identifier facilitates the establishment of the bi-directional communication session between the first and the second client devices. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130031261 | PAIRING A DEVICE BASED ON A VISUAL CODE - A pairing with a computing device may be based on a visual code. A pairing, associated with application input, may be established between a first control module associated with a responding computing device and a second control module associated with the computing device. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130031262 | METHODS FOR HANDLING MULTIPLE DEVICE MANAGEMENT (DM) SERVER ADDRESSES IN A DM ACCOUNT MANAGEMENT OBJECT (MO) - A method for handling multiple Device Management (DM) server addresses in a DM Account Management Object (MO) is provided. The method includes the steps of obtaining, by a DM client, a plurality of DM server addresses and a reference to one or more of the DM server addresses or an empty value from the DM Account MO, and building, by the DM client, a DM session according to the reference. | 01-31-2013 |
| 20130036231 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT FOR CONNECTION SETUP IN DEVICE-TO-DEVICE COMMUNICATION - Example method, apparatus, and computer program product embodiments are disclosed to enable out-of-band short-range communication carrier transport switching for connection setup in device-to-device communication. example embodiments of the invention include a method comprising the steps of participating, by a first device, in a wireless network managed by at least one of an access point device or a group owner device; and exchanging, by the first device, information with a second device over a wireless out-of-band short-range carrier, the exchanged information comprising in-band communication connection parameters for enabling the second device to join the wireless network and authentication information recognizable by the at least one of an access point device or a group owner device managing the wireless network. | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130036232 | System and Method for Enhanced Physical Layer Device Autonegotiation - A system and method for enhanced physical layer device autonegotiation. The autonegotiation process typically identifies the highest common denominator amongst various standardized modes of operation. Enhanced autonegotiation can be used to select a mode of operation that is not the highest common denominator. Enhanced autonegotiation can also identify a non-standardized mode of operation using next page messaging, additional physical signaling, or Layer | 02-07-2013 |
| 20130042012 | Multi-Headed Thin Client - Images from web pages may be classified based on the text associated with the images. A system for identifying and classifying images may identify one or more web pages containing the image, determine topics from the text of the web pages, and develop a set of training phrases for a classifier. The classifier may be trained, then used to analyze the text in the web pages. The training set may include both positive examples and negative examples of text taken from the website. A positive example may include captions or other elements directly associated with the image, while negative examples may include text taken from the web page, but from a large distance from the web page. In some cases, the system may iterate on the classification process to refine the results. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130042013 | METHODS, APPARATUSES AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR ENABLING LIVE SHARING OF DATA - An apparatus for implementing a live sharing session may include a processor and memory storing executable computer program code that cause the apparatus to at least perform operations including sending of a notification(s) to one or more devices. The notifications may include data informing the devices of an outstanding live sharing session. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to provide representations to the devices for selection. The representations may relate in part to different representations of media content. The computer program code may further cause the apparatus to receive one or more requests for removing at least one of the representations or for receipt of one or more other representations of the media content and providing a final media presentation description to the devices, based at least in part on the removed representations or the requested representations. Corresponding methods and computer program products are also provided. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130042014 | MULTI-PROTOCOL NETWORK REGISTRATION AND ADDRESS RESOLUTION - The functionality of communications standards and protocols that are application-layer specific are overlaid on an IP-based infrastructure, by employing an IP DNS server as the registration host for IP and other communications standards based and protocol based communications. Communication can occur at either the IP layer or the communications standards or protocol application layer. At the IP layer, a host application can interrogate network nodes. To extend this service to other communications standards or protocol communications, device registration and resolve services are implemented on the DNS server. Similar to the manner in which an IP-based service uses a native, IP-based DNS resolve request, a host can utilize a resolution request against the communications standards and protocol-enabled DNS server for standards and protocol application-layer interrogation of endpoints. | 02-14-2013 |
| 20130046896 | SCALABLE TRANSCODING FOR STREAMING AUDIO - Systems and techniques for capturing audio and delivering the audio in digital streaming media formats are disclosed. Several aspects of the systems and techniques operate in a cloud computing environment where computational power is allocated, utilized, and paid for entirely on demand. The systems and techniques enable a call to be made directly from a virtual machine out to a Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) via a common Session Interface Protocol (SIP) to PSTN Breakout service, and the audio to be delivered onward to one or more Content Delivery Network (CDN). An audio call capture interface is also provided to initiate and manage the digital streaming media formats, | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130046897 | SIP COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - The present invention provides an improved SIP communication protocol. An NAT (Network Address Translator) traversal method is added before the SIP communication protocol, i.e. a client to client (C2C) module function is added to improve the function of SIP communication protocol, so as to solve the problem that the RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) packets cannot traverse NAT firewall to achieve C2C communication after SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) is ended in VoIP. The major content of the present invention is to conduct a plurality of detection before SIP communication protocol, so as to predict the allocation rules of the port number by the C2C module, and open the RTP channel for C2C. | 02-21-2013 |
| 20130054821 | EMULATING FICON OVER IP - A method, including receiving a Fibre Connection (FICON) information unit by a host processor executing a host internet protocol (IP) software library, and writing the FICON information unit to a transport layer. Data including the FICON information unit is then transmitted to a storage control unit over an IP network. | 02-28-2013 |
| 20130054822 | Failover Data Replication with Colocation of Session State Data - A method, system, and medium are disclosed for performing failover data replication with colocation of session state data. In servicing a client request, a first session is created on a primary server. A first portion of session data comprises a state of the first session and is stored on the primary server. An identifier of the first session is stored on the primary server. One or more backup servers are selected for backup of the first portion of session data. A second session is created on the primary server. A second portion of session data comprises a state of the second session and is stored on the primary server. The same backup server(s) are selected for backup of the second portion based on the stored identifier of the first session. The primary server replicates the first and second portions of session data into memory space of the backup servers. | 02-28-2013 |
| 20130054823 | APPLIANCE FOR PROCESSING A SESSION IN NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - A session of network communications is processed between a client terminal and a server by intercepting a request generated from a network transport unit of the client terminal, generating an intermediate session ID for the client terminal, asking the server to establish a session, receiving a response sent from the server using a server session ID after the session is established, associating the server session ID with the intermediate session ID and sending the response to the network transport unit using the intermediate session ID. | 02-28-2013 |
| 20130060953 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SOLICITATION OF PRESENCE INFORMATION FROM PRESENCE SOURCE - A method for requesting presence information from a presence source by a presence server is provided. The method includes transmitting a message requesting specific presence information to the presence source; and receiving, from the presence source, the specific presence information published by the presence source. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130060954 | ENABLING SET UP OF A CONNECTION FROM A NON-REGISTERED UE IN IMS - A method and system for enabling a set up of a service connection from a user equipment (UE) to a priority service is provided. The UE is not registered with an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and the proxy node is a P-CSCF network node in the IMS. The proxy node receives a service request from the UE. The proxy node determines that the UE is not registered with IMS when the UE is not indicated as registered in the proxy node. The proxy node further identifies the service request as a priority service. The proxy node, when the service request has been identified as a priority service request and the UE has been determined to be not registered with the IMS, simulates setup of a terminating service connection to the priority service node by sending a terminating request to an I-CSCF network node included in the IMS. | 03-07-2013 |
| 20130067100 | MULTI-DESKTOP INTERACTION USING NESTED REMOTE DESKTOP SESSIONS - As described herein, a computer system receives a first indication that an interactive login session is to be established. The first indication includes user credentials for establishing the interactive login session. The computer system then establishes the interactive login session using the received user credentials. The interactive login session includes a data transfer endpoint for receiving data from other sessions. The computer system receives a second indication that a child session is to be established in parallel to the established interactive login session. The child session is configured to direct input and output data through a loopback connection to the data transfer endpoint of the interactive login session. The computer system also establishes the child session using the received user credentials. The child session then transfers at least a portion of data to the data transfer endpoint of the interactive login session using the loopback connection. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130067101 | SESSION INITIATION AND MAINTENANCE WHILE ROAMING - The technology disclosed addresses initiation of peer-to-peer media exchange sessions, with traversal of NAT and firewall devices, in a manner adapted to roaming. In particular, involves preliminary determination of NAT/firewall topology, which reduces latency at initiation, and hole punching technologies to select a routing and traversal strategy that reduce reliance on external media relay devices. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130067102 | GATEWAY AND A METHOD THEREIN FOR ENABLING SIP COMMUNICATION OVER A NON-STANDARD SIP TRANSPORT PROTOCOL - A protocol conversion gateway and a method therein for enabling a client, which client does not support a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) transport protocol, to communicate with a SIP proxy are provided. The method comprises receiving a first SIP message, over a non-standard SIP transport protocol, from the client. The method further comprises inserting a SIP address of the protocol conversion gateway in at least one header of the received SIP message, and sending the SIP message to the SIP proxy over a standard SIP transport protocol. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130067103 | AGILE NETWORK PROTOCOL FOR SECURE COMMUNICATIONS USING SECURE DOMAIN NAMES - A client device comprises: (a) a memory, (b) an application program, and (c) a signal processing configuration. The memory is configured and arranged to facilitate a connection of the client device with a target device over a secure communication link created based on (i) an address request generated by the client device, and (ii) a determination as a result of the address request that the target device is a device with which a secure communication link can be established when the requested address is identified in an address lookup. The application program is configured and arranged so as to allow participation in audio/video communications with the target device over the secure communication link once the secure communication link is established. The signal processing configuration is arranged to execute the application program. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130067104 | METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING CONTENT REPORT BEHAVIOR - The present invention relates to the multimedia field, and discloses a method, a device, and a system for controlling content report behavior. The method includes: receiving a request for subscribing to a configuration update notification, in which the request is sent by the terminal or the media control function, and a configuration update request that is sent by an SCF and carries the new content report configuration information, and sending a configuration update notification message to the terminal or the media control function, where the configuration update notification message carries the new content report configuration information or acquiring information thereof. The method of the present invention avoids using the message body of the SIP message to transmit the content report configuration information, is compliant and compatible with logic for processing a SIP INFO message specified in the RFC 2976. | 03-14-2013 |
| 20130073739 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTING A COMPUTING DEVICE FOR MAINTAINING A CLIENT SESSION IN RESPONSE TO A REQUEST PACKET - A server farm for processing client requests comprising a first server having a first processor and a first network interface controller communicatively coupled to the first processor, and a second server comprising a second processor and communicatively coupled to the first server, wherein the first network interface controller is configured to maintain a state table associated with at least the first server and the second server and respond to receipt of a request packet from a client by, initiating by the first processor execution of a software application associated with the request packet when the state table corresponds to a first state, and selectively forwarding the request packet to the second server when the state table corresponds to a second state. | 03-21-2013 |
| 20130080646 | REMOTE INPUT DEVICES - In a first embodiment of the present invention, a method for operating a user agent on a first device is provided, comprising: discovering, using a home networking protocol, a second device, wherein the second device includes a user input mechanism; retrieving information regarding the user input mechanism from the second device using the home networking protocol; determining whether to accept the connection based on the information regarding the user input mechanism; when it is determined to accept the connection, negotiating an out-of-band connection in a protocol other than the home networking protocol with the second device; receiving input command events from the second device via the out-of-band connection; and executing the input command events at the user agent to control an aspect of the first device. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130080647 | Providing Session Initiation Protocol Request Contents Method and System - An embodiment provides a user equipment that includes a processor configured to receive a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) NOTIFY message transmitted by a network component as a result of a registration event. The SIP NOTIFY message contains at least a portion of information included in a first SIP message sent between a first user equipment and the network component. Another embodiment provides method and apparatus for a network node to determine whether filter criteria include one or more indicators that specify the need for information, and including in a second SIP message the information specified by the one or more indicators. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130080648 | SESSION INITIATION FROM APPLICATION SERVERS IN AN IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - The present invention provides a technique where application servers can initiate sessions within the IMS network by initially sending session initiation messages to the I-CSCF. By routing the session initiation messages to the I-CSCF, the application servers need not directly access the HSSs in order to initiate sessions. Upon receiving a session initiation message from an application server, the I-CSCF may access the HSS to identify an S-CSCF to use for session control and then route the session initiation message to that S-CSCF. The S-CSCF may then access the same or different HSS to determine how to further route the session initiation message to establish the session. The session initiation message may be routed toward other S-CSCFs en route to the appropriate user elements. The session may be a session established between user elements or between the application server and a user element. | 03-28-2013 |
| 20130091291 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING VOICE OR VIDEO TRANSMISSION QUALITY IN CLOUD COMPUTING MODE - A method for improving voice or video transmission quality in the cloud computing mode includes performing, by a cloud client, media negotiation with a communication peer end according to obtained media negotiation information of a corresponding local client; and establishing, according to a result of the media negotiation, a media channel between the local client and the communication peer end to perform voice or video transmission. An embodiment of the present invention further provides a corresponding cloud client and a corresponding local client. According to the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention, two client ends work collaboratively and a media channel is established on the local client, thereby ensuring voice or video transmission quality in the cloud computing mode. | 04-11-2013 |
| 20130097329 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IP REACHABILITY IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a system and method for establishing communications in a communications network, a network service provider can assign IP addresses to mobile devices dynamically to conserve IP address resources. A network service provider can also implement network address translation to further conserve IP address resources and to provide improved security. If a requestor seeks to obtain an IP address of a mobile device and the address is a local address, the system determines if the mobile device has a network address translation (NAT) binding that associates the IP address of the mobile device with a public IP address. If the mobile device does not have a NAT binding, the system creates a NAT binding that associates the IP address of the mobile device with a public IP address. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130097330 | FAILOVER COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system that incorporates teachings of the subject disclosure may include, for example, a home subscriber server having a memory coupled to a processor. The processor can be configured to store a first identity of a first communication device registered with a primary communication resource and a secondary communication resource, receive a request associated with a registration request initiated by a second communication device, detect that a second identity of the second communication device matches the first identity of the first communication device, and direct a registration of the second communication device with at least one of the primary communication resource or the secondary communication resource responsive to the detected match. Other embodiments are disclosed. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130097331 | Submit Report Handling In SMSIP - Submit report handling in Short Message Session Initiation Protocol (SMSIP) is provided. For example, a method can include preparing a submit report, wherein the preparing includes using a combination of forking and an in-reply-to header to find an appropriate terminal. The method can also include sending the submit report to the appropriate terminal. Likewise, another method can include receiving, by an apparatus, a session initiation protocol message request including a submit report. The method can also include processing the submit report to determine whether the request corresponds to a message sent by the apparatus. The method can further include sending, when the submit report is determined not to correspond to any message sent by the apparatus, a not-acceptable-here session initiation protocol response. The method can additionally include sending, when the submit report is determined to correspond to the message sent by the apparatus, an ok session initiation protocol message. | 04-18-2013 |
| 20130103844 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAINTAINING ONE OR MORE COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - An approach is provided for establishing one or more communication sessions in a cloud computing environment and maintaining the establishment of the one or more communication sessions while managing system resource and power resource consumption. The approach involves causing, at least in part, an establishment of one or more communication sessions between at least one device and one or more other devices, wherein the communication sessions convey, at least in part, one or more notification messages. The approach also involves processing and/or facilitating a processing of device resource information, device capability information, network resource information, or a combination thereof to determine one or more parameters for generating one or more heartbeat signals to maintain the one or more communication sessions. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130103845 | SERVER DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, INFORMATION-PROCESSING DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A server device includes a storage unit that stores a database that records plural pairs of a user/device ID and a corresponding first parameter, the first parameter indicating an amount of data that the user or the device has a right to communicate via a predetermined network; a first obtaining unit that obtains a user/device ID and a corresponding retail ID from the information-processing device; an adding unit that performs, in a case that the first obtaining unit obtains a user/device ID and a retail ID, an adding process to add a predetermined second parameter to a first parameter corresponding to the user/device ID, from among the plurality of first parameters recorded in the database, the second parameter indicating an amount of data to be added; a second obtaining unit that obtains an amount of data in a communication performed by the information-processing device via the predetermined network. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130103846 | Method for Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) Informing Centralized Deployment Functional Architecture (BPCF) of User Equipment Access Information - A system and method for performing quality of service control on a user equipment are provided in the present invention. The method includes: after establishing an Internet Key Exchange version 2 (IKEv2) security association between the user equipment and a packet data network gateway to establish an Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) tunnel, the packet data network gateway sending IPSec tunnel information to a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF), the PCRF then sending the IPSec tunnel information to a Broadband Policy Control Function (BPCF), and the BPCF performing quality of service control on services of the user equipment according to the received IPSec tunnel information. With the technical scheme of the present invention, it enables the BPCF to acquire tunnel information of the user equipment and then perform quality of service control on the user equipment. | 04-25-2013 |
| 20130111043 | LOW-LATENCY HOLE PUNCHING | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130111044 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR FAST INITIAL NETWORK LINK SETUP | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130111045 | Image Forming Device, Server, and Image Forming System | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130111046 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EFFICIENT USE OF A TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND THE CONNECTION BETWEEN THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK AND A CUSTOMER PREMISES EQUIPMENT | 05-02-2013 |
| 20130117458 | Build a Person from Multiple Contacts - A data structure that represents a person is created. The data structure comprises a person object. The person object comprises one or more contact objects. When it is determined that the person is a global address list contact, first contact information for the person is obtained from a global address list store and stored in a first contact object. When it is determined that the person is an email contact, second contact information is obtained from a contact store and stored in a first memory cache. When it is determined that the second contact information includes a global address identifier, the global address identifier is stored in the second contact object. A person identifier is created for the person that identifies the person. The person identifier is stored in the first contact object and in the second contact object. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130117459 | SYSTEM AND METHOD OF IMPLEMENTING AGGREGATED VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK (VPN) SETTINGS THROUGH A SIMPLIFIED GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) - Systems and methods are provided for defining an operating system that automates setup and implements a virtual private network (VPN) on a network interface device such as a router. A graphical user interface module comprises instructions for electronically providing a graphical user interface including a plurality of interface elements to a user who then may provide customizable input defining a first set of variable parameters. An automation layer module comprises instructions defining the type of graphical user interface to display to a user and instructions for electronically accessing a particular data file defining a second set of static parameters. A firmware module and related processor programs and the network interface device and executes the programmed code to establish a VPN connection in accordance with a configuration defined by the first set of variable parameters and the second set of static parameters. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130117460 | DATA MANAGEMENT METHODS FOR USE IN A NETWORK SYSTEM AND NETWORK SYSTEMS USING THE SAME - Data management methods for use in a network system including at least first, second and third network terminal devices and traversal server are disclosed. First and second network terminal devices can traverse at least one NAT router and/or firewall to establish a connection channel between each other for data access through traversal server. The method includes the steps of: receiving first packet with first protocol format from first network terminal device; determining whether to perform protocol conversion operation; if so, obtaining a list of available network terminal devices, assigning first network terminal device from obtained list, converting first packet with first protocol format into second packet with second protocol format that is decodable by second network terminal device, and sending second packet to second network terminal device such that second network terminal device can obtain content of first packet by decoding second packet upon reception of second packet. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130117461 | CONNECTION ESTABLISHING MANAGEMENT METHODS FOR USE IN A NETWORK SYSTEM AND NETWORK SYSTEMS USING THE SAME - Connection establishing management methods for traversing network address translation (NAT) routers and firewalls between network terminal devices to establish a connection channel therebetween for use in a network system including at least first, second and third network terminal devices and a traversal server are disclosed. First, when traversal server receives a call request of first and second network terminal devices, network topology levels of first and second network terminal devices are detected to detect whether first and second network terminal devices are located behind NAT router and/or firewall. Then, one of first and second network terminal devices or third network terminal device is selected according to the detection result such that selected network terminal device acted as proxy server for the traversal server to establish a connection channel corresponding to call request between first and second network terminal devices. | 05-09-2013 |
| 20130124740 | METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC ESTABLISHING WIRELESS CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN A MOBILE WIRELESS DEVICE AND A TARGET SCREEN FOR MULTIMEDIA DATA STREAMING - A method for automatically establishing a wireless connection between a receiving screen and a mobile wireless device to enable streaming of multimedia data is provided herein. The method comprises the steps of: (i) creating a dynamic image code which includes data enabling wireless connection that is associated with the target screen device; (ii) displaying said image code on the target screen device, until a connection with a mobile wireless device is established; (iii) capturing said dynamic image code by the mobile wireless device; (iv) decoding the dynamic code for retrieving the data enabling wireless connection that is associated with the target screen; and (v) establishing a wireless connection between a target screen device and a mobile wireless device for enabling data streaming by the mobile wireless device based on the retrieved enabling data wireless connection. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130124741 | View Sharing Between In-Range Devices - A first system may receive a view from a second system. The first system may establish a direct wireless communication link with the second system that does not connect through any intermediate system between the first system and the second system. Through the direct wireless communication link, the first system sends a view sharing request to the second system. The view sharing request may specify a view that is displayed by the second system and not the first system. The first system may receive view information corresponding to the view and display the view according to the received view information. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130124742 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PREDICTING DOMAIN NAME REGISTRATION RENEWAL PROBABILITY - A method for determining probability of a domain name registration renewal includes receiving a plurality of inputs associated with the domain name and assigning each of the plurality of inputs to at least one category from among a plurality of categories. The method also includes assigning a weighted value to each of the plurality of categories and calculating the probability of the domain name registration renewal based in part on the weighted value of each category. | 05-16-2013 |
| 20130132592 | PROVIDING A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION CHANNELS FOR USE BY A PROCESSING SYSTEM - A method of providing a plurality of communication channels for use by a processing system. The method can include, via a processor, providing to the processing system an option to establish a first communication channel via first communication adapter. The method also can include providing to the processing system an option to establish at least a second communication channel via at least a second communication adapter. Responsive to receiving a request from the processing system to establish both the first communication channel and the second communication channel to be simultaneously active, a transaction notification to apply a fee to an account associated with the processing system can be generated. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130132593 | ROUTING MESSAGES - This invention relates to a method of routing for a message via an IMS system is disclosed. A message is received at an ICSCF. Address information is obtained for one of an application server, server or gateway for which said message is intended. The message is sent to said application server, server or gateway in accordance with said address information. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130132594 | CONTROL OF PARAMETER NEGOTIATION FOR COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - The invention relates to a session control entity, method and a computer program product for transmitting a request comprising a parameter relating to setup of media transmission path for a user, and including or detecting in the request an indication indicating whether or not the parameter has been received from the user. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130132595 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING REMOTE ACCESS SERVICE - A remote access service is provided by receiving remote access transport agent (RATA) capability information of a home remote access server (RAS) and a remote RAS from the home RAS and the remote RAS, respectively, generating a RATA profile based on the RATA capability information, supported by the home RAS and the remote RAS, and transmitting the generated RATA profile to the home RAS and the remote RAS, respectively. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130132596 | Methods, Apparatuses and Systems Facilitating Seamless, Virtual Integration of Online Membership Models and Services - Methods, apparatuses and systems facilitating integration of the functionality associated with a first on-line service entity with the functionality associated with a second on-line service entity. Embodiments of the present invention allow a first on-line service entity having its own membership model to efficiently collaborate with a second on-line service entity to offer its users the services of the second on-line service entity in a seamless and consistently branded manner. One implementation obviates the need for synchronization of the membership models between the first and second on-line service entities. One implementation allows the second on-line service entity to provide services to the users associated with the first on-line service entity in a seamless manner without the first on-line service entity having to proxy the session between the second online service entity and the users. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130132597 | METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR MAKING USE OF VIRTUAL IMS SUBSCRIPTIONS COUPLED WITH THE IDENTITY OF A NON SIP COMPLIANT TERMINAL FOR NON-REGISTERED SUBSCRIBERS - A Service Interaction Manager in a Packet Based Multimedia System (PBMS) for initiating a session with a terminal utilizing a temporary virtual subscription when the terminal does not have a subscription with the PBMS. A table stores temporary virtual subscriptions. A Coupling Function connected with a Network Access Gateway and the table utilizes the table to select an available virtual subscription and to store in the table, a temporary association between an identifier of the terminal and the available virtual subscription. A Correlation Function connected with a requested service, the table, and a PBMS access gateway receives from the PBMS access gateway, a session start request message with the terminal identifier, and utilizes the table to correlate the session start request message with the available virtual subscription based on the terminal identifier. | 05-23-2013 |
| 20130138823 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EXTENDED WIRELESS ACCESS GATEWAY SERVICE PROVIDER WI-FI OFFLOAD - A method is provided in one example embodiment and includes receiving a dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) discovery signal at a wireless network element from a customer premise equipment; requesting that a data session be established at a gateway; receiving an Internet protocol (IP) address; and communicating the IP address to the customer premise equipment. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130138824 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTION BETWEEN COMMUNICATION APPARATUSES, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, AND SERVER APPARATUS - A first connection between a first communication apparatus and a server apparatus and a second connection between a second communication apparatus and the server apparatus are established. The first and second communication apparatuses exchange information on their features via the first and second connections, and then, disconnects the first and second connections. The first communication apparatus acquires information on settings of its communication environment, and then, establishes a third connection with the server apparatus. The second communication apparatus acquires information on settings of its communication environment, and then, establishes a fourth connection with the server apparatus. The first and second communication apparatuses exchange the information on the settings of their communication environments via the third and fourth connections. The first and second communication apparatuses establishes a fifth connection between them not through the server apparatus, based on the information on the settings of their communication environments. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130138825 | METHOD FOR RECORDING EVENTS IN AN IP NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method for capturing call events and other information in a platform independent way. The method includes generating call event records in response to a SIP call events. A call event file is created that includes all the call event records collected by a server over a predetermined period of time. The call event file is an XML document that includes generic, uniformly formatted records that can be read by any network device equipped with an XML parser. XML documents include embedded instructions that enable a receiving computer to decode the records without needing a special proprietary interface. | 05-30-2013 |
| 20130145038 | Method and system for establishing session - A method for establishing a session is disclosed, in which the first policy server sends a request message to the second policy server when needing to establish the session with the second policy server, for requesting the second policy server to initiate and establish a session with the first policy server; the second policy server initiates and establishes the session with the first policy server, based on the request message. A system for establishing a session is also disclosed. With the disclosure, even if the first policy server cannot establish a session with the second policy server, it may send a request to the second policy server, for requesting the second policy server to establish the session. Therefore, the session is established more flexibly. In addition, in the case that the session established by the second policy server is applicable to policy control, the effectiveness of session establishment is improved. | 06-06-2013 |
| 20130151721 | Remote Session Management - Provided is reporting session information for a session upstream from a server. A data processing system receives a session handshake from a first client for a session between the server and the first client. The system receives a session-descriptor for a session between a second client and the first client before handling a nested session. The system determines whether a user has made an upstream session request. The system obtains session data from an upstream data structure, responsive to a determination that the user has made an upstream session request. The system renders the session data based on the upstream session request. | 06-13-2013 |
| 20130159539 | EXCHANGING A COMPRESSED VERSION OF PREVIOUSLY COMMUNICATED SESSION INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In an embodiment, a server exchanges session data between a group of session participants during a communication session, the exchanged session data including session media and/or session signaling information. The server stores at least a subset of the exchanged session data. Later, the server establishes a connection to a given user equipment (UE) (e.g., either after or during the communication session). The server determines a UE-defined context that is indicative of a manner by which missed session data from the communication session is to be compressed for delivery to the given UE. The server selectively compresses at least a portion of the stored subset of the exchanged session data that was missed by the given UE based on the UE-defined context, and transmits the selectively compressed portion of the stored subset of the exchanged session data to the given UE. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130159540 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR AGGRESSIVE WINDOW PROBING - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for aggressively probing a client side connection to determine and counteract a malicious window size attack or similar behavior from a malfunctioning client. The solution described herein detects when a connection may be under malicious attach via improper or unusual window size settings. Responsive to the detection, the solution described herein will setup probes that determine whether or not the client is malicious and does so within an aggressive time period to avoid the tying up of processing cycles, transport layer sockets and buffers, and other resources of the sender. | 06-20-2013 |
| 20130166761 | Dialog Establishment Over A Peer-To-Peer Architecture - A device and method are described for establishing a dialog between Internet Protocol (IP) end points using a peer-to-peer (P | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130166762 | Methods to Manage Services over a Service Gateway - In activating a service, a service gateway retrieves a service table entry using a service or server address of the service entry, where the service table entry has an association with another service entry. An association to the service entry is added and a marker value is set to indicate associations with two service entries. After a time duration, the association with the other service entry is removed, and the marker value is changed accordingly. In deactivating a service entry, the service gateway calculates a hash value for the service or server address of the service entry. After matching the hash value to a hash value of another service entry, an association with the other service entry is added. A marker value is set to indicate associations with two service entries. After a time duration, the association with the service entry is removed, and the marker value is changed accordingly. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130166763 | METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICES FOR SELECTING BETWEEN PRIVATE ADDRESSES AND PUBLIC ADDRESSES WITHIN A USER SESSION - According to one aspect of the present invention there is provided a method for selecting a network address within a network. The method may comprise providing network address translation related information of a first user session, storing the network address translation related information of the first user session and selecting a network address for a subsequent second user session by taking into account the network address translation related information of the first user session for the selection. | 06-27-2013 |
| 20130173812 | SIP TRANSFER IN A BACK-TO-BACK USER AGENT (B2BUA) ENVIRONMENT - The system generates a change in the SIP INVITE message during a call transfer. Here, a user relation element involved in the call can change the header information in the message to include the endpoint view of the transferring party. Thus, the INVITE message is redirected to the transferring party's user relation element, which can interpret the received message and “unravel” the B2BUAs in the existing call path. The system includes changes in the user relation element to effect the message change and interpret the message once received. Changes to the user relation element forgo the need to change the communication endpoints. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130173813 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENDPOINT HANDOFF IN A HYBRID PEER-TO-PEER NETWORKING ENVIRONMENT - A system and method for endpoint handoff in a hybrid peer-to-peer networking environment are provided. In one example, the method includes logging into the peer-to-peer network by a first endpoint. The first endpoint directly notifies a second endpoint that the second endpoint is to transfer an active communication session existing between the second endpoint and a third endpoint from the second endpoint to the first endpoint. The first endpoint receives session parameters associated with the active communication session directly from the second endpoint and directly notifies the third endpoint that the first endpoint is online. The first endpoint then re-establishes the active communication session with the third endpoint using the session parameters. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130173814 | SESSION ESTABLISHING DEVICE, SESSION ESTABLISHING METHOD, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A session establishing device includes a storage that stores therein establishment-finished information and under-establishment information in a manner associated with each other with respect to each session used by a terminal unit; an information determining unit that, when having received a session start request from a terminal unit, determines whether under-establishment information corresponding to the session indicates not in the process of establishment when there is a not-yet-established session; an assignment control unit that, when the under-establishment information corresponding to the session indicates not in the process of establishment, assigns the session to the terminal unit which issued the session start request; and an information registering unit that, when the session has been assigned to the terminal unit, registers session identifying information and terminal identifying information in a manner associated with the session and changes content of the under-establishment information corresponding to the session to in the process of establishment. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130173815 | Selectively processing cookies in a proxy - An intermediary (such as a web reverse proxy), which is located between a web browser and one or more backend applications, manages cookies that are provided by the backend applications and returned to the web browser during a user session. The intermediary decides which cookies should be sent to the browser and which cookies should be stored therein. Preferably, this determination is made in an automated manner by examining the response for any cookie-dependent code (e.g., scripting) included in the response. | 07-04-2013 |
| 20130179582 | SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL MESSAGE ROUTING METHOD BETWEEN IP NETWORKS USING DIFFERENT IP ADDRESS FORMAT - Disclosed are the examples of an interworking system and related methods. The interworking system can be configured to implement a session initiation protocol (SIP) message routing method that may include checking a transmitting subject and a transmission method of a SIP message, applying a network address translation based on the checked message's transmitting subject and its transmission method, and specifying the address of the node selected based on the checked message's transmitting subject in routing path information. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130179583 | QUALITY OF SERVICE SUPPORT FOR MACHINE-TO-MACHINE APPLICATIONS - A Quality of Service functionality is provided for Machine to machine device communications that allows a single IMS session to support a plurality of different data streams. In one embodiment a single IMS session is used to support a plurality of different data streams that arise from a single application type, while in another embodiment, a single IMS session is used to support a plurality of different data streams across a plurality of different devices and applications. Through the use of a single IMS session, signaling is reduced and QoS can be offered without impacting a large number of nodes. An IMS User Agent is deployed to aid in providing this functionality. | 07-11-2013 |
| 20130185445 | Method and System for Managing a SIP Server - A method, system and computer program product are described for managing network communications to a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) server capable of SIP processing using a SIP stack. A data packet is received from a network device. It is determined, from the data packet, whether the network device is a device recognised by the SIP server. Responsive to this determination, and before SIP processing using the SIP stack, it is determined whether the data packet conforms to a permitted configuration. The permitted configuration includes that data of the data packet indicates an unfragmented User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packet and that data indicative of SIP data in the received data packet matches a parsing rule. If the data packet conforms to the permitted configuration, it is passed to the SIP stack, if not it is discarded. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130185446 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONNECTING TO VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK ACROSS DOMAINS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for connecting to a VPN across domains. The method includes: receiving, by a PE, a request message for connecting a VDC to a VPN sent by a DCG, determining an RD/RT list corresponding to a VPN User ID in the request message according to the User ID, so as to configure a VPN instance, determining a connection identity at a local end according to a connection identity at a DCG end of an AC in the request message, and binding a logical port in the connection identity at the local end with the VPN instance so that the VDC is connected to the VPN. Accordingly, the present invention further provides a PE and a DCG device for connecting to a VPN across domains. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130185447 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR ESTABLISHING A WI-FI DISPLAY (WFD) SESSION - Systems, methods, apparatus, and techniques are provided for establishing an application layer communications session over a layer 2 (L2) communications connection. In particular, a discovery request frame is transmitted from a first device. A discovery response frame is received at the first device, where the discovery response frame is transmitted from a second device in response to having received the discovery request frame. An application layer communications session is established between the first device and the second device while maintaining an existing L2 communications connection between the first device and the second device. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130185448 | Systems and Methods for Managing Emulation Sessions - A method and system for managing an emulation session of a computer product. The method and system involves receiving a request from a user device to establish the emulation session; establishing an electronic communication link between the user device and an emulation server for providing the emulation session to the user device; operating at least one server processor, the at least one server processor being in electronic communication with the user device and the emulation server and being separate from the user device processor, to determine emulation session data based on the received request and by monitoring the emulation session; to determine a plurality of emulation session parameters based on the received request; to determine a session action to be applied to the emulation session based on the plurality of emulation session parameters and the emulation session data; and to control the emulation session based on the session action. | 07-18-2013 |
| 20130191546 | OPTIMIZING ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - A method, computer program product, and system for electronic communication is described. A first unified telephony session is selected. A first arbitrator associated with the first session is selected. A first set of participants associated with the first session is selected. The first arbitrator is directed to act as a proxy connection for a first channel associated with the first set of participants. | 07-25-2013 |
| 20130198397 | Method and Apparatus for Performing Multiple Forms of Communications in One Session - An approach is provided for performing multiple and hybrid forms of communication in the same communication session. A communication manager receives a to establish a communication session using a first form of communication, wherein the communication session supports multiple and simultaneous forms of communication. Next, the communication manager selects a second form of communication to conduct the communication session. Then, the communication manager transcodes the second form of communication to the first form of communication. The different forms can be converted to facilitate and enrich the communication capability, according to an embodiment of the invention. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130198398 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AN IMPROVED NETWORK CLIENT DEVICE - A system and method for improving the efficiency of inbound audio and video calls communications and messaging which reduces the use of resources of a mobile device is disclosed. In the invention, a mobile device periodically and intermittently connects and polls the gateway server to determine if an inbound audio or video call has been requested. If a request for an audio or video call is retrieved, the mobile device allows the user to accept or reject the call, which choice is sent to the gateway server. If the call is accepted, the mobile connects to the gateway server with an authorization to answer the call. The invention periodically polls the gateway server for messages and is not constantly and persistently connected. As the mobile device is not continuously connected or in the process of constant reconnection, the mobile device's use of resources (battery, CPU, and network) is reduced. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130198399 | INPUT/OUTPUT COMMUNICATION - Data (e.g., a media stream) is received from a first electronic device at a second electronic device. Input is extracted from the received data. Thereafter, output responsive to the input is transmitted from the second electronic device to the first electronic device. | 08-01-2013 |
| 20130205033 | SESSION INFORMATION TRANSPARENCY CONTROL - Transparency control for session information for a communication network node can be set on a dynamic and/or static basis in relation to properties of a peer, an interface, a trust level, a session or a message. The transparency control can be based on message-related parameters, with the transparency of certain message parts being controlled on a static and/or dynamic basis in relation to transparency control settings. The transparency control can change upon the occurrence of a rerouting event that implicates recalculated transparency control settings. A message can be marked with transparency type settings that are evaluated to determine transparency control for the message. The transparency control can be based on transparency types of topology, dialog, identity, header, body, media, functional or accounting. The transparency control settings can be user selectable to permit transparency behavior tailored to the desires of an operator of the communication network node. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130205034 | METHODS FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATIONS IN A PRESENCE AND MESSAGING SERVER AND DEVICES THEREOF - A method, non-transitory computer readable medium, and apparatus for facilitating communication of presence information includes establishing a connection with at least one client computing device upon receiving a request for presence information from the client computing device. The request for presence information is inserted into a first queue. A response message is asynchronously obtained from a second queue maintained by a session server. The response message is sent to the client computing device according to the established connection. | 08-08-2013 |
| 20130212288 | Client Bandwidth Emulation in Hosted Services - Bandwidth on the Internet and intranets is highly variable and unreliable, two properties that can make streaming digital media content difficult. In a virtualization system (e.g., virtual desktop, remote desktop, remote application, and the like), this is especially so based on different bandwidths available to the session host and the session client. Methods and systems for emulating a bandwidth of a client device in a virtualization system are described. When the session host is executing an application (e.g., a digital media application), the session host may emulate the bandwidth of the session client by hooking into and throttling date over one or more APIs associated with the digital media application, thereby tricking the application into making a bandwidth determination based on the emulated bandwidth of the session client, rather than based on the bandwidth of the session host. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130212289 | FIXED MOBILE CONVERGENCE FOR AUDIO AND WEB CONFERENCE SESSIONS USING BARCODES - Method to transfer a communication session to a mobile device, including: receiving by use of a first communication channel an information message comprising an identification of the communication session and an identification of a communication client hosting the communication session; sending by use of a second communication channel a join request; joining the communication session; and sending by use of the second communication channel a confirmation message confirming the transfer of the communication session. Furthermore, a method to transfer a communication session from a mobile device to a nonparticipating computer, including: receiving by use of a first communication channel an information message comprising an identification of the nonparticipating conference-enabled computer; sending by use of a second communication channel a request to push the communication session to the nonparticipating computer; receiving a confirmation; and optionally closing the communication session on the mobile device. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130212290 | PROVIDING SESSION IDENTIFIERS - Technologies are generally described for providing a session identifier. In some examples, a method performed under control of a first device includes generating information including at least a part of a next session identifier to be used in a next session between the first device and a second device and transmitting the information to the second device. The next session follows a present session between the first device and the second device. | 08-15-2013 |
| 20130219071 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ROTATING A GATEWAY ADDRESS - A client device, a gateway and a corresponding method are provided in order to increase the security of a network to which access is provided via a gateway. The address of the gateway may rotate, e.g., change, such that hackers or other individuals or devices that should not have access to the network will experience much greater difficulty in securing the address of the gateway and accessing the network, at least for any extended period of time. By ensuring that both the client device and the gateway are synchronized in regard to the rotation of the address of the gateway, however, the client device may still properly address the gateway and therefore access the network, even as the address of the gateway rotates. Different operating systems may also be associated with some of the different addresses of the gateway in order to increase the security of the network. | 08-22-2013 |
| 20130219072 | SCREEN MIRRORING METHOD AND APPARATUS THEREOF - A screen mirroring method of a source device is provided, including determining whether a reproduction operation of media content is requested while a screen mirroring operation is performed, when the reproduction operation of the media content is requested, streaming the media content to a sink device and stopping the reproduction operation of the media content. | 08-22-2013 |
| 20130227153 | COMPUTER-IMPLEMENTED METHOD, COMPUTER SYSTEM AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIUM - The present application relates to a computer implemented method for processing a request to connect to a server from an application residing on a client device, comprising:
| 08-29-2013 |
| 20130227154 | Session Parameters in the Periodic Assistance Data Delivery - Session parameters and/or information regarding session parameters are provided to a target device from a location server in a periodic assistance session. For example, the location server starts an unsolicited periodic assistance session, and transmits information indicating the unsolicited assistance session is periodic as well as any relevant session parameters to the target device. The location server may change session parameters “on the fly,” and inform the target device of the modified session parameters. The target device may initiate a session and requests certain parameters, to which the location server responds with an indication as to what parameters the target device will actually receive. Additionally, the target device may modify the session parameters, and the location server can respond to the target indicating whether or not the modification was accepted or if the modification was accepted in a modified form. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130227155 | IPv4 ADDRESSING OVER NON-IPv4 SYSTEMS - A system includes an access node having an associated identifier. The access node is configured to insert the identifier into a network connection request. The system includes an IP edge service node connected to the access node and configured to receive the network connection request. The IP edge service node is further configured to store the inserted identifier and to insert the identifier into an Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) address request transmitted according to dynamic host configuration protocol version 6 (DHCPv6) through an established network connection based on the network connection request. The system further includes a server configured to receive the IPv6 address request and assign an IPv6 address based on the IPv6 address request. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130227156 | IPV6 ADDRESS GENERATION TO TRIGGER A VIRTUAL LEASED LINE SERVICE - Various embodiments relate to a communications system and related method for determining an address of a service access point (SAP) upon establishment of a service over a packet data network. A customer SAP connected to a provider SAP may request a link-local address for another customer SAP on the far-end of the packet data network. When the service, such as a virtual leased line (VLL) is not yet established, the provider SAP may generate an address for the customer based on another value, such as its own media access control (MAC) address. The generated address may then allow the service to become established, which may allow Neighbor Solicitation and Neighbor Advertisement packets to be sent, analyzed, and extracted. The provider SAP may then replace the generated address with the address extracted from the Neighbor Solicitation or Advertisement packet received after the service was established. | 08-29-2013 |
| 20130232273 | SIP Media Retry - Methods, apparatuses and computer programs for selecting a codec for use by a communications device for a session over a network, having a transcoding resource, are provided. It is determined whether the transcoding resource is available for the communications session and, if the transcoding resource is available, a subset of codecs available to the communications device is used in a signalling process used to determine a codec for the session. The subset is selected based on an operative condition affecting the communications device. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130232274 | NETWORK NODES THAT ESTABLISH SESSIONS USING EXISTING CONNECTIONS IDENTIFIED IN A CENTRAL DATABASE - Network nodes can add information to a central database ( | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130232275 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING CONNECTIONS - A mechanism for establishing connections is described. The mechanism comprises: sending a first message comprising the domain name of a network element to a server; receiving a response message comprising server record and domain names relevant to primary IP address and secondary IP address of the network element from the server; determining, on the basis of the received response message, the domain names relevant to the primary IP address and secondary IP address of the network element respectively; sending a second message comprising the determined domain name relevant to the primary IP address of the network element to the server; receiving the primary IP address of the network element from the server; attempting to establish a first connection towards the network element based on the obtained primary IP address; sending a third message comprising the determined domain name relevant to the secondary IP address of the network element to the server in the event that the first connection establishment attempt fails; receiving the secondary IP address of the network element from the server in response to the third message; and attempting to establish a second connection towards the network element based on the obtained secondary IP address. | 09-05-2013 |
| 20130238809 | Secure Capability Negotiation between a Client and Server - Embodiments of the present disclosure provide for establishing an authenticated session between a client computing device and a remote computing device. In certain embodiments, a connection is established between the client computing device and the remote computing device. Once the connection is established, the client computing device sends a number of requests to the client computing device including a negotiate request, a setup request, and a validation request. In response to the requests, the client computing device receives a number of responses from the remote computing device including a negotiate response, setup response and a validation response. Once the responses have been received, a determination is made as to whether information contained in the validation response matches information contained in the negotiate response. If the information matches, an authenticated session is established between the remote computing device and the client computing device. | 09-12-2013 |
| 20130246639 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FLEXIBLE NETWORK ACCESS CONTROL POLICIES IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method includes capturing session attributes associated with a communication session initiated by a node in a network environment, querying external attributes associated with the node, deriving a response attribute according to an access control policy rule based on at least one of the session attributes and at least one of the external attributes, and applying the response attribute to the communication session. The session attributes can include remote authentication dial in user service RADIUS vendor specific attribute information from an unknown vendor. The method may further include auditing the communication session, enforcing the response attribute, or ignoring the access control policy. Enforcing the response attribute can include taking an access control action according to the response attribute. The access control action may include allowing the node to access a virtual local area network in the network environment, denying access to the network environment, etc. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130246640 | UNIVERSE MEDIA SHUFFLING - A communication broker and methods of administering the same are provided. The communication broker is adapted to direct various enterprises to set up a media channel directly therebetween while remaining in the control signaling path for the communication session. The broker may enable the enterprises to use standard authentication techniques and the Datagram Transport Layer Security (DTLS) protocol to establish the media channel. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130246641 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC SERVER CLIENT CONTROLLED CONNECTIVITY LOGIC - The exemplary embodiments of the invention provide at least a method and apparatus to receive a connection instruction request from a user equipment; identify a network from which the request was sent; select stored probe values and associated network information that are associated with the identified network; determine connection instructions based at least in part on the stored probe values and the associated network information, in which the connection instructions include a dynamically extended reconnection delay if a determined keep-alive timer for keep-alive instructions would be impractically short; and send the connection instructions to the user equipment. Further, the exemplary embodiments of the invention provide at least a method and apparatus to determine a maximum packet size for which transmission will not trigger a state change for user equipment; and restrict transmissions of background data to or from the user equipment so as not to exceed the maximum packet size. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130246642 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ESTABLISHING AUDIO AND VIDEO COMMUNICATION CONNECTION - A method and apparatus for establishing an audio and video communication connection is provided. The method comprises the steps of establishing server-relayed connections with a plurality of clients; attempting to establish direct or client-relayed connections with the plurality of clients; and if the attempt to establish direct or client-relayed connections with the plurality of clients is successfully, disconnecting the server-relayed connections with the plurality of clients. The apparatus comprises a first building module for establishing server-relayed connections with a plurality of clients, a second building module for attempting to establish direct or client-relayed connections with the plurality of clients; wherein the first building module is configured to disconnect the server-relayed connections with the plurality of clients if the attempt to establish direct or client-relayed connections with the plurality of clients is successfully. | 09-19-2013 |
| 20130254411 | DIRECT COMMUNICATION BETWEEN APPLICATIONS IN A CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - A device receives traffic destined for a first application, and the traffic is received from a second application via a virtual machine and an indirect connection. The device determines, based on the traffic, whether the second application is a known and trusted neighbor of the first application, and establishes a direct connection between the first application and the second application, when the second application is a known and trusted neighbor of the first application. The device also applies traffic rules to the direct connection, and enables the traffic to be directly and securely communicated between the first application and the second application via the direct connection. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130254412 | UNIFIED COMMUNICATION AWARE NETWORKS - Unified Communication and Collaboration (UC&C) systems are enabled to dynamically enlighten a set of network elements (NEs) and/or network infrastructure with application awareness so that an accurate set of rules or actions can be applied for a given session without needing to lookup the payload of every packet or applying a somewhat ineffective expensive heuristic mechanisms. Taking advantage of typically longer communication session durations and separate control and media planes, a UC&C control point programs a set of NEs for a given UC&C media flow within a scalable and timely manner. Quality of Service (QoS), security, monitoring, and similar functionality may also be programmed into the NEs through the UC&C control point. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130254413 | PEER-TO-PEER TIME LIMITED DATA SHARING - System and methods for performing time limited data sharing over peer-to-peer data connections. A sharing data communications device sends a data sharing invitation with an end time specification to another device. Upon accepting the invitation, a data sharing relationship is established that will terminate at the specified end time. The invitation specifies a data set that can be shared over the data sharing relationship. The sharing data communications device is able to send the specified data set to the other device until the end time or until the data sharing relationship is terminated by either device. In one example, the establishment and maintenance of the data sharing relationship and shared data exchange is performed by the two end user devices over a peer-to-peer data protocol without an intermediate data sharing server. | 09-26-2013 |
| 20130262686 | METHOD FOR ORGANIZING A COLLABORATIVE EVENT AND SYSTEM EMPLOYING SAME - A method of establishing a collaborative event comprises creating an event session having an event identifier and setting up a wireless network to which one or more participant computing devices can connect having a network identifier associated with said event identifier. | 10-03-2013 |
| 20130268685 | LOSS TOLERANT PROTOCOL FOR REMOTING DESKTOP GRAPHICS - In various embodiments, remote presentation encoding techniques may be modified in such a way that the data can be transmitted over transports without guaranteed packet delivery. In one embodiment, the desktop graphics data may be encoded in individual frames, each frame comprising self-contained graphics elements that fit in a small number of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) protocol data units (PDUs). The PDUs may then be sent to the client on a separate lossy link instead of the lossless link. On the client side, the client may detect which graphic elements within a frame were “lost” as a result of dropped UDP packets and request a refresh from the server through the lossless channel. | 10-10-2013 |
| 20130268686 | METHOD, SWITCH, SERVER AND SYSTEM FOR SENDING CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT REQUEST - A method for sending a connection establishment request is provided, comprising: sending a parameter requesting message to a configuration server from an OpenFlow switch for obtaining connection parameters of an OpenFlow controller; receiving by the OpenFlow switch an Internet Protocol (IP) address and a set of OpenFlow controller connection parameters sent from the configuration server, the set of connection parameters comprising at least connection parameters of a first OpenFlow controller; sending a connection establishment request message to the first OpenFlow controller from the OpenFlow switch according to the IP address and the connection parameter of the first OpenFlow controller. An OpenFlow switch, a configuration server and a system for sending a connection establishment request are also provided. With the solutions provided in embodiments of the disclosure, the automatic connection establishment between the OpenFlow switch and the OpenFlow controller can be realized. | 10-10-2013 |
| 20130275605 | ENGINEERING TOOL AND PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER - An engineering tool and a programmable controller include a creation unit that converts a parameter of a transmission/reception area of a link device in a controller network into a parameter of a reception area of a reception link device and a parameter of a transmission area of a transmission link device in a field network based on a conversion law that is different between a master and a slave in the field network, thereby creating a parameter of a transmission/reception area of the link device in the field network. | 10-17-2013 |
| 20130282912 | CONNECTION ESTABLISHING METHOD BETWEEN TWO ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND SYSTEM APPLYING THE SAME - A connection establishing method between two electronic devices is disclosed, which includes following steps: activating a connection establishing program in a first electronic device; searching at least one specified electronic device; reading a storage unit, wherein the storage unit includes a database, and the database stores a plurality of corresponding connection modes between a plurality of second electronic devices and the first electronic device; pairing the searched specified electronic device with the database. If the second electronic devices include the specified electronic device, a connection between the specified electronic device and the first electronic device is established according to the corresponding connection mode. If the second electronic devices do not include the specified electronic device, a connection mode between the specified electronic device and the first electronic device is established and the database is updated. | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130282913 | FACILITATING EARLY MEDIA IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method of sending information from a Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node to a first Session Initiation Protocol terminal. The method comprises, upon receipt of a session initiation request at the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node, establishing a first Session Initiation Protocol dialog between the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node and the first Session Initiation Protocol terminal, sending information over said first dialog, forwarding said request from the Session Initiation Protocol intermediate node to a second, destination Session Initiation Protocol terminal, before, during, or after establishment of said first dialog, and establishing a second Session Initiation Protocol dialog, between the first and second Session Initiation Protocol terminals. | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130282914 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTENT PROTECTION IN WI-FI DIRECT NETWORK - A method of performing communication between a first device and a second device by using a Wi-Fi direct scheme is provided. The method may include receiving, by the first device, information on relating to a content protection capability of the second device in during a device discovery procedure; and determining, by the first device, whether to perform a connection setup procedure with the second device based on the received information on relating to the content protection capability of the second device. | 10-24-2013 |
| 20130290548 | HOME GATEWAY, CLOUD SERVER, AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION THEREBETWEEN - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method and an apparatus for communication between a home gateway and a cloud server. The cloud server has a home gateway software running unit, and various software modules are arranged in the home gateway software running unit. The method includes the following: The cloud server establishes a data communication channel with the home gateway through a TCP/IP protocol, where a terminal is connected to the home gateway through a short-distance communication protocol; and the home gateway software running unit sends a first software message to the home gateway through the data communication channel so that the home gateway forwards the first software message to a first terminal to which the first software message is directed; or the home gateway software running unit receives a second software message from the home gateway through the data communication channel. | 10-31-2013 |
| 20130290549 | METHOD FOR MANAGING NETWORK CONNECTION INFORMATION AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - An electronic device capable of connecting to networks, and in particular, to a device and method for managing Packet Data Protocol (PDP) context in an electronic device are provided. The method includes when first network connection information stored in a memory upon performance of an initialization booting operation is different from second network connection information, using the second network connection information for network connection, wherein the first network connection information corresponds to network connection information defined by default in the electronic device and the second network connection information corresponds to network connection information updated by a service provider. | 10-31-2013 |
| 20130290550 | TERMINAL CAPABILITIES SET EXCHANGE BETWEEN HETEROGENEOUS ENDPOINTS - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving at a protocol translator a first message from a first endpoint to a second endpoint. The first message includes a list of media capabilities of the first endpoint. The method also includes transmitting from the protocol translator a second message to the second endpoint including a media capabilities request header and receiving at the protocol translator a response message from the second endpoint. The response message includes a response header including a list of the media capabilities of the second endpoint. | 10-31-2013 |
| 20130290551 | CONTROL APPARATUS, CONTROL TARGET APPARATUS, AND METHOD FOR OPERATING THE CONTROL, APPARATUS AND THE CONTROL TARGET APPARATUS IN MULTIPLE NETWORKS - A control target device receives, from a control point device connected to a first network, a message for requesting movement to a second network. The control target device transmits a network movement advertising message to the control point device of the first network. The control target device disconnects from the first network and accesses the second network. | 10-31-2013 |
| 20130290552 | Client and a Method in a Client in a Communication Network for Providing a Service - A client and a method in a client in a communication network comprising a core network, for providing a communication service, is provided. The method comprises receiving a session setup request from an originating party, requesting a session with a destination party. The setup request comprises a capability indication associated with the originating party and a session type indication. The method further comprises determining capabilities of devices in a first communication context associated with the destination party and comparing the capabilities of the devices in the first communication context to the capability indication and to the session type indication in the received request. Still further, the method comprises determining a level of correspondence between the capability indication and the session type indication, and the capabilities of devices in the first communication context, and indicating a device in the first communication context having a suitable level of correspondence to the capability indication associated with the originating party and the session type indication. | 10-31-2013 |
| 20130297810 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PEER-TO-PEER CONNECTION REESTABLISHMENT - Techniques are provided for efficiently reestablishing connection between peer-to-peer devices. For example, there is provided a method for peer-to-peer (P2P) connection reestablishment by a mobile device. The method may involve caching at least one of a Radio Resource Control (RRC) context and a session management (SM) context for a previous P2P session with a peer mobile device. The method may further involve establishing a connection with the peer mobile device based at least in part on at least one connection context identifier (CC ID) associated with the previous P2P session. The method may further involve reestablishing a previous session state based on the at least one of the RRC context and the SM context. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130297811 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING SIP OPTION MESSAGE FOR CAPABILITY DISCOVERY OF RICH COMMUNICATION SUITE IN PORTABLE TERMINAL - A method of exchanging Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) options messages for Rich Communication Suite (RCS) capability discovery in a portable terminal is provided. The method includes requesting a server for a setting value associated with an SIP options message exchange, receiving the setting value including the number of the SIP options messages for transmission and a transmission cycle of the SIP options message, transmitting the SIP options message to each of as many contacts as the number of the SIP options messages in the transmission cycle, receiving a reply message from each of the contacts to which the SIP options message is sent, and updating RCS capability information of the contact according to the received reply message, the contacts are registered to a phone book of the portable terminal. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130297812 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REALIZING APPLICATION DETECTION AND CONTROL IN IP-CAN SESSION SUPPORTING DUAL STACK - The disclosure provides a method and a system for realizing application detection and control in an IP-Connectivity Access Network (IP-CAN) session supporting dual stack. The method includes: a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) informs a Traffic Detection Function (TDF) of an IPv4 address via a TDF session established for the IP-CAN session if a gateway where the PCEF is located or another external network element allocates the IPv4 address according to a request of the UE and the UE accesses a service using the IPv4 address, after the UE establishes the IP-CAN session and accesses a service using an IPv6 address in the IP-CAN session supporting dual stack; and the TDF performs application detection and control on traffic, of which the source address and/or the destination address is/are the IPv4 address, according to an Application Detection and Control (ADC) rule related to the TDF session. With the method of the disclosure, the PCRF will no longer initiate a request for establishing a new TDF session, in this way, the service detection for one same IP-CAN session needs to be reported via one same TDF session only, thus, resources are saved and signalling overhead is reduced. | 11-07-2013 |
| 20130304930 | FORKING INTERWORKING - Communication systems, such as the long term evolution (LTE) of the third generation partnership project (3GPP), may interoperate with other communication systems. Interoperating communication systems may benefit from forking interworking in cases where, for example, one network supports session initiation protocol forking and one network does not. A method may include receiving a session initiation protocol invite request containing a session description protocol offer from a network not supporting forking. The method may also include receiving, in different early dialogues, a plurality of provisional session initiation protocol responses containing session description protocol answers. The method may further include storing information from the answers together with information about a related session information protocol dialogue. | 11-14-2013 |
| 20130304931 | SEAMLESS HOST MIGRATION BASED ON NAT TYPE - Systems and methods of the present invention for maintaining network data distribution are provided. Network data may be distributed in such as manner as to allow a network session to weather interrupted communications between host and clients without significant loss of data. Embodiments of the present invention provide for one or more clients to serve as backup host(s) for the network session, such determinations including the use of NAT profile information. When the other clients transmit data to the host, they may also transmit the data to one or more backup hosts if there are any indications of interrupted communication. | 11-14-2013 |
| 20130311665 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR FACILITATING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DURING A PRE-BOOT PHASE OF A COMPUTING DEVICE - A system, device, and method for facilitating wireless communications during a pre-boot phase of a computing device includes establishing a communications interface between a unified extensible firmware interface executed on the computing device and a wireless transceiver of the computing device during a pre-boot phase of the computing device. An OOB processor of the computing device processes data communications between the unified extensible firmware interface and the wireless communication circuit during the pre-boot phase by reformatting the data communications between wired and wireless communication standards. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130311666 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, AND NON-TRANSITORY COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus, which is connectable with a plurality of networks including a first network and a second network of a type different from the first network, is provided. The communication apparatus detects an operation by user for setting communication parameters for connecting to a network, and provides, if detecting the operation while connecting with another first communication apparatus via the first network, another second communication apparatus with communication parameters for communication via the second network. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130311667 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DYNAMIC POLICY EVALUATION - Methods and apparatus for managing a media session on a network device, and for selecting and applying policies to the media session. The network device may initially evaluate a general set of media session policies. A subset of the policies may be identified by selecting only those policies whose rules are currently satisfied, or whose rules are not presently satisfied but which may be satisfied when a fast-changing characteristic of the media session changes. Policies whose rules are not initially satisfied due to a slow-changing characteristic are not likely to be satisfied within the life of the media session, and can be excluded from the subset of policies. Thereafter, only the subset of selected policies need be re-evaluated during the media session. | 11-21-2013 |
| 20130318249 | Communication Session Transfer Between Devices - Methods and apparatuses, including computer program products, are described for communication session transfer between a plurality of computing devices. A first computing device detects the presence of a second computing device in proximity to the first computing device, where the first computing device has established a first communication session with a remote computing device. The first computing device establishes a wireless connection to the second computing device. The first computing device receives, from the second computing device, information associated with the first communication session. The first computing device establishes a second communication session with the remote computing device using the received information, where the second communication session is established with the same state as the first communication session. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130318250 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING BETWEEN TERMINALS - Disclosed is a terminal connection method. The method includes providing an identifier and network state information of a first terminal to a server; and upon a request of a second terminal, establishing a network with the second terminal on the basis of the network state information. It is possible to connect terminals with each other over a network by simply entering a registered ID when the terminals are connected over the network, thereby quickly and easily connect the terminals. | 11-28-2013 |
| 20130326076 | PER FLOW AND PER SESSION METERING LIMIT APPLICATION - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by a policy and charging rules node (PCRN), the method including: receiving a metering limit associated with a user; defining a session key associated with the metering limit; defining a flow key associated with the metering limit; dynamically selecting the session key; commanding a policy and charging enforcement node to apply the dynamically selected session key to a session of the user; dynamically selecting the flow key; and commanding a policy and charging enforcement node to uninstall the session key and to apply the dynamically selected flow key to a flow of the user. | 12-05-2013 |
| 20130326077 | METHOD FOR CONNECTING A REMOTE NETWORK AND SYSTEM FOR CONNECTING A REMOTE NETWORK - Disclosed is a remote network connection method of easily establishing network connection between an information processing apparatus and a terminal device. The remote network connection method includes connecting to a gateway, transmitting connection information including at least one of gateway connection information and information processing apparatus identification information to a server, and setting network connection to a terminal device connected to the gateway on the basis of the connection information through the gateway. Accordingly, it is possible to easily establish the remote network connection between the information processing apparatus and the terminal device through a mobile communication network using a push message function of the server, without a separate network connection setup between the information processing apparatus and the terminal device. It is also possible to reduce the network maintenance cost. | 12-05-2013 |
| 20130332618 | Enabling different client contexts to share session information - The problem of sharing session information across client contexts is addressed by binding initial session information to a persistent, short-lived and one-time use temporary identifier. This identifier is persisted on a client side (e.g., through a cookie jar) that is shared among the different client contexts that can share the original session. This temporary identifier, in turn, allows one or more other sessions to use the original session information by acting as an index into that session information, which is stored on the server side. Preferably, this temporary identifier contains a unique identifier (ID) that is generated as a sufficiently-complex random number. A mapping back to the real session identifier is maintained on the server side for this short-lived ID. | 12-12-2013 |
| 20130339532 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COOKIE-BASED BROWSER IDENTIFICATION AND TRACKING - The present invention provides a system and method to identify unique browsers (Agents) communicating to the client. Every new browser communicating through the client is assigned a unique Agent ID that is stored in the browser's cookie cache. When the browser sends a request, the cookie may have the Agent ID to identify the browser to the client. If the cookie with the Agent ID is not present, then the client will return a re-direction response to a common URL with the domain having the cookie with the Agent ID to identify the unique browser. Another re-direction takes place back to the browser to make the request with the original URL, but this time has the cookie with the Agent ID to identify the unique browser. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130339533 | VIRTUAL SESSION MANAGEMENT AND REESTABLISHMENT - Systems and methods are described that establish and maintain a virtual session between a client and one or more database servers. A database server establishes a first session with a client wherein establishing the virtual session with the client comprises associating a virtual session identifier (ID) with the first session, generates state information in association with the first session, and stores the state information in a repository in association with the virtual session ID. After the first session fails, a same or different database server establishes a second session with the client wherein establishing the second session with the client comprises receiving the virtual session ID from the client, accesses the state information that was stored in the repository in association with the virtual session ID, and associates the state information with the second session. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20130339534 | DEVICE INTERCONNECTION TECHNIQUE - Communication between first device and second media device commences by first rendering accessible at least one area in the first device for access by the second device. Thereafter, the electronic first device receives identification information from the second device via a first communications modality. In response to the identification information, the first device configures itself to initiate communications with the second device via a second communications modality. | 12-19-2013 |
| 20140006634 | Method of Communication Between Two Devices | 01-02-2014 |
| 20140012997 | DYNAMIC CLIENT REGISTRATION FOR SERVER PUSH EVENTS IN LONG POLLING SCENARIOS - The disclosure generally describes computer-implemented methods, software, and systems for modeling and deploying decision services. One computer-implemented method includes establishing a push-channel session uniquely associated with a client, wherein the push channel session communicates with the client using a single push channel. The computer-implemented method further includes registering the established push-channel session with a messaging channel runtime creating a client-specific messaging channel and registering a backend application with the push-channel-session-associated single push channel using a push channel registration session. The method further includes, responsive to an application message received from an application session associated with the backend application using a client-specific application channel, dispatching the received application message to the push-channel session from the messaging channel runtime using the client-specific messaging channel. The method includes communicating the dispatched application message to the client using the single push channel. | 01-09-2014 |
| 20140012998 | LIVE CONNECTION ENHANCEMENT FOR DATA SOURCE INTERFACE - The invention provides for the connection of a plurality of remote applications with a data source, to maximize the speed and reliability of data transfer. An interface module interfaces with a remote application such as a web browser. A port module interfaces between interface module and a data source. A connection manager facilitates the interface between the interface module and the port module. The port module detects the unavailability of the data source in response to an initial request for the data source by the remote application. The port module may then dynamically detect the availability of the data source in response to a subsequent request for the data source and re-connect to the data source to the remote application in response to the subsequent request without having to reinitialize the connection manager. | 01-09-2014 |
| 20140012999 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING PAID CONNECTION USING SCREEN MIRRORING APPLICATION BETWEEN MULTI- PLATFORMS - A method of establishing a paid connection using a screen mirroring application between multi-platforms is disclosed. A transmitting end application is installed in a transmitting end apparatus of a sharing source. A receiving end application is installed in a receiving end apparatus of a sharing target. If the transmitting end application is a paid version, an unlimited connection is established for performing screen mirroring between the transmitting end apparatus and any receiving end apparatus. If the transmitting end application is a free version, the method further confirms if the receiving end application is a paid version for deciding whether a limited connection or an unlimited connection should be established. Thus, it is assured that either the transmitting end application or the receiving end application is a paid version, the interests of application developers are protected and users are free from paying twice for establishing one connection. | 01-09-2014 |
| 20140019628 | RESOURCE ADAPTER FOR ESTABLISHING A CONNECTION BETWEEN AN EXECUTIVE INFORMATION SYSTEM AND AT LEAST ONE CLIENT - Certain example embodiments relate to a resource adapter configured to establish connections between an executive information system (EIS) and one or more clients. The resource adapter includes at least a first and a second connection pool, both maintaining a plurality of connection objects. Each connection object defines a channel of communication between the EIS and the resource adapter. A cluster coordinator is configured to assign a first connection object in a first connection pool and a second connection object in a second connection pool to the one or more clients to create at least two coexisting connections between the one or more clients and the EIS. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140019629 | DISTRIBUTED CALL SERVER SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION SESSIONS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - An apparatus, method, and computer program manage communication sessions that include a plurality of portions. Different processors handle each portion of a communication session. The apparatus, method, and computer program transfer the communication session from one of the processors to another of the processors during the different portions of the communication session. | 01-16-2014 |
| 20140025831 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING POST-RING RESERVATIONS - In one embodiment, a method includes obtaining a request from a first endpoint to establish a session, determining whether a resource reservation may be established post-ring, and identifying a second endpoint to establish the resource reservation post-ring when it is determined that the resource reservation may be established post-ring. The method also includes notifying the second endpoint of the request and ringing the second endpoint. Notifying the second endpoint of the request includes notifying the second endpoint that the resource reservation may be established post-ring. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140025832 | INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM, CLIENT DEVICE, AND CONTROL METHOD - An image forming apparatus establishes a first network connection using a network protocol to enable transmitting of a request that is issued by taking the server apparatus for the starting point through a firewall to the image forming apparatus. The client server apparatus transmits an instruction through the first network connection to establish a second network connection corresponding to an application installed on the image forming apparatus after establishment of the first network connection. The image forming apparatus establishes the second network connection in response to the instruction transmitted from the print server. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140025833 | Communication Device and Method for Transmitting Messages in a Redundantly Operable Industrial Communication Network - A method for transmitting messages in a redundantly operable communication network which includes a first subnetwork with a tree topology and a second subnetwork, wherein messages are transmitted in the first subnetwork in accordance with a spanning tree protocol. Here, communication devices associated with network nodes of the first subnetwork interchange messages containing topology information with one another to form a tree topology, messages are transmitted in the second subnetwork in accordance with a parallel or ring redundancy protocol, communication devices associated with network nodes of the second subnetwork interchange messages containing topology information for the first subnetwork with one another in accordance with the parallel or ring redundancy protocol and compare the messages with locally available topology information for the first subnetwork, and communication devices associated with network nodes of the second subnetwork determine resultant topology information for the first subnetwork based on a comparison result. | 01-23-2014 |
| 20140032770 | DECLARATIVE SPECIFICATION OF COLLABORATION CLIENT FUNCTIONALITY - Some embodiments may provide a method comprising accessing a first declarative specification element specifying a collaboration session context, accessing a second declarative specification element depending from the first declarative specification element. Some embodiments may further provide a method comprising generating, based on the first declarative specification element, first instructions to instantiate the collaboration session connection, generating, based on the second declarative specification element, second instructions, and generating sequencing instructions to prevent the second instructions from being executed until the collaboration session connection is instantiated. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140032771 | ADAPTIVE CONNECTIVITY IN NETWORK-BASED COLLABORATION - Various embodiments include at least one of systems, methods, software, and data structures for peer-to-peer exchange of at least a portion of networked collaboration session data. Client and server solutions allow for switching between peer-to-peer and server-centric modes of collaboration data sharing. Some embodiments also allow for sharing of data of a first type via a collaboration server and data of a second type via peer-to-peer connections. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140032772 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR USING METADATA TO REPRESENT SOCIAL CONTEXT INFORMATION - A method includes establishing an interaction session between a plurality of devices associated with a plurality of users, respectively. Access to an asset by a first device in the interaction session is detected. Session metadata relating to the interaction session is associated with the asset. The asset may be an asset that was generated by another device during another interaction session or it may have been generated by the first device in the interaction session. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140032773 | RUN-TIME ACTIONABLE INFORMATION EXCHANGE SYSTEM IN A SECURE ENVIRONMENT - Systems and methods of implementing features in session border controllers at runtime after deployment. The systems can include a session border controller (SBC), and a user computer communicably coupled to the SBC by a network. The systems and methods can enable a user to introduce, via the user computer, actionable information (Al) into the SBC, which can store the Al in an Al registry. The SBC can expose or otherwise make available the Al stored in the Al registry to the user, allowing the user to generate and/or modify, using at least some of the Al, one or more policies and/or rules that can be implemented and/or executed by the SBC for introducing one or more features in the SBC. In this way, such features can be implemented in the SBC at runtime after deployment, without having to undergo a separate design and development cycle for the SBC. | 01-30-2014 |
| 20140040488 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIATING AND MAINTAINING SESSIONS BETWEEN ENDPOINTS - Methods for re-anchoring a transport layer session in a communication network are disclosed. For example, a method receives a request to re-anchor a transport layer session and sends a packet notifying of a transport layer session re-anchor to a peer. The packet includes a header with a session identifier field, and a record type field that indicates that a payload of the packet comprises transport layer session re-anchor information. The method then receives a confirmation of the transport layer session re-anchor notification. Another method receives a packet comprising a notification of a transport layer session re-anchor from a peer. The packet includes a header with a session identifier field, and a record type field that indicates that a payload of the packet comprises transport layer session re-anchor information. The method then updates a session management table and transmits packets to the peer using an updated address received in the notification of the transport layer session re-anchor. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140040489 | Method and Apparatus for Identifying an IMS Service - A method of indicating IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) services and IMS applications to which a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) message relates. An IMS communication service identifier and an IMS application reference are added to the SIP message. The identifier and the reference may be added as Feature Tags. The reference may also be added as an a-line augmenting an m-line in a Session Description Protocol (SDP) part of the SIP message. | 02-06-2014 |
| 20140047122 | HIGH AVAILABILITY SESSION RECONSTRUCTION - A first message is received at a primary container that is replicated by a secondary container. The first message is an initial message to initiate a first session. The first message is processed by an application in the primary container. At a point in time, the primary container is unavailable and the system and method detect that the primary container is unavailable. A second message is received. The second message is associated with the first session. The second message is modified by moving at least a portion of a header in the second message into a different header in the second message and adding an additional header to the second message in response to the primary container being unavailable. | 02-13-2014 |
| 20140059239 | ACKNOWLEDGEMENT MESSAGE MONITORING - The invention relates to a system and method for monitoring a handshaking exchange between a call initiator and a call recipient to determine if handshaking has failed, to avoid repeated failed calls between the call initiator and the call recipient. | 02-27-2014 |
| 20140059240 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COMMUNICATION SESSION CORRELATION - A system and method for correlating communication sessions. A globally unique correlation identifier is created and exchanged between the parties during Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) session setup to allow for association and correlation of additional SIP sessions between the same parties or with additional parties. The correlation information may then be used by network and session entities to perform different services. | 02-27-2014 |
| 20140059241 | Multiple Core Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) - A Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) proxy server including a multi-core central processing unit (CPU) is presented. The multi-core CPU includes a receiving core dedicated to pre-SIP message processing. The pre-SIP message processing may include message retrieval, header and payload parsing, and Call-ID hashing. The Call-ID hashing is used to determine a post-SIP processing core designated to process messages between particular user pair. The pre-SIP and post-SIP configuration allows for the use of multiple processing cores to utilize a single control plane, thereby providing an accurate topology of the network for each processing core. | 02-27-2014 |
| 20140068091 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING A SYNCHRONIZATION OF SUBSCRIPTION-NOTIFICATION SERVICE SUBSCRIPTIONS AMONG MULTIPLE ENTITIES - A communication system synchronizes subscriptions between a user terminal (UT) and a Subscription Service Host (SSH). The UT conveys, to the SSH, multiple subscription messages associated with a Watcher that each initiates a subscription associated with the Watcher and requests watched entity status information. The UT starts a timer and, in response to an expiration of the timer, conveys a subscription information consolidated status update (SICSU) request to the SSH that requests a consolidated status update of all subscriptions associated with the Watcher. In response, the UT receives an SICSU notification comprising a first one or more SICSU values that indicate a status of multiple subscriptions associated with the Watcher, determines a corresponding second one or more SICSU values based on its own list, compares the first SICSU values to the second SICSU values, and determines whether the UT is out of synchronization with the SSH based on the comparison. | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140068092 | MANAGEMENT AND OPTIMIZATION OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS MULTIPLEXED OVER MULTIPLE LAYER-THREE TRANSPORTS WITH INDEFINITE DURATION LAYER-TWO SESSIONS - A method of managing peer-to-peer communications between electronic devices is described. The method may include establishing an address for a plurality of network media types that a protocol stack is able to access, the address being configured as an endpoint on a first electronic device to which a second electronic device may connect to and connecting through the established address of the second electronic device supporting the same network medium. The method may further include determining which endpoint to use to establish a connection between two devices. | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140068093 | System, Device, Method and Computer Program Product for Managing Devices - A system for managing a communication device having a first function of using a first communication protocol and a second function of using a second communication protocol is provided. The communication device is connected to a network including a first device using the first communication protocol and a second device using the second communication protocol. The system is provided with an inputting system that accepts an input for changing an operation regarding the communication of the communication device from a user, and a judging system that judges whether a trouble would arise in communication, in which the communication device is involved, based on the input inputted by the user through use of the inputting system. | 03-06-2014 |
| 20140075037 | NETWORK STACK AND NETWORK ADDRESSING FOR MOBILE DEVICES - An apparatus may include a processor circuit, a memory, and a networking stack for execution on the processor circuit to generate a request message to establish a communications session, the request message including a first globally unique identifier (GUID) that identifies the apparatus and second GUID associated with a target device, generate an application identifier that specifies a connection protocol to be used to conduct the communications session, and initiate the communications session upon receipt of the second GUID associated with the target device. Other embodiments are described and claimed. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140075038 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a communication system that performs effective media data communication while preventing deterioration in communication quality. The present invention relates to a communication device that relays data between plural networks. The communication device includes a data processing unit for transmitting received data to a route to a destination of the data, a unit for managing data flowing through the communication device in a session unit and classifying managed sessions into a management session and a non-management session, and a unit for determining a route related to the management session based on conditions of the non-management session passing through each route. The data processing unit outputs data related to the management session to the route. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140075039 | NETWORKING METHOD, SERVER DEVICE, CLIENT DEVICE, AND NETWORK SYSTEM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a networking method, a server device, a client device, and a network system, relating to the communication field, for implementing easy interworking between the server device and the client device. The method includes: receiving, by a client device through a wireless router, a request message that is broadcast by a server device connected to the wireless router for requesting to display IP information of the client device, where the client device is connected to the wireless router; and displaying, by the client device, the IP information of the client device on a screen so that the server device is connected to the client device according to the IP information. The embodiments of the present invention are applicable to networking between the client device and the server device. | 03-13-2014 |
| 20140082207 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE SAME, AND STORAGE MEDIUM - A communication apparatus receives a network ID from an access point, connects to a network formed by the access point, establishes communication with an external device via the connected network, allows data communication, receives a device ID from the external device, compares the network ID of the connected network with the received device ID, and determines whether the external device is operating as the access point based on a result of the comparison. | 03-20-2014 |
| 20140095724 | DISTRIBUTED APPLICATION OF ENTERPRISE POLICIES TO WEB REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS (WEBRTC) INTERACTIVE SESSIONS, AND RELATED METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA - Distributed application of enterprise policies to WebRTC interactive sessions, and related methods, systems, and computer-readable media are disclosed. In this regard, in one embodiment, a method for applying an enterprise policy to a WebRTC interactive session comprises receiving, by a distributed policy enforcement agent of a recipient device, a WebRTC session description object directed to the recipient device originating from a sender device via a secure network connection. The method further comprises determining, by the distributed policy enforcement agent, one or more enterprise policies based on the WebRTC session description object. The method additionally comprises applying the one or more enterprise policies to the WebRTC session description object. In this manner, an enterprise may permit establishment of a WebRTC interactive session that crosses an enterprise network boundary, while at the same time ensuring that the WebRTC interactive session complies with the one or more enterprise policies. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140095725 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SERVER INITIATED CONNECTION MANAGEMENT IN A MULTI-CORE SYSTEM - The present application is directed towards systems and methods for managing server initiated connections via a multi-core system that provides VPN access between clients and servers. The solution described herein provides a mechanism by which server and client communications via the multi-core system for a server initiated connection may be received on different cores and for the system to manage these communications across different cores to provide an end-to-end connectivity between the client and the server. | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140095726 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A THIN CLIENT SESSION - The exemplary embodiment concerns a method for establishing a Thin Client session between a Thin Client device ( | 04-03-2014 |
| 20140101323 | MANAGING MID-DIALOG SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) MESSAGES - Processing mid-dialog SIP messages by receiving a mid-dialog SIP message from a SIP user agent client, creating a new SIP session, associating the new SIP session with the mid-dialog SIP message, identifying an application that is associated with the mid-dialog SIP message, providing to the application the mid-dialog SIP message in the context of the new SIP session, receiving an acknowledgement from the application that the application will accept the mid-dialog SIP message, and responsive to receiving the acknowledgement, providing to the application the mid-dialog SIP message in the context of the new SIP session. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140101324 | DYNAMIC VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - Various embodiments establish a virtual private network (VPN) between a remote network and a private network. In one embodiment, a first system in the remote network establishes a connection with a central system through a public network. The central system is situated between the first system and a second system in the private network. The first system receives, from the central system and based on establishing the connection, a set of VPN information associated with at least the second system. The first system disconnects from the central system and establishes a VPN directly with the second system through the public network based on the set of VPN information. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140101325 | DYNAMIC VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORK - Various embodiments establish a virtual private network (VPN) between a remote network and a private network. In one embodiment, a first system in the remote network establishes a connection with a central system through a public network. The central system is situated between the first system and a second system in the private network. The first system receives, from the central system and based on establishing the connection, a set of VPN information associated with at least the second system. The first system disconnects from the central system and establishes a VPN directly with the second system through the public network based on the set of VPN information. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140101326 | DATA CLIENT - Facilitating the distribution of content is disclosed. A request for content is received from a requesting peer. A peer type compatibility criteria is applied to an allocation process that allocates at least one sending peer to deliver the content to the requesting peer. The peer type compatibility criteria ensures that a lightweight peer is paired with a regular peer. | 04-10-2014 |
| 20140108667 | Techniques for Generating Different Sessions for Multiple Tabs of a Single Browser Window - A technique for creating different sessions for each tab of a client browser window includes receiving a first login request associated with a first tab of the client browser window, and in response to the first login request: generating a first uniform resource locator and a first session cookie having a path that includes the first uniform resource locator; and transmitting the first session cookie to the client browser. The technique further includes receiving a second login request that is associated with a second tab of the client browser window, and in response to the second login request, generating a second uniform resource locator and a second session cookie. The second uniform resource locator is different from the first uniform resource locator and a path of the second session cookie includes the second uniform source locator. The technique also includes transmitting the second session cookie to the client browser. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140108668 | SECURED WIRELESS SESSION INITIATE FRAMEWORK - A method for reducing a call establishment time in real-time communication between at least two devices. The method includes: receiving, at a first internal server of a system, a first communication from a caller, wherein the first communication is a push request that comprises an attempt to initiate a connection with a callee; and sending a push notification via the first internal server to the callee, wherein the first internal server has at least two interfaces, wherein each interface of the at least two interfaces comprises a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port, wherein the sending includes: embedding, by the first internal server and inside the push notification, an external UDP (IP, port) pair, of the at least two interfaces, to which the callee is able to connect. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140108669 | METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING A P2P NETWORK SCHEME - Various embodiments provide methods, apparatus, and systems for generating P2P network schemes. In an exemplary method for generating a P2P network scheme, predicted data can be obtained and used to determine a bandwidth managing scheme of the predicted data, based on a corresponding relationship between predicted data and bandwidth managing schemes. The bandwidth managing scheme can be executed and be used to automatically determine schemes, e.g., for pushing resources into the P2P network. | 04-17-2014 |
| 20140115175 | CLIENT LIVE MIGRATION FOR A VIRTUAL MACHINE - A computing device connects a first client device to a session of a virtual machine. The computing device subsequently connects a second client device to the session in response to a request from the second client device to access the virtual machine. The computing device may then disconnect the first device from the virtual machine session or disable one or more functions associated with the first client device. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140115176 | CLUSTERED SESSION MANAGEMENT - Systems and methods for emergency call-center session routing in an all-active cluster formation are provided. Each node in a cluster receives sessions through load balanced distribution. Nodes in the cluster may be configured to use a common database. The database is synchronized across the cluster ensuring that data is accessible by any node in the cluster. Session state is maintained in the database, such that any session can be managed by any node in the cluster. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140115177 | Method for Establishing Management Session, Customer Premises Equipment, and Auto-Configuration Server - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a method for establishing a management session, a customer premises equipment, and an auto-configuration server. The method includes generating a universal resource locator URL list according to a corresponding IP address of each uplink interface. The URL list includes at least two URLs and each URL has a corresponding uplink interface. The URL list is sent to an auto-configuration server ACS. A connection request sent by the auto-configuration server is received through a first uplink interface. The connection request includes a first URL, the first URL is a URL in the URL list, and the first URL corresponds to the first uplink interface. A second uplink interface is determined. The second uplink interface is an uplink interface used for initiating a management session. A management session to the auto-configuration server is initiated using the second uplink interface. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140115178 | Systems, Methods, and Computer Readable Media for Maintaining Packet Data Protocol (PDP) Context while Performing Data Offload - Systems, methods, and computer readable media for maintaining packet data protocol (PDP) context while performing data offload are disclosed. According to one aspect, a method for maintaining PDP context while performing data offload includes detecting a data offload condition wherein a UE for which a first network node is maintaining a PDP context is sending or receiving data using a data path that does not include the first network node. While the data offload condition exists, packets are sent from a source other than the UE to the first network node so as to cause the first network node to maintain the PDP context for the UE. In one embodiment, a node interposed between the UE and the first network node periodically sends dummy packets or heart beat packets to the first network node on behalf of the UE, which may include packets that appear to come from the UE. | 04-24-2014 |
| 20140122729 | HOME CLOUD WITH VIRTUALIZED INPUT AND OUTPUT ROAMING OVER NETWORK - A home cloud computing system employs a virtualization system to virtualize data of a device and adaptively transform type or format of the virtualized data for one or more other devices, thus leveraging resources of the device for the one or more other devices. Through data virtualization and adaptive transformation, devices of heterogeneous types are seamlessly connected to one another and can act as input or output devices for each other to create a home cloud network of devices. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140122730 | TECHNIQUES FOR DEVICE INDEPENDENT SESSION MIGRATION - Techniques for device independent session migration are presented. A secure mechanism is presented for a target device to receive a current authenticated communication session from an original device with minimal user interaction while automated security is enforced during session migration. In an embodiment, the target device is a mobile device and the original device is a desktop; the target device captures a data glyph that is visually presented on a display of the original device and the data glyph is then seamlessly communicated to a server manager for authentication and session migration. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140122731 | TECHNIQUES FOR DESKTOP MIGRATION - Techniques for desktop migration are presented. A user authenticates to an original device and a token is generated for remoting to that device's desktop. A target device acquires the token while in proximity to the original device and uses the token to authenticate to a third-party service that provides a second token back to the target device. The second token permits the target device to authenticate and to directly connect via remoting software to the original device's desktop. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140122732 | Data Packet Transmission Method and Related Device and System - Embodiments of the present disclosure relate to the field of computer networks, and disclose a data packet transmission method and a related device and system. In the method, a traditional communication protocol (such as TCP) handshake process is optimized, so that data packet transmission may be implemented in the handshake process. The data packet transmission does not depend on completion of the handshake, thereby effectively reducing a data packet transmission delay caused by an RTT delay existing in the handshake process. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140122733 | Non-Transitory Computer-Readable Medium, Communication Relay Apparatus, and Image Processing Apparatus - A process and system are described in which a session is established between a client application and a communication relay program being executed by a processor. In response to a process request from the client application, session information is added to the process request to identify the established session. Next, the process request with the session information is transmitted to an image processing apparatus. Responses received from the image processing apparatus may include the session information to identify to which session each response belongs. The communication relay program removes the session information from the response and forwards the response to the client application through the relevant session. | 05-01-2014 |
| 20140129726 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL SESSIONS WITH STATE CHARTS - A method involves acts of receiving a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) request, initiating by a computing device having a processor, a SIP session as a result of receiving the SIP request, executing, by the processor, a state chart implemented in the SIP server, communicating events by the computing device to the state chart, as the events occur in the SIP session, and changing states in the SIP session by the computing device, as the states are defined in the state chart, to completion of the SIP session. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140129727 | ACTIVATION METHOD FOR DATA CARD AND DATA CARD - The disclosure relates to an activation method for a data card and a data card. The data card has two activation modes: a network card activation mode and a U-disc activation mode; in the U-disc activation mode, only a U-disc related module is activated; and in the network card activation mode, the data card can be configured to access the internet via the interaction with an AT command in the data card without installing GUI software, and various operation systems can be compatible. When the data card is activated in the network card activation mode, an Ethernet card is enumerated directly without a switching process from the CDROM to the modem, thereby improving the activation speed of the data card. The Ethernet card device and the U-disc cannot function at the same time, so as to ensure that the limited bandwidth of a USB is completely used for data service. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140129728 | APPARATUS, SYSTEMS, AND METHODS FOR IP REACHABILITY IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a system and method for establishing communications in a communications network, a network service provider can assign IP addresses to mobile devices dynamically to conserve IP address resources. A network service provider can also implement network address translation to further conserve IP address resources and to provide improved security. If a requestor seeks to obtain an IP address of a mobile device and the address is a local address, the system determines if the mobile device has a network address translation (NAT) binding that associates the IP address of the mobile device with a public IP address. If the mobile device does not have a NAT binding, the system creates a NAT binding that associates the IP address of the mobile device with a public IP address. | 05-08-2014 |
| 20140143433 | Initiating a Central Server-Directed Communication Session from an In-Progress Half Call Model Communication Session - A particular method includes receiving a signal to invoke a central server-directed service from a first communication device at a session initiation protocol application device. The first communication device is coupled to at least one second communication device via a pathway of a half call model communication session. The method includes sending first instructions to the first communication device via the session initiation protocol device in response to the signal. The first instructions enable the first device to access the central server-directed service. The method also includes sending second instructions to the at least one second device via the session initiation protocol device in response to the signal. The second instructions enable the at least one second communication device to access the central server-directed service. | 05-22-2014 |
| 20140143434 | FRAMEWORK TO NOTIFY AND INVITE USERS TO JOIN A COLLABORATIVE SESSION - A notification framework and method that quickly sends invitations one device to another device to join devices to collaboration session. Devices may be provided with an application that enables a user to register with a registry service. The registry service is provided as a mechanism to enable delivery of a collaboration invitation and joining of participants in the collaborative session. Notification invitations containing a collaboration URL may then be forwarded via a push service to the invited registrants. Each invited registrant is then provided an option to accept invitation and automatically join the session with the user. In another example, the host user may “pass” or “share” a session to an invited registrant rather than having an invited registrant join a session. | 05-22-2014 |
| 20140143435 | ELECTRONIC DEVICE AND METHOD FOR DISPLAYING SERVICE INFORMATION IN ELECTRONIC DEVICE - An electronic device for displaying service information is provided. The electronic device includes a short-range communication unit configured to connect the electronic device to an external device, and a controller configured to extract service information, provided by a service provider providing the external device, from an information message used for connection to the external device and to display the extracted service information, if the electronic device is connected to the external device via the short-range communication unit. | 05-22-2014 |
| 20140156857 | BINDING MULTIPLE ADDRESSES TO A SOCKET IN A NETWORK SYSTEM - A TCP/IP socket extension may bind a single socket to more than one IP address. The socket API extension may allow a user to bind a socket to a list of IP addresses instead of a single IP address. Additional socket APIs may allow applications to bind an existing socket to one or more additional IP addresses. Bind-specific support may enhance a user's capability to specify one or more IPv4 addresses and/or IPv6 addresses or other addresses to bind to a generic server information handling system (IHS). The method may convert a generic server IHS into a bind-specific server IHS that accepts new connections over both the IPv4 and IPv6 network transports and/or other network transports without requiring changes to the server IHS. A modified TCP/IP stack may provide support for multiple sockets. The method may map multiple address/port/protocol tuples to the same socket. | 06-05-2014 |
| 20140156858 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GEOGRAPHIC SIP SCALING - Described herein are aspects relating to a system and method for scaling a session initiation protocol communication system that allows components of the system to be distributed and/or scaled across multiple and different hardware, networks, systems, and locations. | 06-05-2014 |
| 20140164634 | APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETERMINING BUFFER SIZE OF NETWORK RECEPTION BUFFER, AND NETWORK SESSION SYSTEM - In this system for determining buffer size, the number of times a network reception buffer in which data is accumulated becomes full or empty (the number of occurrence of full or emptiness) in a certain period of time Tr is counted by a full/empty counter CT in response to start of communication with a different session terminal TM to adjust buffer size in accordance with the counted number of occurrence of full or emptiness (S | 06-12-2014 |
| 20140173123 | ADDRESS FAMILY PREFERENCE IN MULTIPLE NETWORK INTERFACE ENVIRONMENTS - Internet protocol (IP) addresses are received from one or more domain name service (DNS) servers for accessing a remote host in response to a DNS query. The IP addresses are prioritized based on a list of preferred network interfaces associated with a plurality of networks. A network connection is established with the remote host using the most prioritized one of the IP addresses and a network protocol associated with the most prioritized IP address, where the most prioritized IP address is routable to reach the remote host over a network via the most preferred network interface. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140173124 | Method and System for Causing a Client Device to Renew a Dynamic IP Address - A method includes terminating a connection between (a) a wireless network supported by a network device and (b) a client device. The method further includes rejecting one or more requests to establish the connection between the wireless network and the client device based at least on the one or more requests being received from the client device within a first period of time subsequent to the terminating operation and accepting a particular request to establish the connection between the wireless network and the client device based at least on the particular request being received from the client device after the first period of time subsequent to the terminating operation. | 06-19-2014 |
| 20140181315 | Network System and Network Connection Device - A network system includes a device adapter including a first virtual communication port, and a network connection device including a virtual device adapter protocol hierarchy which includes a second virtual communication port communicable with the first virtual communication port, a TCP/IP layer, a device controlling protocol layer in an application layer and a device object. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140181316 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUBSCRIBING FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEMS (IMS) SERVICES REGISTRATION STATUS - A system and method that allows mobile device applications to receive changes in registration status from application services that are accessed via an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). Applications on a mobile device subscribe to receive notifications of changes in registration status for requested services. When a change to the registration status of a service occurs, a notification message is transmitted to the application on the mobile device. Notifications of changes in status are thereby received by each application on a per-application-service basis. In some embodiments, when a request to register with an application service fails, the corresponding notification message includes a reason for the failure. In some embodiments, notification messages are originated by a registration manager that operates in the IMS and transmitted to an IMS client operating on a mobile device. In some embodiments, notification messages are originated by each application service and transmitted directly to subscribed applications. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140181317 | REMOTE RECOGNITION OF AN ASSOCIATION BETWEEN REMOTE DEVICES - A device identification server identifies a “household” to which a particular device belongs by associating the device with a LAN MAC address of the router through which the device connects to a wide area network such as the Internet because the LAN MAC address (i) is unique to the router and (ii) is not readily discoverable by interaction with the router through the wide area network, impeding spoofing by malicious entities. The device queries and receives the LAN MAC address of the router through the local area network. The device passes the LAN MAC address of the router along with its digital fingerprint to the device identification server. Devices that report the same LAN MAC address of the router through which they connect to the wide area network are determined to be from the same “household”, i.e., to be managed by one and the same entity. | 06-26-2014 |
| 20140189136 | ENFORCING WEB SERVICE POLICIES ATTACHED TO CLIENTS OPERATING IN RESTRICTED FOOTPRINT PLATFORMS - A computer-controlled method for a mobile application invoking a web service can include an application development framework (APPDF) mobile framework component creating an envelope for a request and passing the envelope to a transport component. The transport component can create a proxy for the envelope and a proxy for a connection based on an enforcement context. The transport component can stream the proxy envelope through the proxy connection to the web service. | 07-03-2014 |
| 20140189137 | METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR TDF SESSION ESTABLISHMENT - More than one TDF session for a user in a PCC architecture are coordinated. There are provided PCRF server, PCEF devices and TDF devices, and method of coordinating a PCEF session and the more than one TDF session. The method includes: establishing or modifying at a PCRF server a PCEF session for an IP-CAN session; selecting at the PCRF server more than one TDF device; determining at the PCRF server an order in which each selected TDF device is to be involved, and access information required by each selected TDF device; initiating a TDF session, providing applicable ADC rules and routing information indicating a next TDF device to be involved, from the PCRF server towards each selected TDF device; and submitting from the PCRF server to the PCEF device PCC rules for the IP-CAN session along with routing information indicating a first TDF device to be involved. | 07-03-2014 |
| 20140195690 | ZERO CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A BROWSER AND A NETWORKED MEDIA DEVICE - A method, apparatus and system related to zero configuration communication between a browser and a networked media device are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method of a client device includes constraining an executable environment in a security sandbox, executing a sandboxed application in the executable environment using a processor and a memory, and automatically instantiating a connection between the sandboxed application and a sandbox reachable service of a networked media device. The method may include processing an identification data associated with the sandbox reachable service sharing a public address with the client device. The method may also include determining a private address pair of the sandbox reachable service based on the identification data. Further, the method may include establishing a communication session between the sandboxed application and the sandbox reachable service using a cross-site scripting technique of the security sandbox or appending a header of a hypertext transfer protocol. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140195691 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND MEDIA SERVER FOR CREATING MULTICAST CHANNEL - A method, system and media server for creating a multicast channel, wherein, the method for creating a multicast channel includes: a media server receiving a command for creating a multicast channel from a client, the command carrying a channel number and a multicast address of the multicast channel to be created and an interface address of the media server; the media server binding, according to the command, the multicast channel identified by the channel number to the interface identified by the interface address of the media server, and obtaining port information of the interface; the media server creating, according to the port information and the multicast address, the multicast channel from a port identified by the port information to a multicast group identified by the multicast address. | 07-10-2014 |
| 20140201379 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATED NETWORK CONNECTIVITY FOR MANAGED APPLICATION COMPONENTS WITHIN A CLOUD - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method performed by an application manager for automatically establishing a network connection between components of an application within a distributed cloud, the method including: establishing application components in the distributed cloud; selecting a first application component; identifying network characteristics from the network policy file associated with the first application component; determining a network connection between the first application component and a second application component according to the network characteristics associated with the first application component; associating the network connection with the first application component; and establishing the network connection between the first and second application components. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140201380 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD THEREOF - A communication apparatus, which is connected to an external apparatus via a network, comprising first and second data communication units, wherein when the first data communication unit establishes a connection to an external apparatus via a network formed by a relay apparatus, the apparatus participates in the network formed by the relay apparatus, and when the second data communication unit, which forms a network in which the communication apparatus serves as a relay apparatus, establishes a connection to the external apparatus, the apparatus forms the network in which the communication apparatus serves as a relay apparatus using parameters of the network stored when the connection to that external apparatus is established. | 07-17-2014 |
| 20140223019 | PERSISTENT NETWORK NEGOTIATION FOR PEER TO PEER DEVICES - A device may communicate with a peer-to-peer (P2P) network prior to associating with that network. The communications prior to association may include information about whether the P2P network is persistent or non-persistent. The information may include a persistent group intent field that identifies whether a device would prefer to join a persistent P2P network and allows a P2P network to advertise whether it is persistent. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140223020 | USER-TO-USER SELECTABLE LOCATION-BASED INFORMATION SERVICE - A location-based information system and method therefor, which is responsive to the user's selection of geographic zone and parameters. A proprietary app (application) is installed in a mobile device of the user, which insures that a connection to the user from a caller is based on the user's defined zone and other parameters without the disclosing the exact location of the user. Various embodiments of the invention provide an option for user-to-user location-based connection without depending on a remote server. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140223021 | System and Method for Implementing a Session Initiation Protocol Feature - A method for implementing a SIP feature includes, in particular embodiments, establishing a communication session via a communications platform between a first and second user and receiving a request from a third user to join the communication session. The second and third users are from a plurality of users using a shared line. The method further includes integrating communications of the third user into the communication session. In particular embodiments the method includes establishing a communication session between a first and second user via a communications platform. The method also includes receiving a select request that locks the communication session so that a third user cannot resume the communication session with the first user. In particular embodiments the method includes receiving a request from a first user of a shared line to enable a privacy feature that reduces call information generated by the communications platform in remote state notifications. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140223022 | Data Capture and Identification System and Process - An identification method and process for objects from digitally captured images thereof that uses data characteristics to identify an object from a plurality of objects in a database. The data is broken down into parameters such as a Shape Comparison, Grayscale Comparison, Wavelet Comparison, and Color Cube Comparison with object data in one or more databases to identify the actual object of a digital image. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140223023 | SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING FEEDBACK TO SENDING ENTITIES - Systems for providing feedback to sending entities are provided. In some embodiments, systems for providing feedback to a sending entity that sends a request for session are provided, the systems comprising: a receiving entity that receives the request for session from the sending entity, wherein the request for session is used to establish a communication session that takes place after processing the request for session, and wherein the receiving entity comprises at least one hardware processor that: assigns a freed processing slot to the sending entity in response to determining that the request for session has been processed by the receiving entity and that a number of requests for sessions to be processed is less than a first limit. | 08-07-2014 |
| 20140237129 | Service Redirection from a Policy and Charging Control Architecture - For authorizing redirection services in a policy and charging control architecture, a policy and charging control rules function (PCRF) server determines control rules and redirection information per service in an internet protocol connectivity access network session, and a policy charging and enforcement function (PCEF) device receives control rules and redirection information per service basis, determines redirection per service request, and triggers the redirection. Upon a first request for a service, the PCEF device returns a redirection message with a redirection identifier; and upon completion of the service redirection, the first request for the service reaching the PCEF, the PCEF verifies the service is authorized and submits a service allowance toward the service server in charge of the service. Methods are also disclosed. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140237130 | DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVICE - Systems and methods are described that comprise receiving at a platform an enrollment request from a client device. The enrollment request comprises a request key and device data of the client device. Device identification is generated and issued to the client device in the absence of a previous enrollment event. A response to the client device is generated, and the response is a response to the enrollment request that includes the device identification. Subsequent sessions between the client device and the platform are controlled with the device identification. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140237131 | SECURED COMMUNICATION CHANNEL BETWEEN CLIENT DEVICE AND DEVICE MANAGEMENT SERVICE - Systems and methods are described that comprise issuing a request to a client device from a platform. The request is an electronic message that includes an electronic link. An acknowledgement is received from the client device, and the acknowledgement is generated upon activation of the electronic link. A secure channel is established between the platform and a client application of the client device upon receipt of the acknowledgement. Establishment of the secure channel comprises the client application logging into a care application of the platform with a device identification that was received from the platform during an enrollment transaction. A session is conducted over the secure channel, and the session comprises the care application remotely controlling the client device via the client application. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140237132 | COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMPUTER-READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM HAVING STORED THEREIN COMMUNICATION CONTROL PROGRAM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A first determination section determines, when an instruction for connection establishment is issued, whether or not connection information including target apparatus specifying information that uniquely specifies a predetermined target apparatus is stored in a first storage section. A first connection section performs, when the first determination section determines that the connection information is stored in the first storage section, a process for establishing a connection by wireless communication to the target apparatus that is specified based on the target apparatus specifying information stored in the first storage section. | 08-21-2014 |
| 20140244851 | SECURE VIRTUAL NETWORK PLATFORM FOR ENTERPRISE HYBRID CLOUD COMPUTING ENVIRONMENTS - A secure virtual network platform connects two or more different or separate network domains. When a data packet is received at an end point in one network domain, a determination is made as to whether the data packet should be forwarded outside the virtual network platform, or transmitted via the virtual network to a destination in another network domain connected by the virtual network platform. | 08-28-2014 |
| 20140250234 | AGGREGATION OF SENSOR APPLIANCES USING DEVICE REGISTERS AND WIRING BROKERS - The invention provides for a computer system, comprising a device register for creating and registering one or more device objects. At least one device object of the one or more device objects is configured for communicating with a network connector of a sensor appliance via a network connection. The device object is configured for exposing at least one parameter of the sensor appliance by declaring its capabilities. The computer system further comprises an aggregation model for aggregating the at least one parameter of the at least one device objects; a set of wiring definitions descriptive of raised events created by changes or updates in the at least one parameter; and a wiring broker for updating the aggregation model in accordance with the raised events. | 09-04-2014 |
| 20140258551 | Method for Implementing Session Border Controller Pool, and Session Border Controller - A method for implementing a session border controller (SBC) pool and a SBC device are provided. In the present invention, an SBC pool is formed by at least two SBCs, the at least two SBCs are mutually backed up for disaster recovery and use a same Internet Protocol (IP) address for a terminal device, and whether the terminal device is registered in the SBC pool is determined; and if the terminal device has been registered in the SBC pool, a service message is forwarded to an SBC with which the terminal device is registered. In this way, it is avoided that SBC device disaster recovery places a special requirement for the terminal device, and the terminal device does not need to be configured with two IP addresses. Furthermore, all devices in the SBC pool can process the service message of the terminal device, thereby increasing a resource utilization rate. | 09-11-2014 |
| 20140280989 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING PEER TO PEER CONNECTIONS THROUGH SYMMETRIC NATS - A system and method for establishing a direct peer to peer communication link between computers connected to the Internet through symnat routers. One client computer (Client B) is instructed by a server to open a number of targets by sending packets to a range of port numbers beginning with another computer's (Client A) last known public port number. Client A is then instructed by the server to send a number of packets at the last known port used by client B but each time increasing its (Client A's) port number. If a packet is sent where the To and From ports of both client computers match, a peer to peer communication link can be established. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140280990 | SHARED DATA COMMUNICATION BANDWIDTHS AMONG MOBILE DEVICES - Systems and methods are disclosed for connecting one or more mobile communication devices so that each device's data connections can be bundled to create a virtual connection to provide increased data communications bandwidth for one or more of the mobile communication devices to access applications and data on the Internet. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140280991 | Dynamic Personalization of a Communication Session in Heterogeneous Environments - A method and system for transparent and automatic establishment of a personalized communication session across heterogeneous networks utilizes a network node for providing personalization services. Communication sessions initiated on any number of heterogeneous networks are transparently and automatically personalized for subscribers to personalization services offered by the network node by routing media in the communication session through the personalization node. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140280992 | Mitigation Of Processing Loops In A Communication Network - Aspects of the disclosure relate to error prevention in a communication session traffic environment. One or more embodiments of the disclosure relate to mitigation of processing loops during establishment of a communication session in a network. A network node at the boundary of the network can mitigate processing loops by monitoring formation of such loops and proactively terminating communication processing in response to expiration of a timer. The timer can be initiated in response to formation of a loop. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140280993 | DYNAMIC MODIFICATION OF A SUBSCRIBER CONNECTION - In one embodiment, a method comprises receiving a request to modify a subscriber connection to a network element. The method also includes modifying attributes of the subscriber connection, within a memory of the network element, without disconnecting the subscriber connection from the network element. | 09-18-2014 |
| 20140289421 | Automatic Multimedia Upload For Publishing Data And Multimedia Content - Disclosed herein is a method and system for utilizing a digital data capture device in conjunction with a Bluetooth (BT) enabled mobile device for publishing data and multimedia content on one or more websites automatically or with minimal user intervention. A client application is provided on the BT enabled mobile device. In the absence of inbuilt BT capability, a BT communication device is provided on the digital data capture device. The BT communication device is paired with the BT enabled mobile device to establish a connection. The client application detects capture of data and multimedia content on the digital data capture device and initiates transfer of the captured data, multimedia content, and associated files. The digital data capture device transfers the captured data, multimedia content, and the associated files to the client application. The client application automatically publishes the transferred data and multimedia content on one or more websites. | 09-25-2014 |
| 20140297880 | ESTABLISH CLIENT-HOST CONNECTION - Example embodiments disclosed herein relate to establishing a connection over a network between a first host device and a client device. The client device transmits client Information over the network related to the first host device. Display information Is transmitted by the first host device to be output by the client device. | 10-02-2014 |
| 20140304418 | Load-Balanced, Persistent Connection Techniques - Techniques for creating a persistent connection between client devices and one or more remote computing resources, which may form a portion of a network-accessible computing platform. This connection may be considered “permanent” or “nearly permanent” to allow the client device to both send data to and receive data from the remote resources at nearly any time. In addition, both the client device and the remote resources may establish virtual channels over this single connection. If no data is exchanged between the client device and the remote computing resources for a threshold amount of time, then the connection may be severed and the client device may attempt to establish a new connection with the remote computing resources. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140304419 | SYSTEM AND TERMINAL FOR P2P CONNECTION IN MOBILE ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD FOR P2P CONNECTION USING THE SAME - A method for peer-to-peer (P2P) connection in a mobile environment, the method comprising: transmitting, from a first peer to a second peer, a connection request message through a push mechanism; transmitting, from the second peer to the first peer, a connection response message including connection information containing a private address of the second peer, a public address of the second peer and an address of a relay server; and attempting, at the first peer, to connect with the second peer by making a first connection attempt using the private address of the second peer, a second connection attempt using the public address of the second peer, and a third connection attempt using the address of the relay server, the first to the third connection attempts being made concurrently or sequentially at predetermined time intervals. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140304420 | METHOD FOR SECURE USER PLANE (SUPL) VERSION NEGOTIATION - The subject matter disclosed herein relates to a system and method for negotiating a version of Secure User Plane Location (SUPL) between a network entity and a SUPL enabled terminal. In a particular implementation, a SUPL initiation message is transmitted from a network entity to a SUPL entity, where the SUPL initiation message identifies a plurality of SUPL versions capable of supporting a desired service. A response is received from the SUPL entity that is based, at least in part, on an ability of the SUPL entity to support at least one of the plurality of versions. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140304421 | ADAPTIVE MULTIPLE PATHWAY SESSION SETUP TO SUPPORT QoS SERVICES - A user device is operable to request setup of one or more serving routes to be utilized for delivering content to the user device. The user device is operable to receive the delivered content via the one or more serving routes and/or one or more auxiliary routes based on the request. The serving routes and the auxiliary routes are determined based on a provisioning profile for the user device. The provisioning profile comprises preferred service types, desired QoS for one or more services, client account information, and/or client billing and credit verification information. A connection or communication session is established dynamically based on demand, from the user device and/or a supporting network, for each of the determined one or more auxiliary routes. The user device is operable to receive the delivered content via the determined auxiliary routes in the established connection sessions. | 10-09-2014 |
| 20140310421 | Method of Operating a First Communication Device for Receiving a Media Data Stream From at Least One Second Communication Device, Including a Communication Device, a Telecommunication Server and a Telecommunications System - A method of operating a first communication device ( | 10-16-2014 |
| 20140310422 | SWITCHING BETWEEN CONNECTIVITY TYPES TO MAINTAIN CONNECTIVITY - Techniques are provided for leveraging narrowband connectivity (such as dial-up communications or other types of low bandwidth communications) to provision or configure broadband connectivity between a broadband access provider and a broadband device, such as a DSL modem or a cable modem. Specifically, because narrowband connectivity does not require advance configuration or provisioning by the host system of connectivity parameters for an access-seeking device, a modem at an access-seeking device may be leveraged to establish a narrowband connection between that device and a host system and to enable an exchange or negotiation of connectivity parameters necessary to enable future broadband connectivity. Thus, once established, the narrowband connection may be used as a conduit for communicating required provisioning information between the broadband-enabling host and the access-seeking device to enable broadband connectivity by the device in the future. | 10-16-2014 |
| 20140325080 | CONNECTION PERSISTENCE ACROSS SERVER FARMS IN A NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - An example method for connection persistence across server farms in a network environment is provided and includes associating a first real server with a first server farm attached to a first virtual Internet Protocol address (VIP), associating a second real server with a second server farm attached to a second VIP, and linking the first real server with the second real server in a particular group. The first real server is configured to service a first connection from a client to the first VIP in a network environment, the second real server is configured to service a second connection from the client to the second VIP in the network environment, and the method further includes facilitating connection persistence of the first connection with the second connection across the first server farm and the second server farm. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140325081 | Method and Device for Establishing an End-to-End Communication Between Two Networks - The invention relates to a method for establishing an end-to-end communication between two networks, wherein: a message is received from one first network, this message having a first header and an application-data part; data of said first header is coded into a second header within the application data part, with the aid of a first coding scheme, so as to produce a modified application data part; said modified application data part is coded with the aid of a second coding scheme so as to produce a coded message; and this coded message is transmitted to a second network. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140325082 | NETWORK APPLICATION DEVICE, NETWORK CONNECTION METHOD, AND NETWORK CONNECTION SYSTEM - Disclosed herein is a network application device (NAD), comprising a connection assistant module and an application module. The connection assistant module connects to a traversal server, causing the traversal server to receive a physical network address of the NAD. The application module connects to the connection assistant module at a local port number. Also disclosed herein is a network connection system, comprising said traversal server and a first and a second said NAD. The traversal server receives a unique identifier associated with the second NAD when the connection assistant module of the first NAD connects to the traversal server, and provides the same connection assistant module with a physical network address of the second NAD. The application module of the first NAD thereby communicates with the second NAD through the connection assistant module. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140325083 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR COOKIE-BASED BROWSER IDENTIFICATION AND TRACKING - The present invention provides a system and method to identify unique browsers (Agents) communicating to the client. Every new browser communicating through the client is assigned a unique Agent ID that is stored in the browser's cookie cache. When the browser sends a request, the cookie may have the Agent ID to identify the browser to the client. If the cookie with the Agent ID is not present, then the client will return a re-direction response to a common URL with the domain having the cookie with the Agent ID to identify the unique browser. Another re-direction takes place back to the browser to make the request with the original URL, but this time has the cookie with the Agent ID to identify the unique browser. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140325084 | Personal Network Access Control System and Method - A server is provided that includes a processor such that for a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) request containing a Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) identifying the first device, the processor is programmed to promote adding a URI and redirecting the SIP request to a second device. The added URI used by the second device to invoke a Personal Network Management (PNM) Controller function. | 10-30-2014 |
| 20140337537 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FACILITATING COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MESSAGE CONSUMERS AND MESSAGE PRODUCERS - A method and system for facilitating communication between message producers and message consumers is disclosed. When a message producer is interested in identifying a message consumer for processing generated messages, the message producer declares a consumer identification rule. A messaging service manager identifies a set of suitable message consumers by comparing the consumer identification rule with a set of attributes associated with each of the message consumers registered with the messaging service manager and assigns channels associated with the set of identified message consumers to the message producer. The message producer may select a channel associated with a message consumer to initiate communication between the message producer and the message consumer. | 11-13-2014 |
| 20140344465 | SUBSCRIBER FOR USE IN A DIGITAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, DIGITAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION - A method for data transfer in a digital data transfer system with at least two participating devices includes connecting the at least two participating devices through a data connection. A protocol stack is processed by a processor of the at least two participating devices. Data exchange between the at least two participating devices via the data connection is organized by means of a communication call routine in a session layer of the protocol stack. The data is assigned to a series of messages by a write-read routine in a transport layer of the protocol stack and configured to at least one of fill and read out a memory buffer. At least two predefined priority levels are defined in the messages for transporting the data with different priority levels. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140344466 | PEER TO PEER CONNECTION - A method in a first device for setting up a peer-to-peer IP connection between the first device and a second device may include sending a request to a second device for setting up the peer-to-peer IP connection between the first device and the second device. The request may include an IP address of the first device. Alternatively, an IP address of the second device may be received in a message from the second device. The peer-to-peer IP connection between the first device and the second device is then set up. The setting up may be initiated by one of the parties associated with the first device or the second device by connecting to the other party using the IP address of the other party. | 11-20-2014 |
| 20140359144 | Efficient Programmatic Memory Access over Network File Access Protocols - Embodiments provide a method and system for transferring data between different computing devices. Specifically, a communication session is established between a first computing device and a second computing device. The communication session may be established using a first communication protocol. The first computing device creates a virtual memory object which is bound to one or more memory blocks of the first computing device. A path to the virtual memory object is generated and the path is transmitted to the second computing device using the communication session. The second computing device may then read or write data directly into/from the virtual memory object using a second communication protocol that is different from the first communication protocol. The data is written into and read from the virtual memory object using file system commands. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140359145 | REMOTE PROCEDURE CALL WITH CALL-BY-REFERENCE SEMANTICS USING REMOTE DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS - Embodiments relate to providing remote procedure calls (RPC) with call-by-reference semantics using remote direct memory access (RDMA). An aspect includes establishing a session between a client and a server. A client session heap memory and a server session heap memory are initialized with a RDMA provider. A parameter is then stored in the session heap memory. A handle for the parameter is passed to the server which permits access to the parameter responsive to an on-demand request from the server. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140359146 | REMOTE PROCEDURE CALL WITH CALL-BY-REFERENCE SEMANTICS USING REMOTE DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS - Embodiments relate to providing remote procedure calls (RPC) with call-by-reference semantics using remote direct memory access (RDMA). An aspect includes establishing a session between a client and a server. A client session heap memory and a server session heap memory are initialized with a RDMA provider. A parameter is then stored in the session heap memory. A handle for the parameter is passed to the server which permits access to the parameter responsive to an on-demand request from the server. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140359147 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS OF COMMUNICATING VIA A WEB BROWSER - Various embodiments are directed to techniques for placing and receiving calls via a web-browser interface. In some embodiments communication connection logic may be be executed by a processor component to receive a request to establish a bi-directional communication session between a first endpoint and multiple endpoints via a uniform resource indicator (URI) accessed via a web browser of the first endpoint, identify the second endpoints based on the URI, send a connection request to at least one of the second endpoints, receive a connection acceptance response from at least one of the second endpoints, and establish the bi-directional communication session between the first endpoint and the second endpoints. Other examples are described and claimed. | 12-04-2014 |
| 20140365673 | Smart Management of Background Network Connections - In some implementations, a network daemon can manage access to a mobile device's network interface. The network daemon (e.g., network connection managing process) can monitor the condition of the mobile device's network connection on one or more interfaces. The network daemon can monitor many conditions on the mobile device. The network daemon can receive background networking requests from network clients (e.g., processes, applications) that specify criteria for initiating a network connection. The network daemon can then smartly manage network connections taking into account network conditions, mobile device conditions and/or client criteria received in the client request. This can help reduce battery life impact, memory usage, likelihood of call drops, data usage cost, and load on network operators. | 12-11-2014 |
| 20140365674 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SIP USER AGENT IDENTIFICATION AND EFFICIENT BINDING - The present disclosure provides a system and method for Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) user agent identification and efficient binding. In accordance with one example embodiment, there is provided a method for use on a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) registration server for registering user agents, comprising: receiving a REGISTER message which includes a binding key; determining whether a prior binding associated with the binding key exists in a registration repository; and creating a new binding associated with the binding key and adding the new binding to the registration repository when no prior binding associated with the binding key exists in the registration repository. | 12-11-2014 |
| 20140372618 | METHOD AND APPARATUSES FOR MAKING USE OF VIRTUAL IMS SUBSCRIPTIONS COUPLED WITH THE IDENTITY OF A NON SIP COMPLIANT TERMINAL FOR NON-REGISTERED SUBSCRIBERS - A Service Interaction Manager in a Packet Based Multimedia System (PBMS) for initiating a session with a terminal utilizing a temporary virtual subscription when the terminal does not have a subscription with the PBMS. A table stores temporary virtual subscriptions. A Coupling Function connected with a Network Access Gateway and the table utilizes the table to select an available virtual subscription and to store in the table, a temporary association between an identifier of the terminal and the available virtual subscription. A Correlation Function connected with a requested service, the table, and a PBMS access gateway receives from the PBMS access gateway, a session start request message with the terminal identifier, and utilizes the table to correlate the session start request message with the available virtual subscription based on the terminal identifier. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140372619 | NETWORK SYSTEM - A network system is provided. The network system includes: a first component having a first device code and performing a predetermined function; and a second component having a second device code and exchanging information with the first component for communication connection. One of the first and second components receives a command for the communication connection and generates a connection sequence. The component generating the connection sequence exchanges communication addresses and device codes with the other component receiving the connection sequence. If the information has not been exchanged between the first component and the second component during a predetermined time, the first component and the second component are switched to a communication connection standby mode. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140372620 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING CONTENT SHARED BETWEEN DEVICES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses are provided for sharing contents with a sink device in a wireless communication system. A first set of information is received from at least one sink device. A connection is established to the at least one sink device based on the first set of information. Capability information of the at least one sink device is received. A second set of information related to the capability information is sent to the at least one sink device. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140372621 | AirSharing Method, AirSharing Apparatus, and Terminal Device - An AirSharing method, an AirSharing apparatus, and an AirSharing terminal. The AirSharing method of the present invention includes: determining whether an interface to be shared currently is a media interface; if the interface to be shared currently is a media interface, implementing AirSharing with a peer device in a Digital Living Network Alliance manner; and if the interface to be shared currently is not a media interface, implementing AirSharing with the peer device in a minoring manner. In this way, a current playing scenario can be determined, and the Digital Living Network Alliance manner or the mirroring manner is used adaptively to implement AirSharing with the peer device. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140372622 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MINIMIZING APPLICATION DELAY BY PUSHING APPLICATION NOTIFICATIONS - A method for minimizing application initialization delay comprising sending, from a privileged application executing on a mobile device, a registration message to a server, receiving, at the privileged application, a response message from the server, extracting, from the response message, application information and notifying the mobile device of the application information. | 12-18-2014 |
| 20140379933 | HANDLING OF AUXILIARY NAS - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including: receiving, at the network device, a traffic message including an IP address; identifying the traffic message as belonging to a new session; generating a request message based on identifying the traffic message as belonging to a new session, wherein the request message includes the IP address; transmitting the request message to a policy server; and receiving, from the policy server, a policy message including a policy. Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method and related network node including: receiving, at the policy server, a request message from a network device, the request message including a subscriber IP and a network device identifier; identifying a subscriber session associated with the IP address; recording the network device identifier in association with the subscriber session; retrieving a policy associated with the subscriber session; and transmitting the policy to the network device. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20140379934 | MANAGING A NETWORK CONNECTION FOR USE BY A PLURALITY OF APPLICATION PROGRAM PROCESSES - A method, system, and/or computer program product manages a network connection for use by a plurality of application program processes. A set of application program processes, which utilize a network connection, are categorized into a plurality of categories. An optimum network connection parameter value is identified for each category of application program processes. A network connection is established for use by the set of application program processes. A usage of the network connection is determined by each of the application program processes. A network connection parameter is set for the network connection dependent on a respective usage and optimum network connection parameters of the application program processes. | 12-25-2014 |
| 20150019746 | INTEGRATED SIGNALING BETWEEN MOBILE DATA NETWORKS AND ENTERPRISE NETWORKS - A method is provided in one example and includes receiving a request from a first network element associated with a first network for establishing a first communication session between the first network element to a first user device associated with a second network. The request includes a first user identifier used to identify a first user associated with the first user device within the first network. The method further includes translating the first user identifier to a second user identifier in which the second user identifier is used to identify the first user within the second network. The method still further includes sending a first query including the second user identifier to a second network element, and receiving a first response message including quality of service information indicated by a policy associated with the second user identifier. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150019747 | SESSION PERSISTENT DATA AND METHOD OF USE THEREOF - A method of and apparatus for generating, storing and transmitting information relating to a session between an endpoint in an enterprise and an endpoint remote from the enterprise to enable the remote endpoint to contact the enterprise endpoint in a subsequent communications session. The information generated includes, at least, a session identifier identifying the session and the identity of the enterprise endpoint. Advantageously the remote endpoint is also provided with the enterprise communication identity or other means to enable the remote endpoint to associate the session identifier with the enterprise's communication identity. | 01-15-2015 |
| 20150026352 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CDN EXCHANGE INTERCONNECTION - The disclosure pertains to CDNI interconnection at a global level. CDNXs are enhanced to provide logging services associated with bilateral or multilateral agreement with CDNs, where these CDNs are interconnected with other CDNs not using the same CDNX. Moreover, additional functions are added in CDNXs and CDN Interconnection protocols to support CDN capability advertisement, CDN peer discovery, and to bootstrap CDN Interconnection. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150026353 | REDUCING LOAD AT A PROXY SERVER - A method is described for reducing a load placed on an endpoint server acting as an endpoint of a tunnel from a client device across a network. The method, implemented at the client device, comprises the following steps. A request to establish a new network connection is received. A risk of establishing the new network connection outside of the tunnel is determined based on a plurality of predefined criteria. The determined risk is compared with a predefined risk threshold and, if the determined risk is less than or equal to the predefined risk threshold, the new network connection is established directly via the network. If the new network connection fails before it is completed it is re-established via the tunnel. If the determined risk is greater than the predefined risk threshold, the new network connection is established via the tunnel. A client device and computer-readable medium configured to implement the method is also described. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150026354 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTIMEDIA CALLING LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION SERVICE - Implementing a multimedia calling line identification presentation service. A multimedia resource notification module obtains a storage address of a multimedia resource that is stored by a resource storage entity and that is subscribed to by a calling terminal, and sends the storage address of the multimedia resource to a resource playing entity. A service management module establishes a media channel between the resource playing entity and the called terminal for playing the multimedia resource. Establishing the media channel includes sending multimedia session information to the called terminal, the multimedia session information having been received by the service management module from the resource playing entity. Establishing the media channel also includes sending negotiated multimedia session information to the resource playing entity, the negotiated multimedia session information having been received by the service management module from the called terminal. | 01-22-2015 |
| 20150039774 | DRA DESTINATION MAPPING BASED ON DIAMETER ANSWER MESSAGE - Various exemplary embodiments relate to a method of routing Diameter requests. The method includes: receiving an initial request from a client, the initial request including a session identifier, an initial destination realm, and request content; determining a Diameter route for the initial request based on the destination realm and the request content; forwarding the initial request according to the Diameter route; receiving a response to the initial request; extracting an origin realm or host from the response; and storing the origin realm or host in association with the session identifier. Various exemplary embodiments relate a Diameter Routing Agent (DRA) configured to perform the above method. Various exemplary embodiments relate to a non-transitory machine-readable storage medium encoded with instructions for performing the method. | 02-05-2015 |
| 20150039775 | TRACKING THE PROGRESSION OF A COMMUNICATION SESSION - A global identifier is generated based on the initiation of a communication session in a network. The global identifier is sent during the initiation of the communication session. For example, in a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) INVITE, the global identifier is passed as the communication session progresses across the network. The communication session is logged based on the global identifier in a communication log. A map of the communication session is built from the session log based on the global identifier. The map includes all the elements that were involved with the communication session.
| 02-05-2015 |
| 20150039776 | Facilitating Individualized User Interaction with an Electronic Device - Facilitating an individualized interaction between a mobile computing device and an electronic device is provided. A mobile computing device may be utilized to receive an identity of the electronic device. The identity of the electronic device and other data may then be sent from the mobile computing device to a server. An individualized interaction may then be initiated via a previously established communication session between the server and the electronic device. The individualized interaction initiated in response to a determination that the mobile computing device is proximate to the electronic device. | 02-05-2015 |
| 20150046598 | UNIVERSAL STATE-AWARE COMMUNICATIONS - A communications system for general business environments that exploits knowledge of user state to provide advantages of efficiency and control for individual users and for the business. The communications system also provides particular advantages in environments where users have multiple communication devices and for communications of a business with external parties. In other aspects, the communication system provides features of application flexibility and system fault-tolerance with broad applicability to communication systems. The communication system includes a controller that receives requests for establishing communications when a user is in an appropriate state to receive communications and communicates state of the user to other users. The controller receives a user request for establishing a communication when the user is not in the appropriate state for communication, receives a user request for a state change to the appropriate state to receive the communication, and initiates the communication without changing state of the user. | 02-12-2015 |
| 20150052258 | DIRECT MAP PROXY SYSTEM AND PROTOCOL - The present disclosure provides a detailed description of techniques used in methods, systems, and computer program products for a direct map proxy system and protocol. The claimed embodiments address the problem of flexibly and efficiently mapping to a large number of devices connected to the Internet using domain names. More specifically, some claims are directed to approaches for receiving from a user device a first domain name, mapping it to a different second domain name associated with a target device, and using the second domain name to initiate and establish a connection between the user device and target device, which claims advance the technical fields for addressing the problem of flexibly and efficiently mapping to a large number of devices connected to the Internet using domain names, as well as advancing peripheral technical fields. | 02-19-2015 |
| 20150058492 | MANAGEMENT OF NETWORK IMPAIRMENT BY COMMUNICATION ENDPOINTS - A communication session is established between a first communication endpoint and a second communication endpoint. A determination of a network condition is made, such as determining a type of network impairment. In response to determining the network condition, a message is sent to the second communication endpoint that requests the second communication endpoint to change a process for sending packets in the communication session. The process for changing packets can include: having the second communication endpoint send the same packets in the communication session at least twice; having the second communication endpoint use a different packet priority value for the communication session; having the second communication endpoint switch from a connection oriented protocol to a connectionless protocol for the communication session; and having the second communication endpoint switch from the connectionless protocol to the connection oriented protocol for the communication session. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150058493 | PREVENTING EXTRACTION OF SECRET INFORMATION OVER A COMPROMISED ENCRYPTED CONNECTION - A device may receive, from a first device, a first message that includes a first random cookie and a session cookie. The device may provide the first message to a second device. The device may receive, from the second device, a second message that includes a response to the first message. The device may generate a second random cookie. The second random cookie may be different from the first random cookie. The device may provide, to the first device, the second random cookie, the session cookie, and the response. | 02-26-2015 |
| 20150067182 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR END-TO-END CLASSIFICATION OF LEVEL 7 APPLICATION FLOWS IN NETWORKING ENDPOINTS AND DEVICES - In general, in one aspect, the invention relates to a method for handling connections. The method includes receiving, by an OS, a request from an application to create a connection, wherein the request comprises a connection identifier and a SLA, creating, by the OS, the connection targeting the application in response to the request, and mapping the connection identifier to the SLA. The method further includes receiving data from the application for the connection, generating, by a network protocol stack on the OS, a packet from the data by storing the connection identifier into a plurality of headers of the packet, processing, by the network protocol stack, the packet according to the SLA to obtain a processed packet, and transmitting, by the network protocol stack, the processed packet to the network. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150067183 | WIRELESS TERMINAL HAVING FUNCTION FOR REDUCING NETWORK LOAD AND METHOD FOR REDUCING NETWORK LOAD THEREOF - The present invention relates to a wireless terminal having a function for reducing network load and a method for reducing network load thereof. The wireless terminal includes a policy storage section for storing identification information of one or more applications allowed network usage irrespective of data limit into a storage region; a policy receiving section for receiving the policy information for blocking the network usage from a server over a communication network in case of exceeding the data limit; and a processing section for blocking network connection for all applications except the applications corresponding to the pre-stored identification information of the applications allowed network usage among the applications using networks based on the received policy information for blocking the network usage. | 03-05-2015 |
| 20150081921 | DYNAMICALLY MODULATING LINK WIDTH - Systems and methods of managing a link provide for receiving a remote width capability during a link initialization, the remote width capability corresponding to a remote port. A link between a local port and the remote port is operated at a plurality of link widths in accordance with the remote width capability. | 03-19-2015 |
| 20150095505 | RESOLVING NETWORK ADDRESS CONFLICTS - Exemplary systems and methods resolve an IP address conflict in a network system, including network systems in a virtual computing environment. An IP address monitor receives a message from a first device connected to a network or a second device connecting to the network. The message includes an indication of a network address conflict between the first and second devices. The IP address monitor detects the IP address conflict from the message, selects one of the first and second devices to disconnect from the network, and sends a message to disconnect the selected device from the network. A new IP address is received for the selected device, and the IP address monitor sends a message to reconnect the selected device to the network. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150095506 | Path computation element communication protocol session establishment method and device - Disclosed are a path computation element communication protocol (PCEP) session establishment method and device. The technical solution comprises: at a PCC or PCE node device side, before needing to establish a PCEP session, allocating a TCP connection communication end attribute to a PCC or a PCE at either end in the manner of static configuration/dynamic designation or election mechanism automatic allocation; or detecting whether to establish a TCP connection relationship, if not, actively connecting the opposite end, and if a plurality of TCP connection relationships has been established, simultaneously cutting off a plurality of connections at both ends, and reinitiating a TCP connection after waiting a random time respectively. The present invention achieves the establishment of a PCEP session in the multi-PCE cooperation computation scenario under the condition of meeting two constraint conditions which are specified by a protocol. | 04-02-2015 |
| 20150100700 | Communicating Service Denials Back to Client During MDNS Service Discovery - Methods and systems may be provided to receive a first client request for a first service. A unicast mDNS query response may be provided to the first client, wherein the query response comprises information indicative of a denial of the first service and the query response is available for display to the first client. | 04-09-2015 |
| 20150106528 | COMMUNICATION OF DATA OF A WEB REAL-TIME COMMUNICATION VIA A CARRIER-GRADE ENVIRONMENT - A method, a device, and a non-transitory storage medium having instructions to establish a web connection with a user device and provide access to a carrier-grade network in support of a Web Real Time Communication (WebRTC) session; obtain service data that includes data pertaining to a user of the user device; assign a level of trustworthiness to the service data; generate a message, wherein the message includes a request to initiate the WebRTC session; package the service data in the message based on the level of trustworthiness; and transmit the message to another device. | 04-16-2015 |
| 20150113152 | TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROVING SYN CACHE PERFORMANCE - A computer implemented method receives a client request message to initiate a network connection. In response to the client request, the method generates a key to represent the client request. The key is generated independent of information provided in the client request message and is generated to correspond to a desired address in a data structure used to track client request message. The method then enters the generated key at the desired address in the data structure and transmits a response message that includes the key back to the client. The network connection between the client and the computer system is established according to the key. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150113153 | METHOD FOR SKIPPING TITLE SEQUENCE OF MULTIMEDIA FILE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE THEREOF - A method for skipping title sequence of a multimedia file and an electronic device are provided. The method includes: obtaining a first portion feature data of a first multimedia file; obtaining a beginning time of a second portion of a second multimedia file according to the first portion feature data; and skipping a first portion of the second multimedia file prior to the beginning time of a second portion, and displaying the second portion of the second multimedia file. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150113154 | PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION FOR SYMMETRIC NAT - Systems and methods for communicating between a first and a second peer using interactive connectivity establishment (ICE) protocol, the first and second peers sharing a symmetric network address translation (NAT) having wireless isolation enabled and no support for hair-pinning. At a first Traversal Using Relay NAT (TURN) server designated as a relay candidate by a TURN Virtual Internet Platform (VIP), it is determined that a first port allocated by the symmetric NAT for a first request for communication initiated by the first peer and directed to the TURN VIP, is different from a second port allocated by the symmetric NAT for a first packet transmitted from the first peer to the first TURN server, based on a first indication. The second port is mapped to the first port. Using a similar port mapping for the second peer, peer-to-peer communication between the first and second peers is enabled. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150113155 | Method and Apparatus for Connection Establishment - A method and an apparatus for connection establishment are provided. The method includes receiving a registration request and a connection request that are sent by a client based on a service, generating a policy instruction for the service according to service information carried in the registration request when the service is registered successfully according to the registration request, feeding back the policy instruction to the client, instructing the client to adjust, according to the policy instruction, the on-off state of the connection between the server and the client and established for the service, establishing, the connection between the server and the client for the service, and adjusting, based on the policy instruction, the on-off state of the connection to solve a problem in the prior art that a large amount of electricity is consumed by the client. | 04-23-2015 |
| 20150120945 | Push Channel Based Creation of Web-Based User Interface Sessions - Systems and methods for instantiating new web UI sessions and web UI agents using push channels are disclosed. When a new web UI session is created in an application server in response to a function request from an existing web UI agent, its network address is pushed to the existing web UI agent to create a new web UI agent. The new web UI agent can then be attached to the new web UI session using the address provided to the existing web UI agent. To push the network address to the original web UI agent, a dedicated bi-directional network connection is established between the existing web UI agent and an application push channel session. The new web UI session can push its address to the existing web UI agent through an AMC. | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150120946 | Method, Server and System for a Network Multimedia Content Component Service in an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem - Method, server ( | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150120947 | METHOD AND A PROXY-CALL SESSION CONTROL FUNCTION NODE FOR DEREGISTRATION OF A USER EQUIPMENT FROM AN INTERNET MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for deregistration of a UE from an IMS, the deregistration being initiated from and performed by a P-CSCF node. The present invention also relates to a P-CSCF node comprising a processor and a memory storing a computer program, which when run in the processor, causes the P-CSCF node to perform the method. The method includes monitoring at least one parameter associated with UE behaviour in the IMS and triggering generation of a message in response to that the monitored parameter meets predefined criteria. The message is inserted in a SIP header message and sent to the S-CSCF node which forwards it to the HSS. The P-CSCF node then receives an acknowledgement from the S-CSCF node that the UE has been deregistered from the HSS and terminates the UE session with the IMS. | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150120948 | INFORMATION PROCESSING DEVICE - The information processing device includes a communication means for transmitting connection request information to a server device, and receiving response information which is a response to the connection request information; and a determination means for determining whether or not a connection with the server device succeeded, based on display information which is included in the received response information and displayed on a display device. If the determination means determines that a connection with the server device failed, the communication means transmits the connection request information to the server device. | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150120949 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS, INFORMATION PROCESSING METHOD AND PROGRAM - According to the present disclosure, there is provided an information processing apparatus including a connection control unit configured to generate or update a connection table on the basis of status of communication performed by a communication unit at a time of an operation to establish a session or status of communication regularly performed by the communication unit after the operation to establish the session. | 04-30-2015 |
| 20150127839 | SESSION QUALITY DISPLAY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Wireless communication systems may transfer communication status to a session icon that is displayed on a wireless communication device such as a smart phone, a tablet, a personal computer, a game console, a hand-held or wearable console, or other software processing device that has a wireless transceiver. A session quality server system obtains communication status data for a set of communication contacts. The session quality server system transfers the communication status data of the contact set over to the wireless communication device. Before a media session such as a voice call is established with a communication contact, the wireless communication device displays a session icon for that communication contact. The communication status of that contact is visually indicated in the session icon. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150127840 | METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION WITH A GUEST DEVICE ON A NETWORK - A method of establishing communication with a guest device on a network, where the guest device may not have access to network services such as DNS. The guest device ascertains its own network address and encodes it in a QR code or the like which is read by a second device and decoded to ascertain the network address of the guest device. The network address is then used to establish communication between the second device and the guest device. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150127841 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control device includes: a parameter storage unit that stores each entry containing a communication parameter learned through a communication between communication nodes, a communication source IP address related to the communication, and a communication destination IP address related to the communication; and a parameter acquiring unit that acquires a communication source IP address and a communication destination IP address related to a communication to be newly started, extracts, from among plural entries stored in the parameter storage unit, at least one entry in which the number of bits matched between communication source IP addresses or communication destination IP addresses is more than or equal to a predetermined lower limit value which is lower than the total number of bits in an IP address, and acquires, on the basis of the extracted entry, an initial value of a communication parameter to be used in the communication to be newly started. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150127842 | Method for Extending Application Interface for Future Applications - A Session Initiation Protocol session on a mobile terminal is tagged to associate the session with a specific application and SIP messages for the SIP session are associated with, and routed to, the specific application according to the tagging. A conduit manager matches sessions to the specific application when there are multiple applications sharing a same connection between the user terminals. SIP messages intended for legacy Rich Communication Services application are routed to the legacy RCS application and all remaining messages are routed to the conduit manager. A new data or media type which is not one of pre-defined RCS data transactions may be added by supplying additional parameters in a Session Description Protocol parameters section. User terminals may be secured from unwanted RCS applications by each application holding a valid permission to access an RCS service. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150127843 | Multiple Pathway Session Setup to Support QOS Services - A request from a user device is received for a service by a network management server via a communication network. The network management server determines multiple routes for delivering content associated with the requested service based on a provisioning profile for the user device. Content associated with the requested service is then delivered via the determined multiple routes. The provisioning profile is updated and includes preferred service types, desired QoS for one or more services, client account information, and/or client credit verification information. The network management server manages the delivery of the content associated with the requested service via the determined multiple routes. The content includes packets that are the same, which are communicated or delivered simultaneously via the determined multiple routes. The network management server allocates one or more of the determined multiple routes for delivering the content based on priorities associated with the routes. | 05-07-2015 |
| 20150134840 | APPLICATION STREAMING SERVICE - A method can include a node receiving a token redemption request from a client computing device. The node can determine a destination host management service based at least in part on a geographic proximity of the destination host management service to the client computing device. The destination host management service can be one of a plurality of host management systems distributed across a plurality of data centers. The node can route the token redemption request to the destination host management service. The destination host management service can determine a destination host running an application in one of the plurality of data centers and provision a session between the client computing device and the application running in the destination host. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150134841 | NETWORK SYSTEM, NETWORK NODE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Network system being configured to execute I/O commands and application commands in parallel and comprising a network and at least one network node, wherein the at least one network node is connected to the network via a network adapter and is configured to run several processes and/or threads in parallel, wherein the at least one network node comprises or is configured to establish a common communication channel (C-channel) to be used by the several processes and/or threads for data communication with the network via the network adapter, wherein the C-channel comprises or is established to comprise a work queue (WQ) for execution of I/O commands and a completion queue (CQ) for indication of a status of I/O commands, and wherein the at least one network node, especially its comprised or to be established C-channel, is configured for an exclusive access of precisely one single process or thread out of the several processes and/or threads to the CQ of the C-channel at a particular time. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150134842 | TRANSLATED SESSION INFORMATION TO PROVISION A NETWORK PATH - A system and method to receive session information corresponding to a session associated with a server, and translate the session information into translated session information including a topology parameter and a data parameter. The translated session information is to direct a controller to provision a network path according to the translated session information. The network path is to be compliant with the topology parameter and data parameter. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150134843 | METHOD OF ESTABLISHING NETWORK CONNECTION AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A method of establishing network connection for peer-to-peer connection between a first network device and a second network device includes a first server receiving a connection request package from the first network device according to a first match table. The first server confirms the second network device being connected thereto. The first server confirms the address type of the first network device and the second network device and transmits a connection signaling package to the second network device. The first server receives a connection response package sent by the second network device according to a second match table and the first server confirms connection according to the connection request package and the connection response package. Then, the first network device and the second network device establish connection. | 05-14-2015 |
| 20150142984 | System and Method for Security over a Network - A system and method is disclosed for communicating a data request between a first device and a second device over a network, the first device and second device each having at least a processor, storage, memory and input and output components, the method comprising sending from the communication output of the first device a data request having a request header comprising at least a unique primary device identifier associated with the first device, receiving, at an intermediary the data request, accessing, at the intermediary, a database having the primary device identifier and a unique alternate device identifier associated with the first device, sending to the second device the data request having a header comprising at least the alternate device identifier associated with the first device. The second device may also have a primary device identifier and alternate device identifier. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150142985 | SESSION HOPPING - Method for communicating in a computer network from a first node ( | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150142986 | Systems and Methods for Personalizing and/or Tailoring A Service Interface - Systems and methods for enabling proximity services to be delivered as part of an application service and/or for providing tailored services and/or a differential quality of service (QoS) to a flow may be disclosed. For example, a temporary service name between an application and a server such as a D2D server may be established such that a UE and/or network may execute such a service at a later time without later involvement by the application and/or without exchanging credentials for the application with the network and vice versa. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150142987 | Method and System of Transferring a Message in a Session Initiation Protocol Based Communications Network - Systems and methods of transferring a message in a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)-based communications network, from a first node to a third node using a second node are provided. In one exemplary embodiment, a method of registering in an Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) communications network, a User Agent (UA) using a Proxy Call Session Control Function (P-CSCF) entity with a Serving Call Session Control Function (S-CSCF) entity may include determining a first group identifier associated with a plurality of P-CSCF entities. Based on the first group identifier, the method may include selecting a network address corresponding to one of the plurality of P-CSCF entities. Further, the method may include storing subscriber data in a repository associated with the selected P-CSCF entity. Also, the method may include synchronizing, by the selected P-CSCF entity, the subscriber data stored in the repository associated with the selected P-CSCF entity to the remaining P-CSCF entities of the plurality of P-CSCF entities. The UA may be ready to establish and receive SIP sessions through any of the plurality of P CSCF entities. | 05-21-2015 |
| 20150149647 | Systems and Methods for Providing Context to SIP Messages - Systems, methods, and computer program products are provided for providing context through a scripting-type programming language to data included in a SIP message. The method includes defining one or more contexts through a scripting-type computer programming language. The one or more contexts reference a particular pre-defined portion of a SIP message and are provided by the scripting-type computer programming language. A series of SIP messages may then be received, where each SIP message in the series belongs to the same SIP message flow. After a particular SIP message in the series is received, the message is parsed to identify whether it includes any portion of data that can be referenced via one or more contexts. Any particular portion of data that can be referenced via a context is associated with a respective context such that the respective portion of data can be referenced by the context. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150149648 | Systems and Methods for Processing SIP Message Flows - Systems, methods, and computer program products are provided for modifying a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) messages. The method includes providing a scripting-type computer programming language that includes contexts that reference pre-defined portions of data of a SIP message and variables that store data associated with a SIP message flow. An interface for configuring rules to be executed when processing SIP messages is provided. Each rule includes an action that describes a modification to be made to a particular SIP message. When a SIP message is received, it is parsed to determine at least a context of a portion of the message. The parsing includes associating the portion of the message with a particular context. It is then determined whether a rule should be applied to the data associated referenced by the contexts, and if so, the SIP message is modified based on the actions associated with the rule. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150149649 | Varied Wi-Fi Service Levels - In one embodiment, a method includes receiving a request from a client computing device of a user to access a communication network; and identifying a particular tier for the client computing device from among a number of tiers of service based at least in part on social-graph information of the user. Each tier of service includes one or more session settings of the communication network. The method also includes configuring a session of the communication network for the client computing device based at least in part on one or more of the session settings of the identified tier of service; and establishing the configured session between the client computing device and the communication network. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150149650 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR POSITIONING SESSION INITITAION PROTOCOL DIALOG - The disclosure discloses a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) dialog positioning method and a SIP dialog positioning device. The method includes that: a network element receives an in-dialog SIP message with index information, wherein the index information is used for indicating a position of a dialog at a calling party or a called party; and the network element positions the dialog according to the index information. According to the disclosure, the index information for indicating the position of the dialog at the calling party or the called party is carried by the in-dialog SIP message, and the dialog is positioned according to the index information, so that such an implementation mode is simple and high in positioning speed, and the performance of the network element is improved. | 05-28-2015 |
| 20150295917 | IDENTITY PROTOCOL TRANSLATION GATEWAY - One or more methods of translating identity protocols and a device and a system implementing such methods are described herein. One such method comprises configuring a gateway to communicate with a first identity protocol and a canonical representation, with the canonical representation being different than the first identity protocol. The method may further comprise: including the first identity protocol in a first communication between a first computing device and the gateway, and translating at least a portion of the first communication from the first identity protocol to a canonical representation. The gateway may then translate the at least a portion of the first communication from the canonical representation to a second identity protocol and sending the first communication to a second computing device, including the first identity information in the second identity protocol in the communication. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150296019 | VEHICLE-MOUNTED COMMUNICATION DEVICE, INTER-VEHICLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A vehicle-mounted communication device for transmitting uplink data as data generated in a vehicle includes a first wireless communication unit configured to establish an uplink connection to a second vehicle-mounted communication device, a second wireless communication unit configured to establish a downlink connection to a third vehicle-mounted communication device, an authentication unit configured to authenticate the third vehicle-mounted communication device, an address management unit configured to assign a network address to the third vehicle-mounted communication device, and an address translation unit configured to perform translation of the network address assigned from the second vehicle-mounted communication device and the network address used by the vehicle-mounted communication device. | 10-15-2015 |
| 20150304359 | APPLICATION OF ENTERPRISE POLICIES TO WEB REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS (WebRTC) INTERACTIVE SESSIONS USING AN ENTERPRISE SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL (SIP) ENGINE, AND RELATED METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER-READABLE MEDIA - Application of enterprise policies to Web Real-Time Communications (WebRTC) interactive sessions using an enterprise Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) engine, and related methods, systems, and computer-readable media are disclosed. In one embodiment, a method comprises receiving, by session token converter of enterprise device, an incoming WebRTC session description token. The method comprises generating, by session token converter, outgoing SIP request message. The method comprises sending, by session token converter, outgoing SIP request message to enterprise SIP engine and applying, by enterprise SIP engine, enterprise policies based on outgoing SIP request message. The method comprises, responsive to applying enterprise policies, sending incoming SIP request message to enterprise device. The method comprises converting, by session token converter, incoming SIP request message into outgoing WebRTC session description token, and sending outgoing WebRTC session description token to a target device. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150304430 | Methods and Systems for Transmitting Mobile Device Information - Method and systems for providing user data from a communication module (using a first telecommunications network) to data processing center (of a second telecommunications network) is disclosed. The user data is provided in a data field of a session setup message. The user data in the data field of the session setup message is adapted or guaranteed (e.g., required by a telecommunications standard) to be forwarded from the first telecommunications network to the second telecommunication network. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150304431 | SYSTEM AND METHOD TO PROVIDE A WIRELESS CONNECTION TO A COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND A PORTABLE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - System and method to provide a wireless connection to a communication network and a portable communication device. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150304432 | MEASURING AFFINITY LEVELS VIA PASSIVE AND ACTIVE INTERACTIONS - Systems and methods for the measuring of affinity levels via passive and active interactions are provided. A first group of users are selected from a plurality of possible groups of users. Affinity levels are measured among the users of the first group, the affinity levels based at least partially on both passive and active interactions between an electronic device of a first user and electronic devices of users in the first group. The first user is added to the first group based on the affinity levels. | 10-22-2015 |
| 20150312281 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SELECTION IN MULTI-DEVICE SCENARIO - According the present invention there may be provided a method of determining which user device (UD) of a plurality of user devices should receive a Session Initiation Protocol, SIP, request (RQ) for a communication service on a telecommunications system, the system comprising: a plurality of user devices (UD) adapted to run a communication service; an application server (AS) in communication with the plurality of user devices on which there is comprised a registry of the plurality of user devices (UD), the registry comprising associations between user devices and SIP instances, each user device being associated with a respective user identity; and, a telecommunication network in communication with the plurality of user devices (UD) and with the application server (AS), wherein the method comprises, at the application server (AS): receiving a SIP request (RQ) for establishing a communication service, the SIP request intended for a user identity from the telecommunication network; and, dynamically determining which SIP instance should receive the SIP request (RQ) based on the user identity for which the SIP request is intended and parameters associated with the user device or SIP instance on the registry. A corresponding application server and computer readable medium are also provided. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150312353 | DRIVER-TO-DRIVER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, VEHICLE, AND METHOD THEREOF - A driver-to-driver communication system includes a server accessible over a communications network, a first vehicle, and a second vehicle. The first vehicle and the second vehicle each have a license plate with a license plate number. The license plate numbers are stored on the server. The first vehicle may be substantially behind the second vehicle, and may be configured to send the second license plate number to the server. This may be accomplished by a computer device, which includes a camera to detect and read the second license plate number. A processor recognizes the second license plate number and sends it to the server over the communications network via a wireless module. The server matches the second license plate number with the second vehicle, and subsequently establishes communication, either direct or indirect, between the first vehicle and the second vehicle. | 10-29-2015 |
| 20150319250 | TECHNOLOGIES FOR ACCELERATING NETWORK VIRTUALIZATION - Technologies for accelerated network virtualization include executing packet processing functions by a network virtualizer established in a provider partition of a computing device and offloading packet movement functions to a network interface controller of the computing device. In the illustrative embodiments, the network interface controller includes one or more tenant-facing ports, a provider-facing port, and an external network-facing port, which are used by the network interface controller to receive, send, and pass packets from, to, and between the various partitions of the computing device. To transmit a packet, the network virtualizer generates a provider header, and either the network virtualizer or the network interface controller encapsulates a packet received from the tenant partition with the provider header. To receive a packet, either the network virtualizer or the network interface controller strips a provider header from the received packet. | 11-05-2015 |
| 20150326429 | PHYSICAL-LAYER SYSTEM PRIORITIZATION AND COMMUNICATION SESSION MANAGEMENT WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Embodiments are directed to selecting a physical layer for an access terminal's (AT's) participation in a communication session. In an embodiment, the AT can register its priorities for multiple physical-layer systems as well as contact information by which an application server can contact the AT over each system. The AT selectively updates the system prioritization and/or contact information. When the AT joins or initiates a communication session, the application server supports the AT on a highest-priority system through which the AT can be contacted. The system supporting the AT's session can change upon request by the AT, the initiative of the application server and/or a detected triggering event. In a further embodiment, multiple systems can be used concurrently to support the AT's session, such that the AT can send and/or receive signaling and/or media for at least a portion of the communication session over the multiple systems concurrently. | 11-12-2015 |
| 20150334054 | USING VIRTUAL NETWORKING DEVICES TO CONNECT MANAGED COMPUTER NETWORKS - Techniques are described for providing managed virtual computer networks whose configured logical network topology may have one or more virtual networking devices, such as by a network-accessible configurable network service, with corresponding networking functionality provided for communications between multiple computing nodes of a virtual computer network by emulating functionality that would be provided by the networking devices if they were physically present. The networking functionality provided for a managed computer network may include supporting a connection between that managed computer network and other managed computer networks, such as via a provided virtual peering router to which each of the managed computer networks may connect, with the functionality of the virtual peering router being emulated by modules of the configurable network service without physically providing the virtual peering router, including to manage data communications between computing nodes of the inter-connected managed computer networks in accordance with client-specified configuration information. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334136 | Method and system for telecommunication network to provide session service to internet - Provided is a method for a telecommunication network to provide a session service to the Internet. An access gateway of a telecommunication network supports an Internet application protocol, or an access-side device of the telecommunication network is upgraded to support the Internet application protocol, and the Internet is connected to the telecommunication network via the access gateway or the upgraded access-side device. The method further includes that an Internet user establishes a session with a telecommunication user or another Internet user via a telecommunication network. A system for a telecommunication network to provide a session service to the Internet is also provided. By upgrading an access-side device of a telecommunication network, the disclosure enables the access-side device to support an Internet application protocol and converges the Internet with the telecommunication network, thus being able to provide a session service to an Internet user. The disclosure facilitates the usage of the session service by the Internet user. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334191 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING IMAGE - The present disclosure relates to a method and a device for transmitting images. The method includes: receiving an IP connection request sent from a computer; acquiring an IP address of the computer according to the received IP connection request; acquiring screenshots and direction information related to the screenshots; and sending the screenshots and the direction information to the computer via IP Layer according to the IP address. In addition to screenshots, the embodiment also transmits the direction information related to the screenshots so that a receiving end may display better screenshots according to the direction information, thus improving the display effect. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150334194 | CONTROL SYSTEM AND CONTROL METHOD, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING INFORMATION, INFORMATION PROCESSING TERMINAL AND METHOD THEREOF, STORAGE MEDIUM, AND PROGRAM - A client (such as a PC, portable telephone, PDA, electrical appliances), to which a device such as a IC card is connected, starts a handshake protocol to request a server to start communication. When communication is established via the handshake protocol, the initiative of communication is transferred to the server, and the state changes into a neutral state. In this neutral state, a control packet including a particular number of messages and a finished message is transmitted from the server to the client. If the client receives the control packet, the client performs a process according to the messages included in the control packet. This makes it possible to remotely control a device via a network in a highly reliable and efficient manner. | 11-19-2015 |
| 20150350332 | ANSWERING A CALL WITH CLIENT THROUGH A HOST - A client device may be used to initiate or answer calls using a host device connected to a network. For example, when a phone operating as a host device receives an incoming call from a network, the phone may communicate the presence of the incoming call to one or more client devices such as laptop, desktop, tablet, or wearable devices that are associated with the host device. When an answer call selection is made at a client, a call answered communication may be sent from the client device to the host device. The host device may then communicate with the network to connect the call to the host, and when the call is connected, the host may hand-off the call to the client that sent the call answered communication. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150350335 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING MULTIPLE FORMS OF COMMUNICATIONS IN ONE SESSION - An approach is provided for performing multiple and hybrid forms of communication in the same communication session. A communication manager receives a to establish a communication session using a first form of communication, wherein the communication session supports multiple and simultaneous forms of communication. Next, the communication manager selects a second form of communication to conduct the communication session. Then, the communication manager transcodes the second form of communication to the first form of communication. The different forms can be converted to facilitate and enrich the communication capability, according to an embodiment of the invention. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150350336 | SECURE NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION (NAT) PORT BLOCK ALLOCATION - A node is configured to receive, from a second node, a request to establish a session; perform, in response to the request, a network address translation (NAT) operation to establish the session, the NAT operation causing a first port block to be allocated to the session, the first port block including a first set of ports via which traffic, associated with the session, is transported; determine that the set of ports are no longer available for the session; determine whether a quantity of times that the first port block has been allocated to the session is greater than a threshold; and retain the first port block, for the session, when the quantity of times that the first port block has been allocated to the session is not greater than the threshold. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150350337 | Long-Lived MPTCP Sessions - Techniques for supporting long-lived multipath transmission control protocol (MPTCP) sessions. An MPTCP session may be established between two endpoints. Application data may be communicated between the MPTCP endpoints over one or more MPTCP subflows of the MPTCP session. All MPTCP subflows may be terminated. MPTCP session state information may be maintained after all MPTCP subflows have been terminated. Thus, a zero-subflow MPTCP session may be maintained. Additional MPTCP subflows may subsequently be added back to the MPTCP session using the maintained MPTCP session state information. | 12-03-2015 |
| 20150358361 | MECHANISMS FOR HANDLING SIP GLARE ACROSS MULTIPLE DIALOGS - The system and method detect and properly handle a glare condition in a SIP communication session. A glare condition is where a communication device has two concurrent outstanding requests (typically an incoming and an outgoing request that have not be acknowledged) and needs to process one of the requests before processing the other request. To detect a glare condition, the system and method identify that an out-of-dialog SIP request is received while an outgoing SIP request is pending. In response to detecting the glare condition, a glare algorithm is initiated. The glare algorithm ensures that outstanding requests will be handled in a timely manner. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150358411 | SANDBOXED APPLICATION DATA REDIRECTION TO DATACENTERS - Technologies are generally described to redirect data from application sandboxes to datacenters. In some examples, an application operating in an application sandbox may exchange data with an application data store, such as a file or a directory, also located in the sandbox. The data store may then exchange data with a datacenter at a particular geographic locale over a network connection established by a sandbox data servicer module. The network connection may be periodically updated to connect the data store with different datacenters at different geographic locales based on geographic information associated with the application, a device on which the application executes, the datacenters, and/or the exchanged data. | 12-10-2015 |
| 20150365482 | SMB2 SCALEOUT - Systems and methods are disclosed for clients and servers operating in a scaled cluster environment. Efficiencies are introduced to the process of connecting a client to a clustered environment by providing the client with the ability to attempt a connection with multiple servers in parallel. Servers operating the in the clustered environment are also capable of providing persistent storage of file handles and other state information. Ownership of the state information and persistent handles may be transferred between servers, thereby providing clients with the opportunity to move from one server to another while maintaining access to resources in the clustered environment. | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150365484 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MAINTAINING SESSION, NETWORK SIDE, TERMINAL AND COMPUTER STORAGE MEDIUM - A a method for maintaining a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) session when a terminal is powered off is provided. The method includes that a network side receives terminal power-off indication information sent by a terminal when the terminal is powered off ( | 12-17-2015 |
| 20150373123 | CODELESS DEVICE PAIRING BETWEEN MOBILE DEVICE AND PARTICULAR ONE OF A PLURALITY OF MEDIA DEVICES - A media server receives a request from an unpaired mobile device, queries a login database to determine whether the mobile device is logged in for high speed Internet access, and, when yes, identifies a particular guest area of the hospitality establishment according to details in its login record. One of the media devices accessible from within the particular guest area is selected and paired with the mobile device without requiring a user of the mobile device to input into the mobile device a connect code of the selected media device. In another example, a user initiates a codeless pairing mode on a particular one of the media devices and begins interacting with the media server utilizing an unpaired mobile device. Since, only one media device can be in that mode at a time, the media server pairs the newly detected unpaired mobile device with the particular media device. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373125 | Methods and Apparatus for Providing Session Policy During a Registration of a Device - A method for a user agent to access a session policy in a network is provided. The method comprises the user agent sending a registration message to a first network node. The method further comprises the user agent receiving policy-related information from the first network node in a response to the registration message. The policy-related information is one of the session policy, a Uniform Resource Locator that points to the session policy, and a Policy-Contact header containing a policyContactURI for a policy document. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150373126 | METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR INTERACTIVE DATA EXCHANGE - A method, apparatus and system for exchanging data, the method including: receiving an identifier of a data server to exchange data with a mobile terminal; determining the data server in accordance with the identifier of the data server; and relaying data to be exchanged between the mobile terminal and the data server. The mobile terminal exchanges data with the data server originally configured to support landline terminals through the access server, which enhances data exchange between the mobile terminal and the data server. | 12-24-2015 |
| 20150381664 | System and Method for Connectivity Contextual Services Local Online Experience - A connectivity contextual services ecosystem management system may comprise a connectivity contextual services connectivity system, one or more user devices, and one or more merchant devices. The connectivity contextual services connectivity system may deliver different connectivity contextual services to a user device and/or a merchant device in response to a context environment, in order to provide a user with a customized experience, such as allowing that user to enter into conversations with merchants, view inventory of merchants, and search for merchants with relevant products without entering a physical store. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150381691 | Bonding of Multiple Concurrent Data Streams Among Multiple Devices - Examples are disclosed for hosting a communication session between a computer device and a destination communication device in an Internet Protocol (IP) based packet data network. A computer device receives multiple concurrent IP packet data streams each representative of the same content but received over corresponding multiple communication links. The original IP packet data stream comes from the communications server. At least one IP packet data stream representative of the original IP packet data stream traverses a communication link through a second communication device working in tandem with the communications server before arriving at the computer device. The computer device determines a highest quality packet for each corresponding packet in the multiple concurrent IP packet data streams. The computer device then creates a bonded IP packet data stream by selecting the highest quality packet for each time slot from among corresponding time slots of the multiple concurrent IP packet data streams. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150381740 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC SESSION DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN COMPUTING DEVICES BASED ON ZONE TRANSITION DETECTION - A system and method for automatic session data transfer between computing devices based on zone transition detection are disclosed. A particular embodiment is configured to: determine if a mobile or wearable computing device is located within a proximity zone around a location of a stationary computing device; establish an authorized wireless data connection with the mobile or wearable computing device via a wireless transceiver; determine if the mobile or wearable computing device is likely departing the proximity zone and if so, upload user session data to the mobile or wearable computing device; and determine if the mobile or wearable computing device is likely approaching the stationary computing device and if so, download user session data from the mobile or wearable computing device. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150381752 | DYNAMIC DISABLING OF MULTI-STEP TRANSPORT LAYER HANDSHAKE SPOOFING IN PERFORMANCE ENHANCING PROXIES (PEPs) IN BROADBAND NETWORKS - An approach for selective dynamic disabling of transport layer handshake spoofing is provided. A local proxy node of a communications network receives request message from a respective local host for establishing a network connection with a remote host. A destination address for the network connection is determined. It is determined whether the destination address is included in a handshake spoofing bypass list. If it is determined that the destination address is included in the spoofing bypass list, a corresponding un-spoofed connection request message is transmitted to a remote proxy node associated with the remote host, in accordance with a respective handshaking protocol for the connection establishment. If it is determined that the destination address is not included in the spoofing bypass list, a corresponding spoofed connection request message is transmitted to the remote proxy node, in accordance with a respective handshake spoofing protocol for the connection establishment. | 12-31-2015 |
| 20150381819 | Method and Communications Arrangement for Operating a Communications Connection - The invention relates to a method and a communications arrangement for operating a communications connection between a communications terminal device (KE | 12-31-2015 |
| 20160006689 | METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS FOR KEEPING SESSION TABLE ALIVE IN NET ADDRESS TRANSLATION APPARATUS - Embodiments of the disclosure provide a method for keeping a session table alive in a Network Address Translation, NAT, apparatus, including: creating a hello session table by an Access Border Gateway Function, A_BGF, apparatus; creating a hello message by the A_BGF apparatus according to the hello session table; sending the hello message by the A_BGF apparatus to the NAT apparatus; receiving the hello message by the NAT apparatus; and updating a session table corresponding to the hello message by the NAT apparatus. Embodiments of the disclosure also provide a system and apparatuse for keeping a session table alive in an NAT apparatus. Application of the embodiments of the disclosure keeps the session table alive in the NAT apparatus of an IP Multimedia Subsystem, IMS, ensures an unblocked registration path, and prevents the user conversation being interrupted due to an aged session table of the NAT apparatus. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160006770 | DYNAMIC BRIDGE FOR OBJECT TRANSFER - A request for a first dynamic bridge end is received at a first device. A capability for a second dynamic bridge end is transmitted to a second device. At least one of the first dynamic bridge end and the second dynamic bridge end have a movable end point location. The first dynamic bridge end and the second dynamic bridge end create a path for transmission of an object. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160006819 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MEDIA AND SIGNALING IN A COMMUNICATION PLATFORM - Systems and methods for communicating media between a client and a media server. Responsive to a communication initiation received by a signaling controller from a client system, the signaling controller invites a media server by providing an invitation to the media server. The media server is bridged with the client system by controlling a media proxy service to establish a media proxy between the client system and the media server by using client media parameters of the first communication initiation and media server media parameters provided by the media server responsive to the invitation. Media is communicated between the external client system and the media server by using the established media proxy. | 01-07-2016 |
| 20160014213 | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160014214 | PULLING INFORMATION FROM INFORMATION SOURCES VIA REFER REQUESTS | 01-14-2016 |
| 20160021195 | IDENTIFYING RESET SOURCE AND REASON IN A TCP SESSION - A method for identifying reset source and reason in a TCP session is provided in the illustrative embodiments. A reset packet is prepared for the TCP session. An identifier associated with the target data processing system is added using a first header in the reset packet. The identifier associated with the target data processing system is unknown to a sender a data packet in the TCP session. The sender sends the data packet to another data processing system during the TCP session. A reason for resetting the TCP session is added using a second header in the reset packet. The TCP session is reset by sending the reset packet. | 01-21-2016 |
| 20160028779 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE - When a communication request sent by a communication requester includes a non-standard communication implementation request requesting implementation of non-standard communication, a control section selects a specified device as a communication partner even if an alternative device that performs communication with the communication requester for the specified device is assigned to the specified device. The specified device is a communication device specified as the communication partner by the communication requester. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160028831 | Method and apparatus for connection management - In accordance with an example embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a method, comprising receiving in an apparatus a first message from a second apparatus located in a different domain as the apparatus, the first message comprising a logical name of the second apparatus and a first global address, receiving a second message from a third apparatus, the second message comprising a second global address, and determining whether the first and second global addresses are the same address, or where the first and second global addresses are IPv6 addresses, whether they belong to the same network, and responsive to the first and second global addresses being the same address, or in the case of IPv6 belonging to the same network, causing transmission of information comprising at least one of a logical name and a local address of the second apparatus to the third apparatus. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160028833 | TENANT AWARE SESSION MANAGER - Various embodiments of systems and methods to provide a tenant aware session manager for accessing a cloud application is described herein. In one aspect, a request to access the cloud application is received. A communication session corresponding to a current communication session ID associated with the request is determined. Upon determining the communication session, a current tenant ID is retrieved from the request. Further, a check is made to compare whether a tenant ID associated with the communication session matches with the current tenant ID. The communication session to execute the cloud application is returned when the tenant ID matches with the current tenant ID. When the tenant ID does not match with the current tenant ID, a new communication session is generated with a tenant ID same as the current tenant ID and the new communication session is returned to execute the cloud application. | 01-28-2016 |
| 20160034319 | DISTRIBUTED TASKS FOR RETRIEVING SUPPLEMENTAL JOB INFORMATION - A method to assist with processing distributed jobs by retrieving and/or synchronizing supplemental job data. The method includes receiving a request to perform a job and opening a first connection (e.g., persistent connection) between a primary machine and a secondary machine, and transmitting by the primary machine a request pertaining to the job to the secondary machine using a second connection, the job to be performed by the secondary machine. The method also includes receiving by the primary machine using the second connection a task request for supplemental information pertaining to the job, transmitting by the primary machine a task response including the supplemental information to the secondary machine, and receiving a job result for the job using the second connection. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160036866 | IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MBMS FILE REPAIR USING HTTP SERVERS - Disclosed in some examples is a method of media repair in an IMS based network, the method includes communicating with an IMS network using SIP to setup a download session with a BMSC over a MBMS bearer; responsive to determining that one or more received encoding symbols of media downloaded using the established MBMS bearer cannot be decoded: requesting a file repair procedure from the IMS network component using a SIP re-invite request, the SIP re-invite request including an address of an HTTP repair server indicated by the IMS network component during the MBMS bearer setup; responsive to receiving a SIP acknowledgement indicating that the request was successful, requesting an HTTP connection with the HTTP server to re-download the one or more encoding symbols of the media that could not be decoded; and receiving the one or more encoding symbols from the HTTP server. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160036919 | Propagating Communication Awareness for Communication Sessions - Techniques for propagating communication awareness for communication sessions are described. In at least some embodiments, a communication session refers to an exchange of communication media between different communication endpoints. According to various embodiments, communication awareness of a communication session is propagated among various autonomous networks involved in routing the communication session. Communication awareness, for instance, is propagated out-of-band from a data stream that carries the communication session. | 02-04-2016 |
| 20160044063 | Session Association Method, Apparatus, and System - A session association method, apparatus, and system. The method includes collecting call control signaling, on a signaling link of a control plane in a communications network, transmitted by network elements, where the call control signaling includes speech channel information; and performing session association on the call control signaling according to the speech channel information. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160044069 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR RELIABLE MESSAGING BETWEEN APPLICATION SESSIONS ACROSS VOLATILE NETWORKING CONDITIONS - An electronic device is provided comprising a processor, a memory coupled to the processor, and a communications module saved in the memory and an application saved in the memory. The communications module configures the processor to generate a first transmission sequence number associated with a transport message to be sent to a remote device, include the first transmission sequence number in the transport message, and send the transport message to the remote device. | 02-11-2016 |
| 20160057178 | LOCAL CONTROL OF ADDITIONAL MEDIA SESSION FOR A PACKET BASED CALL - A user equipment (UE) engages in a packet based call between a local party associated with the UE and a remote party. The UE establishes a control plane session of the call with a node of an Internet Protocol multimedia system (IPMS), and establishes a media session of the call managed by the IPMS. The UE determines a local endpoint for terminating an additional media session at the local party, and sends a first message of the control plane session to the IPMS. The first message indicates the local endpoint and indicates that management of the additional media session by the IPMS is not required. The UE receives a second message of the control plane session from the IPMS that indicates a remote endpoint for terminating the additional media session at the remote party. The UE configures the local endpoint for transfer of media with the indicated remote endpoint. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057215 | METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR DELEGATING GROUP OWNERSHIP FOR THE FORMATION OF A NEW GROUP - Disclosed are methods and systems for devices in peer-to-peer networks to form a new group using information sent by a group owner in a previous group session. In some embodiments, a method of delegating group ownership from a first device to a second device for the formation of a new group includes: determining the second device will be the group owner of the new group during a current group session; broadcasting to devices in the current group session that the second device will be the group owner of the new group; dissolving the current group session; and forming a new group with the second device as group owner. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160057231 | Avoiding Registration Storms for Open Systems Interconnection Layer 4 Through Layer 7 Services in a Cloud Computing System - Concepts and technologies disclosed herein are directed to avoiding registration storms for Open Systems Interconnection (“OSI”) communication model layers 4-7 services in a cloud computing system. According to one aspect of the concepts and technologies disclosed herein, a traffic distribution system can receive a connection request from a device. The traffic distribution system also can send the connection request to a site. The site can include a virtual call session control function (“V-CSCF”). The site also can include a state persistence database. The V-CSCF can cause a registration state associated with the device to be stored in the state persistence database. The registration state can be replicated to one or more further persistence databases that operate within one or more further sites. | 02-25-2016 |
| 20160065677 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A RELIABLE CONTENT EXCHANGE OF A CCN PIPELINE STREAM - A client device can establish a reliable content exchange (RCX) session with a hosting service over a Content Centric Network (CCN) to send a reliable pipelined flow of data to the hosting service. During operation, the client device can provide authentication information to the hosting service, and initiates an RCX control channel with the hosting service. The client device can select content to send to the hosting service, and uses the control channel to send an Exchange-initialization request that establishes an Exchange session for transferring the content to the hosting service. The Exchange-initialization request includes a collection name associated with the selected content, and an Exchange identifier (XID) for the Exchange session. The client device can then receive an Interest that requests a segment of the selected content over the Exchange session, and can return a Content Object whose payload includes the requested segment of the content. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160065678 | COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MANAGEMENT COMPUTER, AND SESSION INFORMATION MIGRATION METHOD - A communication system comprising computers and a management computer, wherein the computers include a communication control unit configured to control a communication using a session of a terminal. The communication control unit manages a database storing in a plurality of pieces of session information. The management computer includes property management information for managing a property of each of the plurality of pieces of session information. The session information migration control unit is configured to: detect a migration trigger of the plurality of pieces of session information stored in a first database; select the plurality of pieces of session information from the plurality of pieces of session information stored in the first database based on the property management information; determine a migration order for the selected plurality of pieces of session information based on the property of the each of the selected plurality of pieces of session information. | 03-03-2016 |
| 20160072766 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR CARRIER GRADE NAT OPTIMIZATION - Methods and systems for maintaining NAT session management on a multi-core device are disclosed. A first core of the multi-core device that is intermediary between a plurality of clients and a plurality of servers may insert a NAT session into a local outbound session table stored in a memory of the first core. The first core may determine that a second core of the multi-core device will serve as a receiving core for a response to the request from the server to the client. The first core may insert the NAT session into a global session table responsive to determining that the second core will serve as the receiving core. | 03-10-2016 |
| 20160072895 | DIRECT TRANSMISSION OF DATA BETWEEN APPLICATIONS IN A MULTI-TENANT ENVIRONMENT - Overhead of sending data from one application to another by doing input and output processing can be costly. The present invention provides a method of transmitting data with a low overhead between applications in a multi-tenant runtime environment. The multi-tenant runtime detects a connection between tenants, and then performs low-overhead data transmission mechanisms by cloning data from one tenant space to another tenant space, while keeping the data isolated for two tenants. | 03-10-2016 |
| 20160080167 | ATTACHED COMPUTING DEVICE - Examples of a computing device for attaching to a host computing device are disclosed. In one example implementation according to aspects of the present disclosure, a computing device may include one or more processors, a memory, and a connection port to attach the computing device to a host computing device. Additionally, the computing device may include a driver installation module to cause a device driver to be installed on the host computing device to enable the computing device to send data to and receive data from the host computing device. The computing device may also include an operating system session module to initiate an operating system session on the computing device and to cause the operating system session to be accessible to a user of the host computing device via a web browser interface on the host computing device. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160080315 | ENHANCED DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP) - Systems, apparatus and methods described herein are configured for receiving a network parameter request (e.g., a DHCPv6) request from a specific client and processing the network parameter request to facilitate allocation, assignment, etc., of one or more specific network parameters to the specific client based on a unique identifier (e.g., MAC address) of the specific client. In some embodiments, the systems, apparatus and methods described herein are further configured for processing and relaying the network parameter request to a network parameter server (e.g., DHCPv6 server) to enable one or more specific network parameters to be assigned to the specific client. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160080319 | SYSTEM TO IDENTIFY A COMPUTER ON A NETWORK - A system, a method, and a computer program for identifying a device on a network that participates in communication sessions, where the device may rotate its IP address between communication sessions. A plurality of unauthorized communication sessions that are carried out on different IP addresses are captured, stored, and analyzed to determine whether the same device was used during the communication sessions. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160080428 | INFORMATIONAL ENRICHMENT FOR INTERACTIVE SYSTEMS - Interactive services are enhanced by intercepting a session initiation protocol message used to initiate a bidirectional communication and in transit to a networked recipient computer that provides interactive services for the bidirectional communication to be initiated. Supplemental information is obtained based on information in the session initiation protocol message in order to provide to the networked recipient computer of the bidirectional communication to be initiated. A computer processor of an intermediary computer is used to insert the supplemental information into the session initiation protocol message. The session initiation protocol message is routed with the supplemental information inserted to the networked recipient computer that provides the interactive services for the bidirectional communication to be initiated. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160080434 | System, Method, and Computer Program Product For Resolving Addressing In A Network Including A Network Address Translator - A system, method, and computer program product through which address resolution is performed for nodes of a network that are behind a network address translator (NAT). A determination is made upon the initiation of a communication session as to whether one or more of the nodes included in the session are behind a NAT. Based on the determination, information is exchanged from an independent application server to the nodes included in the session so as to resolve the addressing problems introduced by the NAT. The invention is applicable in applications including, but not limited to, IP telephony, and applications complying with the session initiation protocol (SIP). | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160080466 | INFORMATION PROCESSING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF REMOTE OPERATION CONTROL - An apparatus link unit of a PC and an apparatus link unit of a smartphone link with each other to automatically establish a mode of remote operation between the PC and the smartphone. When the apparatus link unit of the PC transmits a notice of completion of PC-smartphone link to the smartphone, a port number to be used in the remote operation is informed. The apparatus link unit of the PC transmits a file to the smartphone using a port number of a normal link mode while a remote operation controller is performing the remote operation. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160080501 | ON DEMAND CUSTOMER PRIVATE NETWORK CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN CLOUD DATA CENTERS - An approach is provided for establishing a private network connection between source and target cloud data centers (CDCs). Requirements of the private network connection are received. Network service providers (NSPs) providing a network service to the source and target CDCs are determined. Performance information of respective NSPs is determined. Performance information of NSP(s) are determined to satisfy the requirements. One of the NSP(s) is selected based on the corresponding performance information optimally satisfying the requirements. First and second connection endpoints of the private network connection are generated in the source and target CDCs, respectively. Based on the first and second connection endpoints and responsive to a request from the target CDC to the selected NSP to attach the target CDC to the private network connection, the private network connection is established. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160081127 | SMART HOME DEVICE AND NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - According to an aspect of the present invention, a smart home appliance device comprises: a controller for controlling an operation of a smart home appliance; and at least one communication module for transmitting/receiving data on the basis of a command of the controller, wherein the controller transmits an access request message to a consolidated authentication center, receives an access response message corresponding to an access request, transmits a pairing request message including device information of the smart home appliance device to the consolidated authentication center, and receives a pairing response message corresponding to the pairing request message. | 03-17-2016 |
| 20160094586 | Media Session Between Network Endpoints - A media session between an initiating endpoint and a responding endpoint is effected, there being a plurality of available paths through a communication network via which the media session could be established. Type metrics associated with the available paths convey the directness of the available paths and are for making a selection of an available path for the media session. Network information indicative of the quality of the available paths and collected from a plurality of network nodes comprises contributions from network nodes other than the initiating and receiving endpoints which have current and/or have had past visibility of at least parts of the available paths. Said selection is influenced so as to cause the endpoints to select for the media session a higher quality but less direct available path in favour of a more direct but lower quality available path. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160094591 | Media Session between Network Endpoints - A media session is established between a first endpoint and a second endpoint via a communication network based on connectivity checks performed by the endpoints. A set of candidate pairs, each comprising a first network address available to the first endpoint and a second network address available to the second endpoint, is generated. To each candidate pair of the candidate pair set, a respective priority is assigned. If none of the criteria is determined to be met by the first endpoint, the priorities are assigned by the first endpoint according to a standardized networking protocol as specified by the standardized networking protocol, and if any of the criteria is determined to be met by the first endpoint, at least one of the priorities assigned by the first endpoint is different from that specified by the standardized networking protocol. | 03-31-2016 |
| 20160105468 | SERVICE CAPABILITIES IN HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - In some implementations, a telecommunications network can include a core network device. The core network device can receive from a session-originating device an initiation request of a communication session, the initiation request including information of a destination and information of media capabilities. The core network device can determine network-location information of the destination, retrieve from a capability registry modification information corresponding to the network-location information, and modify the information of the media capabilities based at least in part on the modification information. The core network device can transmit the initiation request including the modified information of the media capabilities to another core network device corresponding to the network-location information. The core network device can also determine that the information of the one or more media capabilities does not correspond to the retrieved capability information and transmit a session-failure indication to the session-originating device. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105471 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED FLOW STATE P2P SETUP IN VIRTUAL NETWORKS - Systems and methods for virtual network implementation and management based on a peer-to-peer metadata exchange are disclosed. Metadata pertaining to a flow traversing a virtual network overlaying an underlying network is generated in accordance with actions executed to send data packets via the underlying network relative to the virtual network. The metadata is encapsulated in one or more control packets sent to a set of nodes of the underlying network. Each node of the set of nodes maintains a copy of the metadata received in the one or more control packets in a local data store. The metadata is accessed via the local data store when needed to process packets of the flow. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160105481 | SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR HANDLING MULTIPLE CONCURRENT SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL TRANSACTIONS - Systems and methods for handling the processing of multiple SIP transactions that have been requested at substantially the same time can involve establishing a priority order for processing the SIP transactions, and then individually processing the SIP transactions based on the established priority order. One or more SIP transactions having a lower priority can be held in a SIP processing queue of a software application until the processing of SIP transactions having a higher priority has been completed. Each time that the processing of a higher priority SIP transaction is completed, the next-highest priority SIP transaction in the queue is submitted for processing. Also, where possible, two or more SIP transactions in the queue may be consolidated into a single SIP transaction. | 04-14-2016 |
| 20160112467 | Method and System for Enabling a Communication Device to Remotely Execute an Application - A communication system capable of enabling one or more communication devices to remotely execute one or more applications includes one or more communication devices that are coupled to a data connection. At least one of the one or more communication devices is operable to communicate a request to establish a communication session over the data connection. The system also includes one or more application servers that are coupled to the data connection. At least one of the one or more application servers is adapted to execute an application to establish the requested communication session with the at least one communication device. The at least one application server resides at a location remote from the at least one communication device. The at least one application server communicates a request for processing service to the at least one communication device. The request for processing service is communicated to the at least one communication device over the data connection. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160112471 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DYNAMIC DEVICE PAIRING - A communication system, method, and components are described. Specifically, a communication system that supports dynamic device pairing of communication devices is described. Such pairing is accomplished using a feature or pairing server, without requiring modification to associated communication endpoints. Moreover, sequenced applications can be applied for all communication endpoints when pairing is in effect. | 04-21-2016 |
| 20160119263 | SYSTEM FOR DELEGATING THE PRIORITIZATION OF INCOMING COMMUNICATIONS TO TRUSTED USERS - A computer-implemented method for prioritizing an incoming communication directed to a recipient by an originator includes creating a privacy/trust relationship between a recipient and an originator in response to user input, and determining a disposition of an incoming communication by reference to the privacy/trust relationship. | 04-28-2016 |
| 20160127474 | EXCHANGING FLOOR ARBITRATION HISTORY INFORMATION DURING A COMMUNICATION SESSION - In an embodiment, a communication device (e.g., a current floor arbitrator of the session, a proxy device, etc.) records a floor arbitration history that tracks one or more floor grants and one or more floor denials that occur while a first device is performing a floor arbitration function for the communication session with the communication group, and transmits some or all of the floor arbitration history to a second device during the communication session. The second device (e.g., a new floor arbitrator for the session, a late or re-joining participant to the communication session, etc.) participates in the communication session based at least in part upon the received floor arbitration history (e.g., by factoring the received floor arbitration history into future floor-related decisions, by selectively requesting particular missed portions of the communication session, etc.). | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160127477 | ZERO CLIENT DEVICE WITH CACHED CONNECTIONS - Systems and methods for maintaining zero client sessions between different servers and a zero client device are presented herein. | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160127560 | METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A TELECOMMUNICATIONS LINK - Disclosed is a method for establishing a telecommunications link (C | 05-05-2016 |
| 20160150023 | APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD OF SELECTING RELAY DEVICE, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - A plurality of control apparatuses each stores, in a memory, relay device identification information for identifying one or more relay devices of a plurality of relay devices available for selection by the control apparatus, and selects, in response to connection of a first communication terminal to the control apparatus, one of the one or more relay devices having the relay device identification information stored in the memory as a first relay device to be connected to the first communication terminal to relay content data for the first communication terminal under control of the control apparatus. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160150052 | Gateway, Client Device and Methods For Facilitating Communication Between a Client Device and an Application Server - It is presented a method, executed in a gateway, the gateway being arranged to facilitate communication between a client device and an application server. The method comprises the steps of: sending a request for an electronically transferable subscriber identity module, the request comprising an identifier based on an identity of the client device; receiving a response indicating that an electronically transferable subscriber identity module, generated based on the identifier, is available; downloading the electronically transferable subscriber identity; and storing the electronically transferable subscriber identity module with an association to the client device, along with any previously stored electronically transferable subscriber identity modules. A corresponding gateway, computer program and computer program product are also presented. | 05-26-2016 |
| 20160156676 | RADIO ACCESS NETWORK CONTROL OF MEDIA SESSION | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160156718 | ENF SELECTION FOR NFVI | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160156747 | MANAGEMENT OF TRANSMISSION CONTROL BLOCKS (TCBS) SUPPORTING TCP CONNECTION REQUESTS IN MULTIPROCESSING ENVIRONMENTS | 06-02-2016 |
| 20160164788 | Egress Rate Shaping To Reduce Burstiness In Application Data Delivery - Systems, methods, and devices of the various embodiments enable rate shaping of content data delivered to a client application. A processor may determine an ingress rate of content data to a buffer. The processor may determine an amount of the content data stored in the buffer. The processor may determine an egress rate of the content data from the buffer to the client application based on the ingress rate and the amount of content data stored in the buffer. The processor may send the content data from the buffer to the client application at the egress rate. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160164925 | UNIVERSAL POINT OF CONTACT IDENTIFIER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A subscriber to a universal point of contact service designates a preferred point of contact at which a communication initiator, such as a telephone caller, can contact the subscriber. Such an initiator desiring to contact the subscriber uses the subscriber's email address to establish a communication session with a device associated with the subscriber's preferred point of contact. The subscriber's email address is input to an initiating device, preferably a telephone or facsimile machine, using an entry device capable of entering an email address. A requestor unit, receiving the email address, locates a repository of the subscriber's point of contact information, and requests that information. The repository sends the point of contact information the subscriber has designated as preferred, and the requestor unit uses that information to control a telephone switch to establish a communication session between the initiating device and the subscriber's preferred point of contact device. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160164968 | ADAPTIVE CONNECTIVITY IN NETWORK-BASED COLLABORATION BACKGROUND INFORMATION - Various embodiments include at least one of systems, methods, software, and data structures for peer-to-peer exchange of at least a portion of networked collaboration session data. Client and server solutions allow for switching between peer-to-peer and server-centric modes of collaboration data sharing. Some embodiments also allow for sharing of data of a first type via a collaboration server and data of a second type via peer-to-peer connections. | 06-09-2016 |
| 20160173537 | Effecting Communication Events | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160173539 | Method And System For Routing Of Session-Based Services | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160173581 | Method and Apparatus for Providing Relevant Service Levels | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160173612 | Peer-to-Peer Interconnection between Service Providers | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160173614 | ADMINISTERING A REMOTE SESSION BETWEEN A TARGET COMPUTING DEVICE AND A REMOTE COMPUTING DEVICE | 06-16-2016 |
| 20160182285 | DATA TRANSFER ON AN INDUSTRIAL PROCESS NETWORK | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160182624 | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR WIRELESS CONNECTION | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160182646 | Data Transmission Processing Method and Apparatus | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160182648 | TECHNIQUES FOR TEMPORARILY DISABLING WIRELESS AUTOMATIC-CONNECTIONS | 06-23-2016 |
| 20160191654 | TECHNOLOGIES FOR MANAGING SOCIAL RELATIONSHIPS OF A COMPUTING DEVICE SOCIAL GROUP - Technologies for managing social relationships of a computing device social group includes exchanging device attributes amongst the members of the computing device social group, determining a social relationship between members, and sharing a social interaction policy based on the social relationship. The social interaction policy and the social relationship are used to define and control interactions of members of the computing device social group. | 06-30-2016 |
| 20160197849 | Method and Apparatus for Implementing a Messaging Interface | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160198002 | Connected Vehicle Settings and Cloud System Management | 07-07-2016 |
| 20160205144 | METHOD OF CONTROLLING SESSION INITIATION PROTOCOL SESSIONS WITH STATE CHARTS | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160205149 | TECHNIQUES FOR DEVICE INDEPENDENT SESSION MIGRATION | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160205151 | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN USERS | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160205206 | A DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND SYSTEM | 07-14-2016 |
| 20160255119 | METHOD FOR TELECOMMUNICATION AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL | 09-01-2016 |
| 20160380789 | Media Relay Server - A media session between an initiating endpoint and a responding endpoint is established. A set of candidate pairs is generated at the endpoint. Each of the candidate pairs comprises a respective network address available to the initiating endpoint and a respective network address available to the responding endpoint. The set of candidate pairs is generated by exchanging network addresses between the initiating endpoint and the responding endpoint. The media session is established using a candidate pair of the set determined to be valid by the endpoints performing connectivity checks for at least one candidate pair of the set to determine whether or not the candidate pair is valid. The set includes a multiplexed relayed candidate pair, which comprises a multiplexed relayed candidate. The multiplexed relayed candidate comprises a unique session identifier to allow multiple media streams to be relayed via the same port of the media relay server simultaneously. | 12-29-2016 |
| 20160381146 | SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONNECTIVITY MANAGEMENT - One aspect of the present invention is to provide a Connectivity Management (CM) function for use in networks such as a wireless network. The CM function can support both User Equipment (UE) and Machine Type Communication (MTC) devices in the network. In one embodiment of the first aspect, there is provided methods and systems for CM for a plurality of different types of devices that may evaluate tracking criteria to determine where and when wireless resources will need to be allocated to a wireless device. In some embodiments, these tracking criteria include location tracking and/or activity tracking. Another aspect provides for the instantiation of virtual CM functions established at appropriate physical nodes to provide device specific or service specific CM. | 12-29-2016 |
| 20160381147 | INFORMATION TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - An information transmission method is provided. An apparatus receives a first session request from a third party application function, which includes identity information of the third party application function and identity information of a destination entity in a network. The apparatus establishes a first session with the third party application function; sends a second session request to the destination entity, which includes identity information of an anchor entity and the identity information of the third party application function. The apparatus establishes a second session with the destination entity; receives information reported by the destination entity, which includes a report event and identity information of the third party application function. The apparatus forwards the report event to the corresponding third party application function according to the identity information of the third party application function included in the information. Correct identification and forwarding of a packet flow is achieved. | 12-29-2016 |
| 20180026879 | IN-ORDER MESSAGE DELIVERY IN A DISTRIBUTED STORE-AND-FORWARD SYSTEM | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180026917 | ETHERNET AUTO-NEGOTIATION WITH PARALLEL DETECT FOR 10G DAC OR OTHER NON-AUTO-NEGOTIATED MODES | 01-25-2018 |
| 20180027605 | Method, System and Devices for Connecting a User Equipment, UE, to a Telecommunication Network | 01-25-2018 |
| 20190150205 | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS SYSTEM | 05-16-2019 |
| 20220141312 | Generating Unique Identifiers - Systems, apparatuses, and methods are described for generating unique identifiers. Identifiers may be organized or grouped by different topics. Identifiers may be requested, generated, stored as groups, and may be allocated from those groups based on requests for identifiers to improve the efficiency of one or more computing devices or systems. The size of each group of identifiers may be adjusted. | 05-05-2022 |
